Revit Architecture 2008

Metric Tutorials

April 2007

Copyright© 2007 Autodesk, Inc.
All Rights Reserved This publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. AUTODESK, INC., MAKES NO WARRANTY, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS, AND MAKES SUCH MATERIALS AVAILABLE SOLELY ON AN "AS-IS" BASIS. IN NO EVENT SHALL AUTODESK, INC., BE LIABLE TO ANYONE FOR SPECIAL, COLLATERAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH OR ARISING OUT OF ACQUISITION OR USE OF THESE MATERIALS. THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE LIABILITY TO AUTODESK, INC., REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION, SHALL NOT EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE, IF ANY, OF THE MATERIALS DESCRIBED HEREIN. Autodesk, Inc., reserves the right to revise and improve its products as it sees fit. This publication describes the state of the product at the time of publication, and may not reflect the product at all times in the future.

Autodesk Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Render Queue, Revit, Showcase, SketchBook, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, and Wiretap. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner, Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, Wire.

Third Party Trademarks
All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders.

Third Party Software Program Credits
ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Copyright© 1997 Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE® and other Pantone, Inc. trademarks are the property of Pantone, Inc.© Pantone, Inc., 2002 Pantone, Inc. is the copyright owner of color data and/or software which are licensed to Autodesk, Inc., to distribute for use only in combination with certain Autodesk software products. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. AutoCAD 2008 is produced under a license of data derived from DIC Color Guide® from Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc. Copyright © Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc. All rights reserved. DIC Color Guide computer color simulations used in this product may not exactly match DIC Color Guide, DIC color Guide Part 2 identified solid color standards. Use current DIC Color Guide Manuals for exact color reference. DIC and DIC Color Guide are registered trademarks of Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002).

Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved.

GOVERNMENT USE
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Contents

Part 1

Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . Navigating the User Interface . . . . . . . . Performing Common Tasks as You Work in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Revit Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Chapter 1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Part 2

Developing Your Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Creating the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Adding Project Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Creating a Column Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Adding Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Adding Braces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Creating a Foundation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Changing Structural Member Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Adding Floors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Adding a Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Adding a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Creating a Drop Ceiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Creating Multi-Level Stairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Adding Entourage and Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Linking a Service Core to the Building Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Part 3

Documenting Your Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Creating Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation and Section Views . . . . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying View Tag Appearance . . . . . . . Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views . Creating a View Template . . . . . . . . . . View Range and Plan Regions . . . . . . . . Using Filters to Control Visibility . . . . . . Masking Portions of a View . . . . . . . . . Working with Visual Overrides . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Views to Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 . 112 . 115 . 121 . 126 . 130 . 130 . 133 . 136 . 137 . 140 . 146 . 146 . 149 . 153

Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Contents | v

Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Tagging Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Doors and Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Other Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Rooms from a Program List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Color Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Material Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shared Parameter File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shared Parameters to a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing, Tagging, and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions . . . . . . . Exporting Project Information with ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 . 160 . 165 . 169 . 172 . 172 . 177 . 179 . 181 . 183 . 189 . 192 . 195 . 195 . 196 . 199 . 204 . 204 . 206 . 206 . 210 . 211 . 215 . 215 . 221 . 223 . 227 . 230 . 231 . 238 . 238 . 244 . 248 . 250 . 252 . 254 . 258 . 259 . 260 . 260 . 262 . 278 . 278 . 283 . 283 . 284 . 284 . 287 . 292 . 292 . 294 . 296

Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Changing the Base Elevation of a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Witness Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions . Creating Text Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail from a Building Model . . . . Detailing the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Detail Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Detail Components . . . . . . . . Adding Keynotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Line-based Detail Components . Modifying a Keynote Database . . . . . . . Creating a Drafted Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a Detail into a Drafting View . . Creating a Reference Callout . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail in a Drafting View . . . . Using Note Blocks . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Note Block . . . . . Using Drawing Lists . . . . . . . . . Creating a Drawing List . . . . Using Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Symbol Legend . . . Creating a Component Legend Using Revision Tracking . . . . . . . Setting Up a Revision Table . . Sketching Revision Clouds . . . Tagging Revision Clouds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 6 Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

vi | Contents

Working with Revisions . . . . Importing from Other Applications . Importing Image Files . . . . . Importing Text Documents . . Importing Spreadsheets . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. 297 . 299 . 299 . 300 . 301

Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Using Dependent Views in Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Part 4

Viewing and Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Viewing a Building Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exploring the Building Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View with a Camera . . . . . . . . . Creating a Section View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Fill Pattern Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling the Fill Pattern Color of a Material . . . . . . . Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type . Creating a View Plan Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Exterior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model . Adding Trees to the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding RPC People . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a New Render Scene . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Daylights and Rendering the View . . . . . . . Creating and Recording Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position . . Recording the Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Views for Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study - Courtyard View . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View . . . . . . Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations . . Creating Solar Studies - Summer and Winter Solstice . Previewing Solar Study Animation . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting the Study as AVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting a Study as PNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Orienting to True North for Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . Orienting to True North . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering Interior Shadow Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 . 324 . 327 . 333 . 335 . 337 . 337 . 339 . 340 . 341 . 346 . 346 . 350 . 352 . 355 . 358 . 358 . 360 . 364 . 365 . 367 . 367 . 370 . 372 . 376 . 376 . 377 . 379 . 382 . 382 . 383 . 384 . 384 . 387 . 388 . 388 . 390 . 391 . 394 . 394

Chapter 9 Viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

Chapter 12 Presentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

Contents | vii

Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Advanced Model Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Elevation Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet . Adding Section Views to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Section View for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . Working with a Presentation View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . Working in a Callout Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Isometric Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Perspective Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annotating the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 399 . 401 . 403 . 406 . 406 . 408 . 411 . 411 . 415 . 417 . 420 . 422 . 429 . 429 . 436 . 440

Part 5

Importing and Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Render a Revit Architecture Building Model in 3ds Max . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446 Rendering Cutaway Views in 3ds Max . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 Creating a Daylight Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457

Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445

Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461 Creating a Building from Mass Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462

Part 6

Creating

Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473

Chapter 15 About Families and the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Using Families and the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 Introduction to Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 Introduction to the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477

Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Creating 3D Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Process Overview: Creating a Family . . . . . . . . . . Defining the Origin of a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Reference Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Priorities for Reference Planes . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning Reference Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing Family Parameters and Family Types . . . . Lock geometry to reference planes . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Work Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Solid Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating 2D Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading a Family into a Project . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Door Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing the Door Plan View Components . . . . Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry . . . . . . Assigning Materials to the Door Components . . . Defining New Door Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Window Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the New Window Parameters . . . . . Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry . . . Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry . . . . Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry . . . Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry . . Assigning Materials to the Window Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480 . 480 . 481 . 481 . 483 . 484 . 490 . 491 . 491 . 491 . 491 . 495 . 496 . 497 . 498 . 503 . 506 . 508 . 511 . 512 . 513 . 519 . 521 . 526 . 538

viii | Contents

Defining New Window Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Complex Model Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting a Family Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Skeleton for a Complex Wall Opening . Modelling a Complex Wall Opening . . . . . . . . . Creating Window Frame Geometry . . . . . . . . . . Defining the Window Sash Parameters . . . . . . . . Defining Visibility Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Reference Planes for the Glass Geometry . . Creating the Glass Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Formulas to Define Width . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning Default Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Material Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Nested Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Sill Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading Sill Families into the Window Family . . . . Creating a Length Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing the Sill Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shared Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing Nested Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing the Family in a Project Environment . . . . . Creating a Furniture Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters . . . . . Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry . . . . Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . Defining New Furniture Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Baluster Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Baluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run . . . . . . . Creating Profile Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Sweep Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Rail Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Reveal Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Host Sweep Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path . . . . . . . . . Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Room Tag Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Annotation Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol . Adding the New North Arrow to a Project . . . . . . . Creating a Titleblock Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet . . . . . . . Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock . . . . . . . Adding the Titleblock to a New Project . . . . . . . . Creating In-Place Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family . . . . . . . Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family . . . . . . Appendix A - Exploring Family Templates . . . . . . . . . Model Family Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annotation Family Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . Titleblock Family Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 540 . 545 . 547 . 548 . 551 . 554 . 561 . 565 . 566 . 567 . 570 . 573 . 574 . 574 . 575 . 575 . 577 . 578 . 579 . 580 . 581 . 582 . 583 . 584 . 591 . 594 . 603 . 609 . 612 . 614 . 614 . 616 . 618 . 618 . 618 . 619 . 620 . 621 . 622 . 624 . 626 . 626 . 628 . 628 . 630 . 631 . 631 . 634 . 642 . 644 . 644 . 650 . 653 . 654 . 668 . 669

Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671
Planning a Parametric Component Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672

Contents | ix

Determining Component Needs . . . . . . . . Selecting the Family Template . . . . . . . . . Creating the Component Skeleton . . . . . . . . . Adding Reference Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Dimensions and Constraints . . . . . Creating New Length Parameters . . . . . . . Flexing the Component Model . . . . . . . . Adding Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Solid Extrusions . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry . . Creating Additional Solid Geometry . . . . . . Testing the Family in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . Loading a Family into a Project . . . . . . . . Testing a Family Instance in a Project . . . . . Working with Nested Subcomponents . . . . . . . Adding a Nested Component . . . . . . . . . Creating Formula-controlled Parameters . . . Arraying Nested Subcomponents . . . . . . . Reloading a Family into a Project . . . . . . . Applying Subcategories, Materials, and Parameters . Creating and Applying Subcategories . . . . . Creating Material Parameters . . . . . . . . . Controlling Component Visibility . . . . . . . . . Assigning Detail Level and View Controls . . . Creating Component Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Multiple Component Types . . . . . Creating Conditional Formulas . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 672 . 673 . 676 . 676 . 682 . 686 . 690 . 693 . 693 . 695 . 698 . 707 . 707 . 708 . 712 . 712 . 716 . 721 . 726 . 728 . 728 . 733 . 735 . 735 . 738 . 738 . 739

Part 7

Using Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 741
Flat Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Mullions to the Curtain System . . . Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . Adding a Custom Curtain Panel . . . . . . . . Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel Additional Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sloped Glazings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storefront System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curtain System by Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 744 . 744 . 753 . 755 . 755 . 758 . 760 . 764 . 764 . 765 . 768 . 774 . 774 . 778 . 780 . 782 . 785 . 787 . 788 . 789 . 791 . 792 . 793 . 794

Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743

Chapter 19 Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773
Creating Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Extruded Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint . Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning Roof Eaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mansard Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roof Fascia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 20 Area Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797
Using Area Analysis Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 798 Creating Area Schemes and Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 798

x | Contents

Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 804

Chapter 21 Massing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 807
Using Massing Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model . . . . . . . . . . Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model . Using Mass Family Files in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating New Mass Family Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Placing New Mass Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Joining Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Elements with Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mass Elements in Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Building Components from Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . Creating Walls by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Floors by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roofs by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Elements Created from Massings . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups . Creating and Placing a Group . . . . . Modifying a Group . . . . . . . . . . . Nesting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Detail Groups . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail Group . . . . . . . . Using Attached Detail Groups . . . . . Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808 . 808 . 813 . 815 . 815 . 816 . 819 . 822 . 822 . 825 . 825 . 828 . 832 . 834 . 837 . 842 . 846 . 846 . 853 . 857 . 859 . 860 . 863 . 866 . 866 . 870 . 870 . 876 . 880 . 882 . 889 . 893 . 895 . 899 . 900 . 904 . 904 . 905 . 913 . 916 . 917 . 921 . 932 . 938 . 939 . 940 . 942 . 942 . 943

Chapter 22 Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 845

Chapter 23 Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 869
Using Site Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Property Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings . Creating Topographic Subregions . . . . . . . . Grading the Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Building Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Site and Parking Components . . . . . Creating Parking Space Schedules . . . . . . . . Adding Structural Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a DWG for Use as an Underlay . Sketching Structural Walls . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning and Modifying Walls . . . . Adding Structural Columns and Beams . . . . . Adding Structural Columns . . . . . . . . Adding Structural Beams and Girders . . . Adding Joists and Purlins . . . . . . . . . Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels . . . Defining New Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating the Existing Design . . . . . . Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation . . . . . Creating a Framing Elevation . . . . . . . Adding Structural Braces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 24 Structural . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 903

Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 949
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 950

Contents | xi

Using Worksharing in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals . . . . . . . Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets . . . . Working Individually with Worksets . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksets with Multiple Users . . . . . . . . . . . Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users . Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project . Creating the Structural Design Options . . Creating the Roof System Design Options . Managing Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. 950 . 950 . 953 . 957 . 961 . 965 . 970 . 970 . 980 . 987

Chapter 26 Creating Multiple Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 969

Chapter 27 Project Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 991
Using Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 992 Phasing Your Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 992 Using Phase-Specific Room Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 998

Chapter 28 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1001
Linking Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linking Building Models from Different Project Files . Repositioning Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . . Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility . . . . . Managing Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models . . . . . . . Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates . . . . . Working with a Linked Building Model . . . . . . . . Managing Shared Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Components of Linked Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1003 . 1003 . 1011 . 1014 . 1017 . 1019 . 1020 . 1021 . 1024 . 1026 . 1027

Part 8

Customizing Project Settings and Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1031
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Object Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Line Patterns and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options . Modifying Project Browser Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing the Base Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Modifying Families and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Views and View Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Render Scene Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Import/Export Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up Shared and Project Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Named Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1034 . 1034 . 1036 . 1038 . 1039 . 1041 . 1041 . 1045 . 1047 . 1048 . 1053 . 1055 . 1056 . 1059 . 1059 . 1060 . 1064 . 1067 . 1069 . 1071 . 1072 . 1074

Chapter 29 Modifying Project and System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1033

xii | Contents

Getting Started

1

1

2 | Chapter 1 Getting Started

Introduction

1

This introduction helps you get started with the Revit Architecture 2008 tutorials and presents the fundamental concepts of the product, including:
■ ■ ■ ■

how Revit Architecture works. the terms used when working with the product. how to navigate the user interface. how to perform some common tasks in the product.

3

Using the Tutorials
In this lesson, you learn how to get started with the Revit Architecture tutorials, including where to locate the training files specified in the tutorials and how to create a new Revit Architecture project from a template file. The Contents tab of the Revit Architecture Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title to display the titles of the lessons in the tutorial, and expand a lesson title to display a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit Architecture. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit Architecture.

Accessing Training Files
Training files are Revit Architecture projects, templates, and families that were created specifically for the tutorials. The training files, like the tutorials, are bundled with the product. Training files are provided to help you work through the tutorials. In this exercise, you learn where the training files are located, as well as how to open and save them.

Where are the training files located?
Training files, by default, are located in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training. Training files are grouped into three folders within the training folder:

Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric units. Common file names have a c_ prefix. Imperial: files specifically for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix. Metric: files specifically for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.

■ ■

NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for more information.

IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is included in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.

What is a dataset?
A dataset is a Revit Architecture project that defines a building information model and views of the model that is used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Dataset section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather than opening an existing dataset.

Open a dataset
1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of dataset.

4 | Chapter 1 Introduction

4 Click the dataset name, and click Open.

Save a dataset
5 To save a dataset with a new name, click File menu ➤ Save As. In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point for the next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save the changes, and use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:

For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note where you save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required.

For File name, enter the new file name. A good practice is to save the dataset with a unique name after you have made changes. For example, if you open c_settings.rvt and make changes, you should save this file with a new name such as c_settings_modified.rvt.

For Save as type, verify that Project Files is selected, and then click Save.

Create a project from a template
7 To create a project from a template, rather than using an existing dataset, click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

8 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project. 9 Under Template file, verify the second option is selected, and click Browse. In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Templates. 10 In the Choose Template dialog, review the Revit Architecture templates.

Accessing Training Files | 5

Templates are available for specific building types: commercial, construction, and residential. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. For most tutorial projects, you will use the default template, and customize the project as necessary. 11 Select DefaultMetric.rte, and click Open. 12 Click OK.

Understanding the Basics
In this lesson, you learn what Revit Architecture is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. You begin with the fundamental concepts that Revit Architecture is built upon. You learn the terminology, the hierarchy of elements, how to navigate the user interface, and how to perform some common tasks in the product.

What is Revit Architecture 2008?
The Revit Architecture platform for building information modeling is a design and documentation system that supports the design, drawings, and schedules required for a building project. Building information modeling (BIM) delivers information about project design, scope, quantities, and phases when you need it. In the Revit Architecture model, every drawing sheet, 2D and 3D view, and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. As you work in drawing and schedule views, Revit Architecture collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. The Revit Architecture parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views, drawing sheets, schedules, sections, and plans.

What is meant by parametric?
The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit Architecture provides. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. In mathematics and mechanical CAD, the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters; hence, the operation of the software is parametric. This concept is important because it is this capability that delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit Architecture: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project, and Revit Architecture coordinates that change through the entire project. The following are examples of these element relationships:

The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. If you move the partition, the door retains this relationship to the partition. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. If the length of the elevation is changed, the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. In this case, the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved, the floor or roof remains connected. In this case, the parameter is one of association or connection.

How does Revit Architecture 2008 keep things updated?
A fundamental characteristic of a building information modeling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. When you change something, Revit Architecture immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. Revit Architecture uses two key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do, without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design.

Element behavior in a parametric modeler
Revit Architecture uses five software element classes: host, component, annotation, view, and datum.

Hosts include walls, floors, roofs, and ceilings.

6 | Chapter 1 Introduction

■ ■ ■ ■

Components include windows, doors, and furniture. Annotations are 2D, view-specific elements that help you produce documentation. Views are dynamic representations of the model and are always up-to-date. Datums are reference elements that help you put your building together.

This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Revit Architecture elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly; programming is not required. If you can draw, you can define new parametric elements in Revit Architecture. In Revit Architecture, the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. Often, you do nothing to establish these relationships; they are implied by what you do and how you draw. In other cases, you can explicitly control them, by locking a dimension or aligning two walls, for example.

Understanding Revit Architecture 2008 terms
Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit Architecture are common, industry-standard terms familiar to most architects. However, there are some terms that are unique to Revit Architecture, and understanding them is crucial to understanding the software. This section defines the basic terms used in Revit Architecture. Project: In Revit Architecture, the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. The project file contains all the information for your building design, from geometry to construction data. This information includes components used to design the model, views of the project, and drawings of the design. By using a single project file, Revit Architecture makes it easy for you to alter your design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views, elevation views, section views, schedules, and so forth). Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements, such as roofs, floors, and ceilings. Most often, you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building; for example, first floor, top of wall, or bottom of foundation. To place levels, you must be in a section or elevation view.
Level 2 work plane cutting through the 3D view with the corresponding floor plan tiled next to it.

Element: When creating your project, you add Revit Architecture parametric building elements to the design. All elements are considered categories. Revit Architecture classifies elements by model component elements and annotation elements.
■ ■

A model component element, such as a door, desk, or roof, represents the actual 3D geometry of the building. An annotation building element, such as a door tag, elevation symbol, or room tag, helps document the model.

Understanding the Basics | 7

Family: Families are classes of elements in a category that group elements with a common set of parameters (properties), identical use, and similar graphical representation. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties, but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. For example, six-panel colonial doors could be considered one family, although the doors that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. Families are either component families or system families:

Component family files can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. System families include walls, dimensions, ceilings, roofs, floors, and levels, and are not available for loading or creating as separate files.
■ ■

Revit Architecture predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. For example, the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system; however, you can create different types of walls with different compositions. System families can be transferred between projects.

Type: Each family can have different types. A type can be a specific size of a family, such as a A0 title block or a 910 x 2110 door. A type can also be a style, such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. A family can have several types. For example, a table could come in several different sizes. Each different size would be a new type within the same family. Instance: Instances are the actual items that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances).

Revit Architecture 2008 terms

Navigating the User Interface
One of the advantages of Revit Architecture is its ease of use, specifically its clear user interface. The Revit Architecture window is arranged to make navigation easy. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled, making it easy to understand what each button represents. Revit Architecture uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions, learning Revit Architecture is much easier.

8 | Chapter 1 Introduction

In the following illustration, the user interface is labeled. In the steps that follow, you navigate and become familiar with the user interface.

Start a new project
1 On the Standard toolbar, click .

This creates a new project based on the default template.

The Title Bar
2 Place the cursor at the top of the user interface and notice the Title Bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open.

By default, new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. In addition, the Level 1 floor plan view is the default open view. TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template on which the project is based.

The Menu Bar
3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom.

Navigating the User Interface | 9

click Toolbar. and click. The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. and View. Notice the design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to doors.The Menu Bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File. You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar. The buttons on the toolbar represent some of the more common commands. notice a door type is specified. These shortcut keys are listed next to the command on the menu. the shortcut key for Zoom in Region is ZR. Edit. While working in the drawing area. A context menu appears with a list of all available commands. On the left side of the Options Bar. click the command name to start the command. Many of the commands also have shortcut keys to speed up the design process. 10 | Chapter 1 Introduction . Notice the bar beneath the toolbars contains wall design options. The Toolbar 4 On the Window menu. Another timesaving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. you simply type the required keystrokes to run the command. The context menu changes depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected. The Options Bar 5 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. 6 Click Modelling menu ➤ Door. To choose commands. place the cursor over the menu name. There are six toolbars across the top of the window just beneath the Menu Bar. Then. You can control the visibility of the six toolbars and turn the toolbar text labels on or off within the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. TIP For example.

you can select any component and then change the type from the Type Selector. The Design Bar 10 Click Window menu ➤ Design Bars. the door type active in the Type Selector is the door type that is added when you insert it into the building model. If you select the Door tool. The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list. You use the Type Selector in two ways.The Type Selector 7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. Select the drop-down list to view the list of doors. the Type Selector displays a list of doors available within the project. The list of components in the Type Selector is identical to the components listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category. You can also use the Type Selector to change a component type after it has been added to the building model. if you intend to add a door. 8 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. notice the list of walls that are available. First. you can select a component type before you add it to the building model. For example. Within the drawing area. Navigating the User Interface | 11 . 9 In the Type Selector.

The Show Design Bars dialog is displayed. immediately below the Type Selector. There are 10 tabs in the Design Bar. containing buttons grouped by function. 11 Click OK. Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu. You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog. ■ ■ ■ ■ Basics tab: includes commands for creating most basic building model components View tab: commands for creating different views in the project Modelling tab: all the commands to create model elements Drafting tab: commands for both adding annotation symbols and creating the sheet details for the project construction documents Rendering tab: commands for creating rendered 3D images ■ 12 | Chapter 1 Introduction . The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface.

delete. and rename views. and groups of your current project: ■ ■ Right-click in the browser to add.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Site tab: commands for adding site components and producing site plans Massing tab: commands for executing conceptual massing commands Room and Area tab: commands for making room and area schemes and plans Structural tab: commands for adding structural components to your project Construction tab: includes commands for creating construction industry information To access the commands within a tab. elevations. sheets. and the respective commands are displayed on the Design Bar. schedules. The Project Browser 12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser. and groups. Expand or compress the browser list by clicking the + or sign next to the name. Navigating the User Interface | 13 . select Views (all). TIP You can turn the visibility of each tab on and off by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the context menu. and group name. You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views. reports. click the tab. 3D). windows). families. In the Project Browser. walls. families. The browser is conveniently organized by view type (floor plans. family category (doors.

17 Place the cursor near the center of the drawing area. making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. Do not click. The Status Bar 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. so you can position it wherever you want by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location.■ ■ To open a view. The browser is dockable. 15 In the Browser Organization dialog. you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for both views and sheets. scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser. The cursor is displayed as a pencil. double-click the name. ■ 13 In the Type Selector. click Cancel. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area. 14 | Chapter 1 Introduction . click Wall. 14 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. After you create a browser organization scheme.

it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point. in conjunction with Tooltips." TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar. you can use the Status Bar and the Tab key to toggle between components and select the desired component. 20 Press TAB. Revit Architecture 2008 Help 21 Click Help menu ➤ Revit Architecture 2008 Help. Navigating the User Interface | 15 . click Modify. When you place the cursor over a component. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol arrow on the left side of the drawing area. regarding selected components within a view. 18 On the Design Bar.In the bottom left corner of the window. it highlights and the status bar displays the component name. It highlights when the cursor is over it. You can turn the Status Bar visibility on or off from the Window menu. The elevation symbol consists of two parts. use the Tab key to alternate between nearby components. In this case. and notice that the preselected component switches to the main elevation symbol. When attempting to select a specific component in a complex or crowded view. The Status Bar also provides information. notice that the name of the preselected component is Views: Elevation: West. notice the Status Bar provides information regarding what you should do next. the main symbol and the elevation directional arrows. Make sure you place the cursor over the arrow portion of the symbol. TIP When attempting to select a specific component in a crowded or detailed view. In the Status Bar. Elevations: Elevation: Elevation 5.

2 Click File menu ➤ Open. you open a dataset and practice adjusting the view with the zoom commands. Click the Help button. click . Be sure to have the Standard toolbar displayed. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the Tool Tip displays. TIP You can control the level of Tool Tip assistance from the Settings ➤ Options menu. For example. You can select a topic on the Contents tab. Windows: From any window. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. find a keyword on the Index tab. If there is no Help button displayed. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire building or floor plan in the view. Tool Tips: To see Tool Tips. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. Toolbar: From the Toolbar.rvt. press F1 to get the topic associated with the window. 16 | Chapter 1 Introduction . and then click on a specific menu command or command button for Help. click Training Files. After you are familiar with how to complete these tasks. Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit Architecture In this exercise. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. Use zoom commands to adjust the view 1 In the tutorials. it will be easier to work in Revit Architecture and focus on the unique tasks for each tutorial. and the topic specific to the dialog box opens. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. You can also press SHIFT+F1. You can access Help in the following ways: ■ Dialog Boxes: Dialog boxes include Help buttons.Help is available online at all times during a Revit Architecture session. ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit Architecture Help window. You can use this tri-pane. There are several ways to access zoom options: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ View menu commands Zoom command on the View toolbar Shortcut keys Wheel mouse Dynamic View dialog In the following steps. Context-sensitive help is also available to provide instant help on any menu command. you learn to perform some of the common Revit Architecture tasks that are included in the tutorials. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. There are several tools that help you find information. press F1 to get help on that dialog box. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the building model in the window.

9 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region you wish to zoom. 5 Click Zoom Out (2x).The 3D isometric view displays: 4 Click View menu ➤ Zoom to display the zoom options menu. 7 Click Zoom To Fit. 8 Click in the drawing area. and enter the shortcut keys ZR to zoom in on a region. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. and the view of the buiding model is sized to fit the available window. The zoom menu lists the zoom options and the shortcut keys for each option. this is referred to as a crossing selection. Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit Architecture | 17 . click the drop-down menu next to the Zoom command to display the zoom options. NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself automatically activates the Zoom In Region command. 6 On the View toolbar.

Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire building again. ■ Resize elements using drag controls 13 In the Project Browser. called drag controls. expand Floor Plans. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. The Dynamic View dialog displays in the lower-left corner of the screen. and drag the cursor in the drawing area. display along the ends. hold the middle mouse button (or left mouse button on a wheel mouse). on the View toolbar. roll the wheel to zoom the view. and tops of selected walls in elevation and 3D views. Similar controls. On a wheel mouse. 18 | Chapter 1 Introduction . as shown: Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the wall. bottoms. Small blue dots. referred to as shape handles. Without clicking in the dialog. 14 Enter ZR. and drag the cursor. To display the Dynamic View dialog in a 2D or 3D view. click Zoom. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. and select the wall. These are the drag controls. Cnst. When drawing or modifying a building model.10 If you use a mouse where the middle button is a wheel. NOTE As you zoom in and out within a view. To modify or add snap increments. expand Views (all). display at the ends of selected lines and walls in a plan view. use a zoom menu command or the Toolbar option to zoom out within the view. click . you can roll the wheel to zoom the view dynamically. If you do not have a wheel mouse. and double-click 2nd Flr. press and hold CTRL. 11 Zoom is also available in Dynamic View mode. 12 Use one of the following methods to zoom: ■ ■ In the Dynamic View dialog. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. Revit Architecture uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area.

19 Click the lower-left endpoint of the table. click to specify the starting position. you want to move the table closer to the wall. moving the cursor to the left horizontally. After selecting the element to be moved. Some commands. 16 Click in the drawing area to deselect the wall. and click again to specify the ending position. require two clicks to complete the command. such as Move and Copy.15 Click and drag the left control. and on the Edit toolbar. Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit Architecture | 19 . for example. Move an element 17 Scroll the view down so you can see the couch and table in the floor plan. to lengthen the wall. 18 Select the Craftsman02 table. click (Move). In this case.

click the drop-down menu next to . you decide that you like the table better where it was placed originally. and drag it on top of the table. Undo commands 22 On the Standard toolbar. All changes you make to a project are tracked. as shown. 20 | Chapter 1 Introduction . select the second item in the list. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. The table moves down and the lower-left corner is placed at the move endpoint. Selecting the second action in the list will undo the last two actions. Select the plant.20 Click next to the lower wall. The table and plant are returned to their original locations. Move. The Undo command allows you to undo several commands by clicking the drop-down menu next to the Undo command on the Toolbar. In this example. 23 On the Undo menu. 21 Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location.

use one of the following methods: ■ ■ ■ Choose another command. On the Design Bar. such as the Lines command. click Lines. 26 To end the command. Press ESC twice. End a command 24 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. on the Standard toolbar. or press and hold CTRL and enter Z. 27 Close the file without saving your changes. click the Undo command. Some commands.NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit Architecture | 21 . stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to place lines. 25 Click in the drawing area to start the line and click again to end it. click Modify.

22 | Chapter 1 Introduction .

Developing Your Designs 2 23 .

24 | Chapter 2 Developing Your Designs .

the wall or column will move with it. 25 . you learn how to use parametric design techniques. When you constrain Revit Architecture elements to each other. If the grid moves. or “flex the model” by changing parameters. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. a curtain wall. Parametric design allows you to incorporate design intent into your model. it is good practice to test the constraints. Dimensions and other positional constraints define relationships between elements in the model. a wall or a column can be constrained to grid. You create a retail building that contains 5 floors.Creating a Building Information Model 2 In this tutorial. you learn how to constrain elements and how to test the parametric relationships between them. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit® Architecture 2008. As you develop the building design. and a sloped roof over one corner of the building. For example. a central service core.

so there is no dependency on previously completed exercises. subsequent exercises instruct you to open a project dataset. You set up the project and create the structural frame and foundation of the building. such as a door or window. 26 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . After the beginning exercises. In practice. you load any required family type that is not in your project. you create a Revit Architecture project from a template provided with the software.Using this Tutorial In the first 6 exercises of this tutorial. from the product library. The project datasets have pre-loaded family types and represent the correct state for beginning the exercise.

For this project. only a single floor plan view and a single ceiling plan view are created. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. change their properties. Create the project from the default template 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. expand Floor Plans. Explore the project with the Project Browser 6 On the left side of the drawing screen. but contains no geometry. 3 Under Template file. and click Browse. verify the second option is selected. schedules. and families in your project. East. Revit Architecture templates are available for specific building types: commercial. South. Creating the Project | 27 . levels. you create the project that will store the retail building design and different views of the building. with an RVT extension. and settings. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. sheets. To create the project file. You can also add views to your project as you develop and document the building information model. you design inside the elevation markers. under Create new. and elevation views created in the project by the template. The project is stored as a single file. expand Views (all).Creating the Project In this exercise. construction. notice four elevation markers. you will use the default template. and residential. locate the Project Browser. The Project Browser contains a hierarchical tree structure that you use to navigate the views. 4 In the left pane of the dialog. and delete them. click Training Files. The new project opens. 5 Click OK. The template file has an RTE extension and provides default project units. In views that display elevation markers. duplicate them. The views that display under each of these branches of the tree are the default floor plan views. or by opening the view in the Project Browser. 2 In the New Project dialog. Each marker corresponds to an elevation view in the project: North. you use a template that is provided with the software. You can access these views by double-clicking the elevation marker arrow. In the drawing space in the right pane. 7 If necessary. and Elevations (Building Elevation). reflected ceiling plan views. Ceiling Plans. select Project. views. These views are customizable: you can rename them. West. NOTE If you create a project without a template.rte. and customize the project as necessary.

display in the south elevation.Floor Plan: Level 1 to indicate the Level 1 Floor plan view is current. After you modify the two default levels. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. you will want to save your work frequently. You also change the elevation of the two levels lines to the appropriate heights for the first two stories of the building. Groups. Two level lines. you modify the 2 default project levels and add 5 levels to the project to define the 7 vertical levels of the building model. the software title bar contains the name of the software and Project 1. You can control how often the software will prompt you to save your work. The bold type indicates that the Level 1 Floor Plan view is the current view. You use levels to position Revit Architecture elements in your building model. Notice that in the top left corner of your screen. and on the General tab. click to scroll down to the bottom of the list. 10 In the Project Browser. You change the names of the 2 default levels. and Revit Links branches that display at the same level as Views (all). as well as change their names. will be accessible from the Project Browser. you add the remaining 5 levels using different techniques. 14 For File name. double-click South. 12 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. “Adding Project Levels” on page 28. Level lines are finite horizontal planes that you use to define the levels (stories) of your building information model. view the Save Reminder interval. and duplicate levels. and click Training Files. and other properties. 9 Under Elevations (Building Elevation). As you design and document your building model. 13 In the file window. 16 Click Save. 28 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . notice the Legends.8 Under Floor Plans. the view you see in the drawing area. enter Revit Retail Building. Families. content and building model reports.rvt) is selected. This folder contains the Revit Architecture files that you need to complete all of the Revit Architecture tutorials. Adding Project Levels In this exercise. verify Project Files (*. created by the template. Save the project 11 Click File menu ➤ Save As. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. You can add. such as schedules and legends. heights. 15 For Save as type. delete. double-click Metric. Click Settings menu ➤ Options. as well as the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views to create foundation and entry levels for the building. verify that Level 1 displays as bold. Schedules/Quantities. Sheets (all).

6 Click the 00 Foundation elevation height. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). and press ENTER.You learn how the levels are locked. When you begin designing. doors. enter 01 Entry Level. and press ENTER. 3 Double-click the Level 1 text. and windows within the building model. so that when one level moves. enter -1800 mm. expand Views (all). and press ENTER. it is good practice to precede the level names with level numbers so the corresponding views will list sequentially in the Project Browser. or constrained. 4 Click Yes to rename the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views. and press ENTER. the other levels move and change with it. Modify the two default project levels 1 In the Project Browser. Adding Project Levels | 29 . 2 Zoom to the level names at the right end of each level line. enter 0 mm. to each other. 7 Double-click the Level 2 text. notice the Level 1 floor and ceiling plan views are now named 00 Foundation. you will use the levels to position building elements such as walls. 5 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans and Ceiling Plans. and double-click South. 9 Click the 01 Entry Level elevation height. 8 Click Yes to rename the corresponding views. TIP Because views list alphabetically or sequentially in the Project Browser. enter 00 Foundation.

By default. A dashed green line indicates where the new level will be drawn. and for Offset. a corresponding ceiling plan and floor plan view will be created. Next. click Level. 17 Move the cursor horizontally until a dashed green line displays alignment with the two existing levels. place the cursor anywhere on the Design Bar. and press ENTER to specify the start point of the new level line. and press ESC. When you add the new level. under Floor Plans. and then move it up. enter 3750 mm. click . 15 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the 01 Entry Level line. 24 Place the cursor on the 02 Level line. 21 In the Project Browser. right-click. and move it slightly upward. Notice that the name of the level line changes to 02 Level in the current view. The command that you use to add levels is on the Basics tab. a temporary dimension displays the height between 01 Entry Level and the cursor position. 13 On the Options Bar. you add a level by drawing it above the 01 Entry Level. 23 On the Options Bar. and click Basics. and click OK. click Rename. right-click Level 3. verify that you have created an 02 Level ceiling plan view as well. click Level. 18 In the Project Browser. 19 Click OK. This is the Options Bar. 30 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . using a different option. 12 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. If it does not. 11 On the left side of the Project Browser. which should display by default. verify and Make Plan View are selected. Use the Pick option to add a level 22 On Design Bar. As you move the cursor. The Design Bar provides tabs that provide quick access to many commands. click to specify the endpoint of the level line. verify Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected. view the Design Bar. 16 Enter 3750 mm. and enter 02 Level. not all the tabs are visible. Notice that the bar above the drawing area changes to display new tools and settings. 20 Click Yes to rename the corresponding level and view. 3750 mm above 01 Entry Level. The Options Bar displays appropriate options and settings for every command that you select on the Design Bar. Use the Draw option to add a level 10 Zoom out so you can see both levels in the view. you add another level.Next. 3750 mm above the 02 Level line. 14 Click Plan View Types.

If you create a level by copying it. or on the Design Bar. Copy levels only when you want to use them for reference. as shown. the associated floor and ceiling plan views are not created. and rename the corresponding views. 26 Rename the level 03 Level. and zoom to the left endpoint of the line. add 3 levels 3750 mm apart above 03 Level. 27 Press ESC. 31 Clear the box to redisplay the level symbol on the right side only. Add the remaining 3 levels 28 Using either the Draw or Pick option. Display a symbol at the left endpoint of the 06 level line 29 Click the 06 Roof Level line. click Modify to end the command. Name the levels: ■ ■ ■ 04 Level 05 Roof Garden 06 Roof NOTE Do not use the Copy command to create the levels.25 Click to place the level line. 30 Select the empty blue box on the left to display a level symbol at the left endpoint of the line. Adding Project Levels | 31 .

Create vertical column grid lines 1 On the Project Browser. 3 On the Options Bar. On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. all the levels move. When the grid is complete.Test the level constraints 32 Select and drag the blue circle to the right or left to shorten or lengthen the level lines. you place the building columns at the grid line intersections. Move the cursor up. you change the columns to round hollow steel columns. If you select a level and click its lock. By using the grid to control placement of columns. so that if the roof elevation changes. you create a structural grid in the 00 Foundation floor plan view of the building model. the column height changes as well. 4 Draw the first vertical grid line: ■ ■ In the lower left corner of the drawing area. In the following exercise. Notice that by moving the top level. ■ The number 1 displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. Notice that the status bar prompts you to specify a start point for the grid line. 32 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . The lock icon that displays indicates that the levels are vertically constrained. specify a start point for the grid line. double-click 00 Foundation. click Modify. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and specify the grid line endpoint. Verify that the levels are vertically constrained with locks before you continue on to the next exercise. until it is positioned under the top elevation marker. and you can move them independently. In a later exercise. you constrain the column heights to the roof level. Creating a Column Grid In this exercise. “Creating a Column Grid” on page 32. the levels are no longer constrained. you ensure a level of accuracy early in your design. click Grid. select . 33 Proceed to the next exercise.

enter 7500 mm. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line B. Next. Click to place the grid line.5 Change the grid bubble number to a letter: ■ ■ Double-click 1 inside the grid bubble. click . On the Options Bar. enter 7500 mm. and press ENTER. use the Pick option to create another vertical grid line by offsetting it a specific distance from the existing line. for Offset. Enter A. for Offset. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line D. You can change what displays in grid bubbles at any point in your project. and for Offset. click Grid. On the Options Bar. enter 4500 mm. 6 Offset a second vertical grid line from the first grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. 7 Add 3 vertical grid lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. and click to place the line. ■ ■ Move the cursor to the right side of the grid line. and click to place the line. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line C. and click to place the line. and then place the cursor on the grid line to display the location of the second grid line. ■ The first vertical grid bay is created. Creating a Column Grid | 33 .

10 Change the grid bubble letter to 1. add horizontal grid lines to complete the grid. as shown. 12 Using the Pick option and offsets of 7500 mm and 4500 mm. click Dimension. click Grid. and specify the grid line endpoint. 11 On the Design Bar. The letter F displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line.8 Press ESC. Move the cursor horizontally past the vertical grid line E. specify a start point for the grid line just below grid line A. 34 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . ■ ■ ■ On the upper left side of the grid. Create horizontal grid lines 9 Draw the first horizontal grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. click Grid. On the Options Bar. Dimension the grid and lock the grid bay spacing 13 On the Design Bar. click and specify an Offset of 0 mm.

At the bottom endpoint of the grid line. By pinning these central grid lines. click Modify. until it is closer to grid line A. select grid lines C and 3. 19 Dimension the horizontal grid lines as shown. 24 Press ESC. Creating a Column Grid | 35 . 17 Click all 4 lock icons on the dimension string to lock the grid bay spacing. 20 Click the 4 lock icons to lock the horizontal grid dimensions. select each vertical grid line just under its grid bubble. you ensure that the grid remains centered and the building will ''grow'' out from the center if its grid dimensions are changed. until it is closer to grid line 5. click Dimension. At the left endpoint of the grid line. Two pins display on the grid lines. 22 While pressing CTRL. click and drag the blue circular grip to the right. You must select the grid lines to redisplay the pins. click the drawing area to the right of the line to place the dimension. and select grid line A. and press ESC. 16 When you select the last vertical grid line.14 On the Options Bar. The locks ensure that the grid spacing cannot be accidentally changed. 25 Adjust the grid: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. ■ ■ Select grid line 1. The pins are hidden. 23 Click Edit menu ➤ Pin Position. 15 Starting with grid line A. 18 On the Design Bar. click and drag the blue circular grip up. 21 Press ESC. and press ESC. click .

click Camera. and specify a point beyond the last horizontal grid line to place the camera. 41 Place the camera and select its target point: ■ Zoom to the lower right corner of the column grid. double-click 01 Entry Level. If it is unlocked. click Structural Column. 36 On the Standard toolbar. Next. 39 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and press ENTER. lock it. Columns that span from the 00 Foundation level to the 05 Roof Garden level are added at the grid line intersections of the column grid. ■ 29 While pressing CTRL. 32 Select the dimension string between grid line A and B. 33 While pressing CTRL. for From. click Finish. select all of the column grid lines. You want to view the columns as if you were walking toward them. select grid line A. click (Grid Intersection). 40 On the Options Bar.■ If necessary. 30 Verify that all the grid lines are selected (red). create a 3D perspective view with a camera in which to better view the columns. and unlock it. click Activate Dimensions. Add columns to the grid 26 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 28 On the Options Bar: ■ Select Height and 05 Roof Garden. 34 On the Options Bar. 36 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 27 In the Type Selector. For Place By. select UC-Universal Column: 305x305x97UC. and on the Options Bar. Create a 3D perspective view of the building 38 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. adjust the position of the dimension strings by selecting and dragging them. 37 Select the dimension string and verify that it is locked. 35 Enter 9000 mm. The columns move to the new location at the intersection of the grid lines. click twice to restore the original locked grid dimension. select 01 Entry Level. and then select the dimension value between grid lines A and B. 31 Press ESC.

The 3D perspective view created by the camera displays. The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display.■ Move the cursor next to grid bubble A. and click to place the target point of the camera. Creating a Column Grid | 37 .

43 Name the view: ■ In the Project Browser. and click Rename. 45 Proceed to the next exercise. expand 3D Views. and then copy them to the subsequent levels. ■ ■ Right-click 3D View 1. You begin by adding beams to the 01 Entry Level floor plan. and click OK. enter To Building. 38 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . under Views (all). Adding Beams In this exercise.42 Resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can view all of the columns. 44 Save the drawing. displays in bold under 3D Views. named 3D View 1 by default. you add beams to build the structure of the building model. The current view. In the Rename View dialog. “Adding Beams” on page 38.

5 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. which displays the structural elements in your view as single lines. click Finish. click Grid. select each grid line. A flyout menu displays the level of detail in which you can display the elements in the current view.When you finish adding beams. 2 At the bottom left corner of the drawing area. 7 On the Options Bar. verify UB-Universal Beam: 305x165x40UB is selected. 4 Click Medium. double-click To Building to view all of the beams. 10 In the Project Browser. The View Control Bar offers graphical shortcuts to view settings and commands. 9 On the Options Bar. you change the height of the columns so they extend to the 06 Roof level. Adding Beams | 39 . 6 In the Type Selector. view the icons on the View Control Bar. The selected grid lines display as red. double-click 01 Entry Level. click Beam. The view is currently set to Coarse. under Floor Plans. 8 While pressing CTRL. under 3D Views. Add beams to the first level of the building 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Click the Detail Level icon . the icon on the right side of the scale.

When you created the columns. 12 On the View toolbar. 17 In the Select Levels dialog. 15 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. which only extend to the 5th level. click Modify. click to view the default 3D view of the structure.Copy beams from 01 Entry Level to levels 02 through 06 11 In the Project Browser. 14 Select one of the beams. and click OK. 16 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. NOTE The default 3D view is not available in a perspective or camera view. press and hold SHIFT. you specified their height to reach only the 05 Roof Garden level. The beams that you copied from the 01 Entry Level are pasted onto each subsequent level of the building. under Floor Plans. select 06 Roof. right-click. double-click 01 Entry Level. 13 On the Design Bar. select 02 Level. and click Select All Instances. 40 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . The default 3D view is a southeast isometric view with hidden lines. All of the beams attached to the columns display as red. Notice that top level beams are not connected to the columns.

Change the height of the columns 18 Select one of the columns. 20 Click Cancel. click . and click OK. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. resize the view to see the entire structure. and click Element Properties. double-click To Building. and click Select All Instances. You could change this parameter to 06 Roof in this dialog to change the height of the column. and if necessary. right-click. The columns now extend to the top level of the building. 22 On the Options Bar. 06 Roof. under Constraints. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. for Top Level. under 3D Views. Adding Beams | 41 . 25 In the Project Browser. right-click. select 06 Roof. 21 With the column selected. under Instance Parameters. All of the columns display as red. 24 Press ESC. The parameter is set to 05 Roof Garden. view the Top Level Constraint parameter. but it would only change the height of the single selected column.

View the south elevation of the structure 26 In the Project Browser. double-click South. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. as lines only. You can view the columns and beams in the elevation. 28 Save the drawing. The structural elements (columns and beams) display only as lines. but want to display them in less detail. and click Coarse. 27 At the lower left corner of the drawing. under Elevations. and click Hidden line. area. Click Detail Level. on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style. “Adding Braces” on page 43. 42 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model .

double-click 00 Foundation. double-click the elevation marker arrow. To better add the braces to the structure. Add braces in a framing elevation view 5 On the bottom left side of the grid. under Floor Plans. verify Attach to Grid is selected. Create framing elevation views 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. you add braces to the four corners of the building structure. Each elevation marker aligns perpendicularly to the grid. 3 On the Options Bar. Adding Braces | 43 . 4 Select the outer grid lines to place 8 elevation markers around the outside of the grid as shown.Adding Braces In this exercise. you create 8 framing elevation views. click Framing Elevation. and press ESC to end the command.

After you add the final brace. 7 On the Design Bar. visible offsets between the beam and the brace connection points displays. press ESC. click Brace. NOTE Do not copy or array braces. The endpoints will display when you move the cursor over them. and click to specify the endpoint of the brace. NOTE Make sure you snap to the endpoints of the beams when adding braces to ensure proper connectivity in the building model. but when placed the braces are placed. 8 In the Type Selector. 9 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the beam on 01 Entry Level. click to specify the start point of the brace. You must place them one by one to establish the proper connections between elements. 44 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 6 Use the grips that display on the crop region to adjust both sides of the view. add 4 braces on the subsequent levels of the building as shown. so that you can see vertical columns located on grid lines A and B. 11 Using the same technique. and when the endpoint snap displays. verify UB-Universal Beam: 305x165x40UB is selected. 10 Move the cursor diagonally to the right endpoint of the beam on 02 Level.The associated framing elevation view displays.

delete it and redraw it.Lower the height of the roof (06 Roof) and the 04 Level to test the connectivity 12 Double-click the 06 Roof level height. Make sure that you use the endpoint snap to connect the brace to the beams. enter 18000 mm. The height of the roof lowers. IMPORTANT If the brace does not move with the level. Adding Braces | 45 . and press ENTER.

Add braces in another framing elevation view 15 In the Project Browser. double-click 00 Foundation. and on the Options Bar. 14 On the Standard toolbar. double-click the framing elevation marker arrow. 20 Select the dimension string between grid lines A and B.13 Double-click the 04 Level height. but this time add them from right to left. enter 10000 mm. as shown in the 3D view below. and press ENTER. and press ENTER. enter 12000 mm. Add brace in the remaining views and test the connectivity of the building model structure 18 Add braces to the structure in the remaining framing elevation views. and click the lock that displays to unlock it. click twice to restore the original level heights. 21 Select grid line A. under Floor Plans. double-click 00 Foundation. 16 On the bottom right side of the grid. 46 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 22 Click the dimension value of the first vertical grid bay (the one that you unlocked). under Floor Plans. 19 In the Project Browser. click Activate Dimensions. 17 Add diagonal braces to the structure.

and roof height. under Elevations. and braces 27 Select one of the columns in the structure. grid size. you place isolated pile caps under the building columns to create a foundation system that distributes the building load to the ground. 25 Change the height of the 06 Roof level to 24000 mm. double-click 3D. Creating a Foundation | 47 . “Creating a Foundation” on page 47. under Floor Plans. The connected beams and braces resize as the columns move. 31 Save the drawing. 26 In the Project Browser. double-click South. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. and drag it away from the structure. Test connectivity of the columns. under 3D Views. 29 In the Project Browser. open the 3D view and notice the change in the size. 28 On the Standard toolbar. and if necessary. 24 In the Project Browser. lock it.23 In the Project Browser. 30 Select the dimension string of the first vertical grid bay. beams. click 3 times to restore the locked dimension. Creating a Foundation In this exercise. double-click 00 Foundation.

click Yes to load a new structural foundation family. for View Range. click Training Files. under View Depth. In the Element Properties dialog.rfa. Verify the pile cap family is loaded in the project 5 In the Project Browser. 7 Select 2000 x 2000 x 900 mm. under Extents. You learn how to access the families that are stored in libraries included with software. 10 Edit the 00 Foundation view range: ■ ■ ■ ■ Right-click in the view.Before you can add the pile caps. and expand Structural Foundation. In the View Range dialog. After you load the pile cap family. and press ESC. expand Families. you must load the appropriate pile cap family into the project. 4 In the left pane of the dialog. 9 Close the warning dialog. The foundation pile cap now displays. select Unlimited. and click View Properties. you add the pile caps in the 00 Foundation floor plan view. Click OK twice. click Edit. and how to load specific families into a project. click the intersection of grid line A and grid line 1. for Level. 6 Expand M_Pile Cap-Rectangular to display the available pile cap types (sizes). The pile cap has been added in the view. Load a pile cap family 1 In the Project Browser. but the current depth of the view does not allow you to view it. Add the first pile cap 8 At the top left of the grid. 3 In the Revit dialog that displays. The M_Pile Cap-Rectangular family displays in the tree. where you must adjust the view range before you can view them. A warning displays. click Foundation ➤ Isolated. under Floor Plans. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. and open Metric\Families\Structural\Foundations\M_Pile Cap-Rectangular. double-click 00 Foundation. 48 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . and drag it to the drawing area.

under 3D Views. 13 In the Project Browser. double-click {3D} to view the complete foundation. When the final pile cap is placed. and click Create Similar.Add pile caps to complete the foundation 11 Right-click the pile cap. 12 Select each grid intersection to add pile caps that form the foundation. press ESC. Creating a Foundation | 49 .

3 In the Type Selector. NOTE The default 3D view is the only 3D view in which the Select All Instances command is available. beam. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select CHS-Circular Hollow Section-Column: 508x12. View the round hollow columns in the building model. Change the column type 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\m_RRB_update_structure. 50 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model .5CHS. double-click 3D.14 Click File menu ➤ Save. under 3D Views. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. right-click. and brace families into the project. Changing Structural Member Types In this exercise. and braces that you used to create the building structure. 4 On the Design Bar. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 Select one of the columns. beams. and click Select All Instances. You load new column. “Changing Structural Member Types” on page 50. It is not available in a perspective or camera view. click Training Files.rvt. All of the columns in the building model display as red. you change the types of the columns. click Modify. and learn how to select and change multiple structural element types to refine the building structure.

12 In the Type Properties dialog. 20 Open the other building elevations and change the braces to M_Round Bar: 75 mm.6x15. You need to create a new bar type by duplicating the 25mm bar type. Changing Structural Member Types | 51 . and click OK twice. enter 75 mm. This not the size that you want to use. Change the brace type 8 On the Design Bar. right-click. and changing its size parameter. but it is the only size of its type currently available. 19 On the Design Bar. 15 In the Project Browser. click Modify. click Edit/New. click . 6 In the Type Selector. click Modify to view the new beam type in the building model.Change the beam type 5 Select one of the beams. enter 75 mm. click Brace. click Modify. for d. 9 In the Type Selector. for Type. select M_HSS-Hollow Structural Section: HSS203. select M_Round Bar: 25mm. In the following steps. The brace type changes. click Duplicate. select M_Round Bar: 75 mm. under Dimensions. the braces as well as the beams change. Because the braces that you added were actually a beam type. 7 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. 16 On the Design Bar. 13 In the Name dialog. and click OK. although the framing elevation displays the braces as lines only. 17 While pressing CTRL. under Elevations (Interior Elevation). 10 On the Options Bar. and click Select All Instances. click . select the braces in the elevation one by one. View the building model with the new structural element types 21 On the View toolbar. 18 In the Type Selector. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. you change the brace type.9.2x101. double-click Elevation 1-a.

“Adding Floors” on page 52. To create floors. 52 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . double-click 01 Entry Level. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Adding Floors In this exercise. ■ On the Sketch tab. click Floor. you add floors to the 01 Entry Level through the 05 Roof Garden level of the building. stairs. click Training Files. you must sketch them first in a sketch editor. You are now in the sketch editor. under Floor Plans. click Lines. Some other Revit Architecture elements. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In this exercise. and elements in the current view display as gray. Notice the Design Bar now displays the Sketch tab.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. you learn some different techniques that you can use when sketching objects. Add the 01 Entry Level Floor 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Sketch the floor: ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and railings are also created from sketches.rvt. such as roofs. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_floors.

At the top left corner of the grid. sketch a rectangular floor inside the extents of the grid. Do not lock the dimension. 5 Dimension the bottom right corner of the grid. The exact dimensions of the sketched floor are not important. 4 Dimension the space between the left floor edge and the first vertical grid line.■ ■ On the Options Bar. and then the 1st horizontal grid line. and click above the 1st horizontal grid line to place the dimension. click Dimension. Do not lock the dimensions. select the top floor line. Move the cursor to the left. If the grid changes size. Leave this dimension unlocked. Using a crossing window. as you resize it in the next steps. 3 Place a dimension between the first horizontal grid line and the left floor edge: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. click . the 01 Entry Level floor will resize with it. Adding Floors | 53 . past the first vertical grid line.

and then press ESC. 9 Because you do not need to modify the floor. If you needed to modify the floor after you created it. click Finish Sketch to create the floor. They display on the floor sketch. Select and lock the dimensions. using a different sketching technique. 7 On the Design Bar. this is how you would do it. and change their values to 300 mm. Move the cursor to the right dimension. Select the left floor edge and change the top dimension value to 300 mm. At the top left corner of the grid. click Quit Sketch. click Modify. Next. you will add a floor to the 02 Level of the building model. on the Design Bar. press ENTER. Enter 300 mm. Move the cursor to dimensions at the bottom of the grid. The floor sketch and dimensions redisplay. select the top floor line. click . The dimensions are not visible on the finished floor. and on the Options Bar.6 Resize the floor sketch by changing its dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. and click the temporary dimension value. 54 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . You use the Pick option to create a floor from the 01 Entry Level floor geometry. 8 Select the floor.

Adding Floors | 55 . dimension the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid as shown. and move the cursor until the dashed green line displays in the inside of the 01 Entry Level floor. and lock the dimensions. and for Offset. and press ESC. The 02 Level floor sketch displays. On the Sketch tab.Add the 02 Level floor 10 In the Project Browser. 11 Sketch the floor: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. ■ ■ Select the right vertical 01 Entry Level floor line. dimension the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid. click Floor. ■ 12 At the top left corner of the grid. 14 On the Design Bar. double-click 02 Level. enter 1500mm. under Floor Plans. 13 At the bottom right corner of the grid. click Lines. IMPORTANT Make sure you select the 01 Entry Level floor lines and not the grid lines. The 02 Level floor displays. click Finish Sketch. click . On the Options Bar. Select the three remaining floor lines.

click Align . 21 Select the top 02 Level floor line. click Floor. and then select the top line of the 03 Level floor sketch. 20 On the Tools toolbar. 22 Click the lock to constrain the 03 Level floor line to the 02 Level floor. The sketched floor line is aligned with the top 03 Level floor line. double-click 03 Level. 16 On the Design Bar. Click the locks to constrain the floors. The 02 Level floor is visible in the view.Add the 03 Level floor 15 In the Project Browser. The cursor changes to 2 arrows to indicate the Align command is active. click Lines. 18 On the Options Bar. 19 Sketch a floor inside the 02 Level floor. and a lock icon displays. under Floor Plans. click . 23 Continue to align the remaining 3 floor sketch lines with the 02 Level floor. 56 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.

and click OK. select 05 Roof Garden. 32 Select the floor. View the floors in the 3D building model and test connectivity 36 In the Project Browser. 37 On the View Control Bar. and unlock it. under Floor Plans. click Finish Sketch. click Finish Sketch. and on the Options Bar. you could place the rectangular sketch on the 04 Level. dimension the space between the 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. under Floor Plans. double-click 05 Roof Garden. 25 Repeat the previous procedure to create a floor on the 04 Level. double-click {3D}. and click Shading with Edges. 29 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. Adding Floors | 57 .24 On the Design Bar. 41 Click the dimension value of the first vertical grid bay. and constrain the 04 Level floor to the 03 Level floor. 35 On the Design Bar. 39 Select the dimension string between grid line A and B. and lock the edges. Copy and paste the 01 Entry Level floor to the 05 Roof Garden level 26 In the Project Browser. dimension the space between 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. 27 Select the 01 Entry Level Floor. double-click 01 Entry Level. The 01 Entry Level floor is copied at the same location onto the 05 Roof Garden level. Alternatively. and click Activate Dimensions. 31 In the Project Browser. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. Click the lock icons that display next to the dimensions to constrain the 05 Roof Garden level floor to the grid. and enter 4500 mm. 38 In the Project Browser. under Views ➤ 3D Views. 40 Select grid line A. Lock the dimensions to constrain the floors. 30 In the Select Levels dialog. 33 At the top left corner of the grid. under Floor Plans. click Model Graphics Style. click Edit. 34 At the bottom right corner of the grid. double-click 00 Foundation.

you add a sloped roof over the corner of the building. click to restore the grid bay size to 7500 mm. double-click 00 Foundation. under 3D Views. 44 In the Project Browser. and lock the dimension that you unlocked in a previous step. “Adding a Roof ” on page 58. Adding a Roof In this exercise. double-click {3D} to view the grid. 45 Proceed to the next exercise. 58 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . under Floor Plans. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.42 In the Project Browser. 43 On the Standard toolbar.

and then move the cursor slightly to the right of the grid line. The roof sketch line displays with a slope marker. click Training Files. and press ENTER. you use the Roof by Footprint option in Revit Architecture. 4 On the Options Bar: ■ Select Defines Slope. double-click 06 Roof. When a green dashed line displays. 5 Move the cursor over grid line E. Adding a Roof | 59 .To create the roof. enter 1800 mm. under Floor Plans. and specify which roof edges will define the roof slope. of the roof in a plan view. click to place the roof line. 3 On the Design Bar. ■ ■ For Offset.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Click . click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. or the perimeter. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Add the roof 1 In the Project Browser. You sketch the footprint. click Lines. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_roof.

7 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Defines Slope. and lock it. click to place the roof line. Select the lower portion of the roof line that you created from grid line E (the part you want to keep). enter 0 mm. 8 Select grid line C to place another roof line. For Offset. and then select the right portion of the roof line that you created from grid line 5.6 Select grid line 5. Continue to trim the lines until you complete the roof as shown. and lock it. and when the green dashed line displays. click (Trim/Extend). The roof sketch line displays with a slope marker. 11 Trim the rooflines: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. ■ 60 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 9 Select grid line 3 to place the final roof line. move the cursor slightly below the grid line. 10 Press ESC.

for Slope Angle. 15 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southeast. enter 4. Change the roof slope 16 In the Project Browser. double-click 06 Roof. and on the Options Bar. click .12 Optionally. and click OK.00. under Floor Plans. View the roof 14 On the View toolbar. Adding a Roof | 61 . 13 On the Design Bar. 17 Select the roof. View the roof 19 On the View toolbar. click . place a dimension between the roof slope edges and the grid to constrain them. under Dimensions. click Finish Roof. click . 18 In the Element Properties dialog.

click Wall. click Training Files. click Duplicate. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_curtainwall. Under Construction. enter 1050 mm. enter Retail Storefront. for Join Condition. When you duplicate a type. click 01 Entry Level. for Spacing. Adding a Curtain Wall In this exercise. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. Under Horizontal Grid Pattern. select Horizontal Grid Continuous. you add a curtain wall. Click OK twice. and click 4 In the Element Properties dialog.rvt. click Edit/New. Under Vertical Grid Pattern. The type is saved in the project. “Adding a Curtain Wall” on page 62. you copy an existing family type and change its name and parameters to create a new unique type. so if you resize the grid. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ Click . under Floor Plans. select Curtain Wall: Storefront. In the left pane of the Open dialog. the curtain wall resizes with it. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. for Type. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. 62 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . for Spacing. You constrain the curtain wall to the grid. 6 In the Name dialog.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. enter 2100 mm. 7 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ . 3 In the Type Selector. Add curtain wall segments 1 In the Project Browser. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

dimension both corners of the curtain wall to the grid. Trim the curtain wall segments 12 On the Tools toolbar. 11 Select the 3 remaining outermost grid lines to create 3 more curtain wall segments that are offset 600 mm from the grid lines toward the building interior. 13 On the Design Bar. enter 600 mm. so they remain in the view. and move it slightly toward the building interior. 10 When a green dashed line displays. but opt to keep the constraint when prompted. select 01 Entry Level.■ ■ ■ For Level. For Height. For Offset. you can delete the dimension. If you want to hide them. and trim each curtain wall segment. If the grid moves. 9 Move the cursor over the grid line 1 near its endpoint. These dimensions are not in a sketch. Adding a Curtain Wall | 63 . the locks ensure that the curtain wall will move with it. click (Trim/Extend). click Dimension. click to place the 1st curtain wall segment. and lock the dimensions. select 05 Roof Garden.

“Creating an Entrance” on page 65. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. Click Model Graphics Style. 15 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style. and click Shading with Edges. double-click To Building.View the curtain wall 14 In the Project Browser. and click Hidden Line. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. under 3D Views. 64 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model .

and double-click South.Creating an Entrance In this exercise.rvt. click Training Files. clear one element to clear all the elements. under Views (all). expand Elevations (Building Elevation). and click None. All the elements in the list are selected. and click Medium. Creating an Entrance | 65 . under the element list. 5 Under Visibility. You also modify the panels around the doors so they are solid rather than glass. you want to change the view so only curtain wall panels and columns display. and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_curtainwall. 6 Under Visibility. To better work with the curtain wall panels. click Detail Level. 4 On the Model Categories tab. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. you replace 4 curtain wall panels with doors in the front of the building to create the main building entrance. select Curtain Panels and Structural Columns. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Modify the South elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. click All. 2 On the View Control Bar.

13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. select Architectural Elevation. 66 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 8 Zoom in to the entrance area. in the center of the 01 Entry Level. 14 In the Select View Template dialog. 15 Zoom to the drawing extents. click Modify. in the Type Selector. 12 With the panels selected. 11 When all 9 panels are selected. 7 Click OK. press and hold CTRL. as these usually represent internal pilasters. select System Panel: Solid. 9 On the Design Bar. click the pin to remove it from each of the panels. and select the other panels around the entrance as shown. 10 Select 1 panel.Do not select Columns. and click OK.

in this case an architectural elevation. double-click {3D}. If you select View ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click Detail Level ➤ Medium. 17 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. 19 In the Project Browser. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.16 On the View Control Bar. under 3D Views. double-click To Building. 18 On the View Control Bar. you see that the visibility of many of the Model element categories that you cleared in a previous step are selected. The view template applies a collection of visibility graphics appropriate to the view it is named for. Creating an Entrance | 67 .

select another mullion to the right. click Curtain Grid. 25 Select the mullion that you selected previously. 26 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and press ESC to remove the grid lines as shown. 23 Press TAB until you are notified that you have selected a grid line. and click to select it. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 68 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 22 Move the cursor over the curtain wall mullion as shown.20 In the Project Browser. 21 Zoom to the front of the building. double-click South. click Add or Remove Segments. 24 On the Options Bar.

35 Zoom in to the front of the building. and view the new entrance. 31 Select the newly created curtain wall panel (press TAB to cycle through selections). and unpin it. 32 In the Type Selector. 30 On the Design Bar. 28 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion.27 On the Options Bar. 29 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion to the right. click . Creating an Entrance | 69 . 33 Repeat for the next 3 panels. 34 On the View toolbar. select M_Curtain Wall Sgl Glass. select One Segment. click Modify.

press TAB until it is selected. and unpin it. select it. and 4th panels.36 Zoom in to the first panel. remove the mullions from the 2nd. 39 Using the same process. 37 Move the cursor over the bottom mullion. 70 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 38 Press DELETE. 3rd.

under Graphics. “Creating a Drop Ceiling” on page 71. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 71 . 5 Click OK. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. Use the same steps that you used to create the south entrance.40 Optionally. open the North elevation. double-click 01 Entry Level. select 02 Level. 3 Right-click in the view. and add an entrance to the north side of the building. and click View Properties. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. for Underlay. under Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Drop Ceiling In this exercise.rvt. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_drop_ceiling. 2 Zoom in to the lower right corner of the building. click Training Files. you create a drop ceiling on the 01 Entry Level of the building. 4 In the Element Properties dialog.

which indicates you must draw the callout. ■ Move the cursor horizontally below the bottom right column. and drag the grip down to position the callout head below the grid as shown. select the grip closest to the callout head. 72 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . and specify a point to complete the callout. 7 Place the callout: ■ Specify a point above the top left column. 8 Select the callout.6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. The cursor changes to a pencil. click Callout.

14 Press ESC. and click Flip Section. 12 Draw a section line. 13 Select the section line. Move the cursor horizontally to the left. ■ ■ Specify the section start point just below the right framing elevation marker. and drag the top grip down to display only 01 Entry Level and 02 Level. enter Display Area. and click Rename. and click OK. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 10 In the Rename View dialog.9 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. right-click Callout of 01 Entry Level. and specify a point past grid line D. 15 Double-click the section marker to view the section. right-click. click Section. 16 Select the section box. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 73 .

22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click . and align the exterior faces of the right vertical wall and the bottom horizontal wall with the 02 Level underlay. For Loc Line. and lock the dimension. select Compound Ceiling : 600 x 600 mm Grid. enter Section Display Area.17 In the Project Browser. 18 In the Rename View dialog. 27 On the Options Bar. 29 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the top horizontal wall and the grid. select Finish Face: Exterior. click Ceiling. 28 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the left vertical wall and the grid. and then specify a point near the intersection of grid lines D and 4 to draw a 5000 x 5000 mm rectangular wall inside the grid lines. 26 On the Design Bar. and click OK. double-click 01 Entry Level. 74 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click (Align). select Wall faces. 19 In the Project Browser. and lock the dimension. Click . 25 Press ESC. for Prefer. expand Sections (Building Section). ■ 23 Select the bottom corner of the overhead floor. 30 In the Project Browser. 33 On the Options Bar: ■ Click Sketch. under Floor Plans. and click Rename. Lock both alignments. 21 In the Type Selector. double-click 01 Entry Level. select Basic Wall: Interior-135mm Partition (2 hr). 32 In the Type Selector. 31 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. right-click Section 1. 24 On the Tools toolbar. under Ceiling Plans. click Wall. click Dimension.

35 Align and lock each ceiling line to the interior wall faces. . press TAB until the chain of walls is selected. click . 39 On the View Control Bar. 41 On the Options Bar. ■ 34 Sketch the ceiling within the walls. The ceiling grid displays inside of the walls.■ Click Click . 40 Move the cursor over one of the walls. 37 On the Design Bar. 38 In the Project Browser under Sections (Building Section). 36 Press ESC. click Finish Sketch. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 75 . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. double-click Section Display Area. and click to select the walls.

press TAB until you select the wall chain.42 In the Element Properties dialog. click Attach. Select the 02 Level Floor. enter 2700 mm. 48 Modify the ceiling grid: ■ To start the tiles on a wall edge. and drag it to the interior face of the horizontal or vertical wall. 46 Attach the walls to the 02 Level floor: ■ Select one of the vertical walls above the ceiling. 47 In the Project Browser. To position the grid. 44 Select the ceiling. double-click 01 Entry Level. for Top/Base. and specify a distance. click Move. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. and click . 43 On the Design Bar. ■ 76 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . and click OK. select a grid line. under Constraints. for Height Offset From Level. under Ceiling Plans. under Constraints. click Modify. select any horizontal or vertical ceiling grid line. for Base Offset. on the Tools toolbar. enter 2700 mm. and click to select the walls. ■ ■ The walls attach to the 02 Level floor. On the Options Bar.

view the ceiling structure. click Edit. 53 Click OK. 52 In the Edit Assembly dialog. click (Rotate).View the ceiling structure 49 Select the ceiling. click Cancel. for Structure. under Construction. and click . 57 On the Options Bar. 54 In the Type Properties dialog. click Cancel. 58 Move the cursor toward the top left corner of the grid. Rotate the ceiling grid 56 Select the center ceiling grid line. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 77 . click Edit/New. 51 In the Type Properties dialog. for Type. 50 In the Element Properties dialog. 55 In the Element Properties dialog.

78 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 61 Select and drag the diagonal center grid line until it spans the corners of the ceiling grid.59 Click. 60 Press ESC. enter 45. and press ENTER.

After the stairs and stairwell have been copied to levels 01-05. “Creating Multi-Level Stairs” on page 79.View the building in 3D with shadows 62 In the Project Browser. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. copy the drop ceiling to the other building levels. you must cut an opening through the floors on each level. Creating Multi-Level Stairs In this exercise. 66 Proceed to the next exercise. click Shadows On. 65 Optionally. and then copying it to the 05 Level. You begin by creating a flight of stairs and stairwell on the 01 Entry Level of the building. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 79 . 63 On the View Control Bar. click Shadows Off. under 3D Views. 64 On the View Control Bar. double-click To Building. you create multi-level stairs and a stairwell that span the levels of the building.

double-click 01 Entry Level. click Ref Plane. click to specify the start point of the reference plane. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_stair_. 2. Create the stair 1 In the Project Browser. ■ 80 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 5 Draw 2 reference planes that you will use to locate the flight of stairs: ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor over the intersection of grid lines C and 3. C. 2 Zoom in to the area defined by grid lines B. 3 On the View Control Bar. Move the cursor to the left along grid line 3. When the temporary dimensions indicate the cursor is 1500 mm from the grid line intersection. Move the cursor vertically. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You will create the stair in the area between these columns.rvt. click Detail Level ➤ Coarse.Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and 3. and specify the reference plane endpoint on grid line B. under Floor Plans.

and specify a point to create first stair flight. 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 7 Sketch the stair: ■ ■ Select the bottom endpoint of the right reference plane.■ Draw another reference plane 1500 mm from grid line 2. Move the cursor vertically along the reference plane until the text below the stair flight displays an equal number of risers created and risers remaining. click Stairs. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 81 .

16 Using the same technique. including its handrails. ■ 12 Draw walls around the stair. click Align.225mm Masonry. with a message that 20 risers have been created and that 0 remain. Click . 9 On the Design Bar. click Wall. and click to select it. press TAB until the stair edge is selected. 11 On the Options Bar: ■ For Loc Line. and specify a point. click Finish Sketch to create the complete stair. and select the 2nd reference plane. 10 In the Type Selector. 13 On the Tools toolbar. beyond the end of the stair. align the 2 vertical side edges of the stair with the 2 vertical walls and lock the alignments. 8 On the Options Bar.■ ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the left. 14 Move the cursor over the top horizontal outside edge of the stair. and lock the alignment. 82 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 15 Select the interior face of the top horizontal wall. select Finish Face: Interior. Make sure you select the stair and not the railing. select Basic Wall: Generic . Move the cursor down. The complete stair displays.

Lock the dimension. click Dimension. 19 Select the dimension. Select the wall. 20 Click OK to delete the dimension. Because the dimension is constrained. 22 On the Standard toolbar. enter 1200 mm. but leave the stair and wall constrained to each other. Select the interior face of the wall. and press DELETE. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 83 . select the dimension value. and specify a point away from the wall. select both reference planes. and press DELETE. 18 Dimension the distance from the bottom of the stair to the interior face of the bottom horizontal wall: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. and drag it to the left to test the stair and wall constraints. 21 Select the stair. for Prefer. The stair and walls move to the left. 23 While pressing CTRL. and press ENTER. Click Modify. click .17 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. a warning displays. select Wall faces. Select the bottom of the stair.

click Modify. 25 In the Type Selector. TIP To flip the door swing. for Multistory Top Level. but if you view the top level of the building. click . select M_Single-Flush: 0915 x 2134mm. You can see that the walls and stairs span the vertical height of the building. press and hold the left mouse button. You must cut an opening through the building to accommodate the multi-level stairs. 35 Press SHIFT. select all 4 walls. for Base Constraint. Click OK. and click . 84 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . verify Up to level: 06 Roof is selected. 26 On the Options Bar. you can see that the stair railings penetrate the floors. click Door. . press the SPACEBAR before you place the door. 27 Select the right side of the lower horizontal wall to place the door. 29 While pressing CTRL. and click 30 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . The Dynamic View dialog displays in the left corner of your screen. 31 Select the stair. select 00 Foundation. 33 On the View toolbar. For Top Constraint. Under Constraints. 32 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Constraints. select 05 Roof Garden.Add a door to the stairwell 24 On the Design Bar. Click OK. 28 On the Design Bar. clear Tag on Placement. click 34 On the View toolbar. and move the cursor to spin the building model.

. 42 Align the top horizontal shaft sketch line with the top horizontal interior wall face and lock the alignment. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 85 . Copy the door to multiple levels 46 Select the door. 38 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 41 On the Tools toolbar. 48 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. under Floor Plans. click Align. double-click 01 Entry Level. 39 On the Options Bar: ■ Click Click . ■ 40 Draw a rectangular shaft opening around the stairs. 37 Zoom in to the stairs. 43 Align the 2 vertical shaft sketch lines with the interior face of the 2 vertical walls. 45 Click Finish Sketch to complete the shaft. 44 Align the bottom horizontal shaft sketch line with the bottom tread of the stair. and lock the alignment. and lock the alignments. 47 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard.Create a shaft opening 36 In the Project Browser. click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening.

By offsetting the base. for Base Offset. . and click 54 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ . click . ■ For Top Constraint. click 51 On the View toolbar. double-click 01 Entry Level. under Floor Plans. and click OK. select Up to Level: 06 Roof. Look at the top of building and notice that the shaft is not cutting an opening. you prevent it from cutting through the 01 Entry Level floor. Under Constraints. click . and spin the building so you can see the roof. The shaft opening will cut through any level it touches. enter 300 mm. 55 On the View toolbar. 53 Select the shaft. and click OK. 86 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 52 In the Project Browser. click 56 On the View toolbar. 57 Spin the building so that you can see the shaft opening. . View the shaft and stair 50 On the View toolbar.49 In the Select Levels dialog. select 02 Level through 05 Roof Garden.

click Training Files. and open Metric\m_RRB_wall_profile.58 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height In this exercise. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you create a wall on the 05 Roof Garden level. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 87 . “Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height” on page 87. 59 Proceed to the next exercise. You learn how to access and modify the profile and height of the wall to create a decorative wall that extends past the height of the 06 Roof Level. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.rvt.

select Basic Wall: Generic . Select the dimension value. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. for Underlay. and draw a 10650 mm wall along grid line 3. and press ENTER. 7 Move the cursor near the column at the intersection of grid lines C and 3. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. select 06 Roof. 5 In the Type Selector. for Loc Line. Enter 1050 mm. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.Add a basic wall to the 05 Roof Garden level 1 In the Project Browser. Select the wall. 10 Change the dimension value: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. and click OK. double-click 05 Roof Garden. 6 On the Options Bar.225mm Masonry. You must draw the wall from left to right to position it on the correct side of grid line 3. click Wall. 88 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . under Floor Plans. 2 Right-click in the view. click Dimension. and click View Properties. click Modify. 9 Dimension the space between grid line C and the left face of the wall on grid line 3. select Core Face: Interior. under Graphics.

11 On the Tools toolbar. 15 Select the wall. move the cursor up 6000 mm. and on the Options Bar. click Lines. 21 Select the top endpoint of the right vertical profile line. The South elevation displays. 19 Press ESC. 12 Select the floor on the right side of the wall. 17 On the Design Bar. double-click Elevation: South. click (Align). and click to place a line. and then select the right face of the wall. 23 Press ESC. 22 Move the cursor horizontally 1520 mm to the left. 13 Click the lock that displays to constrain the 2 elements. move the cursor up 4500 mm. click Edit Profile. and click to place a line. Modify the profile of the wall 14 On the Design Bar. 16 In the Go To View dialog. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 89 . click Lines. 18 Select the top endpoint of the left vertical profile line. 20 On the Design Bar. The profile of the wall that you just modified displays as a purple sketch. click Modify. and click to place a line.

Select the top right portion of the circle. 26 Snap to the endpoint of the line that you just drew. 31 Move the cursor to the left. and select the endpoint of the left vertical profile line. 33 Trim the profile lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. click the drop-down arrow that displays next to the sketching tools. Select the top right portion of the circle. 30 Using the Quadrant snap. move the cursor out until a circle with a radius of 1520 mm displays.24 On the Design Bar. click Lines. Select the short right profile line. Press ESC. 29 On the Options Bar. and click (Circle). 28 On the Design Bar. Select the top horizontal profile line. click . 32 Click Modify. snap to the top of the circle. click (Trim/Extend). and select it. 27 Press ESC. and click to place it. click Lines. 90 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 25 On the Options Bar.

note that for Top Constraint. click Modify. 39 In the Error dialog. 41 Select the horizontal line across the middle of the profile sketch. and click to place it. and select the wall. and press DELETE. 43 In the Warning dialog. Up to level: 06 Roof is selected. click . you maintained the relationship to the roof level. move the cursor out until a circle with a radius of 1000 mm displays. click Finish Sketch.34 On the Design Bar. click the Close button. 40 On the Design Bar. and press DELETE. click Continue. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 91 . click Finish Sketch. select the short horizontal line on the right. 37 On the Design Bar. 48 Change the 06 Roof level height to 19000 mm. unlock it. instead of lengthening the existing edge. 35 On the Options Bar. 46 In the Element Properties dialog. By adding extra height to the wall. click Lines. 42 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 36 Snap to the endpoint of the short horizontal line. 44 On the Design Bar. 45 On the Options Bar. click . under Constraints. 47 Click Cancel. 38 On the Design Bar. You need a closed sketch to complete the profile. click Modify.

under 3D Views. click to restore the original height of the roof. and how to place and adjust them in project views. 92 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. Adding Entourage and Site Components In this exercise. “Adding Entourage and Site Components” on page 92. double-click 3D. View the wall 50 In the Project Browser. 51 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northwest. You learn how to load these components into the project. create a sidewalk on 2 sides of the building.49 On the Standard toolbar. you place planters on the 05 Roof level to create a roof garden. and place people and a car on and next to the sidewalk. 52 Proceed to the next exercise.

between grid lines C and D. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 93 . click Training Files. TIP After you place the 1st planter. Create the roof garden 1 On the Project Browser. move the cursor over the planter and move it to the right to display a dashed green line that helps you to place the next planter. as shown. 4 Add 3 planters on the inside of the floor and grid line 5. 3 In the Type Selector. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select M_Planter : 1200 x 1200mm. and open Metric\m_RRB_host. under Floor Plans.Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. double-click 05 Roof Garden. click Component.rvt.

8 On the View toolbar. 9 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. and then click OK twice. 17 Click Apply. click . click Component.5 Meters. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. double-click 05 Roof Garden. 11 In the Project Browser. select Tree . 16 In the Type Properties dialog. 94 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . and press ESC. 15 In the Name dialog.5. Create a sidewalk outside of the building 20 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Type Selector. click Duplicate. click Edit/New. under 3D Views. under Other. under Floor Plans. double-click {3D}. The height of the trees no longer extends past the roof. 18 While pressing CTRL. under Floor Plans. enter Cornus Florida 1.5 Meters.Deciduous: Cornus Florida 4. 19 In the Project Browser. and click OK. double-click 01 Entry Level. enter 1500 mm. select M_Tree . and on the Options Bar. 12 Select 1 of the trees.5 On the Basics tab. and in the Type Selector. click . select the 2 remaining trees. for Type. for Plant Height.Deciduous: Cornus Florida 1. and notice that the trees that you placed in the planters protrude through the roof. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 Click to place a tree in the center of each planter. 10 View the roof.

26 Using the same method. and click to sketch a line. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 95 . 22 On the Design Bar. enter 2400 mm. ■ ■ For Offset. sketch a line between grid lines 4 and 5. 23 On the Options Bar: Click . click Lines. 28 Select the bottom horizontal floor line. for Offset. click Floor. enter 0 mm. 25 Press TAB until a line that is offset 2400 mm below grid line 5 displays between grid lines A and B. and click to place the line.21 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 24 Move the cursor over grid line 5 between grid lines A and B. and click to sketch a line. 27 On the Options Bar. 29 Select the right vertical floor line.

click Finish Sketch. and then select the line that you sketched along the bottom horizontal line of the floor. move the cursor to the right approximately 1200 mm. and click to finish the line. 38 On the Design Bar. 33 Select the left endpoint of the line between grid lines A and B. 35 Select the line that you just drew.30 On the Options Bar. click (Trim/Extend). The completed sidewalk displays. and then select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. click . 37 Select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. and click to finish the line. 34 On the Tools toolbar. and then select the horizontal line near grid line 1. 96 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 36 Select the line between grid lines A and B. move the cursor up 900 mm. clear Chain. 32 Select the top endpoint of the right vertical line. 31 On the Options Bar.

44 In the Element Properties dialog. 41 In the Type Properties dialog. enter -250 mm. 49 On the Options Bar. for Type. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 97 . click . for Height Offset from Level. 45 Click OK. and on the Options Bar. 53 In the Type Selector. The circle is divided in half by a line. and click to place her on the sidewalk. 43 Click OK twice. and second line inside the circle indicates the person’s line of sight. click Duplicate. select Rotate after placement. 39 Select the sidewalk. 50 Click to place Alex on the sidewalk. enter Sidewalk. as it is currently a floor element. select M_RPC Male: Alex. near Column E5. 52 Move the cursor toward the column. and specify a point to rotate him so he is facing the column. RPC people are represented by a circle. select M_RPC Female: Cathy. Place 2 people on the sidewalk 46 Zoom to the lower right corner of the sidewalk. click Edit/New. create a new type for the sidewalk element. 47 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 51 Move the cursor so the rotation line displays along Alex’s line of sight and specify a point. In plan view. 40 In the Element Properties dialog. under Constraints.Next. 42 In the Name dialog. click Component. 48 In the Type Selector.

and place it in the corner of the scene as shown. double-click West. select M_RPC Beetle. 98 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . and place it along the sidewalk behind him. enter -300 mm. click Camera. click the car. 56 Press the spacebar to rotate it until it is facing away from Alex. 63 Select and drag both Cathy and Alex above the sidewalk. 58 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 61 In the Project Browser. 60 In the Element Properties dialog. Next. 55 In the Type Selector. 57 Press ESC. you ensure that the components remain on the same plane as the host. 62 Zoom in to the area where Alex and Cathy are standing. for Offset. you select the sidewalk as a host for both the Alex and Cathy RPC components. and click OK. click Pick Host.54 Rotate Cathy so she is facing Alex. under Elevations. and click . and on the Options Bar. When you select a host for a component. 64 Select Cathy. under Constraints. 59 In the camera view (3D View 1).

View the front of the building 70 In the Project Browser. 68 Select and move both Cathy and Alex until they are standing on the sidewalk. you remove the multi-level stairs and stairwell that you created in a previous exercise from the building. and replace them with a service core. pick the sidewalk as the host for the car. 67 Click the sidewalk. 69 Using the same method. Linking a Service Core to the Building Project In this exercise. double-click To Building. 71 Proceed to the next exercise. and on the Options Bar. “Linking a Service Core to the Building Project” on page 99. 66 Select Alex. Linking a Service Core to the Building Project | 99 .65 Click the sidewalk. under 3D Views. both Cathy and Alex will move with it. If the sidewalk changes height. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. click Pick Host.

After the service core is linked to your project. Notice that there is no longer a stairwell in the building. 2 Zoom in to the stairwell. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 100 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model .rvt. you delete the entire stairwell. so it will cut through the floors of the building. click Training Files. 4 On the View toolbar. under Floor Plans. press SHIFT. walls. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. . and shaft opening.The service core is contained in an external file that you link to your current project. and spin the building. and press DELETE. By deleting the stairwell from the 06 Roof. click 5 On the View toolbar. Remove the stairwell from the building model 1 On the Project Browser. double-click 06 Roof. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_host_style_railings. 3 Select the entire stairwell. including the stairs. you must cut another shaft opening around it. click .

12 Specify a point to place it between grid lines B-D. click (Align). 14 Select the top horizontal floor line. 11 Click Open. 8 In the left pane of the Add Link dialog. You cannot constrain elements in the current project to elements in linked models.rvt. Select Cursor at center. double-click 01 Entry Level. under Positioning: ■ ■ Select Manually place.Link a new service core into the building model 6 In the Project Browser. 7 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Revit. select m_RRB_link. 10 At the bottom of the dialog. 9 In the Metric folder. 13 On the Tools toolbar. The building service core displays in your drawing. Linking a Service Core to the Building Project | 101 . Do not click the lock to constrain the core and floor. and then select the top horizontal core wall. click Training Files. under Floor Plans.

click Finish Sketch. click 24 On the View toolbar. 102 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 17 On the Options Bar. click . 19 Trace the outer edges of the core elements to sketch the service core as shown: 20 On the Design Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening. 21 Select the shaft opening and click 22 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ .Create a shaft opening for the service core 15 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. enter 300 mm. click Lines. select Chain. View the service core in the building model 23 On the View toolbar. Under Constraints. 18 On the Options Bar. click . For Top Constraint. select Up to level: 06 Roof. Click OK. for Base Offset.

rvt. This is the railing that you want to add to your model. “Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings” on page 103. 3 In the new project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. where it is hosted within a railing family. you cut away a portion of the floor on the 02 Level of the building. expand Renderings. click Training Files. Open a different project and view a rendering of the building lounge 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. The rendering displays. press SHIFT. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. You copy the railing type into your project from another project. in the Project Browser. 2 In the left pane of the dialog. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 103 . You can see that the service core cuts through the floors of the building. 25 Proceed to the final exercise. and double-click Lounge Perspective. Notice the glass railing in the foreground. After you modify it. and spin the building to get a better view of the core. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings In this exercise. and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings_. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. you add glass railings around the floor edges.. and open Metric\m_Conference.

13 On the Options Bar. click (Split). click OK. press and hold CTRL.Copy the railing types into the retail building project 4 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 15 On the Design Bar. 10 Close the warning dialog that displays.rvt. The floor sketch displays. 8 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. and click to split the floor. and drag to the left until it intersects with grid line B. 6 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. click Modify. 5 Expand Railing. 14 Select the bottom horizontal floor 700 mm to the left of grid line C. and select Glass. 9 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 17 Select the right endpoint of the floor where you split it. and drag it to the right until it intersects with grid line D. Handrail only. 16 Select the left endpoint of the floor where you split it. and expand Railings. expand Families. click Edit. 104 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . and on the Options Bar. 12 Select the floor. 7 Click Window menu ➤ Revit Retail Building.rvt or m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings. and Parapet. double-click 02 Level. Modify the 02 Level floor 11 In the Project Browser.

24 On the Tools toolbar. and click the lock to lock the alignment. 23 Complete the sketch as shown. 26 Select grid line D. click Lines. move the cursor vertically 1500 mm. click . and lock the alignment. 19 Select the left endpoint of the floor. and click the lock to lock the alignment. 20 Move the cursor horizontally to the right 1500 mm and click to draw another line. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 105 . 25 Select grid line B. and click to draw another line. select the left vertical sketch line along grid line B. select the right vertical sketch line along grid line D. 27 On the Tools toolbar. 21 Sketch the same lines in the opposite direction on the right side of the floor sketch. and click to place it. 22 Select the endpoint of the right horizontal line that you just sketched. 28 Align the horizontal sketch lines with each other as shown.18 On the Design Bar. click (Align). move the cursor vertically until the line is 1500 mm long.

38 Dimension the railing sketch to the edge of the floor and lock the dimension. and dimension the floor sketch lines as shown. click Finish Sketch.rvt project.29 On the Design Bar. Lock the dimensions. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. 37 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. select Glass. 33 On the Design Bar. enter 100 mm. click Railing. and click OK. This is the railing type that you copied from the Conference. 36 Select the floor lines to sketch the railing around the inside of the floor line as shown. click Yes to attach the top of the walls on 01 Entry Level to the bottom of the 02 Level floor. 35 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click . 30 On the Design Bar. For Offset. Add railings around the floor 32 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Dimension. 106 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 31 In the Revit dialog. for Type. click Railing Properties.

click Camera. 42 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics ➤ Hidden Line. 41 Place the camera and camera target as shown. Click Model Graphics ➤ Shading with Edges. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 107 . A new 3D view of the interior of the 02 Level displays. You can view the railing that you just added. View the floor and railings 40 On the View tab of the Design Bar.39 Click Finish Sketch.

43 Close all project drawings. 108 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model .■ Click Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region to hide the frame around the view.

a Kansas City-based architectural firm for providing their Freighthouse Flats renovation project to use for the tutorial datasets in this section.Documenting Your Projects 3 In this section of the tutorials. and a roof garden. Located in Kansas City’s popular Crossroads Arts District. the existing building shell will be maintained and restored. the Freighthouse Flats project is an exciting renovation of an historic three-story warehouse into new urban luxury loft living spaces. exterior fire stairs. BNIM Architects was selected to convert the existing building into a 22-unit condominium featuring concrete floors. The additional 4th floor and non-historic north facade will be modernized to include a 4th floor penthouse. balconies. We wish to thank BNIM Architects. lofty ceilings. As the building is slated to receive historic tax credits. and north facing balconies for the 2nd and 3rd floor units. you learn to create construction documentation in Revit Architecture 2008. 109 .

NOTE For training purposes. 110 | Chapter 3 Documenting Your Projects . slight modifications to the building design have been made.

elevation. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Create new project views. you begin the construction documentation for the Freighthouse Flats project. and detail views Modify the appearance of tags and other annotation on plans Set visibility and graphic controls in views to produce different presentation effects Create projects sheets that contain project views ■ 111 .Adding Views and Sheets to a Project 3 In this tutorial. section. including plan.

and how to create views from callouts that you place in other views. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. you create new plan views of the building model by copying existing views and then modifying the copied views. You duplicate the Level 1 and Level 2 floor plans to create Level 1 and Level 2 furniture plans.Creating Views In this lesson. Level 1 Furniture Plan created from the Level 1 floor plan Vicinity Plan created from the Site plan Dataset ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 112 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . You also duplicate the project site plan to create a vicinity plan. You learn how to create new views from existing views. you learn how to create views from a building model. how to create section and elevation views.

and click OK. under Floor Plans. Duplicating Plan Views | 113 . and right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. enter Level 2 Furniture Plan. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 furniture plan 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 4 In the Project Browser.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. Use an alternate method of view duplication to create a Level 2 furniture plan 5 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views. right-click Copy of Level 2 ➤ Rename. select Level 2. 7 In the Project Browser. 6 Click View menu ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. expand Floor Plans. double-click Level 2 Furniture Plan. click Training Files.rvt. 2 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Level 1 ➤ Rename. and click OK. 8 In the Rename View dialog. under Floor Plans. 9 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan.

enter Vicinity Plan. right-click Copy of Site ➤ Rename. Next. 12 In the Rename View dialog. 15 Select the body of the south elevation marker. 13 In the Project Browser. 14 On the View Control Bar. click the current scale. and click OK. under Floor Plans. hide the display of the elevation markers in the view. 11 Under Floor Plans. and click 1: 1000.Duplicate a view and change the scale as required 10 In the Project Browser. double-click Vicinity Plan. 114 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . right-click Site ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.

rvt. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. 18 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. All of the elevation markers on the plan are hidden.16 Right-click. you create an additional section and elevation view of the building model. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Creating Elevation and Section Views In this exercise. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 115 .

select1:100.South East elevation view Section view Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. 3 In the Type Selector. for Scale. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. 5 Specify a point in the drawing in front of the angular wall to place an elevation marker.rvt. double-click Level 1. 116 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . NOTE Elevation markers are context sensitive and will automatically try to align parallel to model geometry. select Elevation: Building Elevation. 4 On the Options Bar. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Elevation. under Floor Plans. Add an elevation marker to the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser.

click Modify. right-click Elevation 1-a ➤ Rename. and select the head of the elevation marker that you just placed. 10 In the Rename View dialog. click Modify. enter South East. 7 Select and move the upper horizontal line of the elevation until it extends past the upper-left corner of the building. 11 In the Project Browser. 8 On the Design Bar. under Elevations.Modify the elevation extents 6 On the Design Bar. and click OK. under Elevations (Building Elevation). double-click South East. Rename and view the new elevation 9 In the Project Browser. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 117 .

■ Move the cursor down. for Scale. and specify the section line endpoint between the endpoints of grid lines 2 and 3. 15 On the Options Bar. under Views (all). click Section. Modify the section line 17 Click the blue arrows below the section line head to reverse the direction in which the section is cut through the building. 14 In the Type Selector. select 1:100. select Section: Building Section. 118 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 13 On the View tab of the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. 16 Draw a section line through the building: ■ Specify a point above the top wall of the building between grid lines 2 and 3.Draw a section line on the Level 1 floor plan 12 In the Project Browser. and double-click Level 1.

18 Select the blue triangular grips on the left side of the section extents. Click the midpoint of the section line. and click to place it. and move them to just outside of the left side of the building. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 119 . click Split Segment. 19 Click the blue arrows below the section tail twice to cycle through the section tail options and add a section head to the section line endpoint. 20 Add a jog to the section line: ■ ■ On the Options Bar. drag it to the right until it cuts through the stair.

click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. and drag the top segment of gridline F to the right. 24 Select gridline F. expand Sections (Building Section). and double-click Section 1. 23 On the View Control Bar. 120 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Modify. View the new section 22 In the Project Browser.21 On the Design Bar. select the blue break mark that displays under the grid bubble.

you create new views: an enlarged stair plan view and a detail view. click Modify. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. you draw a callout around the geometry in another view to specify the contents of the each new callout view.rvt. Creating Callout Views | 121 . Stair callout on the Level 1 floor plan Resulting callout view .Enlarged Stair Plan Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. To create each view.25 On the Design Bar.

6 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. select 1:50. 3 In the Type Selector.Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. ■ Move the cursor to the lower-left of the stair. click Callout. select Floor Plan. and move it to the left side of the callout boundary. Select the grip on the leader line that is closest to the callout head. 122 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Modify. 4 On the Options Bar. 5 Draw the callout around the large stair in the center of the plan: ■ Specify a point to the upper-right of the stair. and specify a point to complete the callout. for Scale. and select the callout boundary. under Floor Plans.

■ Select the middle grip. The Enlarged Stair Plan view displays. enter Enlarged Stair Plan. 7 On the Design Bar. click Modify. and drag it down slightly to create a jog in the leader line. right-click Callout of Level 1 ➤ Rename. and click OK. Open the callout view 10 Double-click the callout head. Creating Callout Views | 123 . 8 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 9 In the Rename View dialog.

and specify a point to the left and below the roof overhang. 12 On the View tab of the Design Bar. ■ Move the cursor diagonally down. click Callout. for Scale. 14 On the Options Bar.Create a detail view callout 11 In the Project Browser. select 1:50. 15 Create the callout: ■ Zoom in to the upper-left corner of the building. under Sections (Building Sections). 124 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . double-click Section 1. 13 In the Type Selector. and specify a point above and to the right of the roof overhang. select Detail View: Detail.

17 In the Project Browser. 18 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. under Detail Views (Details). Open the detail callout view 19 In the Project Browser. and right-click Detail 0 ➤ Rename. enter Roof Overhang Detail. Creating Callout Views | 125 . double-click Roof Overhang Detail.16 Modify the callout leader as shown. expand Detail Views (Details).

you modify the appearance of tags in a view so that they conform to office CAD standards. You change the appearance of the section mark head. the elevation markers.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. and the callout head and boundary that you placed in previous exercises. Modifying View Tag Appearance In this exercise. Existing stair callout head and boundary 126 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

Modifying View Tag Appearance | 127 . Section Tail – Filled. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. Modify the line weight of the section line and mark 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. select Custom-Section Head. clear any others. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK.rvt. and click 11 In the Element Properties dialog. select the current project. . select the section line. and click Open. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New.Custom. Section Tail . click Duplicate. Modify the section mark head 1 In the Project Browser. 10 On the floor plan. The Custom-Section Head family is now loaded in the project.Modified stair callout head and boundary Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. 8 In the Name dialog. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. and can be applied to the section line. select Section Head . 4 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 1. 15 Under Category. click the Annotation Objects tab. The new section mark head that you want to apply to either endpoint of the section line displays. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Section Tags. select Custom-Section Head: Section Head – Open. for Section Head. and click OK twice.Filled. open Metric\Families\Annotations.rfa. scroll to Section Line. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 12 For Section Tag. 5 In the Load into Projects dialog. click Load into Project. enter Section Head – Custom. click Training Files. and click OK. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. under Floor Plans. and click OK.

22 In the Name dialog. and on the Options Bar. 19 Click OK. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Click OK.5mm Square. 17 Under Category. Modify the shape and weight of the elevation markers 20 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Elevation Tags. For Dimensions ➤ Width. and click Open. under Graphics: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Shape. 23 In the Type Properties dialog.5 mm. notice the square elevation markers that display. click Training Files.5mm Square. The new callout head that you want to apply to the callout displays. On the floor plan. select 3. click Load into Project. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. select Custom-Callout Head. 24 Select an elevation marker in the drawing. For Line Weight. enter 12. and select 3. for Elevation Tag.rfa. On the floor plan. Modify the callout head 28 Click File menu ➤ Open. scroll to Section Marks. and select 2. 30 On the Design Bar. 128 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 26 In the Type Properties dialog. 32 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Callout Tags. select Square. 18 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field.16 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. click Edit/New. enter 12. clear all others. and click OK. click Duplicate. notice the updated section marks that display at each endpoint of the section line. open Metric\Families\Annotations. click 25 In the Element Properties dialog. 27 Click OK twice. 31 In the Load into Projects dialog. select the current project. select 12. and click OK. .

select Custom – Callout Head: Callout Head. Modifying View Tag Appearance | 129 . 42 In the Objects Styles dialog. 40 Press ESC. 43 Under Category. 44 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. 34 In the Name dialog. expand Callout Boundary. 47 Select Callout Leader Line. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. select . 49 Click OK. Click OK. click Duplicate. 35 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Callout Head. 46 Under Category. click 37 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. enter 6 mm. enter . and select 7. select Dash. Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radiusand click OK. . Modify the callout boundary 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 48 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. The custom callout head displays on the floor plan. click the Annotation Objects tab. 39 Click OK twice.33 In the Type Properties dialog. and on the Options Bar. 45 For Line Pattern. The new callout boundary displays on the floor plan. scroll down to Callout Boundary. select the callout. 36 In the drawing. and select 4. For Corner Radius. for Callout Tag.

View templates provide and easy way to transfer visibility settings to multiple drawings. You learn to create view templates. filters. under Elevations. Creating a View Template In this exercise. 2 Select the outer crop region that displays around the view. you create a view template containing specific presentation quality visibility settings. and features blue triangular grips and break marks. view regions.rvt. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG. you create presentation views that feature elevations of the building. masking regions. In the left pane of the Open dialog. To accomplish this. and apply it to multiple elevation views. Presentation view Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and visual overrides. you learn how to control the visibility and graphic characteristics of elements in views. Set a crop region for the view 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click East. click Training Files. The crop region displays as red.50 Click File menu ➤ Save. 130 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views In this lesson.

7 In the Element Properties dialog.3 Select and move the blue triangular grips to resize the crop region as shown. 11 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 4 On the Design Bar. 6 On the Project Browser. under Extents. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. right-click East. clear Entourage. clear Crop Region Visible. 12 Click the Annotation Categories tab. click Zoom to Fit. Create and apply a view template to an elevation drawing 9 On the View Control bar. clear: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Callouts Elevations Grids Levels Sections Creating a View Template | 131 . 8 Click OK. 10 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 5 On the View Toolbar. and click Properties. under Elevations. 13 Under Visibility. click Modify to hide the crop region grips and display it as black. under Visibility.

132 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . grids. and click Apply View Template. right-click North. and click OK. 19 In the Project Browser. under Elevations. click Apply. double-click North. 15 On the View Control bar. 18 In the View Templates dialog. The settings in the view template create a presentation-quality elevation view. under Elevations. click OK.14 Click OK. 20 In the Project Browser. select Black and White Presentation Elevation. elevation markers. and click OK. right-click East. 17 In the New View Template dialog. 21 In the Select View Template dialog. 16 In the Project Browser. and click Create View Template From View. click Shadows Off ➤ Shadows On. and section lines are now hidden in the view. enter Black and White Presentation Elevation. levels. Callouts.

for Level. Adjust the view range of the Penthouse plan 1 In the Project Browser. View Range and Plan Regions | 133 . double-click Penthouse. View Range and Plan Regions In this exercise. 2 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 23 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. 4 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. and the exterior area on the south side of the building. click Edit.22 Click File menu ➤ Save As. select Level Below (Level 4). Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. you modify the view range and create view plan regions to adjust the display of elements in the building Penthouse and Roof Plan. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. for Bottom. You want to display the exterior roof terraces from Level 4 on the penthouse and roof plan. select Level Below (Level 4). under Extents. NOTE The Penthouse plan now shows the level below to provide additional context to the view.rvt.rvt. and click Properties. select Penthouse. right-click. for View Range. Under View Depth. as this structure has not yet been documented in any of the views. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. Click OK twice.

and click Properties. click Edit. 6 In the Project Browser.Adjust the view range of the Roof plan 5 In the Project Browser. for View Range. select Level 4. select Roof Plan. for Bottom. 134 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 8 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. Click OK twice. for Level. select Level 4. double-click Roof Plan. right-click. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. Under View Depth. under Floor Plans. under Extents.

select Unlimited. select the left endpoint of the outer wall. for Level. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. Under View Depth. NOTE A Plan Region allows you to modify the view range of a specified area defined by the extents of the Plan Region.Create a plan region to show exterior space on the south side of the building 9 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Move you cursor diagonally. Click OK twice. 15 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. 13 On the Design Bar. under Extents. 10 On the Design Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. click Region Property. for View Range. click 12 Sketch a plan region: ■ ■ (Rectangle). for Bottom. click Modify. click Finish Sketch. View Range and Plan Regions | 135 . click Plan Region. select Unlimited. click Edit. and select the endpoint the gridline shown below. 11 On the Options Bar. 17 On the Design Bar. click Lines. In the left corner of the building.

6 In the Filter Name dialog. enter Rated Walls. 5 In the Filters dialog. After you apply the filter. 1 In the Project Browser. You use a filter to quickly apply visual changes to the walls based on defined parameters. 4 At the bottom of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 7 In the Filters dialog. you visually audit the drawing to make sure the fire-rated walls are placed correctly. click (New). Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. expand Floor Plans. and click OK. select Walls. and double-click Level 1.rvt. under Views (all). 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.18 Click File menu ➤ Save. click the Filters tab. 8 Under Filter Rules: ■ For Filter by. the fire rating of the walls. select Fire Rating. Using Filters to Control Visibility In this exercise. the fire-rated walls on the floor plan display with a solid red fill. under Filters. under Categories. 136 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Edit/New. in this case.

19 Remove the filter: ■ ■ Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click Remove. 13 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. On the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog. apply the red solid fill override to Cut Patterns as well. click OK. Enter Hr. and click OK. under Projection/Surface. click Override under Patterns. Masking Portions of a View In this exercise. for Rated Walls. and click OK. 11 Select Rated Walls. To accomplish this. The fire-rated walls now display without the solid red fill. click Add. and click OK. Masking Portions of a View | 137 . 14 In the Color dialog. 9 Click OK. you obscure or ''wipe out'' geometry in portions of a view. 18 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 15 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. you use masking regions that you sketch over the areas that you want to hide. under Basic colors. select Solid Fill. 17 Using the same method. for Pattern. 12 On the Filter tab.■ ■ Select contains. but the overrides associated with the filter must be reapplied as well. for Color. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. click No Override. 16 Click OK. select the red color. The Rated Walls filter can be reapplied to the drawing at any time. 10 On the Filter tab.

under Floor Plans. 2 Select Copy of Level 1. and click Rename. as shown. 138 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 6 Modify the crop region to get close to the desired view at the bottom left. right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.rvt. and click OK. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. click Show Crop Region. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 4 On the View Control Bar. enter Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. 5 On the View menu. right-click.Masking regions sketched over the upper corners of a view Unit plan view with upper corners masked Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. 1 In the Project Browser.

click Masking Region.7 On the View menu. and adjust the view again until it displays as shown. Masking Portions of a View | 139 . 8 Select the crop region. 9 On the View Control Bar. NOTE This specifies the line type for the border of the masking region. 12 On the Options Bar. click (Rectangle). 11 In the Type Selector. Use a masking region to hide additional model geometry that does not need to be shown 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 13 Sketch 2 masking regions as shown. select Invisible lines. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region.

right-click Unit 18 Plan .rvt.Level 1. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. 1 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing.14 On the Design Bar. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. 15 View the effects of the masking regions on the floor plan. under Floor Plans. You create poche for the walls and you hide and modify the display of certain elements on the presentation plan. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. click Finish Sketch. 140 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Working with Visual Overrides In this exercise. you create a presentation plan of one of the residential units on the Level 1 floor plan. and apply different visual overrides to create presentation effects.

click No Override. click in the Patterns field. 11 Click OK twice. 7 Under Cut. under Visibility. 4 On the View Control Bar. select Solid fill. and click Rename. and click 1: 50. for Pattern.NOTE Duplicate with Detailing is selected so that the masking regions are retained in the new view. 2 Select the Copy of Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. select Walls. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. Create poche for walls 5 Select the diagonal bottom wall. 6 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. for Color. and click OK. Working with Visual Overrides | 141 . click black. right-click. 8 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 3 In the Rename View dialog. click the current scale. and click Override. 10 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. under Pattern Overrides. and click OK. enter Presentation Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. right-click. 9 On the left side of the Color dialog.

under Visibility. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 16 Under Visibility. clear Grids. 15 Click the Annotation Categories tab. 142 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Modify. 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click OK.Set the visibility and graphics of other categories in the view. 12 On the Design Bar. Hide elements in the view by category 17 Select the lamp on the table on the floor plan as shown. clear Floors.

and click Hide in View ➤ Category. 19 Select 1 of the chairs around the long table on the floor plan as shown. Working with Visual Overrides | 143 .18 Right-click.

21 Under Projection/Surface. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. and click OK twice. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element.20 Right-click. right-click. 144 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 29 In the Color dialog. for Pattern. 22 In the Line Graphics dialog. 28 For Color. click By Category Override. select Dash. click a purple color. select a bright green color. click No Override. for Color. under Lines. and click OK. select the sofa. the Visibility/Graphics dialog opens to the category of the object (Furniture) selected by default. By using the previous method to make the selection. 23 In the Color dialog. click Override. Modify visibility and graphics by element 26 On the floor plan. 27 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog. click Projection Lines. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. 25 Click OK twice.

right-click. click . The hidden crop region is also revealed. Working with Visual Overrides | 145 . Reveal hidden elements in a view 31 On the View Control Bar. and click Unhide in view ➤ Category. 33 On the View Control Bar. 32 Select one of the lamps. The lighting fixtures and grid lines that you hid previously display in a dark red color. click Modify.30 On the Design Bar. click .

34 Click File menu ➤ Save. how to add views to the sheets.rvt. Creating Drawing Sheets In this exercise. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. you learn how to create sheets within a Revit Architecture project. TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar. and how to make changes to the building model from a view on a sheet. you create project drawing sheets that report the project information in the sheet titleblocks. and click View. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select A0 metric. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. and click OK. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats. Create a project sheet 1 On View tab of the Design Bar. 146 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Sheet.Creating Sheets. right-click.

The text fields in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters with the appropriate text fields.Unnamed. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name A102 . and select the title block. For Sheet Name. under Identity Data: ■ ■ (Properties). The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. on the Options Bar. For Sheet Number. Change the sheet name and number 4 On the Design Bar. Creating Drawing Sheets | 147 . 5 When the title block highlights. click Modify. enter Site Plan. enter A101.A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. click 6 In the Element Properties dialog. expand Sheets (all). 3 In the Project Browser. NOTE The vertical time and date stamp in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved.

The new project information displays in the titleblock. enter J. enter For Approval. enter Freighthouse Flats.■ Click OK. Display additional project information in the sheet title block 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. 2007. 14 Click OK. For Client Name. Site Plan displays in the title block as the sheet name and is appended to the sheet name in the Project Browser. enter 2007-1. under Other. 11 In the Edit Text dialog. enter 15 May. 148 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . For Project Status. enter the following address: ■ ■ 123 Main Street Anytown. click Edit. click Modify. Smith. For Project Number. The Sheet Number has been updated to display A101. 7 On the Design Bar. MA 12345 12 Click OK. for Project Address. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. For Project Name. continue to add project information: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 Zoom in to the lower-right corner of the title block.

Elevations A107 . you add views to these sheets. under Sheets (all). Adding Views to Sheets | 149 .rvt. and click Rename. 18 In the Sheet Title dialog. right-click. and click OK. for Name. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. Create additional sheets 19 Using the same method as you did in the previous steps.Floor Plan.Sections A108 .Create a floor plan sheet 15 In the Project Browser. 17 In the Project Browser.Elevations A105 . right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save As. under Floor Plans. create the following new project sheets: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A103 . and click OK.Stairs In the following exercise. click Modify.Elevations A106 . 2 In the Project Browser. 21 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. double-click A102 . Adding Views to Sheets In this exercise. enter Floor Plan. 4 On the Design Bar. select the new sheet name. select A0 metric. and drag it to the sheet. 16 In the Select a Titleblock dialog.rvt. select Level 1. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. Drag the Level 1 floor plan onto a sheet to create a floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. The border of the view displays as red to indicate that you can reposition it on the sheet. you add views to the sheets that you created in the previous exercise. 3 Move the cursor to position the lower-right corner of the view in the lower-right corner of the sheet. and click to place the view. and click Save.Layout Plan A104 .

and click to place it.Elevations. Add elevation views to the A104-Elevation sheet 5 In the Project Browser. align it with the East elevation. 150 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . under Elevations (Building Elevation). and click to place it. 8 On the Design Bar. 6 In the Project Browser. drag East to the upper-right corner of the sheet. click Modify. under Sheets (all). double-click A104 .The red border around the view no longer displays. 7 Drag the North elevation to the lower-right corner of the sheet.

and click to place it. drag Building Section to the upper-right corner of the sheet. click Modify. . 15 Drag the view to reposition it next to the Building Section view. 12 On the Design Bar. Adding Views to Sheets | 151 .Add the Building Section view to the A107-Sections sheet 9 In the Project Browser. Notice the title bar also needs to be resized. select 1:5. and use the blue endpoint grips to resize it so that it spans the length of the view. under Sheets (all). 16 Select title bar. and click OK. and click to place it. click 14 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click A107 . 10 Under Sections (Building Sections). and on the Options Bar.Sections. for View Scale. drag Roof Overhang Detail to the left of the Building Section view on the sheet. 11 Under Detail Views (Detail). Change the scale of the detail view 13 Select the Roof Overhang Detail on the sheet.

19 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 152 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . double-click Level 1. move the cursor over it. and press TAB until it highlights. View updated annotation on referenced views 20 In the Project Browser. double-click A108 . under Sheets (all).NOTE If you find it difficult to select the left grip on the title bar. zoom in to the grip. Notice that the callout tag has been automatically updated to reference the correct sheet. Create a sheet with stair and stair detail views 17 In the Project Browser. 21 Zoom to the stair callout. and click to place it. 18 Under Floor Plans. drag Enlarged Stair Plan to the upper-right corner of the sheet. under Floor Plans.Stairs.

you must first activate the view on the sheet. you learn how to modify a building model directly from the drawing sheets that you created from its views. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View | 153 .22 Zoom in to the section line heads and the east and north elevation markers. under Sheets (all). Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. and then make changes and deactivate the view. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. double-click A107 . Change the roof elevation 1 In the Project Browser. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. and notice they also reference the correct sheet numbers.Sections.rvt. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View In this exercise. In order to do this.

under Elevations (Building Elevation). 5 On the Design Bar. 7 In the Project Browser. 154 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Notice that the Roof Plan elevation has been updated. 6 Right-click. and click Activate View.2 Select the building section view. zoom in to the name and elevation of the level. and press ENTER. click Modify. right-click. 3 At the right end of the Roof level line. and click Deactivate View. 4 Double-click the Roof elevation height. enter 16700 mm. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. double-click North.

you create a perspective view of the building and place it on the sheet. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1. For Sheet Name. enter T. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. enter Title Sheet. The camera view displays. select the new sheet name. Create a new sheet 1 In the Project Browser. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 155 . After you create the sheet. select A0 metric. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. You modify the view to hide the view title. and click OK. 3 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Sheet Number. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. right-click. click Camera.rvt. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. Click OK. as it is not necessary to display it on the title sheet. Create a view of the building to place on the title sheet 5 In the Project Browser.Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet In this exercise. 7 Place the camera as shown. you create a title sheet for your drawing set. and click Properties. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson.

click 9 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . drag 3D View 1 onto the sheet. Under Extents. 10 Select the crop region and adjust the view to fit the building. enter100000 mm. 11 On the View Control Bar. enter 1500 mm. Under Camera. For Far Clip Offset. under Sheets (all). click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. double-click T . For Target Elevation.8 On the Options Bar. 14 Under 3D Views. select Far Clip Active. Click OK.Title Sheet. 12 On the View Control Bar. for Eye Elevation. 13 In the Project Browser. 156 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click to place it in the center of the sheet. click Shadows off ➤ Shadows on. enter 18000 mm.

for Show title. select Scale (locked proportions). and click OK. click Modify. click Duplicate. under Graphics. click Size. and on the Options Bar. 25 On the Design Bar. for Height. . Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 157 . click Edit/New.15 With the view selected. 17 Reposition the view on the title sheet. enter Viewport/no title mark. 24 Click OK twice. on the Options Bar. enter 635 mm. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. 22 In the Name dialog. Under Model Crop Size. Click Apply. click 20 In the Element Properties dialog. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. and then click OK. The title bar no longer displays on the sheet. 19 Select the view on the sheet. 16 In the Crop Region dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. Remove the title bar on the view 18 On the Design Bar. click Modify. select No.

158 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and close the exercise file.26 Click File menu ➤ Save.

159 . in your Revit Architecture 2008 projects. you learn how to tag rooms and other components of floor plans.Tagging and Scheduling 4 In this tutorial. You also learn to create different types of schedules. such as doors and windows. such as room and window schedules.

The Room command with the Tag on placement option selected allows you to place and tag rooms with one command. Because of the open style floor plan. you need to create room separation lines to define the rooms to be tagged. you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit Architecture.Tagging Objects In this lesson. 160 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling .rvt. NOTE If the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar is not active. 3 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. and click Room and Area. Add room separations 1 In the Project Browser. click Room Separation. Adding room separation lines breaks up an open space to make it easier to add rooms. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Level 1. such as furniture Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms In this exercise. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects. expand Floor Plans. click Training Files. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . you sequentially place and tag the rooms on the floor plan. 2 Zoom in to the upper area of the floor plan. right-click in the Design Bar. You learn how to ■ ■ ■ ■ Sequentially tag rooms on a floor plan Tag doors and windows Modify tag placement and mark text Tag other objects.

as shown: 6 Use the same method to create a horizontal separation above the stair to divide the dining area from the living area. as shown: 5 Use the same method to create a vertical separation to divide the kitchen from the entry area on the right.4 Click the endpoint of the short horizontal wall on the left. Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 161 . move the cursor to the right. and click the opposite wall to create a horizontal room separation dividing the kitchen from the dining area (top area of the drawing).

click Modify. 11 In the Tags dialog. The room tag number displays in blue. click OK. 10 In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Tag on placement is selected. click Training Files.7 On the Design Bar. and click to place the room and tag. and select the room tag. 162 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . indicating that it can be edited. Tag rooms sequentially 12 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. 14 Move the cursor to the room at the upper right of the plan view. The crosshair graphic represents the room area being tagged. 13 On the Options Bar. click Room. 15 On the Design Bar.rfa. 9 In the Tags dialog. and the rectangle contains the room tag. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Room Tag. click Load. Load room tag annotation family 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags.

Align the tags by moving the cursor until a dashed green line displays between the placed tag and the one that displays at the tip of the cursor. ■ Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 163 . 18 On the Design Bar. click Modify. and press ENTER. click Room. click it. Move the cursor into the room to the left of the one previously tagged. 19 Place another room and tag: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. Click to place the new room and tag. and press ENTER.16 Zoom in on the tag number. enter U18-1. enter Entry. 17 Click the room text label.

and edit the tags as shown (Toilet. Sequential letters are also supported. 22 Use the same method to place rooms and tags. and press ENTER. and Living): Hide the room separations 23 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. enter Kitchen.NOTE The second tag that you place displays the sequential number U18-2. 164 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . 20 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 21 Click the room text label. Dining.

28 On the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. click Room Tag. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and moving clockwise. 30 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. Tagging Doors and Windows | 165 . Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress.Level 2. Tag rooms on upper level 25 In the Project Browser. in the Project Browser. Model Categories tab.rvt. 27 Starting with the Balcony (area near the stair). You learn how to add tags to the floor plan and how to simultaneously tag multiple untagged doors and windows. but they need to be tagged. expand Lines. The rooms are already placed. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . Tag Level 1 doors 1 If necessary.rvt. double-click Unit 18 Plan . and click OK. Tagging Doors and Windows In this exercise.24 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. click to place a room tag in each of the 5 rooms.Level 1. click Modify. 26 On the Design Bar. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. under Floor Plans. clear Room Separation. you learn how to place door and window tags.

clear Leader. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. 6 Click the door tag for the entry door. and on the Options Bar.2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Tag ➤ By Category. click (Properties). enter U18-2. 166 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . 3 On the Options Bar. enter U18-1. and press ENTER. under Identify Data. for Mark. click Modify. 4 Select 5 doors in the upper area of the floor plan: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Entry door Kitchen pantry door Pocket door in toilet Closet door in dining room Living room door 5 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 7 Select the kitchen pantry door to the left.

click Tag All Not Tagged. Tag Level 2 doors 12 In the Project Browser. and click OK.Level 2. and drag it down to center it in the doorway.9 Using one of the methods you just learned. Tagging Doors and Windows | 167 . 10 Select the tag for the pocket door on the right. double-click Unit 18 Plan . under Category. 11 Select the tag for the closet door and move it to the right of the door. 14 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. 13 On the Design Bar. rename the other 3 door tags to match the corresponding room tags. select Door Tags.

19 In the Tags dialog.rfa. 21 Click OK. 18 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. expand Floor Plans. 23 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. 16 Edit the numbers of the door tags as shown: Place window tags 17 In the Project Browser. click Tag All Not Tagged. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag. and click OK. click Load. click Training Files. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select Window. 20 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and double-click Level 1.15 Move the door tags to center them in the doorway. 168 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling .

and modify the tag placement and display. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. double-click Level 2. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.rfa.Level 1. you learn how to tag furniture objects. select Leader. 27 On the Design Bar. 7 Select each of the chairs and the table to place tags. click Zoom To Fit to see the entire drawing. and double-click Unit 18 Plan .24 Zoom to the lower-right area of the drawing to view the window tags. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. 4 Select a dining room chair. and click OK. Zoom flyout. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save. 25 Under Floor Plans. Tagging Other Objects | 169 . 28 Select Window Tags. click Yes to load a tag. Window tags are placed in the Level 2 plan view. Add furniture tags 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. expand Floor Plans. Tagging Other Objects In this exercise. click Tag All Not Tagged. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Furniture Tag. 3 On the Options Bar. 5 At the confirmation prompt. click Tag ➤ By Category. 26 On the View toolbar.

14 Click Modify. Notice that the chair and table tags overlap. and drag it up to form an angled leader. 15 Select the tag for the table (TBL-1). modify the position of the chair tags to move them closer to the chairs. 170 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . and on the Options Bar.8 Select the furniture in the living room. Modify tag placement 10 Zoom to the dining table. 11 Select the tag for the table. and drag it above the chair tag. 9 Click Modify. 12 Click the elbow control. 13 Optionally. clear Leader.

18 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click Modify. under Floor Plans. click (Filter Selection). Tagging Other Objects | 171 . click Tag All Not Tagged.16 Drag the table tag to the center of the table. select M_Furniture tag : Standard. All furniture in the floor plan is tagged. double-click Unit 18 Plan .Level 2. and on the Design Bar. Tag furniture on Level 2 17 In the Project Browser. 20 On the Options Bar. Change tag style 19 Draw a selection box around the top area of the drawing to select the furniture.

select Furniture Tags. you learn to add schedules. 22 In the Type Selector. click Check None. 172 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. Schedule keys allow you to define common items that can be used by multiple objects within a schedule. you create a window schedule for the building model shown below. and click Modify. Creating a Window Schedule In this exercise. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams In this lesson. select Furniture Tag: Boxed. and click OK.21 In the Filter dialog. You also learn to add schedule keys to a project by creating a room schedule and room color diagram.

Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule.rvt. you change the window instance schedule to a type schedule. click Training Files. in which windows are listed by window type. In the left pane of the Open dialog. that is. Next. a schedule that lists every window in the building. Finally. Creating a Window Schedule | 173 . You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building model. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams.You begin by creating a window instance schedule.

9 Click OK. select Windows. click Schedule/Quantities.Create a window schedule 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. 174 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . right-click in the Design Bar. 7 Using the same method. order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down. expand Floor Plans. add the following fields to the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Height Level Type Mark Width 8 Under Scheduled fields. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click the Fields tab. and click OK. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. enter Building Window Schedule. under Category. Define the fields to display as columns in the window schedule 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog. The Comments field is moved under Scheduled fields. and click View. select Comments and click Add. and double-click Level 1. 6 Under Available fields. 4 For Name.

The window that corresponds to the information in the schedule row is displayed in a relevant view of the building model. click Edit. 12 In the Show Element(s) in View dialog. 13 In the Project Browser. Select a window in the schedule and locate it in the building model 10 Select a cell in the window schedule with the C14 Type Mark. and double-click Building Window Schedule to redisplay the window instance schedule. and on the Options Bar. NOTE By clicking Show. 11 If the confirmation dialog displays. click OK to search through relevant views of the building model. and click View Properties. expand Schedules/Quantities. this can be a time-consuming process. for Sorting/Grouping. right-click the schedule.A schedule is created that contains every window in the building model. you can display other views of the building model that include the selected window. click Show. However. select Type Mark. Creating a Window Schedule | 175 . for Sort by. 16 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. in large building models with many views. under Other. click Close. Group and sort the window schedule by type mark 14 In the drawing area. and click OK twice. If no open view shows the selected element. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. you are prompted to open one that does.

20 In the Element Properties dialog. and press ENTER. clear Itemize every instance. Change the schedule from an instance schedule to a type schedule 19 Right-click on the schedule. 18 Click OK to confirm that you want to change the type mark for all windows of this type. 22 Click OK twice. for Sorting/Grouping. sorted by type mark. 21 In the Schedule Properties dialog. click Edit. The window type schedule is displayed. Change type mark from the schedule 17 In the window schedule. and click View Properties.The window schedule is displayed. under Floor Plans. under Other. The type mark is changed to A and the schedule is resorted. as shown: 24 In the Project Browser. so that the types are sequentially named from A to H. change the Type Mark in the first row from 19 to A. 176 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . double-click Level 2. 23 Change the Type Mark for the other window types.

expand Schedules/Quantities. click Add to create the new parameter. you want to add columns to the window schedule to describe the detail where head.rvt.rvt. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save As. you add schedule columns for parameters that are not standard for the scheduled object. 5 Click OK. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Categories. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. These parameters cannot be shared with other projects and. Under Parameter Data. For Discipline. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 6 Use the same method to create 2 more window parameters: Jamb Detail and Sill Detail. select Type. for Name. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog. Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule | 177 . and sill conditions for a window can be found. For Group parameter under. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. select Windows to associate the parameter with the Windows category. you cannot use them to tag objects. In this case. Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule In this lesson. unlike shared parameters. click OK. The new project parameter Head Detail is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog. jamb. and double-click Building Window Schedule. and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.25 Zoom to the lower area of the floor plan to see that the window tags have changed. enter Head Detail. select Construction. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog.

10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. enter Window Details. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Head Detail Jamb Detail Sill Detail 11 Use the Move Up control to move the new parameters up in the list.Add project parameters to the schedule 8 In the Project Browser. Group headers in the schedule 13 In the schedule. so that they are listed before Comments. and Sill Detail. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. under Other. 12 Click OK twice. click Edit. and while pressing the left mouse button. Jamb Detail. 14 On the Options Bar. TIP To select all 3 headers. 15 In the grouping field above the detail headers in the schedule. under Available fields. select Head Detail. move the cursor over the Jamb Detail and Sill Detail headers. and click Properties. 178 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . click Group. select the following fields. for Fields. click in the Head Detail header. right-click Building Window Schedule.

Under Name. and specify the following values for Filter by: ■ ■ ■ Select Mark in the first field. Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter In this exercise. and produces a schedule that includes only the doors in Unit 18. enter Unit 18 . m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. expand Floor Plans. View Level 1 of the building 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Click OK. Verify the Phase is Phase 1. select the following fields. you create a unit-based door schedule and use a filter to limit the selection of doors to a single unit. select Doors. enter 1/A107. click the Fields tab. for Jamb Detail. click Schedule/Quantities.16 You can add values for the new project parameters directly in the schedule. For example. enter 3/A107. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise.rvt.Door Schedule. Enter U18 in the third field. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. Create a new door schedule for Unit 18 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Type Mark A. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Family and Type Head Height Sill Height Width Mark 7 Click the Filter tab. 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter | 179 . and double-click Unit 18 Plan . Select contains in the second field. for Head Detail. You then hide the column used for the filter. This filter checks each door in the project to see which unit it is associated with. and for Sill Detail. enter 2/A107. Verify Schedule building components is selected. 6 Under Available fields. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save.Level 1. and place the unit-based door schedule on a sheet with the unit plans.

15 On the Design Bar.Door Schedule. Place the schedule on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser.8 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. The schedule includes the count and type for doors in Unit 18 only. Clear Itemize every instance (to group the like door types into one row). 14 Click to place the schedule in the upper-left corner of the sheet. click Unit 18 . and specify the following options: ■ ■ For Sort by. select Hidden Field. and double-click A102 . but is not included as a column in the schedule. 9 Click the Formatting tab. and click OK. 10 Under Fields. 16 Zoom in to see the details of the door schedule. select Mark. 11 Under Field formatting.Unit 18. 13 In the Project Browser. and drag it to the sheet. select Family and Type. expand Sheets (all). click Modify. The Mark field is used to filter the entries in the schedule. 180 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling .

The Number field is moved under Scheduled fields. 7 To the right of Header text. and click View. You also add programmed rooms to the schedule for the public spaces in the building. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. Select the fields to display as columns in the room schedule 4 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. Notice that several rooms have been defined in the floor plan. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. select Number. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. and click Add. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. and click OK. double-click Level 1. Creating a Room Schedule In this exercise. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. click Modify. 19 On the Design Bar. click Schedule/Quantities. under Category. The wider column makes it easier to read the door descriptions. right-click in the Design Bar. Creating a Room Schedule | 181 . select Rooms. you create a room schedule for the first floor plan.Modify the width of a schedule column on the sheet 17 Select the door schedule on the sheet. select Bold to display the schedule headers in bold font. NOTE In some cases in this tutorial. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Available fields. 5 Using the same method.rvt. add the following fields to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Name Level Area 6 Click the Appearance tab. 18 Select the control at the top of the schedule for the Family and Type column and drag it to the right to expand the column width. 8 Click OK. under Floor Plans. partial schedules are shown for illustration purposes. Create a room schedule 1 In the Project Browser.

click New. and press ENTER. enter Building Entry. For 105. 182 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . and press ENTER. enter Corridor. Add new rooms to the schedule 9 On the Options Bar. next to Rows. for Name. A new row is displayed at the bottom of the schedule. The room Number is U17-9. 101-106. The rooms are displayed at the bottom of the list and numbered sequentially. The bold header is not noticeable until you place the schedule on a drawing sheet. select Storage. and press ENTER. for room 101. For 104. For 103. 10 Edit the number to be 101. select Corridor. 11 Using the same method. add 5 more rooms. 12 Edit the room names in the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the schedule. and the Level and Area values are displayed as Not Placed because the room is not placed in the floor plan.NOTE The Appearance settings only take effect when the schedule is placed on a drawing sheet. For 102. enter Storage.

Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. Specify style for room separation lines 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. and click OK. enter Stair. expand Lines. and modify room names. For Weight. select 9. click Override. You also change the bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas of the plan. place rooms from a program list.■ For 106. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 4 Click OK. click Room Separation. and press ENTER. For Room Separation. In the Lines field. under Floor Plans. click the bright green swatch. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List In this exercise. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. under Projection/Surface. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click the Lines field. 3 Change the display of room separation lines: ■ In the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. click the Color field. 13 Click File menu ➤ Save. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 183 . double-click Level 1. Add room separation lines 5 Zoom in to the center of the building. under Visibility/Graphics Overrides. Under Custom colors. you add room separation lines.rvt. In the Line Graphics dialog.

click Modify. draw the horizontal line. click Room. Draw a vertical separation line from the wall endpoint to the new corridor separation line. 184 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . 8 On the Design Bar.7 Click to add 2 room separation lines to the right side of the drawing in the corridor. First. Place rooms from a program list 9 On the Design Bar.

for Room. 12 On the Options Bar. select 102 Storage. select 101 Building Entry. 11 Click to place the room in the newly-defined entry area (lower-right).Placed rooms are indicated with a crosshair graphic in the drawing. 10 On the Options Bar. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 185 . for Room. 13 For Offset. enter 2400 mm.

under Floor Plans. Place 105 in the lower space to the left of the kitchen. These values will change after you change the room bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas. 16 On the Design Bar. click Modify. double-click Level 1. under Schedules/Quantities. Place 106 in the space with the stairs. Notice the area values for the Storage rooms in the schedule. as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Place 103 in the space above room 101. 18 In the Project Browser. 15 Use the same method to place the following rooms. Change the room bounding behavior of walls 17 In the Project Browser. Place 104 in the space to the left of 103. double-click Room Schedule. and zoom in to the Corridor. 186 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling .14 Click to place the room in the area to the left of Building Entry.

click Schedule/Quantities. select Rooms. 25 In the New Schedule dialog. Floor Finish. The Room Style Schedule displays without data. 29 On the Options Bar. double-click Room Schedule. and click Add. under Available fields. clear Room Bounding. 26 Select Schedule keys. and click OK. click New to add a new row. 22 On the Design Bar. click (Properties). 30 For Key Name. and click OK. while pressing CTRL. enter As Selected. and Wall Finish. select the 3 small walls (in the 2 storage areas). as shown: 20 On the Options Bar. under Category. select Base Finish. enter Units. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 187 . click Modify. Create key schedule 24 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Notice that the area for the storage rooms has increased as a result of the change in the room bounding behavior of the walls. 23 In the Project Browser. and for all 3 finishes.19 While pressing CTRL. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. 27 In the Schedule Properties dialog. under Constraints. 28 Click OK to create the new room style schedule.

37 Under U17-8. 32 In the Project Browser. right-click Room Schedule. The Room Style column is added to the Room Schedule. select Units. Specify the Room Style for Level 1 rooms 38 In the Project Browser. under Schedules/Quantities. click Zoom To Fit. click (Filter Selection). double-click Level 1. click Check None. and click Properties. for Room Style. 40 Draw a selection box around floor plan. select Rooms. add 2 more key names: Service and Public. 188 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . 34 In the Schedule Properties dialog. under Floor Plans. and click OK. 41 On the Options Bar. under Other. for Available fields. All rooms are selected in the floor plan. double-click Room Schedule. 35 Click OK twice. click Edit. for Fields. Zoom flyout. 42 In the Filter dialog. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Add. 39 On the View toolbar. 36 In the Project Browser.31 Using the same method. click Room Style.

104.rvt. under Views (all). and 106. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes. select Room Type. right-click Level 1. Create a room color scheme 1 In the Project Browser. and apply it to the Level 1 view. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. select Units. 7 Since you are creating a new color scheme. You also edit the colors used in the color scheme and modify the properties of the color scheme legend. and click OK. select Service. select Room Style. expand Floor Plans. and click OK. 6 For Color. click (Properties). 103. enter Room Type. 11 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 45 In the Project Browser. Notice that the Room Style is Units for all rooms on Level 1. for Name. 5 For Title. click OK. click the Color Scheme field. and click OK. select Public. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. under Schedules/Quantities. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 189 . 47 Click File menu ➤ Save. under Identity Data. you create a room color scheme (based on the type of the rooms in the floor plan). 8 Click OK. and click Properties. 9 In the Project Browser. enter Room Type. 46 Edit the Room Style for rooms 101 through 106: ■ ■ For rooms 101. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 4 In the New Color Scheme dialog. 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. click (Duplicate). at the warning prompt. For rooms 102 and 105. double-click Room Schedule. for Room Style.43 On the Options Bar. All rooms on Level 1 now have the room style defined. Creating a Room Color Diagram In this exercise. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. under Floor Plans. and double-click Level 1. The Room Style specification will be used later to determine color fill in a room color diagram.

for Display Color Fill in. click Edit Color Scheme. and click OK. 18 On the Options Bar. expand Lines. select Foreground. and click OK twice. 13 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 20 In the Options panel at the bottom of the dialog. Change the fill colors applied to the rooms 17 In the drawing area. 19 In the first row of the Scheme Definition table (none). click Edit. 15 Click in the lower right of the drawing area to place the legend. 190 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . select blue. click Modify. click Color Scheme Legend. under Custom color. click the value in the Color column. 22 In the Color dialog. Add a color scheme legend 14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. A legend displays at the tip of the cursor. 21 In the second row of the table (Public). select the color legend. 16 On the Design Bar. clear Visible.12 For Visibility/Graphics Overrides. and clear Room Separation.

Creating a Room Color Diagram | 191 . for Size. on the Options Bar. enter 5 mm. (Properties). under Graphics. and click OK twice. 24 Click OK. click 26 In the Element Properties dialog. 27 In the Type Properties dialog. for Swatch Width.23 Use the same method to change the colors for Service and Units to cyan and gray respectively. click Edit/New. enter 25 mm. 28 Under Title Text. Specify properties for the legend colors and title 25 With the legend still selected.

click Modify. 30 Click File menu ➤ Save. 2 Zoom in to the roof area of the building. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.29 On the Design Bar. 192 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling .rvt. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. You then add formulas to the material takeoff to produce cost estimates. you have already determined the roof configuration for the building. Creating a Material Takeoff In this exercise. under 3D Views. You learn to change the roof family type and create a material takeoff schedule for the roofing materials. Create a material takeoff 1 In the Project Browser. double-click {3D}.

select the roof of the building and the smaller roof for the elevator penthouse. select Basic Roof : Wood Joist . add Material: Description and Material: Area to the Scheduled fields. Clear Itemize every instance. The Roof Materials Takeoff Schedule displays. 5 On the Design Bar. 10 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. click Modify. 4 In the Type Selector. Select Grand totals. For Then by. under Category. and click OK. select Material: Area. under Available fields. and specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. 7 In the New Material Takeoff dialog. 13 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. select Roofs. select Calculate totals. and click Add. 6 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Material Takeoff. Under Field formatting. 12 Click OK. 11 Click the Formatting tab.Insulation on Plywood Deck . and specify the following values: ■ ■ Under Fields. 9 Using the same method.EPDM. select Family and Type.3 While pressing CTRL. 8 On the Fields tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. select Material: Description. Creating a Material Takeoff | 193 . click Family and Type.

TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. 21 Click the Formatting tab. enter Material: Area*Material: Cost /(1000mm^2). and click Add. right-click Roof Material Takeoff. select Calculate totals. and click Properties.35 The Estimated cost is calculated. right-click Roof Material Takeoff.80 5. click Estimated Cost. enter Estimated Cost. and click OK twice. click Material: Cost. 22 For Field formatting. under Other. and click Properties. Add cost information and a formula to calculate estimated cost 14 In the Project Browser. 19 For Formula. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. under Available fields. 23 In the Material Takeoff. 24 In the Project Browser. for Fields. 18 In the Calculated Value dialog. and under Fields. 194 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . 16 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. for the Material: Cost field. enter the following values: Material: Description EPDM Plywood Rigid Insulation Wood Joist Value 16 13.40 50. 20 Click OK. The /(1000mm^2) is required to remove the formatting of the fields so the cost estimate value can be calculated. click Edit. 17 Click Calculated Value. for Name.

click Estimated Cost. You draw a travel path line. either within family components or within the project template. and schedule the total distance of each path. 28 Click OK 3 times. select Fixed.25 In the Element Properties dialog. For Rounding. you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional parameters that are not included in predefined instance and type parameters. tag the line. adding the shared parameters to a family. and reporting the shared parameters. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters. you create a shared parameter file. In this lesson. and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. and are defined and stored in an external file. This lesson demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters. regardless of category. ensuring consistency across families and projects. Scheduling Shared Parameters In this lesson. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add specific parameters to a family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not present by default. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit Architecture multi-category schedules. 27 Click Field Format. For Units.rvt. click Training Files. Creating a Shared Parameter File In this exercise. 26 On the Formatting tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. Adding shared parameters to a family allows you to create a tag and schedule to track this specific information. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save. creating a generic tag to tag the family. These shared parameters can be added to any family. you create an exiting plan for the building. select 2 decimal places. under Fields. click Edit. for Formatting. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 195 .

select Length. you add the shared parameters you created to a family file. enter Travel Distance. and click OK. 11 Click OK.txt. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. and click Save. click Training Files. under Groups. 9 Under Parameters. double-click Exiting Plan-Level 1. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 5 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. click New. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog. enter Exiting. 2 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. 6 In the New Parameter Group dialog.rvt. enter Path ID. click Create. and click OK. click New. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress.rvt. NOTE Shared parameter files are typically stored at a network location for use in all projects. and click OK. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family In this exercise. click New. enter OfficeStandardsParameters. for Name. for Name. 4 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. for File name. 196 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . for Name. 3 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. 7 Under Parameters. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. You then create a generic tag to tag the family.1 In the Project Browser. for Type of Parameter. under Floor Plans.

7 For Group parameter under. under Parameters. the Load into Projects dialog displays for you to select the project. otherwise the family loads into the current project.2 In the Left pane of the Open dialog. 6 In the Shared Parameters dialog. If you have multiple projects open. Create a tag using shared parameters 15 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Annotation Symbol. and click OK. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 3 On the Design Bar. click Add. for Travel Distance Formula. following the equals symbol (=).rfa. and click OK. 13 On the Design Bar. select m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. and click Select. click Load into Projects. click Add. under Dimensions. verify that Parameter group is Exiting and that Path ID is selected. Click Training Files. 11 In the Family Types dialog. The Family Types dialog displays the parameters that are currently available for this family category. and click OK. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Travel Line. enter Length. 12 Click Apply. in the Load into Projects dialog. group it under Dimensions. 9 In the Family Types dialog. select Constraints. 8 Select Instance. select Shared parameter.rvt. and select Instance. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 197 . under Parameters. click Family Types. 4 In the Family Types dialog. and click OK. 10 Use the same method to add Travel Distance as a shared parameter. 14 If necessary.

198 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . 22 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 21 In the Select Parameter dialog. and use the same method to select the Path ID parameter. and click OK 3 times. click Modify.rft. select Travel Distance. 19 On the Design Bar. under Parameters. 24 On the Design Bar. and open Metric\Templates\M_Generic Tag. click Label. click Select. click Training Files. click Add. 25 Click above the intersection of the reference planes.rft. 23 In the Shared Parameters dialog. 17 Select Generic Tag. click Label. and click Open. 20 Click the intersection of the reference planes in the drawing window to display the Select Parameter dialog. 26 On the Design Bar. 18 Zoom in to the intersection of the reference planes.16 In the left pane of the Open dialog.

enter M_Travel Distance Tag. 29 Click File ➤ Save As. Create Level 1 exiting travel path 1 In the Project Browser. and press DELETE.Level 1. You then tag the travel lines and give them a path ID. you create a schedule that totals the travel distances in each exiting plan for each path ID. select Path ID.27 In the drawing window. you place the travel line family in the Level 1 and Level 2 exiting plans. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. Placing.rvt is selected. click Load into Projects.rfa. so that it is positioned just above Travel Distance.rvt. under Floor Plans. and click OK. double-click Exiting Plan . 31 On the Design Bar. verify that m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_Progress. After the lines are tagged. and click Save. 32 On the Load into Projects dialog. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 199 . 30 In the Save As dialog. for File Name.Tagging.Tagging. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters In this exercise. Placing. and move it down. 28 Select the Note in the upper-left area of the drawing window. 33 Click File menu ➤ Save.

4 On the Options Bar. 6 Move the cursor to the right.2 Zoom in to the corridor. click Component. select Chain. above the exterior door as shown. 200 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . and click in the center of the corridor. 5 Specify a start point for the path at the left end of the corridor as shown. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

Create Level 2 exiting travel path 15 In the Project Browser. clear Leader. click Tag ➤ By Category. for Path ID. 12 On the Design Bar.Tagging. enter 1-1. click Modify. 17 On the Options Bar. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click (Properties). and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 201 . Placing. 13 While pressing CTRL. 8 On the Design Bar.Level 2. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. and click outside of the building. under Floor Plans. click Component. 10 On the Options Bar. under Constraints.7 Move the cursor down. verify that Chain is selected. select the 2 dashed travel lines. 11 Select each of the travel path lines. click Modify. through the door. double click Exiting Plan . and click OK.

click Component. move the cursor near the right corner. 19 Move the cursor up through the door. click Modify. 202 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . and click above the door to the stair. 22 Click at the center starting point. 21 On the Design Bar. move the cursor to the left.18 Click in the horizontal corridor below the door on the right side of the floor plan. 20 On the Design Bar. and click to specify the first segment of the path as shown. and click.

and click OK. click Modify. enter 2-1. 33 For Name. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 30 Use the same method to specify the Path ID for the right exit path to 2-2. verify that <Multi-Category> is selected. and click in the stair. 28 While pressing CTRL.23 Move the cursor down. 24 On the Design Bar. click Tag ➤ By Category. and click OK. 27 On the Design Bar.Tagging. Placing. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 203 . click Modify. 26 Select each of the travel path lines. select the 2 dashed travel lines for the left exit path. enter Level 1 Exit Distance. (Properties). under Constraints. Create a schedule to total the paths on each plan 31 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 32 In the New Schedule dialog. under Category. for Path ID. and click 29 In the Element Properties dialog.

47 In the Element Properties dialog. in the first field.34 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. select Travel Distance.rvt. and click View. 37 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. and click OK twice. Create a wall schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Calculate Totals. and click OK. 49 Click File menu ➤ Save. for Filter by. and click Properties. 48 In the Schedule Properties dialog. you schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes as they are applied to Revit Architecture components. in the third field. right-click the Design Bar. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. you create a wall schedule that includes columns for the Uniformat Assembly Codes and assembly descriptions of the scheduled walls. select Path ID. and click Add. select Path ID and Travel Distance. click Edit. under Available fields. enter Level 2 Exit Distance. In the left pane of the Open dialog. right-click Level 2 Exit Distance. in the second field. right-click Level 1 Exit Distance. 43 In the Project Browser. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 40 Click the Formatting tab. while pressing CTRL. 35 Click the Filter tab. and under Field formatting. 45 In the Rename View dialog. under Other. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. enter 2-. 39 Clear Itemize every instance. under Schedules/Quantities. select contains. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and in the third field. The Level 2 Exit Distance schedule displays. and click Rename. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions In this exercise. select Path ID. for Filter. click Training Files. 36 For Filter by. 44 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Level 1 Exit Distance. 46 In the Project Browser. click Schedule/Quantities. 204 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes In this lesson. 38 For Sort by. enter 1-. 42 Click OK. 41 Under Fields. The Level 1 Exit Distance schedule displays.

select Walls. expand C . Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project 6 In the Project Browser. 4 Under Available fields. for Assembly Code.Interiors\C10 . and click OK twice. 8 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog.Drywall w/ Metal Stud.Interior Construction\C1010 Partitions\C1010100 . select the following fields.Partitions . and click the browse button.152 mm. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions | 205 .2 In the New Schedules dialog.Fixed Partitions. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. under Categories. expand Families\Walls\Basic Wall. click the Fields tab. click the Value field. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Area Volume Width Length Assembly Code Assembly Description 5 Click OK to complete the schedule. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. right-click Generic . and click Properties. and click OK. click C1010145 .

and open the database in Microsoft Access. 10 Close the exercise file. 12 Click OK in the remaining dialogs. 10 When the confirmation displays. click Export ➤ ODBC Database. and click OK to create the database. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compatible database. 6 Click Finish. expand the Assembly Description column to see the description. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson. tables that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because these categories do not have types. click OK. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.9 In the schedule. you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database. select a location for the database file. 206 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database. Additionally. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Next. under Database Name. 5 Enter RevitDSN for the name of the DSN. Revit Architecture creates 2 tables for the following categories of elements (see below): one that lists all of the element instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a project.rvt. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog. 8 In the New Database dialog. click Create. 3 Click New. and click Next. enter Revit_Project. 11 In the OBDC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. click Training Files. select the Microsoft Access driver (*mdb). 1 On the File menu. click the File Data Source tab. 9 Under Directories. 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog.mdb for Database Name. under Database. click OK in the dialog.

in addition to the Id column. Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. This table contains one row for each Uniformat Assembly Code. In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category. 13 Close the exercise file.A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements. The exported columns are the same as the columns in the key schedule. Each key schedule gives elements in its category a new parameter. and some instance tables include a RoomId column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access | 207 . The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description. For example. as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit Architecture exports. The table of types includes an Assembly Code column that references the Assembly Codes table. These parameters are also exported and contain the ID of the key element. so that each table of elements includes an Id column. a table is also created for each key schedule in a project. One final table is also exported: Assembly Codes. which is used for choosing one of the keys from the key schedule. instance tables include a TypeId column containing the ID of the instance’s type.

208 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling .

you learn how to change the base elevation of a project. 209 . and how to annotate and dimension your Revit Architecture 2008 projects.Annotating and Dimensioning 5 In this tutorial.

Changing the Base Elevation of a Project In this lesson. Project levels report elevation relative to other levels in the project 210 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . You accomplish this in Revit Architecture by defining levels as either project or shared levels. you learn how to relocate the base elevation of a project. or you can change the base elevation and add its value to the levels above it. You can change the base elevation without changing the elevation value of every other level in the project. as the base elevation of most projects is rarely at 0 mm.

Relocating a Project | 211 . you relocate the base elevation of a building from 0 m to 10000 m. and open m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt. After you define the building levels as shared and relocate the project.Relocating a Project In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. the height of the elevations above Level 1 report height relative to Level 1. click Training Files. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

Level 1 displays an elevation value of 0 mm. Relocate the project 7 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. to better demonstrate how shared levels work.Define Level 1 as a shared level 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). and double-click South. By entering 10000 mm in this step. only the Elevation Base parameter of Level 1 is shared at this time. enter 10000 mm. 8 Select the Level 1 line. By selecting the Level 1 line. enter8 mm Head . click Edit/New. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. 5 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Duplicate. and you create a new shared level type for only Level 1. and press ENTER. Under Constraints. the parameter for all the levels in the project would change. and click OK. you specify the new location of the project. The base elevation now reads 10000 mm. 6 Click OK twice. for Elevation Base. you specify the point (0 mm) from which you want to relocate the project. However. click (Properties).Shared Elevation. 10 On the View menu. 2 Select the Level 1 line to display it as red. The elevation of the other levels remains the same. In order for the levels to report height relative to the new base elevation after the project is relocated. 3 On the Options Bar. 9 Move the cursor above the elevation line. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. you must set the Elevation Base parameter to Shared. select Shared. In the Name dialog. The south elevation is displayed. If you did that now. 212 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . so changing the height Level 1 would change it only in relation to the other levels in the project. The levels in the project are not shared.

The reported value of the Loft level changes to take the new base elevation value into consideration. as well as other views of the building model. 14 In the Project Browser. 12 In the Type Selector. click Modify. Relocating a Project | 213 . select Level : 8 mm Head .Shared Elevation. under Elevations. The changes in elevation have propagated to this view.Define the remaining project levels as shared 11 Select the Loft level line. double-click North. 13 On the Design Bar.

214 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . the Penthouse level. and select Levels 2-4. select Level : 8 mm Head . On the Design Bar.15 Define the remaining levels as shared: ■ ■ ■ Press and hold CTRL. All the building levels now report elevations relative to the base elevation. click Modify. and the Roof Plan level. In the Type Selector.Shared Elevation.

there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. Dimensioning | 215 . Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created. and learn to work with dimensioning constraints to control placement of elements in the model. multi-segmented. Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components. expand Views (all). You place linear. click File menu ➤ Save As.rvt Place an overall linear dimension 1 In the Project Browser. and save the exercise file with a unique name. permanent dimensions are created automatically. Dimensioning In this lesson. and double-click Level 1. you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your building models. although you must turn on their visibility to view them. except when you sketch profiles to complete families. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. and angular dimensions.16 If you want to save your changes. “Dimensioning” on page 215. In this case. 17 Proceed to the next lesson. radial. In Revit Architecture. you learn how to use dimensioning tools and constraints in Revit Architecture to dimension and space planter boxes on the north side of the building. expand Floor Plans. Linear and multi-segmented dimensions Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.

and are created by selecting individual reference points.2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and when a green dashed line displays along the left side of the curtain. select it. select it. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. By default. snap to wall centerlines. 216 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . dimensions are aligned. and when a green dashed line displays along the right side of the curtain wall. click Dimension. 4 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top right side of the view. 3 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top left side of the view.

6 Click the lock that displays on the dimension string to lock the dimension. The lock displays as locked. click Dimension. click Modify. Place a multi-segmented dimension 8 On the Design Bar. indicating that you cannot change the distance between the curtain walls without first unlocking the dimension. Creating Dimensions | 217 . Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained in this way. 7 On the Design Bar. and click to place the dimension.5 Move the cursor above the view.

select Wall Faces. and select its left exterior face. but below the first dimension that you placed. click to make all the dimension segments equal and reposition the planters equal distances apart from one another. select the right endpoint of the planter.9 Select the left side of the left curtain wall as you did in a previous step. and continue to select the endpoints and faces of the planters. 14 Move the cursor to the planter on the right. 12 13 On the Options Bar. Make the dimension segments equal to space the planters at equal distances 18 With the multi-segmented dimension selected. select the right side of the curtain wall. and move the cursor over the left endpoint of the first planter to the right. and click to place the multi-segmented dimension. 17 Move the cursor up. 10 Press TAB until the left endpoint of the planter displays. for Prefer. 218 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . 11 Using the same method. and select it. 15 Move the cursor to the right. 16 After you select the reference points on the final planter. above the plan view of the building.

19 On the Basics tab. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Radial). click Modify. 23 Move the cursor over the left exterior curved face of the planter until it highlights. 21 On the Design Bar. Place a radial dimension with a Typ. 26 Select the radial dimension. and specify a point to place the dimension. click Dimension. select Wall faces. 25 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 24 Move the cursor outside the wall. 27 Select the blue square grip that displays under the dimension value and drag it slightly up and to the right. For Prefer. suffix 20 Zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4. Creating Dimensions | 219 . and select it. click Modify.

for Suffix. 220 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . For Prefer. click Dimension. on the Options Bar. 34 Select the horizontal line.28 With the dimension still selected. 30 On the Basics tab. 32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. click (Properties). enter Typ. and click OK. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. verify Wall faces is selected. 33 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Angular). Place an angular dimension 31 Zoom to the planter near grid line 5..

instead of the wall and each individual opening reference point. you learn to automatically dimension a linear wall and its openings (windows) on the Level 3 floor plan of the building. you select only the wall. This automatic dimensioning option provides a convenient way to quickly dimension walls with multiple openings.This line is the edge of a mass that represents the neighboring building. When you dimension the wall. 35 Select the left exterior face of the planter. Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions | 221 . “Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions” on page 221. 36 Move the cursor to the left to resize the dimension arc. 37 On the Basics tab. 38 Proceed to the next exercise. and click to place the dimension. Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions In this exercise. click Modify.

222 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. and that the opening widths are referenced in the overall dimension string. and double-click Level 3. 4 In the Automatic Dimension Options dialog: ■ ■ Under Select References. 3 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Prefer. expand Views (all). These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings. expand Floor Plans. Click Options. and select Widths. click Dimension. Click OK. select Entire Walls. select Wall centerlines. select Openings.Automatic wall dimension Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. You will dimension the short bottom horizontal wall that includes 3 windows. Select automatic dimensioning options 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. For Pick.rvt Open the Level 3 floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser.

2 Zoom to the planter on which you placed a radial dimension. you learn to override dimension witness line settings as you place dimensions. expand Views (all). and click to place the automatic dimension string. Controlling Witness Lines | 223 . “Controlling Witness Lines” on page 223. When you place dimensions. and learn how to change the location of witness lines after you place dimensions. 6 Move the cursor down below the plan view. For example. 7 On the Basics tab. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. in some cases. click Modify. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. Controlling Witness Lines In this exercise. you specify their origin on the Options Bar.Place the dimension 5 Select the bottom exterior wall.rvt Override default dimension witness lines 1 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. for a multi-segmented dimension. you may want to locate the two outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and double-click Level 1. where the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall. However.

4 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Prefer. 7 Using the same method. and click to place the dimension. and select it. 6 Press TAB to cycle through the selection options until the left face of the planter highlights. click Dimension. select Individual References. 5 Move the cursor over the left side of the planter.3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 224 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . move the cursor down. verify Wall centerlines is selected. select the right edge of the planter. For Pick.

9 Press TAB until the bottom left endpoint is highlighted. and specify a point to place the dimension. select the bottom right endpoint.8 Move the cursor over the bottom of the planter on which you placed the angular dimension. and select it. 10 Using the same method. Controlling Witness Lines | 225 . 11 Move the cursor down.

select Wall centerlines. and when the wall centerline highlights. click Dimension. 13 On the Options Bar.Dimension the partition walls to center lines 12 On the Basics tab. select the green grip that displays in the middle of the tick mark. 14 Move the cursor over the left partition wall in the top left corner of the plan. select the centerline of each of the 6 remaining partition walls. 18 Press and hold SHIFT. 16 On the Design Bar. for Prefer. 15 Moving the cursor to the right. and click to place the dimension. and drag the dimension down the wall. and zoom in on the right end of the dimension. select it. click Modify. 226 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . Adjust the witness line location on the end dimensions to align them to the faces of wall 17 Select the dimension that you just placed.

you learn how to duplicate the dimension family type of dimension on the floor plan and then modify its parameters to create an office standard dimension style. click Modify. “Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions” on page 227. 22 On the Basics tab. you change the Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 227 . create a witness line gap and align the dimension to the outer left face of the wall. 20 Release SHIFT. 21 Zoom to the partition wall on the left side of the plan. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. and click the blue middle grip until the dimension aligns with the outer face of the partition wall.19 Release SHIFT. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions In this exercise. select the top blue grip and drag it up to create a witness line gap. and using the same methods. After you create the new family type.

select Arrow 30 Degree.rvt Duplicate an existing dimension type 1 On the Level 1 floor plan. text font. and select the lower dimension. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. for Tick Mark. and click OK. 2 Click (Properties). Modify the parameters of the new Office Standard type 6 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. 228 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . 4 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. 5 In the Name dialog. enter 3. select CityBlueprint.2 mm. Angular and linear dimensions with office standard text and arrows Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4. for Text Size. click Edit/New. and text size parameters to create dimensions that better conform to your office standards. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. For Text Font. Under Text.dimension tick mark. enter Office Standard.

select another font. click Modify. 8 Move the cursor to the planter on the right. select Linear Dimension Style: Office Standard. 10 On the Basics tab. 7 On the Basics tab. If CityBlueprint does not display in the list. 9 In the Type Selector. and select the bottom dimension. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 229 . click Modify. The dimension that you selected previously now displays the new Office Standard family type.NOTE Fonts that are available in this list are the Windows fonts installed on your system. ■ Click OK twice.

“Creating Text Annotation” on page 230. you add text notes on the Level 1 floor plan of the building. select the angular dimension on the planter.11 Using the same method. You learn how to change the text font and size of text notes. 12 Proceed to the next lesson. You create a new office standard text note type by duplicating the family type of a note on the floor plan. 230 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . create a new angular dimension type. Creating Text Annotation In this lesson. and how to add leaders to the text notes. and modify it to use the office standard parameters.

zoom to planter near grid line 5.Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan In this exercise. 4 Move the cursor above grid line 4. 3 On the Options Bar. you add text notes to the Level 1 floor plan. click (None). 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.rvt Add a text note 1 On the Level 1 floor plan. for Leader. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. and click and drag to create a text box. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 231 . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Text. but below the upper dimension string.

select and drag the top left blue symbol to relocate the text box. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. 7 Select the text box. and click OK. and click OK. If so. click Edit/New. 10 In the Name dialog box. 11 Under Text. select Arc Leaders. 8 In the Element Properties dialog box. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 232 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . enter 6 mm Arial Notes. click Duplicate. for Text Size. Create a new text note family type by duplicating the existing type 6 On the Design Bar. under Graphics. enter 6 mm. You may have to move the text box to avoid overlapping other elements on the floor plan.5 In the text box. click Modify. enter EXISTING BUILDING. and click .

14 Create another text box to the right of grid line 4. click Text.Create a text box with leaders 13 On the Design Bar. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ Click (Add Right Arc Leader). A downward pointing leader displays on the right side of the Planting Bed text box. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 233 . and enter Planting Bed. click Modify. 16 Select the Planting Bed text box. 15 On the Design Bar.

select Arrow 30 Degree. and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. select CityBlueprint. 24 On the Design Bar. and click 22 In the Element Properties dialog. Click OK twice. Under Graphics.■ Click (Add Left Arc Leader). for New. In the Rename dialog. click Edit/New. Under Text. Reposition the leaders 18 Select the blue grip at the end of the right leader. 21 Select the Planting Bed text box to select both the text and leaders. 19 Select the blue grip at the end of the left leader. click Modify. and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. 23 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . for Leader Arrowhead. enter Standard Notes. 20 On the Design Bar. Click Rename. for Text font. Another leader displays on the left side of the Planting Bed text box. click Modify. and click OK. 234 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning .

28 Click the inside bottom face of the rounded planter near grid line 3. select Text: Standard Notes. 30 When green dashed lines that indicate it is aligned with the Planting Bed text. 27 On the Options Bar. click to place the text box.Add another note using the Standard Note type 25 On the Design Bar. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 235 . click Text. 26 In the Type Selector. over the Planting Bed text. 29 Move the cursor up and to the right. click (Arc). for Leader.

and save the exercise file with a unique name. click File menu ➤ Save As. 236 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . and enter 457 mm Conc. 32 If you want to save your changes. Wall.31 Click in the text box. 33 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.

The "drafted" detail that you create is not parametrically linked to the building model. you learn how to create details in Revit Architecture 2008. and metal studs. For a detail that you do not want to associate with the model. you use a separate drafting view in which to create the detail. like a standard door header condition. These components display at the required scale. You can detail directly in a view of the building information model.Detailing 6 In this tutorial. 237 . using detail components to represent materials like lumber. plywood.

Detailing the View In this exercise. and insulation objects. you detail the view of the roof edge. as well as detail lines. The detail components that you add to the view are two-dimensional family objects. region objects.Creating a Detail from a Building Model In this lesson. and use the model as an underlay for the detail. you detail the roof overhang of a project building. you trace over the building model geometry. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You define that view by creating a callout view within a section view. 238 | Chapter 6 Detailing . In the callout view. which means that all detail components.rvt. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. In order to detail from the building model. add detail components. click Training Files. After you add components. They are also view specific. you add notes and dimensions to the detail view. you must define the view in which you want to create a detail. and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes. You load detail components. In the left pane of the Open dialog. that you add to the view are visible only in this view.

click the bottom of the exterior wall to select the start point. 14 In the Type Properties dialog.5mm. enter 406. click Detail Component. Place a repeating detail 9 On the Design Bar. for Pattern ➤ Detail. click in the space below the roof overhang to place the component. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. select Corrugated Metal. click Edit/New. click Repeating Detail. 13 In the Name dialog. and click Open. click Yes to load a Detail Items family. You load and place the component so that it is in the project to use in a repeating detail. 12 In the Type Properties dialog.rfa. click Duplicate. The roof overhang detail displays.Display a detail view 1 In the upper left corner of the building model. double-click the detail callout head. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 7 In the drawing area. Detailing the View | 239 . for Graphics ➤ Display Model. click . 5 In the alert dialog. navigate to Metric\Families\m_Corrugated Metal. 17 In the drawing area. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 10 On the Options Bar. and click OK. Load and place a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Exact location is not important. 8 Delete the component. 16 Click OK twice. 15 For Spacing. select As underlay. click Training Files. enter Corrugated Metal Siding. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK.

20 Move the component end point: ■ ■ ■ Select the corrugated metal component. Add lumber detail components 22 On the Design Bar.18 Move the cursor up to generate the graphics for the repeating detail. click Load. click (Move). click Detail Component. 23 On the Options Bar. and on the Edit toolbar. ■ Click Modify. NOTE The detail component endpoint may not coincide with the geometry extents. 240 | Chapter 6 Detailing . 19 On the Design Bar. and press DELETE. click Modify. Select the bottom edge of the roof joist as the move end point. 21 Select the original instance of the corrugated metal component. Select the endpoint of the geometry of the corrugated metal component as the move start point. Specify a point high enough so the siding reaches the underside of the roof overhang.

navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Roof Edge Components. press SPACEBAR 3 times. 32 To properly orient the component. click Detail Component. click Training Files. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal.24 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Because you still have several components to load. 33 Click the top right corner of the plywood to select the insertion point. and click Open. you load them as a group from a single file. 34 In the Type Selector. 25 In the Type Selector. 31 In the Type Selector. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 06-Wood and Plastic\06100-Rough Carpentry\06160-Sheathing\M_Plywood-Section. Detailing the View | 241 . TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the plywood. 28 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. 30 On the Design Bar. and click Open.rfa. verify that M_Plywood-Section 19mm is selected. 29 In the Duplicate Types dialog. Load components as a group 27 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. click Training Files. click OK. 26 Place the plywood component to the right of the metal component as shown in the following illustration. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 200mm Nominal.rvt. and place it in the detail view as shown.

Add insulation 40 On the Design Bar.Add wallboard detail component 35 In the Type Selector. The wallboard segment is now on the underside of the roof joist. click Insulation. 39 Select the horizontal segment. select M_Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 16mm. 242 | Chapter 6 Detailing . 38 Click Modify. 36 On the Options Bar. NOTE You can also press SPACEBAR as you place the component to flip the justification. 37 Place the wallboard component as shown. select Chain. and click Modify. click the Flip instance arrows.

select to near side. enter 140mm.41 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Width. ■ Click Modify. For Offset. Detailing the View | 243 . click Detail Component. 43 Click Modify. and on the Edit toolbar. Select the left midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move start point. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 300mm Nominal. Add lumber components 45 On the Design Bar. click (Move). as shown. 42 Place 2 segments of insulation. 44 Move the upper segment: ■ ■ ■ Select the upper segment of insulation. 47 Click to place the component at the lower left corner of the roof overhang as shown. Select the right midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move end point. 46 In the Type Selector.

you add lines to your detail. 53 Proceed to the next exercise. Add detail lines 1 On the Design Bar. Add rigid insulation 50 In the Type Selector. select Thin Lines. and lock the component. 49 Place the component directly above the 50 x 200mm component. 244 | Chapter 6 Detailing . “Adding Detail Lines” on page 244. 4 Click Modify. select M_Plywood-Section : 19mm. Like detail components. drag the endpoint up to the top of the 50 x 200mm component. they are view specific. as shown.rvt. 5 Select the vertical plywood component. 2 In the Type Selector. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Detail Lines. 52 Click Modify. Adding Detail Lines In this exercise. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. meaning they display only in this view. select M_Rigid Insulation-Section : 63mm.48 In the Type Selector. 3 Sketch a detail line from the lower right corner of the 50 x 300mm component to the lower left corner of the 50 x 200mm component. 51 Add the insulation above the plywood you just placed.

9 Select the lines at the top of the 50 x 300mm component and the roof joist. and press ENTER. 12 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). enter 10mm. Adding Detail Lines | 245 . click Detail Lines. 11 In the Type Selector. 13 Add detail lines around the 50 x 300mm component. Trim and extend the lines as necessary to get the desired result. as shown. For Offset. enter 10mm.Add offset lines 6 On the Design Bar. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). click Detail Lines. and press ENTER. select Medium Lines. For Offset. 10 On the Design Bar. select Thin Lines. as shown. 7 In the Type Selector.

and draw the detail lines as shown. 16 On the Options Bar. and clear Chain. click (Draw). 18 In the Type Selector.Draw detail lines 14 On the Options Bar. 15 Draw a small diagonal line at the bottom left corner of the 50 x 300mm component. 246 | Chapter 6 Detailing . 17 Draw a horizontal line as shown. select Chain. 19 Zoom in to the area where the roof joist and the corrugated metal component abut. select Thin Lines. draw the detail lines as shown. as shown.

and then select the interior edge of the horizontal segment. select the Penthouse level line. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. Modify display properties 21 In the drawing area. enter 10mm. right-click. For Offset. right-click Roof Overhang Detail. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 26 In the Type Selector. Adding Detail Lines | 247 . click Detail Lines. under Views ➤ Detail Views (Detail). and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. When you turn the display model off. select Vapor Barrier. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. 24 On the View Control Bar. What remains are the detail components and lines that you added. click ➤ Hide Crop Region. Add a vapor barrier 25 On the Design Bar. the model elements such as walls and floors no longer display in this view. select Do not display. and click Properties. and click OK. 28 Select the interior edge of the vertical segment of gypsum wallboard. and press ENTER.20 Move the top horizontal line down so that it overlays the Penthouse level line. 22 In the Project Browser.

33 If a break line does not completely mask the portion of the detail that it is intended to mask. click Detail Component.29 On the Design Bar.rvt. 30 In the Type Selector. you add text notes to complete the detail. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. press SPACEBAR as necessary. click Text. select the break line and use the shape handle grips to modify it. 248 | Chapter 6 Detailing . Add text notes to the detail 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. “Adding Text Notes” on page 248. 32 Click Modify. Adding Text Notes In this exercise. select M_Break Line. 31 Add break lines at the bottom and the right of the detail. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. TIP To rotate the break line as you place it.

7 Select the dimension line. enter Typ. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 6 Click Modify. click Dimension. Click again to specify the location of the text box. 3 Add the leaders and notes as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the detail to specify the location of the arrow.2 On the Options Bar. Adding Text Notes | 249 . Click in the drawing area to end the text insertion command. 5 Click the left outer edge of the 50 x 300mm component. and click the left edge of the corrugated metal component. Enter the text. for Text ➤ Suffix.. and click (Properties). Add a dimension to the detail 4 On the Design Bar. click (Arc) to create an arced leader.

and selecting the chain. 250 | Chapter 6 Detailing . The selected lines need to be replaced with detail components in order for them to accept a keynote.9 Click File menu ➤ Save. while pressing CTRL. 7 Click Modify. click 6 In the Filter dialog. Remove text notes 4 In the drawing area. right-click.Keynotes. and press DELETE. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). Creating Detail Components In this exercise. right-click. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. select all the coping linework. select a text note. 3 In the Rename View dialog. you modify the previously drawn detail so that you can annotate it with keynotes rather than text notes. click Select All Instances. 2 Select Copy of Roof Overhang Detail. and click Rename. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. and click OK. and save the exercise file. Create a duplicate drawing 1 In the Project Browser. (Filter Selection). 10 Proceed to the next exercise. on the Options Bar. Convert detail lines to components 5 Use a window to select the entire roof detail. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. right-click. pressing TAB. 8 Zoom in to the metal coping. click Roof Overhang Detail. and click OK. “Creating Detail Components” on page 250. clear Detail Items and Dimensions. enter Roof Overhang Detail . You can also select all the linework by highlighting a segment.rvt.

14 Click Modify. click Load into Projects. and click Open. The component family is now part of the roof overhang detail. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As.rft. 10 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. enter Roof Edge. Add components to the detail 19 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. click . navigate to your preferred location. and click OK. and click Save. Creating Detail Components | 251 . 16 Click Modify. deselect any extraneous lines that are also selected. NOTE If the Roof Overhang Detail . 15 Use a window to select all linework. in the Type Selector. 23 Using a window. select Medium Lines. 13 Click the intersection of the reference planes to place the linework. 25 In the Filter dialog. 11 In the left pane of the New dialog. and the component can be placed in the detail.Keynotes view is not the open view. click Detail Component. clear Detail Items. While pressing SHIFT. double-click it in the Project Browser. 12 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. select the coping. 24 On the Options Bar. 18 In the Save As dialog. for File name. 21 To place the component. click the bottom left endpoint of the metal coping. click Training Files. 20 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. The original linework remains selected.9 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 22 Click Modify. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component.

and add keynote data to components that do not have data associated with them. navigate to Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Keynote Tag.rvt. 30 In the drawing area. Add keynotes to components 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. “Adding Keynotes” on page 252. click Training Files. 2 In the alert dialog. click Load. click Yes to load a Keynote Tag family to the project.B5. 63mm Rigid Insulation. 27 On the Design Bar. and click Open. click Detail Component. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Metal Fascia w_Drip Edge.26 Press DELETE. 31 Using the same method used previously. select the rigid insulation as the object to tag. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. In the Keynotes dialog. click Training Files. click Keynote ➤ Element. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click on the upper end point of the drip edge to place the component.rfa. and click Open. you place keynotes on objects. 4 Add the tag: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the drawing area.rfa. Click the rigid insulation on the roof to place the tag. 252 | Chapter 6 Detailing . delete the underlying linework. and click OK. 28 On the Options Bar. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07200 ➤ 07210 ➤ 07210. Click to place the leader arm. The underlying linework is deleted and the detail component remains in the drawing. Adding Keynotes In this exercise.

G1. For the 2 instances of the 16mm Gypsum Wallboard.5 Tag additional components: ■ ■ For the plywood decking. navigate to 07645.D11.D1. Because you defined the keynote parameter as part of the component properties. use keynote 06160.D11. For the metal coping. 12 On the Design Bar. click in the Value column.F1. For the 19mm Plywood Siding. 13 Tag components: ■ (Properties). use keynote 06110. use keynote 06110. use keynote 06160. 6 Click Modify. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For the 50 x 300. use keynote 07645. 19mm Plywood. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. Roof Edge4.I1. Adding Keynotes | 253 . For the 50 x 150. 11 Click OK 3 times. click Edit/New.F1. For the 50 x 200. Assign keynote parameter to a component 7 In the drawing area. Tag the metal fascia with drip edge. use keynote 09250. select the metal fascia with drip edge. the keynote is automatically read when you place the tag.C1. FasciaProfile_1. use keynote 06110. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. click Keynote ➤ Element. and click 8 In the Element Properties dialog.

for File name. click Lines.rft. 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar.A8. and click Save. 4 In the Type Selector. and click Open. select Medium Lines. 15 In the Type Selector. navigate to your preferred location. click Load into Projects. click Training Files. 2 In the left pane of the New dialog. Create a detail component 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 22mm Corrugated Steel . 16 Place an instance of the component directly on top of the bottom segment of the corrugated metal repeating component.14 On the Design Bar. 7 Click File menu ➤ Save As. select the horizontal line under the roof overhang as shown. Convert detail lines to components 10 In the drawing area. enter m_Medium Line Detail Component. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 17 Keynote the component. 5 In the drawing area. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component line based. using keynote 07460. “Creating Line-based Detail Components” on page 254. select Corrugated Metal. click Detail Component.20 Ga. 6 Lock the line. Creating Line-based Detail Components In this exercise. and select the right end point. you convert detail lines to detail components so that you can add keynotes to them. select the left end point of the reference line. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 254 | Chapter 6 Detailing . 8 In the Save As dialog. You do this in order to keynote the component. and click Modify. 18 Save the file. 19 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. a repeating detail cannot be keynoted. 9 On the Design Bar.

click the end points at the top of the roof. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. enter Prefinished Metal Soffit Panel. click Detail Component. 31 Select the component. invisible. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 255 . select Medium Line Detail Component. You add the components to the project and keynote them. click Duplicate. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. 20 Click OK 3 times. 28 In the Type Selector. 36 In the Keynotes dialog. 35 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. 34 In the Name dialog. and click Open.A1. enter EPDM Membrane. 19 In the Name dialog. Single-Ply Membrane Roofing. click Load. click Edit/New.11 Press DELETE. 25 Next. m_Invisible Line Detail Component. click Detail Component. click Training Files. click Edit/New. and click (Properties). click Detail Component. Load line-based detail components 21 On the Design Bar. Add light line components 26 Zoom to the roof overhang. select m_Light Line Detail Component. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. The deleted line needs to be replaced with a detail component in order for it to accept a keynote. and click . 30 Click Modify. click Duplicate. 29 In the drawing area. 14 Add the component in the location of the previously deleted horizontal line. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components. 27 On the Design Bar. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07500 ➤ 07530 ➤ 07530. 37 Click OK 3 times. 15 Click Modify. 18 In the Type Properties dialog. and hidden) used in the view. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. click in the Value column. and m_Light Line Detail Component. 24 While pressing CTRL. 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 In the Type Selector. you create line-based detail components for other line weights (light. 16 Select the component. 23 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 22 On the Options Bar.

47 Select the component. 44 On the Design Bar. click 50 Move the air barrier to the right. 40 Click Modify. click Detail Component. and click . and click . click Detail Component. and click the lower end at the break line. against the 3/4" plywood. 53 On the Options Bar. (Move).G1. 45 Click the upper end of the repeating detail. 256 | Chapter 6 Detailing . Add a vapor barrier component 51 On the Design Bar. name the component Air Barrier. 48 Using the same method used previously. select Chain. and assign it keynote 07260. name the component 50 x 200 Framing. 49 With the component selected. 54 Create the component by drawing over the vertical and horizontal dashed detail lines that represent the vapor barrier.38 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component. 42 Using the same method used previously. 43 Zoom to the repeating component.A5. 39 Add the Light Line Detail Component to the underside of the overhang. and assign it keynote 06110. 52 In the Type Selector. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. 41 Select the component just added. on the Edit toolbar. 46 Click Modify.

A4. 56 Delete both dashed detail lines. leaving the detail component lines. 57 Select the vertical hidden line component. 61 In the drawing area. 50 x 200 Framing. Add keynotes 59 Zoom to the drawing extents.55 Click Modify. add keynotes for the EPDM Membrane. Air Barrier. and Vapor Barrier. and click . Creating Line-based Detail Components | 257 . 60 On the Design Bar. 58 Using the method used previously. name the component Vapor Barrier. click Keynote ➤ Element. and assign it keynote 07260.

Enter 07463. 2 Add keynote information for the metal soffit: ■ ■ ■ ■ Position the cursor at the end of the line that begins with 07460. 67 In the drawing area. 66 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. you add keynote information for a detail component to the database text file. The database file opens in a text editor. and click . Modifying a Keynote Database In this exercise. name the component Batt Insul. add a keynote for the component.Create an invisible line component 62 Click Window menu ➤ m_Medium Line Detail Component. 65 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. You are then able to assign the keynote to the component in the drawing. 70 In the drawing area.A1. “Modifying a Keynote Database” on page 258.A9. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. select the component. 3 In the text editor. Enter 07460. Add information to the text file 1 In Windows Explorer. Enter Pre-Finished Metal Soffit. 63 In the drawing area. 71 Save the file. and close the text editor. and assign it keynote 07210. 258 | Chapter 6 Detailing . select Invisible Lines. in the Type Selector.rvt. and press TAB. click File menu ➤ Save. 64 Save the file as m_Invisible Line Detail Component.txt. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.rfa. draw a line in the center of the large vertical segment of insulation. 72 Proceed to the next exercise. click Detail Component. 68 Select the component. and double-click m_Example_RevitKeynotes. 69 Using the method used previously. click Load into Projects.. and press TAB. and press ENTER. navigate to Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Metric.rfa.A4.

select Absolute. under Keynote Table.Update keynote settings 4 In Revit Architecture. 9 In the drawing area. Creating a Drafted Detail In this lesson.txt. Each keynote displays as a simple number. These details do not update with changes to the building model. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. In the Type Selector. 12 Apply various keynote styles: ■ ■ In the drawing area. You can create details in drafting views when you do not need to create callout views from the building model. click to place the leader. you can reference it within the model and place it on a sheet. and click OK. 13 Click Modify. select the metal soffit (horizontal line under the overhang). navigate to 07463. You can create drafted details using the drafting tools in Revit Architecture or by importing details from an existing detail library. and click to place the note. Creating a Drafted Detail | 259 .A1. click Keynote ➤ Element. navigate to m_Example_RevitKeynotes. and click Open. 5 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. Work with keynotes 8 On the Design Bar. Drafted details are created in drafting views and are not directly based on building model geometry. 7 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. under Path Type. click Settings menu ➤ Keynoting. select M_Keynote Tag : Keynote Number. as there is no parametric linkage to any building model components. click Browse. and click OK. ■ Change the keynote style back to the boxed number type. 6 In the Select Keynote File dialog. you learn how to create a drafted detail. select all the keynotes. After you create a drafting view. ■ Select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. The descriptive text for each keynote displays. 14 Save the file. 11 Click Modify.

Importing a Detail into a Drafting View In this exercise. “Creating a Reference Callout” on page 260. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. For Positioning ➤ Automatically place. click Callout. and click OK. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Training Files. 260 | Chapter 6 Detailing . 7 In the Rename View dialog.rvt. The detail is imported as an import symbol. The detail that you import is in DWG format. Creating a Reference Callout In this exercise. select Black and white. select Center-to-center. 5 Enter zf to zoom to the detail. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). for Scale. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). you create a callout in the section view of the building model to reference the metal coping detail that you previously imported. Create a new drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. Navigate to Metric\m_Roof Edge Detail. 3 On the Options Bar. Dataset Use the dataset you used in a previous exercise. enter EPDM Metal Coping. you place an existing detail in a new drafting view to create a drafted detail. For Layer/Level Colors. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. right-click Drafting 1. 6 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. Create the callout view 1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. select Reference other view.dwg. Click Open.rvt. Import a complete detail in DWG format 3 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. and click Rename. and select Drafting View: EPDM Metal Coping. double-click Roof Overhang Detail to open it in the drawing area. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. select 1 : 5.

9 In the Type Properties dialog. 5 Click Modify.No Reference. and click Properties. for Graphics ➤ Reference Label. click Rename. Creating a Reference Callout | 261 .4 Add the callout bubble by dragging a rectangular bubble around the metal coping. The metal coping detail that you imported previously displays. Modify detail view properties 7 In the Project Browser. click Edit/New. 6 Select the callout. click Modify. 10 In the Rename dialog. and double-click the callout. enter Detail . right-click EPDM Metal Coping. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. delete the existing value. for New. 12 Click OK twice. Display the reference view 13 On the Design Bar. The callout head no longer displays a reference label. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. and use the callout grips to move the callout head.

17 Click Window menu ➤ Detail View: Roof Overhang Detail. “Creating a Detail in a Drafting View” on page 262 Creating a Detail in a Drafting View In this exercise. 16 Click on the sheet above the Roof Overhang Detail to place the drafting view./Sect. verify that the scale is 1 : 5. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all). enter Header @ Sliding Door. 18 Save the file. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.rvt. double-click A105 . 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. you create a door head condition in the new drafting view. 3 On the View Control Bar. 15 Under Drafting Views (Detail . The callout is updated with the sheet information. so you use Revit Architecture tools to draft the detail./Det. Create a drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. drag EPDM Metal Coping onto the sheet. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. 262 | Chapter 6 Detailing .No Reference). There is no existing DWG file for this door detail. for Name. Modeling elements at this level of detail may be time consuming and can reduce the overall performance of the product.Add the drafting view to a sheet 14 In the Project Browser. and click OK. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.Elev.

Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 263 . 15 Draw the region: On the Options Bar. select the width dimension.Add a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. for Name. and enter 20. 18 While pressing CTRL. Board. click 13 In the Fill Patterns dialog. click Region Properties. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. Press SPACEBAR to rotate the component as you place it. 17 Click Modify. 19 In the Type Selector. ■ ■ ■ Select the lower left corner of the 2x6 lumber as the start point. click . 14 Click OK 3 times. Draw a rectangle as shown. 6 Click in the drawing area to place 2 instances as shown.5mm. . 11 In the Name dialog. click Duplicate. click Edit/New. click Filled Region. 16 Select the left edge of the region. and click OK. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. click Detail Component. select Gypsum-Plaster. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. enter Gyp. Create a filled region 7 On the Design Bar. select the left and bottom edges of the region. You sketch filled regions to represent gypsum wall board. select Wide Lines. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. 5 In the Type Selector. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern.

264 | Chapter 6 Detailing . Mirror the region 21 Select the filled region.20 On the Design Bar. click 22 On the Options Bar. and drag the bottom up to just below the top of the upper 50 x 150. 24 Select the mirrored region. (Draw). Select the midpoint of the upper 50 x 150 as the start point. and click above the top of the region as the end point. and on the Edit toolbar. click 23 Draw the mirror line: ■ ■ (Mirror). click Finish Sketch. Move the cursor up.

for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. and click OK. for Name. verify that the thickness is 19mm. 27 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.Finish. click Finish Sketch. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. click Region Properties. 29 In the Type Properties dialog. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 265 . 36 Align the wood region to the 50 x 150: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. 34 Draw the region: On the Options Bar. click (Align). Select the right edge of the lower 50 x 150. enter Wood .25 Click Modify. 37 On the Design Bar. 30 In the Name dialog. . Add wood filled regions 26 On the Design Bar. 33 Click OK 3 times. click Duplicate.Finish. select Wood . click 32 In the Fill Patterns dialog. click Filled Region. select Medium Lines. Draw a rectangle as shown. click . 35 Select all the linework for the wood region. click Edit/New. and select the right edge of the wood region. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. in the Type Selector. ■ ■ ■ Select the lower left corner of the left gypsum board region as the start point.

click Filled Region. click (Align). 46 On the Tools toolbar. click Finish Sketch.5mm. You use the reference plane as an alignment reference for the gypsum board region above it. For Offset. 266 | Chapter 6 Detailing . click Ref Plane. select Medium Lines. 41 Beginning at the lower right of the wood region. 40 On the Options Bar. enter 6mm. verify that the width is 19mm and the height is 63. 42 On the Design Bar.38 On the Design Bar. 44 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick). and press ENTER. sketch the new region as shown. click . Add a reference plane 43 On the Design Bar. 45 Select the top of the vertical wood region to place the reference plane above it. 39 In the Type Selector.

and click to select the point. and click to select the point. click Filled Region. and click the bottom of the gypsum board region. Move the cursor left 25mm. 51 Select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. enter 0. Move the cursor right 25mm. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 267 . and select the bottom horizontal line. Add a door panel 49 On the Design Bar. 55 Select the small vertical line of the door panel sketch. Move the cursor down 305mm. ■ ■ ■ For Offset. click (Trim/Extend). and click to select the point. enter 10mm. 54 On the Tools toolbar. 53 Draw the door panel outline: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the top endpoint of the offset line. 56 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. click Finish Sketch. 50 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines).47 Click the reference plane. 48 Click Modify. and press ENTER. For Offset. 52 On the Options Bar: Click (Draw). Select Chain.

enter 3mm. and right edges of the door panel region. For Offset. 62 Select the left detail line.rfa. 60 Select the left. 65 On the Options Bar. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_A307 Bolts-Side. enter 76.Add mounting/sliding hardware 57 On the Design Bar. 58 In the Type Selector. 67 Add the bolt to the right side of the lower wood region as shown. 59 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). Add mounting/sliding hardware 64 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click Open. 63 Repeat for the right detail line. 61 Click Modify. 66 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Detail Lines. select Medium Lines. 268 | Chapter 6 Detailing . click Load.2mm. select the height dimension. and press ENTER. click Detail Component. click Training Files. top. and press ENTER.

and click Open. click Training Files. 76 In the Type Selector. click Detail Component.TIP Press the SPACEBAR as necessary to rotate the bolt to the correct orientation. drag the left shape handle until the nut is against the detail line. click Detail Lines. drag the right shape handle until the bolt end is just past the midpoint of the 50 x 150. 77 Draw a line at the base of the bolt head as shown. select Wide Lines. click Load. Add detail lines 75 On the Design Bar. 73 Add the component to the left side of the lower 50 x 150. use the images as a guide. 71 On the Options Bar. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 269 . navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_Expansion Bolts-Side. NOTE Exact sizes and positioning are not critical when creating the remainder of the detail. 68 Click Modify. 70 On the Design Bar. 69 Select the bolt. 72 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 74 Select the expansion bolt.rfa.

click 83 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. click Detail Lines. select Thin Lines. 81 Draw the rectangle to the left of the wide line as shown. 79 In the Type Selector. 80 On the Options Bar. (Mirror). 270 | Chapter 6 Detailing . 82 Select the rectangle. 86 Draw a small rectangle between the mirrored rectangles as shown. 85 On the Options Bar.78 On the Design Bar. and on the Edit toolbar. click . click . 84 On the Design Bar. click Detail Lines.

click Detail Lines. select Medium Lines. 90 In the Type Selector.87 Click Modify. 88 Select the detail line to the left of the lower wood region. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 271 . 91 Draw a small line from the midpoint of the left mirrored rectangle to the left. drag the top end above the mirrored rectangles as shown. 89 On the Design Bar. as shown. Do not extend the line to the vertical detail line.

draw a line up to the height of the other detail line. 97 On the Options Bar. and on the Edit toolbar. 96 Beginning at the end of the 3mm line. 272 | Chapter 6 Detailing . and press ENTER. 95 On the Design Bar. 93 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection.92 Select the line. enter 3mm. click (Mirror). select the length dimension. 94 Select the mirrored line on the right. click . 98 Click the end of the detail line on the left. and click to place the arc as shown. click Detail Lines.

and click Modify. TIP Rotate and move the break lines as necessary to adjust the masking elements. Add dimensions 104 On the Design Bar. Add two break lines 100 Zoom to the drawing extents. 106 Click to place the dimension. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 273 . click Dimension. and select the right edge of the adjoining vertical region. 103 Add two break lines as shown.99 Click Modify. select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. 101 On the Design Bar. select M_Break Line. click Detail Component. 102 In the Type Selector. 105 In the drawing area.

and click Modify. 108 In the Type Selector. 109 Add a multi-segment dimension line as shown. click Text. Add text notes to complete the detail 111 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. select the gypsum board region on the left. 110 Select the dimension line. click to create an arced leader. 274 | Chapter 6 Detailing . 116 Drag the end of the new leader to the other gypsum board region.107 On the Design Bar. using the Drag Text grip.5mm Arial. 113 In the drawing area. Board. 114 Enter Gyp. and click Modify. and on the Options Bar. select Linear Dimension Style : Linear 2. click (Add Right Arc Leader). drag the text for the smaller dimension. 112 In the Options Bar. 115 Select the note. and click to place the text.

Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 275 . 118 On the Design Bar. click Modify to end the command. 119 Save the file.117 Add leaders and text notes to the detail as shown.

276 | Chapter 6 Detailing .

including: ■ ■ Creating a note block containing typical construction notes Creating a drawing list that is automatically populated based on filter selections Creating the 2 most common types of legends produced for construction: annotation legends and building component legends Tracking and documenting revisions in the project Importing resources from other applications. such as images and text into project sheets ■ ■ ■ 277 .Finishing the Sheets 7 In this tutorial. you perform tasks to provide finishing touches on your project documentation.

8 Drag the endpoint of the leader to position it on the right front door. enter 1. 3 Click Yes to load a generic annotation family into the project.Using Note Blocks In this lesson. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 7 On the Design Bar. 6 Click in the drawing area to the right of the building to place a hexagon tag. you create a typical note block to annotate repairs and renovations to the exterior of the building. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats. The note block can be used to schedule parameters assigned to a generic annotation family.Finishing-Sheets. and double-click East. you add typical construction notes to sheets and then create a note block to expose the notes text. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). 278 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets .rfa.rvt. click Training Files. Creating a Note Block In this exercise. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Load a generic annotation family 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Modify. for Number of Leaders. 5 On the Options Bar. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Sheet Keynote . Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Symbol. click Training Files.Hexagon.

on the Options Bar. click (Copy). and click above the tag to place a copy. Creating a Note Block | 279 .9 Drag the midpoint of the leader to position it as shown: Create annotation marks for items requiring notes 10 With the tag selected. 13 Select the tag. click (Properties). and click OK. enter Seal existing doors and insulate. under Identity Data. 12 On the Edit toolbar. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. for Text.

enter B.14 With the copy selected. 16 For Tag. enter Repair existing door surround. click (Mirror). Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. click (Properties). 17 Click OK. and click. and on the Options Bar. 19 On the toolbar. clear Copy. 18 Use the same method to make another copy of the tag and place it on the left side of the building. on the Options Bar. as shown: NOTE To create a vertical mirror image. 15 For Text. 280 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . position the cursor over the hexagon tag until a vertical bar displays. and click to create a vertical mirror image of the tag so the leader points toward the building. 20 Select the tag on the left.

format. Create. Clean cut and repair wall as required. select Tag. 22 Optionally. Repair as required. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. Clean and repair existing stone trim as required. select Tag. 25 Specify values in the Note Block Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. and place a note block on a sheet 23 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Note Block. Clean and repair stone parapet cap as required. and click OK. and moving counter-clockwise. continue tagging the building as shown in the following illustration: Tag A B C D E F G H Text Seal existing doors and insulate. using the table as a reference.21 On the Design Bar. Tuckpoint as required. for Sort by. Clean existing concrete loading dock. Select Text. click Modify. Creating a Note Block | 281 . Repair existing door surround. for Note block name. Remove all existing windows. and click Add. Clean exterior brick wall. enter Exterior Construction Notes. 24 In the New Note Block dialog. and click Add. Clean opening and repair as required for new window installation. under Available fields. Saw cut existing brick wall. On the Sorting/Grouping tab.

and for Alignment. 32 Zoom in to see the note block. and click Save.■ ■ On the Formatting tab. 28 In the Project Browser. 34 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. enter Description. and drag it to the sheet. The Exterior Construction Notes block displays.rvt. 30 Click to place the block in the upper-left corner of the sheet. click Modify. select Exterior Construction Notes. For Header text. and select Bold. 27 In the column header (text). verify Arial in the first field. expand Sheets (all). for Heading. 33 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and double-click A103 . enter 6 mm in the second field. 31 On the Design Bar. 29 In the Project Browser. On the Appearance tab. and drag the right column control to expand the column to display the note text. 282 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . 26 Click OK.Elevations. expand Schedules/Quantities. enter Mark. select Center.

in the first field. and click Add. in the second field. enter Sheet Index. On the Filter tab. expand Schedules/Quantities. 5 In the list title field. and in the third field. 2 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drawing List. ■ 4 Click OK. select does not equal. for Filter by. Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress. select Sheet Number. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. and click Add. you quickly create a drawing list that is automatically generated from the drawings available in the project. double-click T . under Sheets (all).Title Sheet. Select Sheet Name.Title Sheet. 7 In the Project Browser. select Sheet Index. and drag it to the sheet. select Sheet Number. Using Drawing Lists | 283 . under Available fields. 6 In the Project Browser. Creating a Drawing List In this exercise. The drawing list displays. double-click T . you create an automatically populated drawing list for placement on the title sheet of the project. under Sheets (all).rvt. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. for Sort by. enter T. 3 Specify values in the Drawing List Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. 1 In the Project Browser. select Sheet Number.Using Drawing Lists In this lesson.

for Name. Create a legend view 1 On the View menu. and expand the right column to accommodate the text. door frame schedule. and so on). 10 Zoom in to the drawing list. Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress. Creating a Symbol Legend In this exercise. and door frames. building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule. annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends. enter Typical Symbol Legend.8 Click to place it on the sheet in the lower-right corner. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. click New ➤ Legend. and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or note block. The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. Annotation legends are made up of components such as section markers and door tags that are paired with text that identifies them. you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it using a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. On construction documents. and click OK. you add the completed symbol legend to multiple sheets for easy reference. windows. 284 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. Using Legends Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project. 11 Click File menu ➤ Save.rvt. doors. click Modify. NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit Architecture building model. Finally. 9 On the Design Bar. Building component legends list and identify components such as walls. On construction documents.

13 Working from the top down. 4 Add the following symbols to the legend view. selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the legend as shown. click Symbol. enter Legend Text. click Text. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. enter the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend: ■ ■ ■ Level Indicator Door Tag Window Tag Creating a Symbol Legend | 285 . and click OK twice. click Duplicate. 12 Enter Detail Callout for the text note.Hexagon : Tag Create a text type 5 On the Design Bar. 6 On the Options bar. 10 For Text Size. and click OK. Add text to the legend 11 In the Type Selector. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. 9 For Text Font. click Edit/New. click .Circle M_Door Tag M_Window Tag Sheet Keynote . ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ M_Section Head .Add symbols to the legend 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector. and click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point.Filled Level Head . enter 3mm. you create a text type with the necessary size. for Name. select Arial. You do this by duplicating the standard text type and modifying the type properties. 7 In the Element Properties dialog.

click Typical Symbol Legend. click Modify. 19 In the Project Browser. 18 In the Project Browser. click Typical Symbol Legend. double-click A102 . expand Legends. select Viewport : No Titlemark.Site Plan/Floor Plan. 15 In the Project Browser. The symbol legend is added to the project sheet. under Sheets. expand Sheets (all). 16 In the Type Selector. drag it to the lower-right corner of the sheet. drag it to the lower-right corner of the sheet. and click to place it.Unit 18.■ Sheet Keynote Place the symbol legend on a sheet 14 In the Project Browser. and click to place it. 286 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . 17 On the Design Bar. and double-click A101 .

select Viewport : No Titlemark. For Host length.20 In the Type Selector. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. enter 4th Floor Wall Types. Create a legend view 1 On the View menu. click Modify. enter 900 mm. 3 For Scale. select Walls: Basic Wall: 4th Floor Balcony Divider. and press ENTER. you create a building component legend for the wall types in the building model. 7 Click near the top left of the drawing area to specify the insertion point for the wall. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Family. 8 Click directly below the first wall to place a second wall. select Section. You use the text type that you created in a previous exercise to create annotations that identify the material used in each wall component. 22 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Legend Component. 5 On the Options Bar. for Name. select1 : 50. 21 On the Design Bar. select Medium for Detail Level. For View. 6 On the View Control Bar. A legend view is unlike any other view and can be placed onto multiple sheets for reference where required. Creating a Component Legend In this exercise. click New ➤ Legend.rvt. You then add the completed legend to a project sheet. and click OK. Creating a Component Legend | 287 . m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. Add components to the legend 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

click Text. Add titles to the legend components 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 288 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . for Family. select Walls : Basic wall : 4th Floor Exterior. 10 Select the second wall.9 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. 12 In the Type Selector. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. click Modify.

'' 15 Click below the lower wall and enter Wall Type 2 Exterior Wall. for example to force a line break between ''Wall Type 1'' and ''Patio Divider. 18 Click to the right of the wall to end the leader and specify the text start point.13 On the Options Bar. 17 Click the right side of the Wall Type 1 component to specify the leader start point. Add text to the legend 16 On the Options bar. click to add text with a single-segment leader. NOTE Press ENTER to force the text to start on the next line. pressing ENTER between component descriptions. The text note with leader is added to the legend. 19 Enter the following text. 20 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component. Creating a Component Legend | 289 . and click Modify on the Design Bar: 33mm Decking 50x100 Stud 33mm Decking. click to add text without a leader. and enter Wall Type 1 Patio Divider. for Leader. 14 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text.

25 In the Project Browser. select 4th Floor Wall Types. drag it onto the sheet. 22 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. click OK to accept the default titleblock. Tile views in the drawing window 27 In the Project Browser. and click to place it in the upper left corner of the sheet. and drag it to the new sheet. 290 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . right-click Sheets (all). 23 In the Project Browser. 29 In the project Browser. 24 Click to place the floor plan on the right side of the sheet. under Floor Plans.Place the legend on a sheet 21 In the Project Browser. and click New Sheet. double-click 4th Floor Wall Types. The floor plan and legend are added to the new sheet. select Level 4. click Modify to end the command. 28 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. under Legends. 30 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. 26 On the Design Bar. allowing you to select a component type in one drawing and then apply the type in the second drawing. double-click Level 4. The open drawings are both visible. under Floor Plans.

Creating a Component Legend | 291 . 34 Draw a rectangle around the lower-right area of the floor plan including the patio divider wall.Match a component type 31 On the Tools toolbar. 33 In the floor plan view. 32 In the 4th Floor Wall Types Legend view. click (Match Type). The view zooms in to the patio divider wall. select the Wall Type 2 component. enter ZR to zoom to a specific region. Notice that the eyedropper changes to filled. indicating that it captured the wall type properties.

click if you do not want to save the change to the wall type. Changing the detail level displays the hatching for each material of the wall component. Setting Up a Revision Table There are likely to be changes to your construction documents after you have issued the original set of documents for bid or after you have received a signed contract. The wall type in the floor plan matches wall type 2 from the Wall Type Legend. 36 On the View Control Bar. 292 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . 37 Optionally. Using Revision Tracking Revit Architecture provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds. select Medium for Detail Level.35 Select the patio divider wall. These changes can be due to owner requests. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed. You can create a sequence of revisions. 38 Click File menu ➤ Save. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the titleblock of each project sheet. contractor inquiries.

Specify a revision numbering method 1 In the Project Browser. 7 Under Visible. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog. and you can add data such as release date and description to each revision. enter Relocate 4th floor partition dividing walls. In most instances. 5 For Description. When Issued is selected. under Floor Plans. or changes in building material availability. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. In general.rvt. verify that By Project is selected for Numbering Method. If Visible is not selected. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. This is the date the revisions are sent out for review. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. Setting Up a Revision Table | 293 . In this exercise. you can specify the numbering method for revisions in a project. 2 On the Settings menu. you use the Revisions command to open a revision table in which you can add rows that represent a sequence of revisions. For example. yet as concise as possible. Add a revision to the project 4 For Release Date. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. 6 Verify that Issued is cleared. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. When you use this option. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. If you select By Sheet. click Revisions. Using the table. enter a date. double-click Level 4. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1. if the active revision is number 1. verify that Cloud and Tag is selected. 3 In the Revisions dialog.unanticipated changes in construction conditions. the revision is locked and issued to the field.

You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision. and then indicate the changes graphically with a revision cloud. You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views. Modify a wall 1 In the Project Browser. you make changes to the project floor plan. which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project. click (Move). 2 Zoom in to the left area of the drawing to see the 4th Floor Balcony Divider. move the cursor up. 3 Select the divider. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise. 294 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets .rvt. Revision clouds have read-only properties. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 5 Select the partition. including revision number and revision date. 4 On the Edit toolbar. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click to reposition the divider closer to the upper wall. but each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 4. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.8 Click OK.

Revit Architecture is now in sketch mode. Sketching Revision Clouds | 295 . click Modify. 8 In the drawing area.6 On the Design Bar. 9 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified partition. click Revision Cloud. Add a revision cloud 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 11 On the Design Bar. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. click Finish Sketch. click near the partition you moved. 10 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed.

13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. under Floor Plans. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.Modify revision cloud style 12 Select the revision cloud. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Tag ➤ By Category.rvt. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise. 16 Click OK. 15 Under the Revision Clouds category. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. 296 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . 2 Zoom in to the area with the revision cloud. and then apply the tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing. select 6. double-click Level 4. click the Annotation Objects tab. Load a revision tag 1 In the Project Browser. for Line Weight. you load a revision tag into the project.

Unnamed. In the Tags dialog. and because the revision is the first in the project. click Tags. the cloud is tagged as number 1. you create a sheet view in your project. you prevent further changes to the revision. Because a real-world project can undergo several revisions before it is completed. which creates a record of the revision and locks it from further changes. Tag a revision cloud 9 On the Options Bar. scroll down to Revision Clouds. Working with Revisions | 297 . double-click A107 . position the cursor just outside the revision cloud to the left.rfa. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save. Add a revised view to a sheet 1 In the Project Browser. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table. Working with Revisions In this exercise. If the cursor is just inside the cloud. Because you chose to number by project. You then issue a revision. 2 Enter ZR and zoom to the revision schedule in the sheet titleblock. Because there are no tags loaded for revision clouds. After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet. The information you added to the revision table in a previous exercise is displayed in the revision schedule. under Sheets. 5 In the Tags dialog. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. You do this by issuing the revision. you need to add one. the tag is displayed inside the cloud. click Training Files. 6 Click Load. you create additional revisions in the revision table.4 On the Options Bar.rvt. notice that M_Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds. 7 In the left pane of the dialog. on which you place a revised view. 10 In the drawing area. 11 Click to place the tag. click OK. 8 In the Tags dialog. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Revision Tag. select Leader. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud.

click Revisions. Create additional revisions 5 Your project may have several revisions before it is completed. On the Settings menu. you can no longer modify it. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area. select Issued. nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds. and click OK. click Revisions. for Visible.Issue a revision 3 On the Settings menu. under Add. You can continue to add revisions. 6 In the Revisions dialog. A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table. select None for each issued revision. NOTE After you issue a revision. 298 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . 7 Enter the appropriate information for this revision. 4 For the Sequence 1 revision. click New. 8 If you want to hide issued revisions in the drawing.

and open Common\Freighthouse Logo. into a project. under Sheets.rvt.JPG. click Training Files. you learn to import information from other applications. and place it on a sheet. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save.9 Click OK. double-click T . 4 Click in the upper right area of the sheet to place the logo. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. such as images. Importing from Other Applications In this lesson. you import a logo image in JPG format into a project. Importing from Other Applications | 299 .Title Sheet. text. Importing Image Files In this exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. and spreadsheets. 1 In the Project Browser.

300 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. Importing Text Documents In this exercise. 6 Select the text. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. 4 Click and drag to place a text box on the right side of the sheet.doc text file in another window. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Create a text element on the title sheet 1 In the Project Browser. for Leader.rvt. click Text. click to add text without a leader. 7 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy. Copy the text 5 Open the Training Files\Common\Bidding Statement.5 On the Design Bar. double-click T . click Modify. you import text from another application using a cut and paste function to populate a text object on a sheet. 3 On the Options Bar.Title Sheet 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Sheets.

6 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. NOTE Some formatting may be required once the text is placed in Revit Architecture. Importing Spreadsheets In this exercise. The text is pasted into the new text box on the sheet. 7 In the Revit Architecture window.mdi. and click Save. click Modify. Importing Spreadsheets | 301 .Paste the text on the sheet 8 In the Revit Architecture window. Now that you have the worksheet in a raster format. for File name. click File menu ➤ Print. 4 Under Printer. This exercise demonstrates a common method. 2 Open the Microsoft Excel worksheet.rvt. click Desktop. under Sheets.xls. you have existing information in a spreadsheet format and would like to use it in the project.JPG. 8 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. double-click A102 . The only way to do this is to convert the spreadsheet file to a raster format (JPG or BMP) and import it as an image. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Modify. 9 Click to place the image on the sheet. for Name. enter Fixture Schedule. 11 Click File menu ➤ Save. 9 On the Design Bar. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 5 Click OK. 10 Zoom in to view the pasted text.JPG. select the document writer.Unit 18. with the new text box still selected. and saved as Fixture Schedule. This process may vary from system to system. This step has been completed for you. NOTE You need to print/export the spreadsheet to a raster format. 10 On the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. you could use a screen capture utility to save the worksheet in BMP or JPG format. and open Common\Fixture Schedule. click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. 11 Zoom in to see the Fixture Schedule. 3 In Microsoft Excel. click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. Training Files\Common\Lighting Fixtures.

12 Click File menu ➤ Save. 302 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets .

for the sanctuary will not fit onto a plotted sheet as one plan. The large floor plan. The drawings include the aviary and observation area of the site.Using Dependent Views 8 In this tutorial. To effectively document this project. as well as a large lab building. you break up the plan into sections. or footprint. you work with a large project for a bird sanctuary. called dependent views. 303 .

Dependent view of lab building Dependent view of aviary and observation platforms Dependent views can be placed on sheets for documentation purposes. 304 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views .

| 305 .

The dependent view opens. enter Level 2 . for Name. you ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan and elevation Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split and to provide links to the dependent views Apply the specifications of the dependent views to other views in the project Add dependent views to sheets for documentation Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views In this exercise. right-click Level 2. double-click Level 2. 306 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . click Training Files. you ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan view Add a matchline to the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on sheets Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Apply dependent view specifications to other views Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. under Level 2. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Aviary. click Zoom To Fit. 4 In the Rename View dialog. select the crop region. under Floor Plans. 5 Click in the drawing area. right-click Dependent on Level 2. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent.Using Dependent Views in Documentation In this lesson. 2 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Project Browser. and on the Zoom flyout of the View toolbar. and click OK.rvt Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. and open Metric\ m_Dependent_Views. 6 In the drawing area.

and the model crop is the interior crop region. 8 Click the inside control on the bottom and drag it up. 7 Select the inside (model crop) control on the right and drag it toward the center of the view to crop out the lab building. confining the view to the upper-left area of the drawing (the aviary). Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 307 . The annotation crop is the exterior crop region.The following image shows a plan view with the model and annotation crop regions visible.

13 In the Rename View dialog. for Name. enter Level 2 . 14 Click in the drawing area. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 11 In the Project Browser. 15 Select the crop region. 12 In the Project Browser.9 On the View Control Bar. right-click Dependent on Level 2. right-click Level 2. click (Hide Crop Region). click Zoom To Fit. 16 Use the inside controls to crop the view to the lower-right building (the labs). 10 On the Zoom flyout. and click Rename.Labs. and on the Zoom flyout. 308 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . click Zoom To Fit. and click OK.

under Floor Plans. Matchlines are annotation lines that you add to a view to indicate where a view is split. 20 On the Zoom flyout. Add matchline to indicate split view 21 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 2. click (Hide Crop Region). click Zoom To Fit. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 309 .17 Select the outside control on the left and drag it to the left to reveal the notes. 18 On the Design Bar. click Matchline. 22 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. The outside controls adjust the annotation crop region. 19 On the View Control Bar.

Click above the left corner of the lab building. click Finish Sketch. Move the cursor left about 4800 mm. 310 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . Click just below the lower intersection of the lab building and the aviary.23 Draw the matchline by specifying the following points: ■ Click above and to the right of the intersection of the lab building and the aviary.) ■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor down and click just above the lab building. 24 On the Design Bar. and click. (Align with the second column of lab cubicles.

enter Level 2 Aviary. 26 In the Object Styles dialog.25 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. expand Sheets. select 9. 28 For Line Pattern. 30 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 32 In the Sheet Title dialog. and drag it onto the sheet. 33 In the Project Browser. 34 Click to place the view in the center of the sheet. right-click A101 . 27 Under Matchline. under Floor Plans. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 311 . for Line Weight. Create sheets and place dependent views 29 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. click OK to accept the default titleblock. select Double Dash. and click OK. for Name. click the Annotation Objects tab.Unnamed.Aviary. click Level 2 . 31 In the Project Browser. and click OK. and click Rename.

for Target view. click View Reference. 36 Use the same method to create another sheet.Aviary is selected. Add reference annotations to sheets 37 In the Project Browser. 312 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . under Floor Plans. rename the sheet Level 2 Labs. 38 On the View tab of the Design Bar. You add view references near the matchline to annotate and link to the dependent views. and place the Level 2 .Labs dependent view on the sheet. 39 On the Options Bar. click Modify.35 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 2. 40 Click to the left of the top of the matchline. verify that Floor Plan: Level 2 .

NOTE Double-clicking a view reference opens the dependent view that it references. select Floor Plan: Level 2 . 42 Click to the right of the top of the matchline. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 313 . 44 On the Design Bar. 45 On the Zoom flyout. click Modify. 43 Use the same method to add View References above (A101) and below (A102) the lower-left end of the matchline. click (Show Crop Region). 47 On the View Control Bar. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 2 . click Zoom To Fit.Aviary. 46 In the Project Browser.Labs. 41 On the Options Bar.The Sheet number of the dependent view displays to the left of the matchline. for Target view.

48 Select the crop region. the tags for Cubicles 3 and 14 display. NOTE View references display in all views except for the view that it is referencing. right-click. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. leaving 4 rooms visible in the view. after modifying the annotation crop region. 314 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . 50 Use the same method to hide Cubicle 14 (directly below Cubicle 3). and drag it slightly to the right to expand the annotation region so you can see the view reference. 49 If. Notice that the view reference for the aviary does not display in the aviary dependent view. select the room tag for Cubicle 3 (upper-right room tag) in the annotation area. click the far right control.

54 In the Project Browser. right-click Level 2. 56 Double-click Dependent on Level 1. 55 On the Zoom flyout. click Zoom To Fit. and double-click Dependent (2) on Level 1. 53 In the Select Views dialog. click Zoom To Fit. under Floor Plans. and click OK. expand Level 1. 57 On the Zoom flyout. After you have set up dependent view configuration for one view. and click Apply Dependent Views. select all views in the list. Apply dependent view settings to other plans 52 In the Project Browser. click (Hide Crop Region).51 On the View Control Bar. Notice that the matchline and crop regions from Level 2 are applied to Level 1. but are not placed on sheets. New dependent views display in the Project Browser under the primary view. you can apply the view and crop region specifications to parallel views of the same scale. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 315 .

and double-click South Elevation. 5 In the drawing area. 3 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 316 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . for Name. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. The matchline is already placed in the view. 4 In the Rename View dialog.Left. right-click South Elevation. The dependent view opens. and open Metric\ m_Dependent_Views. select the Crop Region. you ■ ■ ■ ■ Create dependent split views of an elevation view Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on a sheet Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click OK. 2 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. enter South Elevation .Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views In this exercise.rvt Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. expand South Elevation. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). right-click Dependent on South Elevation.

Right. Create a sheet and place both dependent views on the sheet 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 13 On the View Control Bar. cropping the view to the aviary. 17 In the Sheet Title dialog. right-click A103 Unnamed. 12 Select the inside crop region control on the left. and drag it toward the center of the drawing. for Name. 9 In the Project Browser. 10 In the Rename View dialog. enter South Elevation .6 Select the inside crop region control on the right. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. and click Rename. under Sheets. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. click OK to accept the default titleblock. and drag it toward the center of the view. for Name. right-click South Elevation. and click OK. and click Rename. enter South Elevation. 15 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. and click OK. 11 Select the crop region. click (Hide Crop Region). cropping the view to the lab building. click (Hide Crop Region). 7 On the View Control Bar. 8 In the Project Browser. 16 In the Project Browser. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 317 .

verify that Elevation: South Elevation . click Modify. 20 In the Project Browser. 23 In the Project Browser. 25 On the Options Bar. under Elevations. and drag it onto the sheet. 19 Click to place the elevation view at the top of the sheet. click View Reference. under Elevations. click South Elevation .Left is selected. under Elevations. click South Elevation .Left.Right.18 In the Project Browser. 318 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . for Target view. 24 On the Views tab of the Design Bar. 27 Click to the left of the bottom of the matchline. 22 On the Design Bar. double-click South Elevation. 21 Click to place the elevation view at the bottom of the sheet. 26 Click to the left of the top of the matchline at the center of the elevation. and drag it onto the sheet.

South Elevation.28 On the Options Bar. 31 In the Project Browser. 30 On the Design Bar. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 319 .Right. double-click A103 . click Modify. select Elevation: South Elevation . under Sheets (all). for Target view. 29 Click to the right of the top and the bottom of the matchline.

and use the annotation crop controls to modify it. 320 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . and click Activate View.NOTE If the view references are not visible. you can modify the annotation region for the dependent view from the sheet. Right-click the view. Select the crop region.

Viewing and Rendering 4 321 .

322 | Chapter 9 Viewing and Rendering .

More specifically. and how to use plan regions within floor plans and reflected ceiling plans. You learn how to access and create building model views and how to change the visibility of building components and annotations within views. you learn to create and customize views of building information models. you learn how to change the visibility of detail components.Viewing 9 In this tutorial. how to control fill pattern colors. 323 .

locate the Project Browser. sections. and three-dimensional (3D) views. Both hidden lines and window tags display in the east elevation view. 2 In the Project Browser. The current file name is displayed in the Project Browser title bar. on the Standard toolbar.Viewing a Building Model In this lesson. expand Elevations. TIP If the Project Browser does not display. and double-click East. A new view displays a wireframe view of the east elevation view of the building model. click .rvt. expand Views (all). In the left pane of the Open dialog. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Metric\m_Viewing_Exercise. you learn to create and customize user-defined views of a building information model. you learn how to access different views of the building model. The Project Browser is displayed by default between the Design Bar and the drawing area. including elevation and three-dimensional views. Open an elevation view of the building model 1 On the left side of the drawing area. Exploring the Building Model In this exercise. You also learn how to control the visibility of different building components and annotations within building model views. and learn how to control the visibility of building components and annotations within views. click Training Files. You create elevations. 324 | Chapter 9 Viewing .

The 3D view is displayed in a new viewing window. 7 Click OK. Turn off the display of window tags in the elevation view 4 On the View menu. Exploring the Building Model | 325 . This hides the lines that show through to the exterior of the elevation view.Display the elevation view with hidden lines 3 On the View Control Bar. 6 Under Visibility. Create a 3D view of the building model 8 On the View toolbar. the east elevation. The window tags are no longer displayed in this view. click the Annotation Categories tab. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides for Elevation: East dialog. This change is applied only to the active view. This change is applied only in this elevation view. The east elevation view displays with hidden lines. The default name of the view is {3D}. and click Hidden Line. Notice that window tags continue to display in the view. click . click Visibility/Graphics. scroll down and clear Window Tags. click Model Graphics Style.

13 View the Dynamic View dialog in the lower left corner of the screen. 326 | Chapter 9 Viewing . double-click My 3D View. and spin the building model by clicking the appropriate button in this dialog. and click Rename. and click OK. and expand 3D Views. NOTE If you have a pointing device with a middle wheel. Save the current 3D view 14 In the Project Browser. enter My 3D View. click X to close the view. you can enable pan mode by pressing and holding the middle wheel button down. zoom.9 On the View toolbar. click to reorient the view. 18 In the Project Browser. . 11 Pan the view by clicking and dragging the cursor in the drawing area. under 3D Views. you can enable zoom mode by rolling the middle wheel. Move the mouse to pan the view. 12 Press and hold CTRL. The view follows the movement of the cursor. NOTE If you have a pointing device with a middle wheel. You can pan. right-click {3D}. 17 In the upper right corner of the viewing window. . expand Views (all). 10 Move the cursor to the drawing window and notice that it now displays as a hand This means you are in pan mode. 15 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. Notice that the view name is updated in the title bar of the viewing window and in the Project Browser. and notice that the cursor displays as a magnifying glass This indicates that you are in zoom mode. 16 In the Rename View dialog.

2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 3 Add the camera to the view by specifying two points: one for the camera position and the other for the camera target point: ■ ■ Specify the first point in the top right corner of the drawing. and distance from the target. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Creating a Perspective View with a Camera In this exercise. the new view named 3D View 1 is displayed by default in a perspective view. expand Views (all). right-click in the Design Bar. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. Specify the second point in one of the rooms in the building. After you specify the second point (the view target). click Camera. and double-click Level 1. you create a perspective view of the building model with a camera. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. outside of the dimension lines. Creating a Perspective View with a Camera | 327 . as shown in the following illustration. and click View.Notice that the view continues to display with hidden lines and no window tags. Cameras define the eye point. Create the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. “Creating a Perspective View with a Camera” on page 327.rvt. expand Floor Plans. m_Viewing_Exercise. eye height.

5 On the View menu. Press and hold the left mouse button.4 To resize the view to see the entire floor model. Press and hold the left mouse button. You can use the walkthrough controls in this dialog to move the camera position and change the view. Move the cursor up. Change the camera projection settings 6 On the View menu. select the blue control grips on the sides of the crop region and move them out. 328 | Chapter 9 Viewing . 9 To move the camera forward and backward in the view: ■ ■ ■ Click Forward/Back and move the cursor into the perspective view. click Dynamically Modify View. Move the cursor up and down in the view to move the cursor forward and backward. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. 8 To move the camera eye position higher or lower: ■ ■ ■ Click Dolly and move the cursor into the perspective view. and sideways to see how the view changes. 7 In the Dynamic View dialog. click the Walkthrough tab located at the bottom of the dialog. down.

click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. Four views of the model display in the drawing area. Move the cursor side to side in the view to rotate the view. Creating a Perspective View with a Camera | 329 . height. 13 On the View menu. Press and hold the left mouse button. 11 Adjust the view as shown in the following illustration. and target 12 On the Window menu.10 To rotate the camera around the target: ■ ■ ■ Click Turn and move the cursor into the perspective view. You may need to reposition the view with the other controls. Change the camera position. click Tile.

14 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 16 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. 330 | Chapter 9 Viewing . 15 In the Project Browser. right-click 3D View 1. The border of the window that contains the Level 1 view highlights. double-click 3D View 1. double-click Level 1. The camera and the view direction of the camera are displayed in the appropriate views. and click Show Camera.

right-click. 18 Change the target and eye elevation of the camera by modifying its properties: ■ ■ Select the camera in My 3D View. ■ 3D View 1 immediately updates to show the change. In the Element Properties dialog. enter 15000 for Eye Elevation and 1700 for Target Elevation. and move it to another location. Creating a Perspective View with a Camera | 331 . 3D View 1 should update immediately after you move the target point of the camera. and click Shading. TIP The updated view depends on the location of the camera before you change the elevation values. click Model Graphics Style. Click OK. and click Element Properties. Use a section box to clip the model 19 On the View toolbar. under Camera.17 In My 3D View. select the camera target point (the magenta grip). 20 On the View Control Bar. click to create a new 3D view.

25 Select and move the lower right grip on the section box closer to the model. as shown in the following illustration. A rotation tool is also displayed. A section box is displayed around the model. under Extents.21 Rotate the view as shown in the following illustration. 22 On the View menu. The section box highlights and grips are displayed on its faces. 332 | Chapter 9 Viewing . 24 Click the section box. and click OK. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. select Section Box. click View Properties.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.26 Click and hold the rotation tool. Sketch a section line in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser. “Creating a Section View” on page 333. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. and maximize this view. you create a section view by sketching a section line in a plan view. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Creating a Section View | 333 . click Section. m_Viewing_Exercise.rvt. double-click Level 1. Creating a Section View In this exercise. expand Floor Plans. and rotate the section box around the model.

4 On the Design Bar. and click Find Referring Views. select the section view. and click Open View. right-click. and drag the section depth grip below the middle horizontal wall as shown in the following illustration. The box represents the extents of the section view as well as the viewing direction of the section. View the section 5 To view the section. Notice a dashed green box with blue grips is displayed on the section line. 334 | Chapter 9 Viewing . click Modify. You may need to zoom closer to the walls in order to see the fill pattern. NOTE Fill pattern is dependent on the zoom ratio. or in the Project Browser. select Floor Plan: Level 1. 6 In the Project Browser. and double-click Section 1.3 Click to the left of the left wall of the building model. expand Sections. double-click the section head. 8 Select the section line. and then click to the right of the lower right wall to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration. 7 In the Go To View dialog.

10 Double-click the section head to display the section view. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. under Floor Plans. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 12 Select the section line. Change the view direction of the section 11 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. Notice the change in section depth. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. 13 Click the control arrows to flip the section view. Notice that the elevation symbol arrow points to the nearest wall as you move through the building model. 15 Double-click the section head to display the section view. you learn to create an elevation view in a project by adding an elevation symbol to a plan view. click Elevation. and select and move the section depth grip under the lower wall. click Modify. double-click Level 1.9 On the Design Bar. 3 Without clicking in the drawing area. You may need to adjust your zoom settings to see the elevation symbol. Control arrows are displayed near the section tag. Notice the change in the view direction. click Modify. Add an elevation symbol 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. An elevation symbol displays at the end of the cursor. Creating Elevation Views | 335 . Creating Elevation Views In this exercise. double-click Level 1. m_Viewing_Exercise. 14 On the Design Bar. “Creating Elevation Views” on page 335. move the cursor around the building model.

and click.a by default. The elevation is named Elevation 1 . and double-click the elevation symbol arrow. indicating the possible elevation views that you can create. The check mark in the right box indicates the current elevation view. under Elevations. 336 | Chapter 9 Viewing . double-click Elevation 1 . click Modify.a. View the elevation 6 To view the new elevation. 10 In the Project Browser. The elevation symbol is displayed with four check boxes. 8 Select the center of the elevation symbol.b. 7 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. Make sure the elevation symbol is pointing towards the lobby doors. 9 Select the box shown in the following illustration to add a new elevation view.4 To create an elevation view of the building lobby. zoom in. double-click Level 1. Elevation 1 .b. Elevation 1 . place the cursor inside the building facing the lobby entrance. 5 On the Design Bar. Do not select the arrow.

12 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. click Save As. where each layer is assigned a different material. you can set the fill pattern color for the brick to red. you can set the color of the coarse scale fill pattern for wall types. click Training Files. and open Common\c_Showroom. and other families. In the left pane of the Open dialog. This means that in views with a coarse level of detail. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. This includes walls.11 If you want to save your changes. Controlling Fill Pattern Colors In this lesson. and the insulation color to pink. and save the exercise file with a unique name. You can control the fill pattern color of the cut and surface patterns for objects that obtain their fill pattern definition from materials. In addition. and applies to phasing override materials as well. such as Brick on CMU. a shade of gray. roofs. Controlling the Fill Pattern Color of a Material In this exercise. on the File menu. in this case. you learn to control the fill pattern colors of a material. floors.rvt. you can choose the wall fill color for a wall type. You change the color of the cut and surface patterns in the brick material assigned to the exterior wall in the building model. For example. such as the one below. Controlling Fill Pattern Colors | 337 . in a compound wall. you learn to control the fill pattern color of a material and set the coarse scale fill pattern color of a wall type.

Each layer is designated by the material settings of the layer. and double-click 3D. 3 In the Materials dialog. and click OK twice.Brick for Name. click Color. 4 Under Cut Pattern. The surface pattern of the brick is black. View the surface pattern of the exterior brick walls 6 In the Project Browser. A color is assigned to both the Surface Pattern and Cut Pattern options in the dialog. expand Views (all). expand Sections (Section Head . 338 | Chapter 9 Viewing . The brick cut pattern on the left is displayed as red. Change the brick surface pattern from black to white 8 On the Settings menu. 5 In the Color dialog. Notice the different fill patterns assigned to each layer within the floor and wall structure.Change the color of the brick cut pattern for the exterior walls 1 In the Project Browser. expand 3D Views. click Materials. select red.Filled). click Materials.Level 3.Brick for Name. 2 On the Settings menu. 7 Zoom in on the brick pattern of the exterior walls. select Masonry . and double-click Wall/Floor Join . expand Views (all). select Masonry . 9 In the Materials dialog.

rvt. c_Showroom. 11 In the Color dialog. you learn to set the coarse scale fill pattern color for a wall type. select white. Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type | 339 . click Color. The walls in the floor plan that you work with are displayed with a gray fill pattern when displayed in a view with a coarse level of detail. and click OK twice. The view level of this view is set to display in Coarse detail as indicated by the Detail Level instance parameter value under Graphics. 2 On the View menu. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. expand Views (all). 12 Proceed to the next exercise. “Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type” on page 339. click View Properties. The surface pattern of the brick is now white. expand Floor Plans. View the detail level setting of the view 1 In the Project Browser.10 Under Surface Pattern. You change the coarse scale fill pattern from the default color of black to a shade of gray for a wall type. Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type In this exercise. 3 Click Cancel to exit the dialog without making any changes. and double-click Level 1.

select Solid fill for Name. 14 If you want to save your changes. double-click Level 2. although they may have 340 | Chapter 9 Viewing . 12 On the View Control Bar. the Coarse Scale Fill Color is black and the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern is set to none.Change coarse scale fill pattern color of the arced wall 4 Select the south arced wall. click in the Coarse Scale Fill Color value field. on the File menu. click in the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern parameter value field and click 9 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 7 In the Color dialog. and click Fine. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. and click Element Properties. . 5 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 Zoom in on the arced wall. click Detail Level. and click OK three times. and click OK. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Notice that the surface pattern and color of the brick wall that display in a coarse detail level are not applied because the detail level is set to Fine. click Edit/New. the plan regions cannot overlap each other. If you create more than one plan region in a file. 10 On the Design Bar. Creating a View Plan Region In this lesson. right-click. you work with a split-level building model that requires a different view range than the rest of the view. 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. View the arced wall in fine detail 11 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. Plan regions are closed sketches that you can create in floor plan and reflected ceiling plan (RCP) views only. click Modify. select a shade of gray. By default. click Save As. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. The wall type is displayed as solid gray within any view where the Detail Level is set to Coarse.

coincident edges. refer to the online Help for more information. and you cannot control their visibility. it does not display in the Level 1 floor plan. By creating a plan region in the view with a different cut plane height.rvt. Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. If you are not familiar with view ranges in Revit Architecture. you can display the stepped portion of the walls in the Level 1 floor plan. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. or pattern. Plan regions do not work with linked Revit Architecture files. line color. and open Metric\m_Plan_Region. Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan | 341 . Because the stepped portion of the walls in the building model is above the cut plane height in the Level 1 floor plan view. line type. click Training Files. you create a plan region in the Level 1 floor plan of the following building model.

■ ■ ■ Specify a point at the intersection of the two dashed blue lines on the top left. and double-click Level 1.View the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. and click View. click . the south elevation is also displayed. The stepped portion of the project walls and windows are not displayed because the cut plane does not intersect any of the model geometry above this height. so you can view the height of the walls and windows. click Plan Region. Plan regions have a single property. which is similar to the view range for plan views. view range. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. expand Views (all). right-click in the Design Bar. You use the view range property to control the cut plane. the top and bottom clip planes. 342 | Chapter 9 Viewing . click Lines. 3 In the Level 1 view. Specify a point at the intersection of the two dashed blue lines on the bottom right. sketch the plan region using the blue tick marks for guidance: ■ On the Design Bar. The cut plane height of the view range for this view is 1200 mm. On the Options Bar. Add a plan region to view the stepped portion of the model 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and the view depth plane. expand Floor Plans. In the following illustration.

Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan | 343 . 6 In the View Range dialog. Press ESC to end the command. and click Element Properties. The Level 1 floor plan should display as shown in the following illustration. select Parent View’s Level (Level 1) for Cut Plane. click Edit for View Range.■ ■ On the Design Bar. and then click OK twice. 4 Select the plan region. enter 4000 for the Top Offset. 9 On the Design Bar. top and bottom clip planes. and view depth) in the view range is the same as the level used to define the corresponding plane in the parent view. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. and enter 2800 for the cut plane Offset. 8 Click Apply. the line turns red. under Extents. By selecting Parent View’s Level. The plan region displays as a dashed green line. you specify that the level used to define each plane (cut plane. This means that the plan region view is going to cut all geometry at 2800 mm above Level 1. 7 Because the top clip plane value cannot be set lower than the cut plane. right-click. When you select the plan region. click Finish Sketch. click Modify.

on the File menu. 10 If you want to save your changes. click Save As. and save the exercise file with a unique name.The following illustration demonstrates how the level 1 floor plan view is being viewed with the plan region. 344 | Chapter 9 Viewing . 11 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.

to place and render decals to create signs. billboards. and posters. 345 .Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs 10 In this tutorial. and to create walkthroughs of your building information model. you learn to use the AccuRender® Radiosity and Raytrace features in Revit Architecture 2008 to create rendered interior and exterior views of your building information model. AccuRender is the rendering engine incorporated into Revit Architecture that is used to produce rendered views.

You also learn to create a new material and apply it to a building component. 346 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . you: ■ ■ ■ change the texture of the brick material applied to the exterior walls of the building. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model In this exercise. When you complete these changes.Rendering an Exterior View In this lesson. define a new polished aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions on the front curtain wall. After you create the perspective view. you raytrace a region of the building that includes the exterior wall. you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a building model and render it with the AccuRender Raytrace feature. and then raytrace the view to produce the final rendered exterior view. you learn how to view and modify the material that is applied to a building component in a building model. You learn to create and apply materials to a building model. change the material of the front terrace of the building from the default material to asphalt. you select a scene that defines the model environment. In this exercise. and the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes. You work with a building model that already has material applied to it. the floor. and create the perspective view that you want to render. add realistic three-dimensional trees to the building site.

TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. right-click in the Design Bar.Brick. click Edit for Structure. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. Change the brick texture of the exterior wall finish material 7 On the Settings menu. Verify that the material defined for the exterior finish layer (Layer 1) of the building model is Masonry . 9 Under AccuRender. click Wall. 8 In the Materials dialog. under Name. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Materials. View the finish material of the exterior walls 1 Verify that the 3D view of the townhouse building model is displayed. and click the tab in the context menu. click . and click Edit/New. verify that Co-house .Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. click Training Files. 6 Click Cancel three times to return to the 3D view of the building model without making any changes to the exterior finish at this time. click next to Texture to display the Material Library. 3 On the Options Bar. select Masonry .rvt. under Construction.Brick.Heavyweight block is displayed for Type.Cavity Wall . Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 347 . In the left pane of the Open dialog.

26 Click OK twice. 348 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . click Edit for Structure. 23 Under AccuRender. select Carib. 12 Click OK twice. under _accurender. under Name. 24 In the Material Library. select Polished. expand Masonry and click Brick. . under Construction.Plain. enter Aluminum. 27 On the Design Bar. 14 On the Options Bar. 10 In the left pane of the Material Library dialog. under Name. 28 Select one of the curtain wall mullions on the exterior face of the building.Asphalt. and click 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 22 In the New Material dialog. select Site . for Layer 2. click Duplicate. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog.A preview of the brick texture that is currently assigned to the walls is displayed in the right pane of the Material Library. Define a new polished aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions 20 On the Settings menu. click Modify and select the terrace in front of the building. and click Aluminum. under _accurender. click Modify. click next to Texture to display the Material Library. click in the Material field that contains Default Floor. click Edit/New. verify that Floor : Floor 1 displays in the Type Selector. 25 Under Name.200mm. 16 In the Type Properties dialog. You can view the new brick texture when you raytrace a region of the building in a later step. expand Metals. 11 Under Name. 21 In the Materials dialog. 19 Click OK four times. 18 In the Materials dialog. click Materials. Change the material of the terrace from the default material to asphalt 13 On the Design Bar. Polished and click OK.Running. and click .

TIP If you do not select the curtain wall mullion on the first selection. select Exterior under Type. click in the Material field. click . and curtain wall mullions to which you made material changes. 32 In the Materials dialog. and then click . Make sure the region includes the exterior walls. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. This completes the changes in materials and textures that you make for the building model. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 349 . 33 Click OK three times. and draw the rectangular region shown in the following illustration. and click OK. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. select the curtain wall mullion again. click No. click Region Raytrace. Polished. under Name. Raytrace a region of the building to view the material changes that you made 34 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. 29 On the Options Bar. When Curtain Wall Mullions: Rectangular Mullion displays in the Status Bar at the bottom of the screen. under Materials and Finishes. floor. 35 Move the cursor over the building model. press TAB to cycle your selection through different building model components. select Aluminum. verify that New is selected. 36 In the Scene Selection dialog. click Edit/New. 37 If you are prompted to turn off the lights in the scene.

click Display Model to end the Region Raytrace command and redisplay the building model in hidden line wireframe. expand Views (all). Cnst. 350 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 38 On the Design Bar. Add red maple trees to the site 1 In the Project Browser. when you render an exterior view of the model. and curtain wall mullions are rendered (this takes a few moments). the leaves of the trees display as indicated by the season and location specified in the render scene settings. In a later exercise. and double-click 1st Flr. you place two different types of trees on the building site. 39 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. Adding Trees to the Site In this exercise. floor. m_Cohouse. producing a photorealistic effect. expand Floor Plans. “Adding Trees to the Site” on page 350. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.The portion of the building that you selected is raytraced and the materials that you changed and applied to the exterior walls.

Available tree types are listed in the Type Selector by their Latin names. and add it to the site 6 On the Design Bar.2 Zoom out so you can easily view the area surrounding the building model. 4 In the Type Selector. 5 Move the cursor to a location on the building site. 3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. and click . select any of the deciduous trees. The tree that you selected in this step is a red maple. Adding Trees to the Site | 351 . right-click in the Design Bar. and click to place a tree. and click Site Component.Deciduous : Acer Rubrum . Create a new type of tree. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. and click Site. select M_Tree . 7 In the Type Selector.9 Meters. click Site Component. Continue to place trees until you have added several red maples to the building site as shown in the following illustration. click Modify.

352 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 12 In the Plant Library. 15 Under Other. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. enter Black Oak. “Creating a Perspective View” on page 352. you define the exterior perspective view of the building model that you want to render. 10 In the Name dialog. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. to 17 Press ESC to end tree placement. 16 Move the cursor to the building site. and click Deciduous.8 In the Element Properties dialog. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. enter 7000mm for Plant Height. click Edit/New. under Identity Data. and click OK twice. The black oak is shorter than the red maple trees that you added to the site. and click OK. and click OK. select Black Oak for Type Comments. and then click display the Plant Library. 13 Under Name. and place two black oak trees. click Duplicate. under Other. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. m_Cohouse. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. as shown in the following illustration. under accurender. click in the Value field for Plant Name. expand Trees and Shrubs. Black. select Oak. Creating a Perspective View In this exercise.rvt.

3 Select and move the crop boundary grips until the perspective view displays as in the following illustration. click Camera. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target point: ■ ■ Specify the first point on the site facing the building to position the camera. on the View tab of the Design Bar. Cnst. The new perspective view is displayed. Specify the second point in front of the building facade to define the target point of the camera. view open. Creating a Perspective View | 353 .Place a camera in the first floor view 1 With the 1st Flr.

double-click 1st Flr. The red triangle represents the FOV (field of vision) angle and the back clipping plane of the view. 354 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . right-click 3D View 1 (the default perspective view name). The camera position is displayed in the 1st Flr. Cnst. 5 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. and click Show Camera.Modify the camera position and back clipping plane in the perspective view 4 In the Project Browser under Views (all). 6 Select and move the FOV boundary grip to adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane as shown in the following illustration. view. Cnst. expand 3D Views.

under 3D Views. and environment settings that you use to render the view. right-click 3D View 1. “Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View” on page 355. 8 In the Rename View dialog.7 In the Project Browser. Display the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. and click OK. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. you select a scene and specify time. m_Cohouse. Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View In this exercise. and click Rename. date. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. double-click Exterior.rvt. place. lighting. Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View | 355 . enter Exterior.

3 In the Scene Selection dialog. under Scene Settings. verify that Daylight Savings Time is selected. clear Use Sun and Shadow Settings from view. and Place from the Specify Solar Angles list. and drag the slider to set the time to 2:30 PM. 356 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . click Settings. Notice that the name of the tab changes to Date and Time. 6 Select By Date. Select the render scene settings 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. TIP Use the left and right arrow keys to adjust the minutes precisely. click OK to accept the existing scene (Scene 1).You must define a scene because this is the first time settings are being applied to this view. click the Solar Angles tab. and click Sun. 5 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog. 4 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. 7 Under Date. Time. enter 10 (October) for Month and 5 for Day. 8 Under Time.

22 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. 18 Click Material. click No. 17 Under Advanced. click Capture Rendering. 28 If you are prompted to turn off the lights in the scene. 11 Scroll down. select Ground Plane. Rye. click Environment. 13 Enter . Save the rendered view 29 On the Design Bar. Dark. 27 On the Options Bar. select Grass. Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View | 357 . 12 Click the Settings Tab. under Background Color. MA. select Autumn for Plant Season. and click OK. 25 Enter 150 for Resolution. 26 On the Design Bar. under Scene Settings. 16 In the Environment dialog.9 Click the Place tab. The Ground Plane tab displays.) 14 Click OK. click .20 for Cloudiness. 20 In the Name list. 21 Click OK twice. select Good for Quality. The rendered exterior perspective view is displayed. and click OK. 19 In the Material Library. and enter bo. 15 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. This setting produces a level of cloudiness in the sky that ranges from 0 (no clouds) to 1. USA. Render the perspective view 24 On the Design Bar. click Site. and select Boston. verify that Automatic Sky is selected. under _accurender. click Image Size. The rendered view is saved in the project and can be accessed from the Project Browser. 10 Click in the Cities list. 23 Under Raytrace Settings. under Scene Settings. click Raytrace.00 (many clouds.

expand Renderings. on the File menu.rvt. you add ArchVision realpeople (RPC people) to the floor plan of the second floor. Adding RPC People In this exercise. To create the rendered scene. and finally. click Display Model to end rendering and redisplay the wireframe perspective view of the building model. use both Radiosity and Raytracing to render the view. and double-click Exterior to display the rendered view of the townhouse that you saved. define the view and render scene settings. 358 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .30 On the Design Bar. m_Cohouse. Rendering an Interior View In this lesson. you add two RPC people to the interior view that you render in a later exercise. you render an interior view of the building model that you worked with in the previous lesson. Open second floor plan to display the interior scene that you will render 1 In the Project Browser under Views (all). Redisplay the rendered view 31 In the Project Browser under Views (all). 32 If you want to save this exercise. 33 Proceed to the next lesson. Cnst. RPC people are represented by a circle in plan view and resemble real people only when rendered in a 3D view. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. expand Floor Plans. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and double-click 2nd Flr. “Rendering an Interior View” on page 358. click Save As.

click Component.2 Zoom in on the left side of the living room as shown. and then move the cursor to rotate her so she is facing up and to the right (northeast). 5 On the Options Bar. select M_RPC Female: Cathy. Adding RPC People | 359 . 7 Repeat steps 4 .6 to select and place M_RPC Male: Alex to the right of Cathy and facing up and to the left (northwest). 3 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. 6 Click to place Cathy to the right of the sofa and below the table. select Rotate after placement. 4 In the Type Selector.

2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point: ■ Specify the first point on the floor plan facing the table and RPC people to place the camera. click Camera. Add a camera 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you create the interior perspective view that you will render in the final exercise in this lesson. Creating the Interior Perspective View In this exercise.8 Proceed to the next exercise. m_Cohouse.rvt. “Creating the Interior Perspective View” on page 360. 360 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.

Cnst.■ Specify the target point of the camera in front of the corner of the table. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 361 . double-click 2nd Flr. The interior perspective is displayed. but you must adjust the field of vision and far clipping plane to display more of the view. 3 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans.

and click OK. click the dimensions for Size. enter 229 mm for Width. 362 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . double-click 3D View 1 to redisplay the interior perspective view. Resize the perspective view 6 On the Options Bar.4 Select and move the FOV boundary grip to adjust field of vision and back clipping plane as shown in the following illustration. under Size. 5 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. 8 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. and click Rename. enter 178 mm for Height. right-click 3D View 1. 7 In the Crop Region Size dialog.

click View Properties. and click OK. 15 Select and move the section box grips until only the room that you added RPC people to and that you want to render is visible. enter Interior. 14 On the Design Bar. click to display the 3D view of the building model. 12 On the View menu.9 In the Rename View dialog. 11 On the View menu. under Extents. A section box is displayed around the building model. click Shading to view the effects of the section box when you add it. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 363 . and select the section box. select Section Box. Add a section box to limit the extents of the rendered view 10 On the View toolbar. click Modify. Grips are displayed on the section box. and click OK.

and Place from the Specify Solar Angles list. select New. Creating a New Render Scene In this exercise. 13 Click the Settings tab. 12 Scroll down. m_Cohouse. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and environment settings used to render the view. 10 Click the Place tab. and enter Interior Scene for Name. clear Use Sun and Shadow Settings from view. 4 Under Type. under Background Color.This process allows you to limit the geometry that will be rendered when you create a rendering of your interior view. 15 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog. 3 In the Scene Selection dialog. and click OK. 7 Select By Date. click the Solar Angles tab. specify a file location and name for the scene settings. USA. 364 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 8 Under Date. enter 6 (June) for Month and 6 for Day. and enter bo. under Scene Settings. “Creating a New Render Scene” on page 364. 5 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. 6 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog. double-click Interior to display the interior perspective view. you create a render scene to specify the time. Select the render scene settings 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. under Scene Settings. 9 Under Time. date. click Settings. verify that Daylight Savings Time is selected. 16 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. TIP Use the left and right arrow keys to precisely adjust the minutes. 14 Click Save. select Interior. and drag the slider to set the time to 8:30 PM. 17 In the Environment dialog. MA. 11 Click in the Cities list. and click Sun. verify that Automatic Sky is selected. By limiting the geometry. under 3D Views.rvt. click Environment. click OK. and select Boston. and click Save. you reduce the rendering time. on the Main tab. place. Notice that the name of the tab changes to Date and Time. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. Time. Display the interior perspective view 1 In the Project Browser.

20 In the Material Library. Defining Daylights and Rendering the View | 365 . select {3D}. Render the perspective view 4 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. under 3D Views. 21 In the Name list. such as windows and doors. 24 Under Scene Settings. The 3D view of the building model with the section box is displayed. under accurender. Defining Daylights and Rendering the View In this exercise. double-click {3D}. click Daylights. under Use View’s Section Box. The Ground Plane tab displays. select Ground Plane. 5 On the Design Bar. click Radiate. 3 Select the curtain wall on the second floor (Walls: Curtain Wall. m_Cohouse. you define daylights for the glazed panels of the curtain wall and render the view. click Site. When you define daylights for the curtain wall panels. Define daylights for the glazed panels of the curtain wall 1 In the Project Browser. “Defining Daylights and Rendering the View” on page 365. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. select Summer for Plant Season. Curtain Wall 1). 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. select Grass.18 Under Advanced. and click OK. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. Dark. 22 Click OK twice. you allow sunlight to pass through the panels when you render the view.rvt. 19 Click Material. as daylight sources. 23 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. double-click Interior. click OK. You can select families with transparent materials. Rye. 6 In the Radiosity Information dialog.

When radiate completes. you rendered an exterior and an interior view. 9 If you want to save your changes. click Save As. on the File menu. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 8 On the Options Bar. 10 Close the exercise file. the following rendered view is displayed. begins. which can take several minutes. The RPC people do not display in the view until you raytrace them in the next steps. 7 On the Design Bar. select Medium (150 dpi) for Resolution. . You learned to use both the Radiosity and Raytracing features included in the AccuRender render engine. click Raytrace. Light bounce is calculated for each individual light. By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial. and click The raytraced perspective view is displayed and now includes the RPC people. 366 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .The radiosity process.

and change unit formats as desired. click Training Files. NOTE Some Imperial values are used by default in this exercise. which is the path that a camera will follow through your building model. Recording a Walkthrough After you create a walkthrough. Creating a Walkthrough In this exercise. you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse. and open Common\c_Townhouse. Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are created between the key frames. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs | 367 . You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of your building models in Revit Architecture 2008. you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough: ■ ■ ■ ■ Wireframe Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines) Shaded or Shaded with Edges AccuRender (Raytrace) IMPORTANT If you record your walkthrough AVI with the AccuRender display option. You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse. Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough. but you can also create it in a 3D orthographic view. you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path. elevation. In a plan view. you can record the walkthrough by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with any available video player independent of your Revit Architecture software.Creating and Recording Walkthroughs In this lesson. Creating and Editing a Walkthrough The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path.rvt. When you export your walkthrough to an AVI. and you create it by specifying points that create the spline. but you can also define it in a 3D. or section view. The walkthrough path is a spline. and ends in the far corner of the living room. click Settings ➤ Project Units. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you must select or define a scene. proceeds through the dining room. If you prefer to use Metric values. Usually you define the walkthrough path in a plan view. A walkthrough is created in a 3D perspective view by default.

expand Floor Plans. 3 On the Options Bar. verify that Perspective is selected to create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view. 368 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . expand Walkthroughs. expand Views (all). 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Walkthrough 1. 6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room. right-click in the Design Bar. 4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. click . or the first key frame. and double-click 1st Floor.Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Specify four additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown in the following illustration. Edit and play the walkthrough 7 In the Project Browser under Views (all). and click to specify the start point. The floor plan of the first floor of the townhouse is displayed. click Walkthrough. of the walkthrough. on the Options Bar. and click the tab in the context menu.

The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed. click Edit Walkthrough. 10 In the Crop Region Size dialog. 12 On the View menu. 13 On the Options Bar. 14 Click . Creating a Walkthrough | 369 . verify Field of view is selected. Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size. If it is not. 11 Under Change. The walkthrough controls are displayed on the Options Bar. 8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips. enter 16" for Width and 9" for Height. surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown in the following illustration. select the crop boundary. Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the walkthrough path is not precisely the same. The frame that is displayed is frame 300 of 300 frames in the walkthrough. and click OK. 9 On the Options Bar. click the dimensions for Size to change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region. click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x). and select the crop boundary.

clear Far Clip Active. double-click 1st Floor. The walkthrough path is displayed in the floor plan of the first floor. 370 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 2 On the Options Bar.rvt. and click OK. click Edit Walkthrough. 16 On the Options Bar. 18 When the walkthrough stops playing. enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough from 300 to 60.15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog. under Extents. you learn how to edit the walkthrough path and change the camera position in the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise. Edit the walkthrough path 4 On the Options Bar. and click OK. The current display is wireframe with hidden lines. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click . “Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position” on page 370. proceed to the next exercise. The walkthrough plays. enter 1 for Frame. Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera. NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time. press ESC. Change the properties of the camera 1 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning (the key frame). Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position In this exercise. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. c_Townhouse. 17 Click .

and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown in the following illustration. 6 On the Options Bar. Blue grips are displayed at each key frame. Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration so do not be concerned if the camera displays at a slightly different location. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position | 371 . 5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip).The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room. You can move any camera target or key frame position. select Path for Controls.

When you export the walkthrough. you can select to display the walkthrough in wireframe. 4 Under Format. click Export ➤ Walkthrough. 9 On the Options Bar. and click Save. or with AccuRender raytracing. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. select <Shading> for Display mode. NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system. “Recording the Walkthrough” on page 372. 3 Under Output Length. click Edit Walkthrough. If you are unsure of what option to use. The AVI is recorded. 372 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Play the walkthrough to view the changes that you made 8 In the Project Browser. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. Recording the Walkthrough In this exercise. you record the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise by exporting it to an AVI. c_Townhouse. shaded with edges. and click OK. specify 15 for Frames per Second. It produces files that are larger than compressed files. under Walkthroughs. and drag it to the location shown in the following illustration. without opening Revit Architecture 2008. select any codec (compression/decompression) that is available on your system for Compressor.7 Click the third key frame position. 1 On the File menu. 6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walk-through from the location that you specified in step 3. the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users.rvt. specify a path and a file name for the AVI. but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality. 5 In the Video Compression dialog. 2 In the Save As dialog. shaded. hidden line. and then click to play the walkthrough. double-click Walkthrough 1.

perhaps to 6” wide x 4” height. 8 If you want to save this exercise. on the File menu. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second. Recording the Walkthrough | 373 . specifying the number of frames. click Save As.7 Try creating other walkthroughs. reducing the size of the image. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10 seconds. Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and smooth movement. If you had 150 frames and a frame rate of 15 seconds.

374 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

You specify settings for summer and winter solstice solar studies and export one solar study as a video and the other as a series of images. you create interior and exterior views of a building information model to be used in solar studies that you define. Interior solar studies can illustrate how effectively natural light penetrates inside a building during specific times of the day and year. you learn how a solar study of different perspective views of a building can support passive solar design by showing where shadows fall during the warmest time of the day and at different times throughout the year. More specifically. Exterior solar studies can show the impact of shadows on a site by the terrain and the surrounding buildings. In this tutorial.Creating Solar Studies 11 The ability to create solar studies for a specific project and site can be very valuable for creating sustainable designs. 375 .

click Camera.Creating Views for Solar Studies In this lesson. 376 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . expand Floor Plans. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating a Solar Study . you learn to create three 3D views of a building information model for use with solar studies. A plan view provides information on how sunlight and shadows play on the floor of a building. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Click in the lower right corner of the drawing area outside of the courtyard to place the camera and click in the upper left corner above the courtyard to place the camera target point. and double-click 01 Entry.Courtyard View In this exercise. expand Views (all). The view you create may differ slightly from the illustrations in the exercises because of minor variations in camera placement. 1 In the Project Browser. ■ ■ ■ A courtyard perspective view illustrates how shadows impact the site and buildings. click Training Files. A 3D view is created. A cut section view enables you to see the effect of shadows and light on the interior of a building. you customize a 3D external view of the building to enhance Solar Study analysis. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and open Common\c_Solar_Study. as shown.rvt.

rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. and drag the blue circular controls to see more of the perspective view. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study.4 On the View toolbar. and click OK. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View In this exercise. 10 On the File menu. and click Rename. 2 Enter ZR to zoom in on the house. 5 In the Dynamic View dialog. you create a section cutaway view.Courtyard View. Create section 1 In the Project Browser. right-click 3D View 1. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View | 377 . as shown. 7 Click the view boundary to select it. enter Solar Study . 6 On the Design Bar. as shown. click Save As. click to reorient the view. under Floor Plans. expand 3D Views. click Modify. 8 In the Project Browser. click Spin and move the cursor in the drawing area to adjust the view. 9 In the Rename View dialog. if necessary. “Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View” on page 377. double-click 01 Entry.

enter Section for Solar Study Cutaway. 8 In the Rename View dialog. 5 On the Design Bar. and click OK. to reorient the view. and click Rename. and then click to the left outside of the house to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration. Create 3D section view 9 On the View toolbar. 6 To view the section. expand Sections. double-click the section head. click 10 On the View toolbar. click Section. right-click Section 1. click Modify. click . 7 In the Project Browser. 378 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 4 Click to the right of reference plane 9 between A and B and.3 On the Design Bar.

11 In the Dynamic View dialog. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View In this exercise. right-click {3D}. including the house. click Callout. and click OK. and under Orient to a View. “Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View” on page 379. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. to expand the dialog. 13 On the Design Bar. under 3D Views. click Spin and move the cursor to adjust the view down and to the right. as shown. 17 To hide the section box. such as floor plans and ceiling plans. so no shadows will be cast from these elements. click Modify. Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. select Section: 12 In the Dynamic View dialog. On the Annotation Categories tab. you create a plan cutaway view. 3 Click in the upper left corner and lower right corner to sketch a selection around the site. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. click Save.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. and click OK. 15 In the Rename View dialog. enter Solar Study Section Cutaway. NOTE With the detail level set to Coarse. clear Section Boxes. NOTE A plan view of a shadow study should be created in a 3D view with top orientation. changing to Medium or Fine provides a better view for a shadow study. double-click 01 Entry. In some cases. do not display many elements in 3D. and click Rename. as shown. click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. then select Medium. 14 In the Project Browser. some structural elements are shown as a single line rather than solid and do not cast a shadow. 18 On the File menu. then Fine. Typical plan views. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View | 379 . 16 On the View Control Bar. click Section for Solar Study Cutaway.

12 Select the section box in the drawing area. 5 In the Project Browser. right-click Callout of 01 Entry. to reorient the view. 13 Select the blue down arrow control at the bottom of the model and drag down to expose the full first level of the model. and under Orient to a View. 14 Select the blue up arrow control in the center of the model and drag up to expose the second floor of the building. as shown. 380 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . click 8 On the View toolbar. 9 In the Dynamic View dialog click to expand the dialog. Create 3D Plan View 7 On the View toolbar. and click Rename. 11 On the Design Bar. select Floor Plan: Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. and click OK. as shown. click . under Floor Plans. click Spin and move the cursor to adjust the view to the right and back to view the front side. 6 In the Rename View dialog. enter Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. click Modify. double-click Callout of 01 Entry.4 In the Project Browser. 10 In the Dynamic View dialog.

click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. and click Rename. under 3D Views. 16 On the View Control Bar.Courtyard View Solar Study Plan Cutaway Solar Study Section Cutaway These views will be used in additional lessons in this tutorial. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. 18 In the Project Browser. 20 On the View Control Bar. double-click each of the sun study 3D views that you created in this lesson: ■ ■ ■ Solar Study . 19 In the Rename View dialog. so you can see into the building from the top. right-click {3D}. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View | 381 . under 3D Views. click Save. 17 On the View Control Bar. enter Solar Study Plan Cutaway. and click OK. click Detail Level ➤ Fine.15 Select the Roof. Display study views 22 In the Project Browser. 21 On the File menu.

expand Views (all). click . The Sun and Shadows Settings dialog displays.rvt dataset you used in the previous lesson. 6 Click the Multi-Day tab. and double-click Solar Study . 2 On the View Control Bar. Click the Single-Day tab. and time range. 8 Confirm that One Day Solar Study . 7 Create a Single-Day study from an existing study. click . date. date range.Summer and Winter Solstice In this exercise. CA. You can create a still. for City. Create summer solstice study 1 In the Project Browser. you specify the location. For this study. 4 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. 5 Click the Single-Day tab. leave the slider at 50. and click OK. For the Multi-Day solar study. 382 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . USA. For the Single-Day solar study. you create a single-day solar study for the summer solstice. and time. expand 3D Views. and preview the effects of each study as an animation. USA is selected. Dataset Continue to use the customized c_solar_study. 11 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. 3 Select Cast Shadows. Los Angeles. select Los Angeles. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. and click Duplicate. MA. click Changing the place in this dialog changes the setting defined for the project. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation.Courtyard View. single-day.Boston. you specify the location.Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations In this lesson. . or multi-day solar study. You can change the intensity of the shadows by dragging the slider in the Shadow field. you create a solar study for winter and summer solstice. and click OK. 9 In the Name dialog. enter Summer Solstice. Creating Solar Studies . The animations of solar activity at a particular place and time allow you to study the impact of natural light and shadows on the buildings and site. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 10 Under Place.

click the control buttons to preview the animation: ■ To display the previous key frame.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. select June 22. Notice that 01 Entry is selected as the level. you want to see how the shadows fall on the terrain and not for a specific level. and click OK. click . For Time Range. 18 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. NOTE If you clear Sunrise to sunset. 13 Select Ground Plane at Level. Previewing Solar Study Animation In this exercise. verify that Sunrise to sunset is selected. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. on the Single-Day tab. under Frame. enter 20 and press ENTER. Los Angeles. you can specify to go to a specific frame in the solar study animation: ■ ■ Under Frame. 16 In the Name dialog. confirm that Summer Solstice. for Date.12 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Date. click OK. Create winter solstice study 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 2 On the View Control Bar. you can specify the start and stop times for the solar study. under Sun and Shadows Settings. “Previewing Solar Study Animation” on page 383. and click OK. . Preview winter solstice animation 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study . verify that the value is set to 15 minutes. click OK. 19 On the File menu. enter 10 and press ENTER. select December 22. 2006. click . You can select the level to be used for shadow display. and click Duplicate. click To display the next key frame. click Save. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study.Courtyard View is currently displayed. enter Winter Solstice. 6 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. Los Angeles is selected. Under Frame. 14 In this case. 7 On the Options Bar. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. Clear Ground Plane at Level. click . Previewing Solar Study Animation | 383 . you preview the solar studies you created in the previous exercise. select Winter Solstice. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. ■ For Time Interval. 2006. 8 On the Options Bar. ■ ■ To display the previous sequential frame. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. Los Angeles.

Los Angeles. Each PNG is a still image of a sequential frame in the animation. 14 On the Options Bar. 13 On the View Control Bar. 3 Label areas in the house: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click OK.rvt dataset you saved in the previous lesson.■ To display the next sequential frame. click Text. You also export the winter solstice solar study as a series of PNG format images. Exporting the Study as AVI In this exercise. under Sun and Shadows Settings. 2 Enter ZR and zoom in on the house. Preview summer solstice animation 9 On the View Control Bar. Click in the drawing area and enter Living Area. Exporting Solar Studies In this lesson. PNG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. 11 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click . select Summer Solstice. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. click To play the animation from start to finish. AVI files are standalone video files that can be easily distributed and viewed by colleagues or clients. 384 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . click . showing the progression at 15-minute intervals for the location and date specified. The solar study animation plays. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. under Floor Plans. double-click 01 Entry. approximately as shown. 12 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. click . Click and enter Dining. Annotate view for solar study 1 In the Project Browser. . Click outside of the text box to end the command. you annotate a floor plan to identify different activities for the building and export a solar study for a cutaway view as an AVI video file. ■ NOTE You can stop viewing the animation at any time by clicking Cancel in the Status Bar. click OK. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. approximately as shown. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. you export the summer solstice solar study as an AVI file. on the Single-Day tab.

11 To display the section box. click Lines. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. as shown. Los Angeles. click OK. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. click . On the Annotation Categories tab. ■ ■ ■ Click in the drawing area and sketch a rectangle around the living area.4 Sketch rooms: ■ On the Design Bar. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. select Summer Solstice. 5 In the Project Browser. verify that Cast Shadows is selected. NOTE The building is a shell and you are considering alternative layouts for the interior space. Click in the drawing area and sketch around the Dining area. 8 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. Exporting the Study as AVI | 385 . as shown. and click OK. on the Single-Day tab. and click OK. click . Sketching the living and dining room areas in the house and using a solar study to determine where direct light is in the floor plan helps to determine the best layout. select Section Boxes. On the Options Bar. 6 On the View Control Bar. and double-click Solar Study Section Cutaway. expand 3D Views.

enter Summer Solar Study Section Cutaway . as shown. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. NOTE ZR for Zoom To Region to make it easier to select the control. On the Annotation Categories tab. Under Output Length. and click OK. clear Section Boxes. select the section box. Under Format. The equivalent zoom percentage is also set if you specify frame dimensions.Los Angeles. 386 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . Export as AVI 16 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. verify that Hidden Line is selected. if necessary. 15 To hide the section box. enter 450 in the first field (width). 13 Click the right blue control and drag the right edge of the section box to reveal the roof overhang. To maintain the proportions of the frame. you only enter one dimension and the other one is calculated automatically.12 In the drawing area. For Save as type. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. verify that the value is set to 15. select Frame range. and enter 5 to 50. For Frames per second. 14 Click outside of the section box. for Model Graphics Style. select AVI Files. and enter ZF to zoom to fit the building to the drawing area. 17 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Desktop icon on the left to save the file to the computer Desktop. For File name. For Dimensions.

rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. click . 2 On the View Control Bar. Export as PNG 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Section Cutaway is displayed. it is recommended that you first create a folder to export to because the export process creates several files. For Frames per second. The AVI can then typically be played from within the zip file. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. or frame. and click OK. click OK. 7 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Desktop icon. Under Output Length. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. on the Single-Day tab. the Frame Range was set to just 5 files to avoid cluttering the Desktop. as shown: Exporting a Study as PNG | 387 . click Save.NOTE The first and last few frames (sunrise and sunset) show large triangular shadows from the terrain. for Compressor. or GIF. click Save. for Model Graphics Style. verify that the value is set to 15. For Save as type. Exporting a Study as PNG In this lesson. such as JPEG. 6 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. of the animation separately. select Winter Solstice. Los Angeles.Los Angeles. you export the Winter Solstice Solar Study to create a solar animation that is output as individual ping (PNG format) graphics. “Exporting a Study as PNG” on page 387. enter 450 in the first field (width). In this example. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. you open each image. Limiting the range from 5 to 50 omits these frames. enter Winter Solar Study Section Cutaway . and enter 5 to 10. 20 On the File menu. select PNG. 19 In the Video Compression dialog. The resulting PNG images are date and time stamped. select Frame range. 3 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. depending on the Frame Range. and click OK. NOTE Uncompressed AVI files can be zipped to reduce the file size. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. To view the animation. 8 In the Save As dialog. or any single-frame format. The animation plays as the files are saved to the Desktop. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the Desktop. For File name. TIFF. click Save. NOTE When you export to PNG. For Dimensions. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. verify that Hidden Line is selected. 18 In the Save As dialog. BMP. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. Under Format.

you create an internal solar study for a plan to determine where shadows fall inside the building during the warmest part of the day. Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study In this lesson. under 3D Views. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. Create plan interior view 1 In the Project Browser. 388 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. click Save. you create a 3D view of a plan and create a solar study to animate the effects of natural light on the inside of the building.rvt dataset you saved in the previous lesson. Creating an Internal Plan Study In this exercise.9 On the File menu. 2 Select the section box in the drawing area.

NOTE Enter ZF for Zoom To Fit if necessary to see the entire building on the screen. 4 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Top. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. Creating an Internal Plan Study | 389 . 5 Select the roof. Hiding the roof allows you to see how shadows fall on the interior floor of the building. and on the View Control Bar. as shown. 3 Select the blue left arrow control and drag it to the left to expose the roof overhang and posts.

and click OK. 12 In the Name dialog. click OK. 11 Select Multi Day Solar Study . and click Duplicate. USA. 9 On the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. For Time Interval. you compare how shadows display when the project is oriented to Project North and when it is changed to True North.Create multi-day solar study 6 To hide the section box.Week Interval. 14 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop.Boston. select One week. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. 16 In the Video Compression dialog. click the Multi-Day tab. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 15 Export the animation: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. MA. 7 Adjust settings on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Shadows ➤ Shadows On. 17 On the View Control Bar. For Time. under Sun and Shadows Settings. Orienting to True North for Solar Studies In this lesson. select Full Frames (Uncompressed). and click OK. for Compressor. and click Save. Clear Ground Plane at Level so that the shadows fall on the terrain. Click the Desktop icon. click Shadows ➤ Solar Study Off. click 10 On the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. for File name enter 2pm . 18 On the File menu. clear Section Boxes. In the Save As dialog. for name enter 2pm Los Angeles Plan Cutaway. 8 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. 13 Specify values for the multi-day study: ■ ■ ■ . specify 2:00 pm. On the Annotation Categories tab.Los Angeles . click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. 390 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . Notice that the dining area receives full sun during the warmest part of the day. click Save.

to see the sun at its highest point on June 22. and click OK. 4 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. 9 Under Date and Time. and click OK. View still solar studies 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Plan Cutaway is displayed in the drawing area. 2 On the View Control Bar. so you may need to make your own adjustment for specific studies. click the Still tab. Orienting to True North | 391 . click . specify 11:00 AM for time.Orienting to True North Drafting convention is that project north is the top of the view. 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. you create still solar studies and observe that the shadows extend straight up when the project is set to the default orientation of Project North. click . 10 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. and click OK. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. and select Winter Solstice. 8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click Apply. NOTE Solar Studies do not have a Daylight Savings setting. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. change the time back to 12:00 PM. select Cast Shadows. click . For example. you change the orientation to True North to see how the change in orientation can impact solar study accuracy. In this exercise. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. Notice that the shadows display in an upward direction in the cutaway view. on the Still tab. you would set the time to 1:00 PM rather than 12:00 PM. 11 Under Date and Time. Then. 7 Under Sun and Shadows Settings.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. select Summer Solstice. 6 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog.

under Graphics. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. In the Element Properties dialog. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. enter 45 and press ENTER to set the angle of rotation. in the Angle from Project to True North field. and click OK. under Floor Plans. 13 On the View Control Bar. for Orientation. and select View Properties. click OK. click . click the Still tab. Notice that the project rotates in the view. select True North.12 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. On the Options Bar. 14 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. 18 Orient the project to True North: ■ ■ ■ ■ Right-click in the drawing area. double-click 01 Entry. Rotate project to True North 17 In the Project Browser. click OK. Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Rotate True North. 16 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. and click OK. 392 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . and select Winter Solstice. NOTE You must go to a plan view to set True North and you must change the view graphics to True North before you can change the angle value.

Export animated solar study 26 Export the animation: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. including the angle from True North. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 21 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. 20 Click View menu ➤ Refresh. In the Save As dialog. under 3D Views. for File name. click Summer Solstice. click the Still tab. select Summer Solstice. Notice that the shadows lengthen now that the project is oriented to True North. verify that AVI Files is selected. 25 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 23 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. Orienting to True North | 393 . Los Angeles. click . and click Apply. For Save as type. click OK. 24 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. are saved with the project. enter True North Summer Solstice Plan Cutaway. 19 In the Project Browser. 22 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. click the Single-Day tab.NOTE Settings for the location and orientation.

On the Options Bar. enter 600 in the first field. and select View Properties. under Floor Plans. and exporting it as a JPEG image. JPEG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. it is a best practice to change the view graphics setting back to Project North for documentation and annotation purposes: ■ ■ ■ In the Project Browser. 1 In the Project Browser. capturing it. Rendered views will also show shade from plants and seasonal foliage. The scene is rendered in full color at draft resolution. click GO. for Dimensions. 394 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . Click the Desktop icon. Rendering Interior Shadow Views In this lesson. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. you render an interior view to observe how sunlight and shadows play in a specific room. you confirm that the winter solstice has sunlight in the living room by creating one rendering. On the Options Bar. 3 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. select Draft (75 dpi). 28 Once you are finished with the study. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. under 3D Views. 29 On the File menu. ■ 27 In the Video Compression dialog. 2 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. under Graphics. Rendering an Interior View Shadow calculations are not reliable for camera views in which a shadow would fall onto the camera’s location in the view. click Raytrace. Refer to “Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs” on page 345 for additional information on rendering. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. select Project North. for Resolution. double-click each of the following views to review the available views for rendering: ■ ■ ■ to house from SW to west facade of house living area This view most accurately shows the interior of the living room. Since a rendered image is temporary. and click OK. select Winter solstice 2pm in LA. click Save. 4 Render the scene: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. for Scene. In this exercise. In the Element Properties dialog. and click in the second dimension field to see the value calculated automatically. double-click 01 Entry.■ Under Format. This would include some exterior views and most interior views. Rendered views do not have this limitation. for Compressor. NOTE Retain the 45° value for the Angle from project to True North to maintain accuracy in shadow display for this project. and click OK. you also capture the image and export it as a JPEG file for future use. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. and click Save. Right-click in the drawing area. for Orientation.

so use the Capture Rendering option to save the view in the project. double-click each of the following images: ■ ■ ■ living area summer living area winter to house and studio summer solstice 8 On the File menu. select JPEG. click Capture Rendering. 7 Review some captured images of the building. In the Save As dialog. On the Options Bar. under Renderings. click Export Image. Rendering an Interior View | 395 . 6 Export the image as a JPEG: ■ ■ on the Design Bar. click Save. NOTE Rendered views are temporary. select Presentation (300 dpi). The scene is rendered in high resolution. 5 On the Design Bar. Notice that you can clearly see where light enters the windows and how the shadows fall on the floor. for Resolution. In the Project Browser. and click Save. for Save as Type. click GO.■ ■ On the Options Bar.

396 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies .

For the realistic approach. The architect's primary goal in documentation is to communicate the intent of the design. In this series of exercises. elevations. tailoring the presentation is just as important as the accuracy of the content." The analytique is a classic Beaux Arts method of representing a work of architecture for analysis by graphically showing the relationship among plans. and other quantifiable elements within the context of contract documents. length. you learn various methods of effectively communicating your design intent to your audience by creating presentation views. you explore the stylistic approach. There remain many options in the software that do not quantify specific dimensions so much as they explain the subjective complexity of the work. A majority of tools in Revit Architecture 2008 are intended to describe number. They include the Accurender® Plug-in for Rendering. Advanced Model Graphics. the Linework Tool.Presentation Views 12 In this tutorial. there are several options for expressing the architecture. type. You can use the analytique to graphically compare the organization and forms of a particular 397 . and Section Boxes. a consultant. There are two directions you can choose when organizing presentation graphics: realism and stylistics. To express texture beyond material specifics. Whether the audience is the general contractor. or the client. you learn several graphic techniques using these above mentioned tools to create an "analytique." In Revit Architecture. sections. tutorials on the Accurender features of Revit Architecture can be found under “Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs” on page 345. In this tutorial. and details. and line quality without the measurement of its thickness is to transcend "building" and to recognize the "architecture. an outside reviewer.

Using the pre-built building model.building or space by superimposing and overlapping measured drawings at multiple scales. you organize an analytique by creating and modifying several views. 398 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Co-house.

and open Metric\m_Cohouse. Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique In this exercise. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique In this lesson. Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique | 399 . you create a copy of a floor plan in preparation for the analytique. change the visibility settings to remove unwanted documentation. right-click 2nd Flr. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you create a copy of the plan. expand Views (all). expand Floor Plans. A copy of the floor plan is created and opened. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create a presentation floor plan.rvt. click Training Files. Copy the floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. Cnst. In order for the floor plan to fit into the analytique. and place the plan on a dark background for contrast.

6 Click the Model Categories tab. elevations. click the Scale control and select 1:100. NOTE Stair text is considered part of a stair component rather than an annotation. This turns off the visibility of all tags. Modify visibility/graphics 4 On the View menu. this represents the view getting smaller. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. 10 On the File menu. dimensions. and click OK. and click Rename. 3 In the Rename View dialog. Cnst. expand the Stairs category. 5 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. UP Text. and so on in this view. under Floor Plans.2 In the Project Browser. sections. Up Arrow. enter Presentation Second Floor Plan. and clear DOWN Text. 400 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click Visibility/Graphics. right-click Copy of 2nd Flr. click in the drawing area. click the Annotation Categories tab. 8 Click OK. Down Arrow. click Save As. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. Notice the immediate change in the line weights. Notice that no annotations display in this view. Modify view scale 9 On the View Control Bar at the bottom of the drawing area. exit the menu. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. 7 Under Visibility.

you can specify one place where the project resides within the world. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. ■ Under Sun and Shadows Settings. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. and click OK. specify the following: ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style.rvt. navigate to the folder of your choice. Within a Project. “Using Advanced Model Graphics” on page 401. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows and add a sense of texture to the new floor plan view. Time and Place. and delete multiple locations in order to analyze a single prototype. Modify advanced model graphics settings 1 If the Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan is not the active view. At that place. The Sun and Shadows Settings are shared with Accurender and can also be used when rendering. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 7 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. MA. ■ Under Intensity. Under Shadows Properties. click the Place tab. click . The higher the number. 6 Under Settings. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. select Sun and Shadow Settings. 8 Select Boston. modify.rvt. 2 On the View Control Bar. The Shadow intensity dictates the darkness of the shadow display. Changes made within the Advanced Model Graphics dialog are applied only to the active view. double-click it in the Project Browser. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. on the Still tab. NOTE Shadows can be cast in all view styles except Wireframe. you can create. specify 35 for Shadow. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click Save. the darker the shadows. name the project m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. select By Date. Using Advanced Model Graphics | 401 .11 In the Save As directory. Using Advanced Model Graphics In this exercise. click for Place. 5 Under Settings. USA for City. select Cast Shadows.

10 Select Ground Plane at Level. 11 Click OK. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. under Sun and Shadows Settings. and select 1st Flr. 17 On the File menu. This is the level the shadow will be cast upon. click Save. most of the images in the remainder of this tutorial may differ from those on your screen depending on the settings that you choose. 12 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. click OK. under Settings. 16 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. Notice the series of shadows based on the specified sun angles.NOTE For this step. click OK. This turns off the shadows cast on the ground. you can enter any city you wish. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. This gives the plan depth and creates a sensation of space beyond what you can normally express in a plan view. and click OK. specify 10/27/2006 for Date and 1:00 PM for Time. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 402 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click . clear Ground Plane at Level. and click Advanced Model Graphics. however. 18 Proceed with the next exercise. Cnst. Turn off the ground plane shadows 13 On the View Control Bar. 14 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. This plan view is now ready to be added to a sheet. be aware that if you enter a different city. “Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet” on page 403.

click Add View. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click Add View to Sheet. select Arch Portrait. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 403 . Notice the blank D-sized sheet is portrait oriented. 4 In the Views dialog. and click OK. and notice a view title displays. 6 On the Design Bar. click Modify.Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet In this exercise. select Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. right-click the Design Bar. you add the floor plan to a sheet and modify the view to enhance the contrast. TIP If the View tab is not available. and click View. The viewport displays at the tip of the cursor. and click to place it. 5 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet as shown. Create a new sheet 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Sheet. 7 Zoom in around the viewport.

Because the view title needs to be removed for the analytique. and click OK. 12 In the Name dialog. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Activate View. click OK. click Edit/New. enter Presentation. select No for Show Title. you need to create a base of contrast for the centered plan. Create a new viewport type 8 Select the viewport in the center of the sheet. you need to create a new viewport type that does not display the view title. and click OK. For this analytique. you will create a dark filled region for the floor plan view. This activates the Presentation Second Floor Plan within the context of the sheet. click . Notice the viewport no longer displays a view title. 404 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 9 On the Options Bar. Create a solid fill background for contrast 15 Right-click the viewport. under Graphics. To accomplish this. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate.

use the Trim tool to clean up gaps or overlapping intersections. 24 In the Type Properties dialog. When you are finished drawing the chain. draw a chain of lines around the exterior face of the building model as shown. create the interior chain of lines using Medium or Wide lines. 25 In the Name dialog. TIP Use care when sketching this chain. 20 On the Options Bar. click Filled Region. You enter sketch mode where you define the line type. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. under Graphics. enter Solid Black. click . If necessary. The lines shown below are enhanced for training purposes. fill properties. The space between the perimeter of the building model and each line should be equidistant. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 405 . click Region Properties. click Duplicate. for Fill Pattern. 22 On the Design Bar. click . and click OK. you must define the inner perimeter by drawing a chain of lines around the perimeter of the building model. click . 21 Starting at the upper-left corner of the building model. TIP If you have difficulty sketching using invisible lines. 17 In the Type Selector. and select Chain. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. 19 Draw a rectangle around the view as shown. You may want to zoom in while sketching some details. select Invisible Lines. and you should take advantage of endpoint snapping when available. Now that you have defined the outer perimeter of the filled region. click Edit/New. 18 On the Options Bar. select the entire chain (use TAB) and change the line type back to Invisible lines by selecting it from the Type Selector. and the boundary of the region.16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

you create an elevation and add it to the presentation sheet that you created in the first exercise. enter Presentation for Sheet Name. “Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique” on page 406. and click OK. you copy an elevation view and use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the view. and click OK. 30 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. and click Deactivate View. and click View Properties. and click OK. Notice how the filled region enhances the view contrast. under Name. 32 Right-click the edge of the sheet. select Solid Fill. Name the sheet 31 Right-click anywhere on the sheet. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique In this lesson. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. scroll down. click OK. 34 On the File menu.27 In the Fill Patterns dialog. Preparing the Elevation Analytique In this exercise. 35 Proceed with the next lesson. click Save. verify that the Background is Opaque and the Color is Black. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. under Identity Data. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. 406 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

under Visibility. 2 In the Project Browser.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 7 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. Copy and rename the elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. exit the menu. under Visibility. and clear Elevation Swing. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 4 On the View menu. click in the Walls row. Preparing the Elevation Analytique | 407 . scroll up. expand the Doors category. right-click South. and click Rename. on the Model Categories tab. under Elevations. expand Elevations. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. under Views (all). under Pattern Overrides. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. 9 Click OK. click Override.rvt. and click OK. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. A copy of the south elevation view becomes the active view. click Visibility/Graphics. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. 8 Click the Annotation Categories tab. enter Presentation South Elevation. click in the drawing area. and click OK. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. clear Visible. 6 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. right-click Copy of South. 3 In the Rename View dialog.

you can create more interesting shadows on the elevation view. Time and Place. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 11 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 19 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 20 On the File menu. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Elevation. under Settings. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 18 Specify 2:30 PM for Time. 12 Under Shadow Properties. and click OK. By changing the angle of the sun. 408 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 13 Under Intensity. 16 In the Name dialog. verify that Hidden Line is the selected Style. Changes made within the Advanced Model Graphics dialog are applied only to the active view. 21 Proceed with the next exercise. you add the Presentation South Elevation view to the Presentation sheet. select By Date.Apply advanced model graphics 10 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. click . “Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet” on page 408. select Cast Shadows. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet In this exercise. click OK. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. click Save. specify 35 for Shadow. 14 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. click Duplicate.

and double-click A105 . m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 4 Center the viewport above the presentation plan view as shown.rvt. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet | 409 . Add a view to the sheet 1 In the Project Browser.Presentation. Notice the viewport displays a view title. 3 In the Views dialog. TIP Use the snap feature to snap the viewport to the center reference plane. under Views (all). expand Sheets (all). 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Elevation: Presentation South Elevation. click Add View. and click Add View to Sheet.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise.

6 Drag the Presentation South Elevation viewport downward until it shares an edge with the presentation floor plan.5 In the Type Selector. 7 On the Design Bar. 410 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Notice the view title no longer displays. click Modify. select Viewport: Presentation.

you create section and callout views and place them in the analytique. Adding Section Views to the Analytique In this lesson. you create and modify the section view that you later add to the analytique.8 On the File menu. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique In this exercise. click Save. 9 Proceed with the next lesson. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 411 . You also create a view template for presentation views and apply it to other views. You add silhouette edges and filled regions to the views. “Adding Section Views to the Analytique” on page 411.

this view needs to be rotated 180 degrees. you will create a callout around the building model components within the section view. and double-click Section 2. To fit correctly in the analytique. Add a section in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. Cnst. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The section should cut through the center of the building model and extend past the front of the building (lower wall). Section 2 is added to the building model. under Floor Plans.rvt. Create a callout of the section view 5 In the Project Browser. click Section. and use the flip arrows if necessary. TIP You can also change the scale of the section view after you create it. select 1: 100 for Scale. double-click 1st Flr. 412 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Adjust the controls to modify the extents. 4 Add the section shown below. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. expand Sections (Callout 1). 3 On the Options Bar. To accomplish this.

click Override. click in the Walls row. under Sections (Callout 1). 12 In the Project Browser. under Pattern Overrides. double-click Presentation Section 2. and click OK. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 413 . In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. click Callout. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. click Visibility/Graphics. 10 In the Project Browser. clear Visible. TIP You can also open the callout in the Project Browser by double-clicking Callout of Section 2 under Sections (Callout 1). select 1 : 100 for Scale. Use the controls to adjust the precise location of the boundary and to move the callout head so it is readily identifiable. 7 On the Options Bar. 16 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 8 Draw a callout around all the building model components within the section view as shown. and click Rename. 15 Under Visibility. 11 In the Rename View dialog.6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Sections (Callout 1). click Modify. enter Presentation Section 2. Modify Visibility/Graphic Overrides 13 On the View menu. click the Model Categories tab. Rename the callout 9 On the Design Bar. right-click Callout of Section 2. and click OK. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view.

When you select the crop boundary. The outer crop boundary (indicated with dashed lines) shows the crop region for annotation elements. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. under Extents. Hide the crop boundary 21 Select the crop boundary. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. clear Crop Region Visible. and click OK. 20 Click OK. 22 On the Options Bar. 414 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 18 Turn off the visibility of the following model categories: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Casework Ceilings Furniture Lighting Fixtures Specialty Equipment 19 Click the Annotation Categories tab. expand the Doors category. clear Annotation Crop. scroll up.17 Under Visibility. The inner crop boundary shows the crop region for model elements. Notice that the crop regions no longer display. Revit Architecture displays 2 boundaries. and clear Elevation Swing. click .

open the Project Browser and. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Click Apply. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. “Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View” on page 415. Under Intensity. 2 On the View Control Bar. In addition. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View | 415 . you apply silhouette edges to contrast the edges of the view. under Sections (Callout 1). Add shadows to the section view 1 If Presentation Section 2 is not the active view. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 25 Proceed with the next exercise. select Cast Shadows. Under Shadows Properties. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. double-click Presentation Section 2.24 On the File menu. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View In this exercise. click Save.rvt. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the section view. specify 35 for Shadow. Notice that the shadows displayed do not offer much contrast. TIP You may need to move the dialog off to the side in order to see the view.

Notice the shadows on the view provide more contrast and a sense of depth.In the steps that follow. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. select Directly. click Duplicate. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Section. click OK. 11 On the File menu. and click OK. specify an Azimuth of 135 degrees. Notice application of heavy line weights to the edges of the building model. was added to this dataset for training purposes. click . 416 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 5 In the Name dialog. click Save. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select Relative to View. under Silhouette Edges. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. “Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique” on page 417. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. you create a new Sun and Shadow setting in order to make a presentation view with more contrast. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. and click OK. 10 Under Silhouette Edges. Apply silhouette edges 8 On the View Control Bar. TIP You can also use the linework tool to emphasize individual surface edges. and click OK. specify an Altitude of 70 degrees. Silhouette Edges. NOTE The line style. under Settings. 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. select Override Silhouettes. and click Advanced Model Graphics. You can modify this line style by selecting Line Styles from the Settings menu. TIP The current view of your model may vary from the illustrations in the tutorial based on the placement of the section line in the previous exercise. ■ Under Sun and Shadows Settings.

5 In the Type Selector. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 3 In the Views dialog. double-click A105 . select Viewport: Presentation.Presentation. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. you add the Presentation Section 2 view to the analytique and rotate the view 180 degrees. click Add View. click Modify. and click to place the selected view.rvt. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique | 417 . 4 Move the cursor under the centered plan view as shown. and click Add View to Sheet. Add the view to the presentation sheet 1 In the Project Browser. 6 On the Design Bar.Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique In this exercise. The view title no longer displays. select Section: Presentation Section 2. under Sheets (all). m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.

To rotate an object. 10 Specify the start radius to the right of the callout. Rotate the callout view 7 In the Project Browser. 8 Select the callout that you added previously. In the steps that follow. you click to specify the start radius. move the cursor in the direction of the rotation. Using a clock as a reference. double-click Section 2. 11 Move the cursor a slight distance counter-clockwise. 9 On the Edit toolbar. and enter 180 to specify the number of degrees of rotation. specify 3 o’clock as the rotation start point. and press ENTER. click .Notice the section needs to be rotated 180 degrees. and either enter the degrees of rotation or click to specify the end radius. under Sections (Callout 1). 418 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . you accomplish this by rotating the callout within the section view.

double-click A105 .Presentation. and drag it up and to the left as shown. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique | 419 . 14 Select the Presentation Section 2 viewport. the callout rotates 180 degrees. Notice that the Presentation Section 2 view has rotated 180 degrees and now needs to be repositioned. Reposition the viewport 13 In the Project Browser. Notice the extents need to be adjusted to fit around the edges of the building model.After you enter the rotation value and press Enter. under Sheets (all). 12 Drag the callout extents until they extend just past the perimeter of the edges of the building model as shown.

420 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Create a presentation view template 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Presentation Section 2. “Working with a Presentation View Template” on page 420.rvt. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. enter Presentation. 16 On the File menu.15 On the Design Bar. After applying the view template to a new section view. 2 On the View menu. under Sections (Callout 1). 17 Proceed with the next exercise. click Create View Template from View. and click OK. click Save. 4 In the View Templates dialog. Working with a Presentation View Template In this exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. click Modify. you create a view template for presentation views in order to reduce repetitive work while creating subsequent views. you add the modified view to the presentation sheet. 3 In the New View Template dialog. click OK.

Presentation. 14 In the Type Selector. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 15 Right-click the viewport. and elevation swings no longer display. rather than repeat numerous steps to prepare this view for the analytique. 16 On the View menu. select Section: Presentation Section 1. Working with a Presentation View Template | 421 . and click Rename. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 7 In the Rename View dialog. select Viewport: Presentation. Add the view to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser.Create a new presentation view 5 In the Project Browser. click View Properties. click Apply View Template. 13 Place it to the left of the plan view. 12 In the Views dialog. you can use a view property to accomplish the same thing. under Sections (Type 1). double-click A105 . Apply presentation view template 8 On the View menu. and click Activate View. under Sheets (all). Rather than use a callout to rotate this view after it is added to a sheet. right-click Section 1. right-click Copy of Section 1. lighting fixtures. and click OK. enter Presentation Section 1. and click Add View to Sheet. annotations. select Presentation. you can simply apply the presentation view template. click Add View. and click OK. Notice the furniture. Now. 9 In the Select View Template dialog. 6 In the Project Browser. under Sections (Type 1).

“Working in a Callout Analytique” on page 422. 18 Right-click the viewport. such as a tracery window or column capital. 21 Proceed with the next exercise. traditional analytiques contain a detail. click Save. you create a wall section and add it to the right side of the analytique. In this exercise. 20 On the File menu. and click Deactivate View. Working in a Callout Analytique Typically. select 90 degrees Counterclockwise for Rotation on Sheet. 422 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and click OK. under Graphics.17 In the Element Properties dialog. 19 Move the view so the walls line up similar to the image shown.

6 In the Project Browser. double-click Presentation Callout. under Sections (Type 1). After you add the callout. 5 In the Rename View dialog. and click Rename. and modify the extents and the callout head location as shown. 3 Draw a callout around the front balcony as shown. and click OK.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. click Modify. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. select the callout. under Sections (Callout 1). under Sections (Callout 1). double-click Section 1.rvt. enter Presentation Callout. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. right-click Callout of Section 1. Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. Working in a Callout Analytique | 423 . click Callout. 4 In the Project Browser.

under Extents.7 Select the crop boundary and adjust the bottom so that there is a small gap as shown. This gap is used later in the exercise to place a fill region. and click OK. clear Annotation Crop. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 424 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . clear Crop Region Visible. and click View Properties. 8 Right-click.

click Add View. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. Modify presentation callout on sheet 16 Right-click the presentation callout viewport. select Section: Presentation Callout. click View Properties. and move it into the position shown below. specify a value of 22 for Scale Value 1. 17 On the View menu. under Sheets (all). 20 Select the callout presentation viewport. Working in a Callout Analytique | 425 .Add callout to presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. select Viewport: Presentation. double-click A105 . 19 Right-click the callout presentation view. and click Deactivate View. and click Add View to Sheet. click Modify.Presentation. 14 In the Type Selector. 12 In the Views dialog. 15 On the Design Bar. 13 Place it on the right side of the presentation sheet. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click Activate View. select Custom for View Scale.

22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. activate the viewport. click Filled Region. and click OK. hide the crop region and deactivate the viewport. 23 On the Design Bar. 426 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 24 In the Element Properties dialog. sketch the filled regions on the floors and roof shown below. When finished. You can sketch all of them at once or one filled region at a time. turn on the crop region from the view properties dialog. click Region Properties. Click Finish Sketch on the Design Bar when you are finished. and make adjustments as necessary.NOTE If the presentation callout view does not fit properly on the sheet. the easiest method is to apply filled regions to the presentation callout. 25 Using the drawing tools on the Options Bar. Although there are several methods you could use to create these areas of contrast. Apply filled regions to presentation callout 21 In the Project Browser. you add a heavy base to the floors and a poche to the base. In the steps that follow. The intent of the analytique is not so much a measured construction document as it is a stylized representation of the architectural forms. double-click Presentation Callout. select Solid Black for Type. You do not have to replicate the image exactly. under Sections (Callout 1). The composition set for the analytique is now complete.

click Filled Region. click . and sketch the rectangle shown below. double-click A105 . 29 On the Options Bar. under Sheets (all). Working in a Callout Analytique | 427 . Add poche region 27 Right-click the presentation callout viewport. 28 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.26 On the Project Browser.Presentation. and click Activate View.

Notice the entire poche region does not display because the crop region does not encompass the new filled region. click Finish Sketch. 31 On the View menu. and drag the left and bottom extent until the entire poche region displays.30 On the Design Bar. under Extents. select Crop Region Visible. 33 Select the crop region. and click OK. click View Properties. 428 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 32 In the Element Properties dialog.

Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes In this lesson. You then add each view to the presentation sheet. you create three similar isometric views with different cutaways. You then add perspective views to the presentation and annotate the sheet. you create isometric 3D views and use section boxes to create cutaways with shadows. click Save. “Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes” on page 429. and click Deactivate View. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views In this exercise. 38 Proceed with the next lesson. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 429 . 37 On the File menu. clear Crop Region Visible. 36 Right-click the presentation callout viewport. 35 In the Element Properties dialog. and apply shadows to the views. under Extents. click View Properties.34 On the View menu. and click OK.

click Duplicate. click the Scale control. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 7 In the Name dialog. Under Shadows Properties. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. Under Sun and Shadows Settings. 3 On the View Control Bar. 2 On the View menu. Under Intensity. under 3D Views. click . enter Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric.rvt. Create southwest isometric view 1 In the Project Browser. Apply advanced model graphics 4 On the View Control Bar.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click Orient ➤ Southwest. specify 35 for Shadow. select Cast Shadows. and click OK. 430 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . double-click Isometric. and click 1 : 200.

select Override Silhouettes. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 431 . 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 9 Click OK. under 3D Views. and click Rename. Select 1st Flr. in the list. right-click Copy of Isometric 1. Specify an Azimuth of 135 degrees. 13 In the Rename View dialog. select Section Box.8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 11 Under Silhouette Edges. click View Properties. under Settings. under 3D Views. 18 On the View menu. and click OK. Rename and duplicate isometric views 12 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. Specify an Altitude of 45 degrees. Cnst. under Silhouette Edges. and click OK. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click OK. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Directly. Select Relative to View. 15 In the Project Browser. right-click Isometric. 16 In the Rename View dialog. under 3D Views. 14 In the Project Browser. under Extents. enter Isometric 2. enter Isometric 1. Add a section box to Isometric 2 17 In the Project Browser. and click OK. right-click Isometric 1. double-click Isometric 2. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. under 3D Views. Select Ground Plane at Level. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. Notice the section box that displays around the building model.

TIP Notice there is also a rotation symbol. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.20 Select the section box. make a duplicate of the view. Notice the grips that display on each face of the section box. click Modify on the Design Bar. under 3D Views. 23 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Isometric 2. 432 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 21 Select the controls for the top plane of the section box. Before turning off the visibility of the section box. under 3D Views. You can use this to rotate the section box. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the second floor as shown. right-click Isometric 2. and click Rename. When you are finished. These allow you to modify the extents of the section box. 22 In the Project Browser.

NOTE Depending on the precise location of the top plane of the section box. 26 To hide the section box. and click OK. clear Section Boxes. 32 On the Annotation Categories tab. double-click Isometric 2. either adjust the plane location. Notice the section box no longer displays. Next.Presentation. under 3D Views. 25 In the Project Browser. the stairs and railings may display. under Sheets (all). select Viewport: Presentation. you stack the three isometric views in a vertical column on the presentation sheet to show the continual erosion of the structure. 29 Select the section box. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 27 On the Annotation Categories tab. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the first floor as shown. enter Isometric 3. double-click A105 . in the Type Selector. When you are finished. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 433 . 30 Select the controls for the top plane of the section box. under 3D Views. under 3D Views. double-click Isometric 3. click Modify on the Design Bar. and click OK. Add isometric views to the presentation sheet 33 In the Project Browser. In such a case. 31 To hide the section box. or turn off the visibility of railings and stairs using the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 34 In the Project Browser.24 In the Rename View dialog. Modify the section box of Isometric 3 28 In the Project Browser. clear Section Boxes. and click OK. drag Isometric 3 underneath the left section view as shown and.

36 In the Project Browser. You resolve this problem in the steps that follow. in the Type Selector. under 3D Views. select Viewport: Presentation. 434 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .35 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. drag Isometric 2 underneath Isometric 3 as shown and. in the Type Selector. select Viewport: Presentation. Notice the filled region partially covers the view. drag Isometric 1 underneath Isometric 2 as shown and.

and click Activate View. 45 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click Finish Sketch. 43 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. click Edit. 39 On the Design Bar. click Lines. The image below shows the lines redrawn. select Solid Black for Type. This will make it easier to draw lines. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 435 . redraw the portion of the filled region so it follows the boundary of Isometric 1. 46 In the Element Properties dialog. 48 Right-click the Presentation Callout view. You may need to use the split tools and trim tools to modify lines along the way. You change this back to solid fill when you are done. select Transparent for Background. 47 On the Design Bar. 40 In the Element Properties dialog. 41 In the Type Properties dialog. 42 Click OK twice. select Concrete for Type. click Region Properties. 38 Select the poche filled region. and then click Edit/New. under Graphics. and click Deactivate View.Modify filled region boundaries 37 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. 44 Using the drawing tools. click Region Properties.

you add it to the presentation sheet. a cutaway perspective view. 50 Proceed with the next exercise. double-click 1st Flr. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. click Camera. you create the final view for the analytique. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and specify the range and direction just outside the upper right corner of the building model. 436 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . then you specify the eye direction and range. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. click Save. Create a perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Place the camera in the southwest corner of the view as shown. Cnst. under Floor Plans.rvt. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views In this exercise. Adding a camera is a two-click process: first you specify the eye location.49 On the File menu. “Creating Cutaway Perspective Views” on page 436. After adding shadows and silhouette edges to the view.

click . and click Advanced Model Graphics. 6 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 437 . specify 35 for Shadow. select Cast Shadows. Add shadows and silhouette edges 5 On the View Control Bar. Under Shadows Properties. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. Under Intensity. 4 Adjust the crop boundary so the entire building model fits within it. Under Sun and Shadows Settings.The view opens immediately.

A section box now cuts through the building model. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. Notice the controls that display on each plane. and click OK. 13 Use the section controls to modify the location of each respective plane until your view resembles the following image. and click OK. 9 Under Silhouette Edges.7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 438 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and click OK. under Silhouette Edges. select Section Box. under Extents. Add a section box 10 On the View menu. 8 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 12 Select the section box. select Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric for Name. click View Properties. You may need to adjust the location of the crop boundary as well. select Override Silhouettes. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style.

click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog. On the Annotation Categories tab. Clear Crop Region Visible.Presentation. you must specify the actual size of the image. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 439 . drag 3D View 1 onto the presentation sheet. 21 In the Project Browser. click Size. enter 165 mm for Width. and click OK. and click OK. and place it in the upper-left corner as shown. Because scale does not apply to perspective views. 19 To hide the section box. under Sheets (all). After placing it. 15 On the Options Bar. under Change. double-click A105 .14 Select the crop boundary. 17 Under Model Crop Size. select Scale (locked proportions). and click OK. 18 To hide the crop region. click View menu ➤ View Properties. clear Section Boxes. under 3D Views. Add the view to the presentation sheet 20 On the Project Browser. go to the Type Selector and select Viewport : Presentation.

5 In the Name dialog. under Text. “Annotating the Analytique” on page 440. Create new text types 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select Text : Title. under Text. click Duplicate. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. click Text. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 8 In the Type Properties dialog.22 On the File menu. select the same font as the title. click . and click OK. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. select a font. 7 In the Element Properties dialog.rvt. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. enter Description. Add a title and description 12 In the Type Selector. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. specify a text size of 6 mm. and click OK. 2 On the Options Bar. 23 Proceed with the next exercise. Annotating the Analytique In this exercise. 13 Add a title to the analytique as shown. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. specify a text size of 40 mm. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. enter Title. and click OK. click Duplicate. click OK. you complete the analytique by adding text to the presentation sheet. and click OK. 440 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click Save. 9 In the Name dialog.

17 On the Design Bar. click Modify.14 Click in the drawing window to complete the title text. 16 Add a description of your choosing and add it to the analytique as shown. click Save. This completes the Presentation Views tutorial. select Text : Description. Annotating the Analytique | 441 . 15 In the Type Selector. 18 On the File menu.

442 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

Importing and Exporting 5 443 .

444 | Chapter 13 Importing and Exporting

Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

13

In this tutorial, you learn how to export a Revit Architecture building model to Autodesk®3ds Max® or Autodesk®VIZ, where you render it and create a daylight analysis. Autodesk 3ds Max is a professional three-dimensional animation package that provides robust animation, modelling, and workflow functionality for the most complex problems in design visualization and visual effects. Autodesk VIZ is a 3D modelling, rendering, and presentation software application that provides state-of-the-art image creation technologies for communicating and sharing your design intent. For simplicity, this tutorial uses 3ds Max, but the same workflow applies in VIZ. NOTE To complete this tutorial, you must have Autodesk 3ds Max 9 installed on your system. If you do not have 3ds Max installed on your system, or if you have an earlier version of the software, you can download a free trial from the Autodesk website.

445

Render a Revit Architecture Building Model in 3ds Max
In this exercise, you export a Revit Architecture building model to Autodesk 3ds Max and render it. To export the building model to 3ds Max, you select a 3D view of the building in Revit Architecture and export its geometry and data to a DWG file. You then link the DWG file to a new 3ds Max scene. NOTE You can also import the DWG file into 3ds Max, but linking allows you to easily update the 3ds Max scene with any changes that you make to the Revit Architecture model after you initially import it. After you link the DWG file in 3ds Max, you quickly render a view of the building model. The AccuRender materials that are applied to elements in the Revit Architecture building model can be rendered in 3ds Max. After you make some minor adjustments to the materials, you add a daylight system and a sky to produce a more polished rendering.

Dataset
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Export to 3DS.rvt.

Export a Revit Architecture building model to a DWG file
1 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), expand 3D Views, and double-click To Building. The view of the building that you want to render in 3ds Max displays.

446 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

There are a few steps you can take to reduce the geometry and data in the model to make the export process more efficient. You can change the detail level of the view, use a section box to limit the view geometry, and turn off visibility of building elements. Because this building model is small, it is not necessary to use any of these options at this time.

2 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ CAD Formats. 3 In the Export dialog:

For Save in, browse to C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Common. Under File Naming, verify that Automatic and Long are selected. If these options are selected, a file name that consists of the dataset name appended with the view name automatically displays for the File Name.

Click Options.

4 In the Export Options dialog, under Solids (3D views only), select Export as ACIS solids, and click OK. The 3D elements in the building model will be exported as ACIS solids, or as 3D objects with multiple sides. If you select to export as polymesh, each element would be exported as an object made up of multiple polygons that are joined, or ''meshed'' together. When exporting to a DWG for use in Max, it is recommended that you export building models to DWG as ACIS solids. 5 In the Export dialog, click Save. 6 In the alert dialog, click OK to ignore the view crop boundary. The building model is exported to a DWG file in the Training location that you specified. 7 Minimize Revit Architecture but keep it open, as you modify the building model and reload it later in the tutorial. Next, link the file to a 3ds Max scene and render it. Link a DWG file to 3ds Max if you anticipate making changes to the building model that you want to reexport to 3ds Max. Import files when you want to export only one iteration of a design for use in 3ds Max.

Create a 3ds Max scene
8 Open 3ds Max, and if the Welcome screen displays, click Close. 9 Click File menu ➤ New. 10 In the New Scene dialog, select New All, and click OK. 11 Click Customize menu ➤ Units Setup.

Render a Revit Architecture Building Model in 3ds Max | 447

12 In the Units Setup dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Display Unit Scale, select US Standard. Verify Feet w/Fractional Inches is displayed. Under Lighting Units, select American. Click OK.

13 Click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the file as RAC Building.max.

Link the Revit Architecture building model to 3ds Max
14 Click File menu ➤ File Link Manager. 15 In the File Link Manager dialog, click the Presets tab. 16 Under Named Presets, select Revit, and click Modify. This preset contains the desired settings for linking Revit Architecture building models. 17 In the File Link Settings: DWG Files dialog, click the Advanced tab. 18 Verify Use scene material assignments on Reload is selected. This setting ensures that material changes that you make in 3ds Max will be preserved if you reload the DWG file. 19 Click Cancel. 20 In the File Link Manager, click the Attach tab, and click File. 21 In the Open dialog:

For Look in, browse to C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Common. Select c_Export_to_3DS.rvt-3DView-ToBuiliding.dwg, and click Open.

22 In the File Link Manager dialog:
■ ■ ■

For Preset, select Revit. Click the Attach tab. Click Select Layers to include. A dialog listing all the layers that were created when you exported the Revit Architecture building model to the DWG displays.

23 In the Select Layers dialog:
■ ■

Select Select from list. Scroll to view the layers, and verify that a check mark displays to the left of each layer name to indicate it is selected. In this tutorial, you want all the layers visible, but you can use this dialog control the layers that display in your 3ds Max scene.

Click OK.

24 In the File Link Manager, click Attach this file. 25 In the Proxy Object dialog, click Yes.

448 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

The file opens in the 3ds Max, and 4 different views of the building model display. Only the single camera position that created the 3d To Building view was exported with the Revit Architecture building model.

26 Close the File Link Manager.

Adjust a scene for rendering
27 On the bottom right of the screen, click in the Perspective viewport to set it current. The edges of the viewport are highlighted in yellow when the viewport is current. 28 In the top left corner of the viewport, right-click the Perspective viewport label, and click Views ➤ Camera: To Building.

29 Adjust the view:

■ ■

In the lower-right corner of the screen, click Click in the Camera: To Building viewport.

(Dolly Camera).

Render a Revit Architecture Building Model in 3ds Max | 449

Press and hold the mouse button, and drag the cursor toward you until the view is adjusted as shown.

Render the scene

30 On the Main toolbar, click

(Quick Render).

The scene renders and the rendering displays in the Render window. There are a couple of adjustments that you want to make to the rendering, including the quality of the glass and stone materials. Because this is an exterior view, you also want to add a daylight system (a sun) and a sky in the background.

31 Close the render window. NOTE If you want to save any of your renderings as you progress through this tutorial, at the top of the render window, click .

450 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

Improve the quality of the glass and stone materials in 3ds Max

32 On the Main toolbar, click

(Material Editor). (Get Material).

33 In the Material Editor, under the bottom left side of the material slots, click 34 On the left side of the Material/Map Browser, under Browse From, select Scene.

All of the materials applied to the Revit Architecture elements that were exported to the DWG file with the elements display in the right pane of the browser. 35 In the list of materials, select and drag Glass to one of the material slots at the top of the Material Editor.

36 In the Instance (Copy) Material dialog, verify Instance is selected, and click OK. 37 In the Material Editor, change the color of the glass:
■ ■ ■

Under Templates, select Glass - Clear. Under Physical Qualities, for Diffuse Color, click the color swatch. In the Color Selector, specify a golden brown color, and click Close.

38 Change the quality of the stone material on the retaining wall:

■ ■

In the Material Editor, select another slot, and click

(Pick Material from Object).

In the Camera: To Building viewport, move the cursor over the retaining wall and click to select it.

■ ■

In the Material Editor, under Templates, select Stone. Close the Material Editor and the Material Map Browser.

Render a Revit Architecture Building Model in 3ds Max | 451

Add a sun and sky
39 Click in the Top viewport and zoom out until you can see the entire building and the camera. 40 Click Create menu ➤ Lights ➤ Daylight System. 41 In the Daylight Object Creation dialog, click Yes.

42 In the Top viewport, to the right of the building, click and drag to place and size the compass rose. 43 Move the cursor down and to the right to place the sun.

44 On the right side of the screen, locate the Command panel and click 45 Under Daylight Parameters, under Position, click Setup. 46 Under Location, click Get Location. 47 In the Geographic Location list, select Boston, MA, and click OK. 48 Under Site, for North Direction, enter 250. 49 Under Time:
■ ■ ■

(Modify).

For Hours, enter 12. For Month, enter 7. For Day, enter 21.

452 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

For Year, enter 2007.

50 Click Rendering menu ➤ Environment, and verify that the Environment tab is displayed. 51 Under Common Parameters, and under Background, click the color swatch, and set the background color to a sky blue color.

Render the scene

52 On the Main toolbar, click

(Render Scene Dialog).

53 At the bottom of the panel, for Viewport, select Camera: To Building, and click the lock that displays next to the selector. The lock lets you adjust the scene in other viewports (which become active as you use them), and then click Render to render the viewport you originally chose. When off, Render always renders the active viewport. 54 Under Output size, click 640 x 480. 55 Click the Advanced Lighting tab, and under Select Advanced Lighting, select <no lighting plug-in>. 56 Click Render. The scene is rendered and displays the adjustments you made to the glass and stone materials, as well as the addition of the daylight system and sky.

57 Click File menu ➤ Save. 58 Proceed to the next exercise, “Rendering Cutaway Views in 3ds Max” on page 453.

Rendering Cutaway Views in 3ds Max
In this exercise, you create and render 2 similar cutaway views of the building model. You use 2 different techniques to create the cutaway views. You create the first view in Revit Architecture using a section box to limit or ''cut away'' geometry from the building in the front of the To Building 3D view. You then export the geometry to the DWG file you created in a previous exercise, and reload it in the Autodesk 3ds Max scene. You learn how to use a section box to limit the building model geometry that you export, a technique that is useful and time-saving when exporting large building models.

Rendering Cutaway Views in 3ds Max | 453

A cutaway view created by a section box in Revit Architecture and rendered in 3ds Max

After you create the first cutaway view, you create a similar view in 3ds Max by adjusting the visibility of the curtain wall elements so they are not visible to the camera, and then rendering the scene in the To Building viewport. Dataset

Continue to use the datasets you used in the previous exercise, c_Export to 3DS.rvt and RAC Building.max.

Create a Revit Architecture cutaway view
1 Maximize Revit Architecture. 2 In the 3D To Building view, right-click, and click View Properties. 3 In the Element Properties dialog, under Extents, select Section Box, and click OK. 4 Click View menu ➤ Zoom Out.

454 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

A section box displays around the view.

5 Select the section box so that grips display. 6 Select and move the grips until a cutaway view displays as shown.

7 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Reload the cutaway view in 3ds Max and render it
8 Export the building model to the DWG file again, and reload the DWG in 3ds Max. 9 When the file is reloaded, render it again.

Rendering Cutaway Views in 3ds Max | 455

Create a cutaway view in 3ds Max
10 Open Revit Architecture. 11 In the To Building view, right-click, and click View Properties. 12 To restore the view, in the Element Properties dialog, under Extents, clear Section Box, and click OK. 13 Export the building model to the DWG file again, and reload the DWG in 3ds Max.

14 In 3ds Max, on the Main toolbar, click

(Select Objects by Name).

15 At the top of the Select Objects dialog, enter curtain to select all the Curtain Wall Panel and Curtain Wall Mullion objects that display in the left side of the dialog. 16 At the bottom right of the dialog, click Select. The components of the curtains wall are selected. You will create a named selected set to control the camera’s visibility of these objects.

17 On the Main toolbar, click

(Edit Named Selection Sets).

18 In the Named Selection Sets dialog, click set name. 19 Close the Named Selection Sets dialog.

(Create New Set), and enter Curtain Wall for the selection

20 Right-click in the view, and click Object Properties. 21 In the Object Properties dialog, click the General tab. 22 Under Rendering Control, clear Visible to Camera, and click OK.

23 On the Main toolbar, click

.

A cutaway view, similar to the one that you created with the Revit Architecture section box displays. 24 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating a Daylight Analysis” on page 457.

456 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

Creating a Daylight Analysis
In this exercise, you create a daylight analysis of the Revit Architecture building model in 3ds Max. The analysis will uses daylight levels in a specific location to display a spectrum of colors on the building model. The colors indicate the different levels of light incident on each building surface. The blue and green colors indicate low light levels, while the red, yellow, and orange colors indicate high levels of light. A daylight analysis can be a useful tool in determining the sustainability of your Revit Architecture building models.

Dataset

Continue to use the datasets you used in the previous exercise, c_Export to 3DS.rvt, and RAC Building.max. 1 In 3ds Max, click Rendering menu ➤ Environment. 2 In the Environment and Effects dialog, under Exposure Control, select Pseudo Color Exposure Control. Pseudo Color Exposure Control is a lighting analysis tool that provides you with an intuitive way of visualizing and evaluating the lighting levels in your scenes. It maps luminance or illuminance values to pseudo colors that show the brightness of the values being converted. 3 Under Pseudo Color Exposure Control:

Under Display Type, for Quantity, select Illuminance. Illuminance displays values of light incident on surfaces.

■ ■ ■ ■

For Style, select Colored. For Scale, select Logarithmic. Under Display Range, for Min., enter 100. For Max, enter 8000. The display range sets the lowest and highest values to represent in the rendering. Although this tutorial provides display range values, when you create your own daylight analysis you will probably want to test different display ranges to get the results that you want.

4 On the Main toolbar, click

(Render Scene).

Creating a Daylight Analysis | 457

The scene renders and displays a true color rendering in the Render window. The 256 color daylight analysis is then created.

5 If desired, in the Render window, click 6 Save and close the 3ds Max scene. 7 Maximize Revit Architecture.

, and save the file.

8 Save the exercise file with a unique name, or close the file without saving it.

458 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

Importing SketchUp Files

14

The ability to import SketchUp® files directly into Revit Architecture allows you to quickly integrate sketch concepts into the Revit environment and reuse the SketchUp model without having to manually rework it. Once the model has been imported, you can easily add detail with Revit components. In this tutorial, you import a SketchUp file into a Revit Architecture project as an in-place mass family.

After you import the SketchUp model, you create a small building from the front mass form. You use the mass faces of the mass form to create Revit elements, such as walls, curtain walls, and roofs, that compose the building.

459

460 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files

Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass
In this exercise, you create a Revit Architecture project, and import a SketchUp model into the project as an in-place mass family. The in-place mass family is saved only in context of the project, and not in the library.

Create a Revit project
1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 2 In the New Project dialog, under Template file, click Browse. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric.rte. 4 In the New Project dialog, click OK. 5 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 6 In the Save As dialog, for File name, enter Import SketchUp, and click Save.

Import a SketchUp model
7 On the Design Bar, click the Massing tab. TIP If the Massing tab does not display in the Design Bar, right-click in the Design Bar, and click Massing on the context menu that displays. 8 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar, click Create Mass. 9 In the informational dialog, click OK. 10 In the Name dialog, enter SketchUp Model, and click OK. 11 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. 12 In the Import/Link dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Click the Training Files icon. Double-click the Common folder. For Files of type, select SketchUp Files. Click the Sketchup file, buildings.skp. Under Import or Link, for Layers, select All. This option allows you to select what to import: all elements, visible elements, or select from a list.

■ ■ ■

Under Layer/Level Colors, select Preserve colors. Under Positioning, select Manually place, and select Cursor at center. For Place at level, select Level 1. In a new project, Level 1 is the only choice. An existing project may have options for many levels to choose from, depending on the complexity of the project.

Under Scaling, for Import units, select Auto-Detect.

Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass | 461

You can have Revit automatically detect and convert incoming units to project units (Auto-Detect) or you can specify the units for the SketchUp drawing if you know that information.

Click Open.

The model displays in the view on the Level 1 floor plan. 13 Click to place the lower right building inside of the elevation markers.

14 On the View toolbar, click

.

15 Enter ZR to zoom in on the lower right building. 16 On the Design Bar, click Finish Mass. NOTE A warning message displays because the mass contains only mesh geometry. The mesh geometry (faces) will be used in another exercise to create Revit elements, such as walls, curtain walls, and roofs. 17 In the warning dialog, click the Close button.

18 Proceed to the next exercise, “ Creating a Building from Mass Faces” on page 462.

Creating a Building from Mass Faces
In this exercise, you use the faces of the front mass form to create Revit Architecture elements, such as walls, curtain walls, and roofs, that compose the building. The mass faces are not converted to Revit elements: they remain in the project. You turn their visibility off to view only the building.

462 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files

After you create the building from the mass faces, you modify the roofs and add doors to complete the design.

Create roofs from mass faces
1 Zoom in to the front mass form, and on the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar, click Roof by Face. 3 In the Type Selector, verify Basic Roof: Generic - 400mm displays. 4 On the Options Bar, for Level, verify Level 2 is selected. 5 Move your cursor over the top face of the left mass, and when the cursor displays a plus sign, select the face so that it highlights in red. The cursor displays a plus or a minus sign, indicating that you are adding or subtracting faces to and from the selection.

6 On the Options Bar, click Create Roof. A roof is created from the mass face. (It is difficult to see the roof in the current view. To see the new roof, on the View toolbar, click to turn off mass visibility in the view. Click again to display masses.)

7 With the Roof by Face command still active, on the Options Bar, verify that Select Multiple is selected. This option enables you to select more than 1 face when you create a roof. 8 Select the top 3 faces of the mass on the right.

Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 463

9 On the Options Bar, click Create Roof. 10 Adjust the view:

■ ■

On the View toolbar, click

.

In the Dynamic View dialog, click Spin, and move the cursor in the drawing area until you can see the middle mass.

11 Right-click, and click Cancel to end the Spin command. 12 On the Design Bar, click Roof by Face. 13 Select the top 4 faces of the mass.

14 On the Options Bar, click Create Roof.

464 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files

19 On the Design Bar. 20 In the Type Selector. Create walls from mass faces 18 On the View toolbar. select Core Face: Exterior. click you created.200mm displays. 21 On the Options Bar. click . verify Basic Wall: Generic . 22 Select the 4 mass faces that have been highlighted in red below. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 465 . and adjust the view so you can see the front of the mass form. click Wall by Face. This option lets you create the walls on the inside of the mass.15 On the Design Bar. for Loc Line. to turn off the mass visibility in the view. click Modify to end the command. 16 On the View toolbar. and display only the roofs that 17 Click again to redisplay the masses.

26 In the Type Selector. create the 2 curtain systems shown below. 24 Click to redisplay the masses. verify Curtain System: 1500 x 3000mm displays. click Create System.23 On the View toolbar. click Curtain System. 466 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files . 28 On the Options Bar. 27 Select the left face of the left mass. 29 Using the same technique. click to view only the walls and roofs. Create curtain systems from mass faces 25 On the Design Bar.

click .30 On the View toolbar. select the other wall. and adjust the view so you can see the back of the mass forms. and select it. 32 Select the 5 walls highlighted below. click Wall by Face. 34 Select the mass face shown below. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 467 . press TAB until the desired wall highlights. TIP If you have difficulty selecting a wall that shares an edge with another wall. and on the Options Bar. Create walls from mass faces 31 On the Design Bar. Create a roof from a mass face 33 On the Design Bar. click Create Roof. click Roof by Face.

38 On the View toolbar.Create additional curtain systems from mass faces 35 On the Design Bar. click to view the building that you have created. 36 Select the 4 mass faces shown below. click Wall by Face. and select the mass face shown below. 468 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files . click Curtain System. Create the final wall 37 On the Design Bar. click Create System. 39 Click to redisplay the masses. and on the Options Bar.

41 Zoom out beyond the drawing extents. and click in the drawing area to hide the grips. roofs. Below the right corner of the view. The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display. 42 Place the camera and its target: ■ ■ ■ On the View tab of the Design Bar. to view only the walls. specify a point for the camera target. 44 On the View toolbar. click in the view. and curtain systems that make up your building Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 469 . under Floor Plans. The perspective view created by the camera displays. as shown. double-click Level 1. 43 Resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see the building. click Camera.Create a 3D perspective view of the building with a camera 40 In the Project Browser. specify a point to place the camera. In the far left corner of the building that you created.

select Center. select Center. Change the justification of the curtain systems 45 On the Design Bar. 46 On the Options Bar. Click the frame to display its grips. Modify the roofs 49 On the Views toolbar. and select the left curtain system in the view. for Justification. 470 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files . click . Under Grid 1 Pattern. Click OK.You may need to resize the view again. click Modify. Under Grid 2 Pattern. click 47 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . for Justification. 48 Repeat the preceding steps to change the justifications of the 2 other curtain systems in the view.

56 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 471 . and click Cancel to end the command. 52 In the Project Browser.50 Select each roof to display its grips. double-click 3D View 1. under 3D Views. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 55 On the View toolbar. 51 Right-click. 58 Add doors to the building as shown below. 53 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. double-click {3D}. under 3D Views. verify M_Single-Flush: 0915 x 2134mm displays. click Door. 57 In the Type Selector. and adjust the view so you can see the front of the building. Add doors to the building 54 In the Project Browser. and move the roof edges as shown below. click .

59 Save and close the drawing. 472 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files .

Creating Families 6 473 .

474 | Chapter 15 Creating Families .

each with a different size. In this tutorial. Changes to a family type definition ripple through the project and are automatically reflected in every instance of that family or type within the project. Even though various types within a family can look completely different. thus the term family. you learn about the various types of families and the Family Editor. they are still related and come from a single source. shape.” The term family describes a powerful concept used throughout Revit Architecture to help you manage your data and make changes easily. 475 . or other parameter variables as designed by the family creator. Each family element can have multiple types defined within it.About Families and the Family Editor 15 All elements in Revit Architecture 2008 are “family based. This keeps everything coordinated and saves you the time and effort of manually keeping components and schedules up to date. material set.

but you cannot create new system families. The following illustration shows different types within the basic walls family. exterior. and roofs. Standalone families include columns. you create a family within predefined templates that contain the intelligent objects needed to create the particular family type. if you create a family called "double-hung window" that includes types with several sizes. Walls. You can either duplicate and modify an existing component family or create a new component family based on a variety of family templates. 476 | Chapter 15 About Families and the Family Editor . floors. and when and how to use it. NOTE You can use “Transfer Project Standards” to copy system families from one project to another. Family templates are either host-based or standalone.rfa extension. You work with the Family Editor to create and modify components. there is another type of family that allows you to create any shape or form required for a particular project and have Revit Architecture recognize it as a particular component type. foundation. and furniture. Standard Component Families Standard component families are loaded by default in project templates. generic. and roofs are examples of these types of families. the types would all be saved as one file which can then be loaded into any project. The basic walls system family. For example. floors. This makes file management much easier. Introduction to Families Most families are created in the Family Editor and saved as separate files with an . You provide the information necessary to uniquely describe the family geometry. transfer them from one project to another. Standard component families can exist outside of the project environment and have an . however. such as a dome roof. Host-based families have components that require hosts. You can duplicate and modify existing system families. An example is a door family hosted by a wall family. There are. Some family types are pre-defined within Revit Architecture and cannot be created or modified outside of the project environment. you learn about the three types of families and how they are used within a project and how they are created. while many more are stored in component libraries.Using Families and the Family Editor One of the many advantages of using Revit Architecture is the ability to create your own families of components without having to learn a complex programming language. for example. exceptions to this rule. and partition wall styles. You can load them into projects. because there is only one file to track. Revit Architecture has three types of families: ■ ■ ■ System Standard Component In-place System Families System families are pre-defined within Revit Architecture and comprise principle building components such as walls.rfa extension. All different types that you create are stored with the master family file. You also learn about the Family Editor. Family templates assist you in creating and manipulating component families. In addition. has wall types that define interior. and save them from a project file to your library if needed. trees. Using the Family Editor. In this lesson.

2 On the File menu. In-place Families In-place families are either model or annotation components in a particular project. In this section. Introduction to the Family Editor You can use the Family Editor to create both real-life building components and graphical/annotation components. and also a standalone furniture family component. 3 Navigate to the library or location of the family. Families store all of the necessary geometry to display the two-dimensional (2D) and three-dimensional (3D) versions of particular objects. In the final exercise. Load Family command on the File menu. Family element visibility can be dependent of your viewing direction. you can drag it into the document window. such as plan. custom wall treatments.The following illustration shows host-based window and door family components in a wall. and the category that you use determines the component’s appearance and display control within the project. how to access it. so they are useful for objects unique to that project. The following illustration shows a building model of the Pantheon without a roof and with an in-place roof family. To add a family to your project. and when to use it. 4 Select the family file name and click Open. click Load From Library ➤ Load Family. as well as the level of detail associated with that view. You create in-place families only within the current project. After the family has been loaded in the project. it is saved with the project. Introduction to the Family Editor | 477 . However. you need to reload the family in the project to see the updated family. or you can load it using the Load From Library. You do not have to carry the original family file along with the project. You have a choice of categories when you create in-place families. if you change the original family. for example. or 3D. Adding a family to a project 1 Open or start a project. Families are listed in the Project Browser under their respective component category. you learn about the Family Editor. you learned about the different types of Revit Architecture families and when to use them. elevation.

3 Next. it should be available within the Type Selector. With Revit Architecture open. consider checking the web library and other web resources. If you find a close match. and then load it into the project. you should then try to find the component that most closely resembles it. such as newsgroups. navigate to a family file. you will inevitably come to a point where you need a specific component for your design. presume it is a bay window that you require. When the family opens. 2 Define sub-categories for the family to aid in controlling visibility of the object. and click Open. select the appropriate template. you can search the component library loaded on your local hard drive. Within the Windows® environment. how to access it. click File ➤ New ➤ Family. To start a new family. 478 | Chapter 15 About Families and the Family Editor . Also consider any internal family libraries that may exist on the network. 7 Specify 2D and 3D geometry display characteristics with sub-category and entity visibility settings. 3 Lay out reference planes to aid in drawing component geometry. you learn when to use the Family Editor. There is a logical thought process that you should follow: 1 Is there a component of this type already loaded into this project? If so. 4 Add dimensions to specify parametric component geometry. When to use the Family Editor During the design process. 8 Define family type variations by specifying different parameters. it opens within the Family Editor. and click Open. General procedure for creating a standard component family 1 Select the appropriate family template. How to use the Family Editor You can access the Family Editor in several ways. open it in the Family Editor. 9 Save the newly-defined family. 5 Finally. It is far easier to modify an existing component within the Family Editor than to create it from scratch.rfa extension and it will open Revit Architecture in the Family Editor. and then load it into a new project and see how it performs. 4 If you can’t find the component you require. and the general procedure for creating a standard component family. This will be apparent because the only Design Bar tab available is Family. modify it as needed. In this case. you can click File ➤ Open.In this exercise. You can have a project open and the Family Editor open simultaneously. you should create a new component family using one of the family templates as a starting point. if you have exhausted your external resources. 2 If there isn’t a component family loaded in the project. you can double-click any file with an . 6 Flex the new model to verify correct component behavior. 5 Add label dimensions to create type or instance parameters.

In addition. This allows you to create the family in the context of the current project. you create an in-place family. 479 . you learn how to create specific Revit Architecture 2008 families. In each lesson. a lighting fixture. not within the Family Editor.Creating Components in the Family Editor 16 In this tutorial. Using the installed templates. You create a furniture family. When you create an in-place family. and several annotation families. you learn how to create a different type of component. you start with a simple door family and then move onto a window family. you create it within the project file.

Subcategories are used to define visibility settings. Step 6: If the selected family template is a host-based template. both of which must be a closed loop with no intersection between the sketch lines. Step 3: Use the Element Properties dialog to define the reference planes that represent the origin of the family. The start and end angles of the revolution can be defined in the Revolution properties. Step 8: Test (flex) the family: switch between the types. click Finish Sketch on the Design bar. Revolve: The sketch for a revolved object must be a closed loop with no intersection between the sketch lines. create different host types for testing purposes. The first line of the path defines the work plane for the profile. and Sweep. and pin those reference planes. and test after each step.Creating 3D Geometry All tools for creating 3D geometry can be accessed in the Family Design Bar. Step 10: Repeat the flex procedure until reasonably complete. line patterns. To quit the sketch mode. if required. tests at this point ensure that the skeleton of the family works correctly. When you are in sketch mode. Solids and Voids are sketch based. You can also join the geometry of different solids with the Join Geometry tool. Step 11: Test the family in a project environment. The sketches must not touch or intersect each other. Step 9: Create a single level of 2D and 3D geometry and lock it to the selected reference planes. ■ ■ ■ When a void is placed on a solid. If you place the void before you add the solid. Each sketch is set to a different height. fill patterns. and a Profile that must be a closed loop with no intersection between the sketch lines. There can be more than one closed loop in the sketch but they must not touch or intersect each other. Sweep: A sweep contains two sketches: a 2D Path that can be a closed or open. continue to incrementally add reference planes. materials. Revolve. use the Cut Geometry tool to create the cut. You can unjoin solids or cancel the cutting of a void on a solid using commands available on the Tools toolbar: ■ ■ ■ ■ Join Geometry Unjoin Geometry Cut Geometry Don’t Cut Process Overview: Creating a Family Follow this best practice process for creating a family: Step 1: Select a family template. switch between the different host types. it automatically cuts the solid. Blend: A blend contains two sketches. if the family includes a host. The sample below shows a start angle of 0° and an end angle of 180°. build geometry. ■ Extrusion: The sketch for an extrusion must be a closed loop with no intersection between the sketch lines. Base and Top. you can no longer select or modify an element that is not in the sketch. There are four different methods to create Solid geometry and/or Void geometry in the Family Design Bar: Extrusion. Step 5: Dimension the reference planes and create parameters. and export settings for selected geometry. Note that no geometry is created. Step 7: Add 2 or more types in the Family Types dialog with different values for the parameters. Blend. Step 4: Create the skeleton of the family by adding reference planes in all required views. Step 2: Define additional subcategories. 480 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . line colors. lineweight settings.

2 Create a horizontal reference plane above the existing horizontal reference plane. 8 Using the same method. and on the Options Bar. click Training Files. NOTE The direction of the reference planes is not important. The floor plan Ref. and create one to the right. 4 Navigate to Metric ➤ Templates. The furniture family in this lesson has the shape of two boxes.rft. You have created a new furniture family. Select a family template 1 Close all open projects or families. verify that Defines Origin is selected for the Center (Left/Right) reference plane.Defining the Origin of a Family The intersection of 2 reference planes in a view defines the origin and the insertion point of a family in a project. select Metric Furniture. and click OK. click 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 1 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. You should name reference planes to easily identify them in all views. click to pin the reference planes. therefore new reference planes are required in plan and elevation views. verify that Other ➤ Defines Origin is selected. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. 5 While pressing CTRL. 6 Select the horizontal reference plane named Center (Front/Back). and the family contains 2 reference planes in this floor plan. and create one below. and click OK. 3 Create a vertical reference plane to the left of the existing vertical reference plane. . Defining the Origin of a Family | 481 . you define the skeleton of the family with reference planes in plan and elevation views before you create geometry. select both reference planes. on the Edit toolbar. Adding Reference Planes Next. and click Open. You can control which reference planes are used as origin in the Element Properties dialog. click Ref Plane. 2 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. Level is open. The intersection of these reference planes now defines the origin and the insertion point of the family in plan view.

on the Options Bar. and click OK. You name reference planes so that you can identify them in different views.4 Click Modify. Name reference planes 5 Select the left reference plane and. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Left. for Identity Data ➤ Name. 482 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click .

When you dimension a family and a strong and a weak reference are close together. Is Reference Value Not a Reference Definition The reference plane can be used in a family. Weak Reference Strong Reference Directional References According to these rules. define the priorities of the reference planes you have created. The reference plane can be accessed in a project for alignment or dimensioning. The reference plane allows minor strength snapping. Shape handles display if the reference plane is dimensioned with an instance parameter. and on the Options Bar. 1 Select the Left reference plane. The reference allows minor strength snapping. The reference does not snap and shows no shape handles. click . and click OK. These are predefined system priorities that define a direction (for example. top). right. The priority is specified as the Is Reference value in the Element Properties dialog for the reference plane. left. as shown. the strong reference is always captured first.7 Using the same method. If a reference plane defines the left edge of a family. 2 In the Element Properties dialog. The reference plane can be accessed in a project for alignment or dimensioning. Shape handles display if the reference plane is dimensioned with an instance parameter. Front. name the other reference planes Right. for Other ➤ Is Reference. Defining Priorities for Reference Planes | 483 . select Left. use Left for the Is Reference value. Defining Priorities for Reference Planes Revit Architecture includes several predefined priorities that you can apply to a reference plane. These behave the same as strong references. but cannot be accessed in a project for alignment or dimensioning. and Back.

For Group parameter under. Dimensioning Reference Planes The dimension controls the behavior of the location of reference planes. Click the temporary dimension. for Label. enter Length. 5 Click Modify. Repeat for the other reference plane. and press ENTER. The dimension can have a fixed value or can be driven by a parameter. 484 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . specify the Is Reference value to correspond to the name of each reference plane (Right. 4 Select the Left reference plane and the Right reference plane. and Height as parameters of the furniture family. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. 2 Dimension the vertical reference planes: ■ ■ ■ Select one of the new reference planes. and press ENTER. Note that the Length parameter has been added to the dimension string. for Name. Width. and click above the planes to place the dimension. 7 On the Options Bar. Repeat for the other reference plane. We want drive Length. 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. enter 300mm. Click OK.3 Using the same method. and Back). 6 Select the dimension line. Front. select Dimensions. select Add Parameter. enter 750mm. click Dimension. Click the temporary dimension. 1 Dimension the horizontal reference planes: ■ ■ ■ Select one of the new reference planes.

11 Click each of the vertical reference planes. Dimensioning Reference Planes | 485 . and click the EQ symbol above the dimension.9 Using the same method. dimension the horizontal reference planes. click Dimension. Add a multi-segment dimension 10 On the Design Bar. dimension the outer horizontal reference planes with the Width parameter. 12 Using the same method. click to place the dimension.

name them Base Left. click the base reference planes. Base Right. Because the base planes should not be used as a reference for dimensions or alignments. 15 Using the Element Properties dialog. click Ref Plane. and click . 14 Create 2 horizontal reference planes and 2 vertical reference planes within the existing outer reference planes. and press ENTER. but do not appear in the project. 16 While pressing CTRL. 486 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Base Front. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. select Not a Reference. 18 Click the Base Left reference plane. and Base Back. enter 50mm for the left temporary dimension. Position and dimension the 4 new reference planes with a fixed distance from the outer reference planes. you need to specify the Is Reference values.Add base reference planes 13 On the Design Bar. and click OK. for Other ➤ Is Reference. Now the reference planes can be used in the family.

20 On the Design Bar. Dimensioning Reference Planes | 487 . and lock the dimension. click Dimension.19 Using the same method. position the remaining new reference planes. 21 Select the Left and Base Left reference planes.

and section views. Under Is Reference. The front view displays. For Identity Data ➤ Name.22 Using the same method. double-click Front. enter Base Bottom. Next. Make sure that you use consistent views to add dimensions. You can dimension reference planes in plan. 24 On the Design Bar. click Ref Plane. 28 Change the lower temporary dimension to 150mm. 25 Create 2 horizontal reference planes above the existing horizontal reference plane. By default. the family contains a level and a reference plane that defines the origin of the family in the elevation view. Click OK. and lock the dimensions. under Elevations. 26 Select the middle reference plane. 488 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 23 In the Project Browser. elevation. select Not a Reference. and click 27 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . you add a reference plane and the Height parameter of the family in the Front view. dimension all other reference planes for the base with the outer reference planes.

For Identity Data ➤ Name. 38 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. Under Group parameter under. Under Is Reference. 33 Select the lower reference plane and the Base Bottom reference plane. click 31 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . navigate to Training/Metric/Families. 34 Lock the dimension. for Name. and save the file as Cabinet. select Dimensions. click Dimension. 36 Click Modify. select Top. 32 On the Design Bar. Click OK. on the Options Bar. The basic skeleton of the furniture family is completed. 37 Select the last dimension added. and click to place the dimension. you create 2 types of the family in the Family Types dialog. enter Height. Dimensioning Reference Planes | 489 . select Add Parameter. Click OK. 35 Dimension the lower reference plane and the Top reference plane. In the next exercise.rfa. enter Top. 30 With the top reference plane still selected. 39 Click File menu ➤ Save.29 Select the top reference plane and change the temporary dimension to 1450mm. for Label.

6 In the Family Types dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. enter 1800. enter 1000. Level. When a family is loaded in a project. and dimensions are specified. enter 2800. Best practice is to perform the first tests when the reference planes. the types defined in the family editor appear in the project. Note that the reference planes and the dimensions adjust according to the entered values. clicking Apply adjusts the geometry without closing the dialog. 11 Click OK. enter 2000. for Height.Managing Family Parameters and Family Types Parameters and their values can be managed in the Family Types dialog. Family types are also a good way to test your family for correct behavior. 9 In the Family Types dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Name dialog. each type is represented with selected parameters. for Width. enter 800. click Family Types. under Floor plans. enter 600 x 1500 x 1600. double-click Ref. for Height. for Name. NOTE In the Family Types dialog. 2 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. create a new type named 800 x 1000 x 1800. 10 Click Apply. parameters. for Width. NOTE In order to see changes applied to the reference planes. but no geometry has been added. 5 Using the same method. Note that the name of the type you have created is displayed in the Name selection box at the top of the dialog. click New. enter 1000. click in the titlebar of the Family Types dialog and drag it so that both the dialog and the drawing area are visible. Family types allow you to predefine variations of a family. 7 Click Apply. create a new type named 1000 x 2000 x 2800. 3 In the Family Types dialog. under Family Types. clicking OK adjusts the geometry and closes the dialog. check the family as often as possible by switching between different types. For Length. 490 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click OK. 8 Using the same method. For Length.

Defining Work Planes Any solid/void form is created on a work plane. Lock geometry to reference planes | 491 . you can select a named reference plane or define a work plane by picking a plane or a line in the drawing area before you sketch geometry. create an extrusion from the plan view. double-click Ref. under Floor Plans. In such an instance. you only need to lock the top and bottom edges of the solid geometry. Sketch an extrusion 1 In the Project Browser. You constrain the extrusions to the reference planes you created in previous exercises. In that case. Locking edges of solid/void forms: In elevation view.Lock geometry to reference planes Locking sketch lines: Lines of a sketch can be locked to a reference plane in plan view to ensure that the edge of the solid is maintained if the dimension of the reference plane changes. 2 On the Design Bar. edges of a solid form can also be locked to reference planes. The Family Editor offers multiple tools to set a work plane current: Define a work plane before adding geometry: Using the Work Plane dialog. Change a work plane for existing geometry: You can also use the Work Plane dialog to change the work plane for existing geometry in a drawing. and click Edit Work Plane on the Options bar. Creating Solid Forms Use the simplest form to create solid geometry for a furniture family. Creating Geometry In this lesson. A work plane is a planar surface on which you can add sketch lines or others components. Reference planes have the ability to define a work plane if they are named. where you can define the plane. Because you lock the planar edges in plan view. This option will display the Work Plane dialog. Make sure that you have set an appropriate work plane when you create 2D or 3D geometry in your family. select the geometry. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. you access the Work Plane dialog by clicking (Plane) on the Tools toolbar. you use extrusions to model the solid geometry of a cabinet family. Define a work plane in sketch mode: While in sketch mode. there is an option on the Sketch tab of the Design Bar to Set Work Plane. Level.

3 On the Options Bar. You can use the Align tool to align the sketch lines with the desired reference planes. the extrusion is changed accordingly in plan view. do not sketch directly on the reference planes. with multiple reference planes or when you need to sketch with the Line tool. When the setup is more complex. click Finish Sketch. When the parameters Length and Width change. 5 Lock each line of the sketch with the reference plane. NOTE Only sketch directly on the desired reference planes when the situation is clearly arranged. 6 On the Sketch tab. click . An example of sketch lines drawn off of reference planes An example of sketch lines aligned on the desired reference plane 492 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . The sketch of the extrusion is now locked to the outer reference planes in plan view. 4 Sketch the rectangle directly on the outer reference planes.

NOTE You can also drag the top edge of the solid geometry with the extrusion shape handle to the top reference plane and lock it. 10 Lock the dimension. under Elevations.Adjust extrusion height 7 In the Project Browser. click (Align). and click the top edge of the extrusion to align to this reference plane. double-click Front. 8 On the Options Bar. Creating Solid Forms | 493 . 9 Select the Top reference plane as the alignment reference.

16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans.11 Align the bottom of the extrusion to the Base Bottom reference plane and lock the dimension. and click OK. click . 23 Save the file. Level. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. click Finish Sketch. double-click Ref. click . click Visibility. and lock all the sketch lines with the reference planes. and click the top edge of the extrusion to align to this reference plane. Create the base geometry 12 In the Project Browser. 18 On the Tools toolbar. 22 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. double-click Front. 20 Click Modify. 19 Select the Base Bottom reference plane as the alignment reference. 17 In the Project Browser. 13 On the Design Bar. clear Plan/RCP. under View Specific Display. under Elevations. 21 Click the base geometry and on the Options Bar. 15 Sketch the rectangle directly on the reference planes for the base (the inner reference planes). 14 On the Options Bar. 494 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . The base should display only in elevation and 3D views.

The family geometry should change each time you apply a different type. the software automatically creates the correct plan. 5 On the Options Bar. the lines need to appear in medium and fine detail levels. 6 Draw a line from the top left corner of the reference planes to the lower right corner. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. and section views of the family. When you use 3D geometry. 9 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. verify that the Line tool is active. they show only in views that are parallel to their creation view. Level. Test the family 11 On the Design Bar. There are 2 methods for adding 2D geometry available from the Family tab of the Design Bar: Model lines: these can be added in all views. select both lines and. click Symbolic Lines. 12 In the Family Types dialog. Click Modify. The lines are greyed out. 8 While pressing CTRL. elevation. Creating 2D Geometry | 495 . 2 While pressing CTRL. click Visibility. but not in coarse. 7 Draw a symbolic line from the lower left corner to the top right corner. clear Coarse. 13 Click OK. and click the locks to create the constraint. 4 On the Design Bar. on the Options Bar. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. as the current displayed detail level is Coarse. 1 In the Project Browser. The lines display again. click Family Types. For the furniture family. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. and click OK. Symbolic lines: these can be added in plan. By design. For example. and click Apply. 3 On the View Control Bar. 10 On the View Control Bar. select the symbolic line. and lock the geometry. select the base geometry and the furniture geometry. use model lines to display additional lines in the 3D view of the family. elevation. under Floor plans. double-click Ref.Creating 2D Geometry You can create families using 3D and 2D geometry. NOTE You have to exit Symbolic Line mode to lock the geometry. Model lines and symbolic lines can also be constrained to reference planes. under Detail Levels. lines need to be added as symbolic illustration in plan views. and lock the geometry. select a different family type. 14 On the View Control Bar. and section views. Hiding the existing solid geometry before you create the symbolic lines helps you create the lines on the intersections of the reference planes. They are view direction specific.

Before you save the family.The geometry of the furniture family is complete. The last view creates the thumbnail view of the family. 5 Save the file. 2 On the View Control Bar. 3 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northwest. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. under 3D views. 4 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Save View. double-click View 1. 496 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Loading a Family into a Project Families can be loaded directly from the family editor into selected open projects. set a 3D view of the family current. This opens a predefined 3D view. Save a 3D view 1 In the Project Browser.

All the family types you created are listed as options. If required. 10 In the Project Browser. Creating a Door Family | 497 . drag each of the types into the drawing area. 13 Close all open projects or families. this view is maintained when the family is opened again. under Cabinet. and click to place them. 9 In the Project Browser. 11 Click Modify. The family is loaded into the new project. click Load into Projects. you create new door types based on size and assign parameters respectively.rfa 3D View: View 1 to switch to the family. Creating a Door Family In this lesson. expand Families ➤ Furniture ➤ Cabinet. click . click (3D). 8 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 12 On the Views toolbar. you create a custom door family based on the definition of a flush exterior door. You can press SPACE to change the orientation of the type. Create a project 6 On the Standard toolbar. After you create the door leaf as an extrusion.NOTE If you save the family in a 3D view different than the default {3D} view and if you have saved the orientation of your view. you can create additional types with different dimensions in a project. 7 Click Window menu ➤ Cabinet.

Create a new family based on the default door template 1 Close any open projects or families. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Door. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. Drawing the Door Plan View Components In this exercise.rft. and thickness. you draw the plan view components for the new door family.You also learn how to constrain the door design by adding labelled dimensions to specify values for the door width. click Training Files. 2 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. The door type has a variable height and width. 498 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . height.

are also displayed. select Doors [projection]. and represent the door opening profile. 10 On the Options Bar. 9 In the Type Selector. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit. The door opening is aligned and locked to the reference planes. Drawing the Door Plan View Components | 499 . click Tile. 11 Starting at the door hinge point on the lower left corner of the door opening. Floor Plan: Ref. click Symbolic Lines. Notice the four tiled views. 7 Enter ZF. click . 6 Maximize the window. The reference planes that display are part of the default door template. 5 On the Window menu. sketch a 1000 mm x 50 mm rectangle for the door leaf as shown.4 On the View menu. part of the door properties. Labelled dimensions. Level. this is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit. Draw the door panel plan view representation 8 On the Design Bar.

13 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge to the right edge of the door panel as shown. click Dimension.Dimension the door panel 12 On the Design Bar. 500 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 14 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge of the door panel to the bottom edge as shown.

16 Select the vertical dimension that controls the door width. a user can change the value of the Width parameter and all dimensions labelled with it change accordingly.Add dimension labels to the door leaf 15 On the Design Bar. select Width for Label. Because labelled dimensions are parameters. click Modify. NOTE This same label is applied to the dimension referencing the door opening. 19 On the Options Bar. Drawing the Door Plan View Components | 501 . 18 Select the horizontal dimension that references the door thickness. 17 On the Options Bar. select Thickness for Label.

click the down arrow button. the arc is selected so you can see the arc center and each end point. In the image below. along with the witness line controls. 23 On the Options Bar. 24 Enter SI. click . 21 On the Design Bar. as shown. you first specify the arc center. so it doesn’t visually interfere with the door swing location. 502 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 25 Select the upper right corner of the door opening for the arc start point. select Plan Swing [cut]. 22 In the Type selector. and select the intersection at the upper left corner of the door opening for the arc center point.Draw the door opening plan view arc 20 Select the dimension with the two EQ symbols and move it. then you specify each end point. When drawing an arc from center and end points. 26 Select the upper left corner of the door leaf for the arc endpoint. click Symbolic Lines. and select the command from the menu. TIP If the Arc from Center and End Points command is not visible on the Options Bar.

6 On the Options Bar.Add a reference plane for the exterior face of the door 27 Proceed to the next exercise. 7 Select the upper left corner of the door opening for the first corner of the rectangle. and click . enter 50 mm for Depth. 1 In the Project Browser. select Reference Plane: Exterior for Name. click Lines. double-click Exterior. 3 On the Design Bar. under Elevations. and click OK. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 5 On the Design Bar. under Specify a new Work Plane. “Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry” on page 503. you create the solid geometry of the door leaf with an extrusion. 4 In the Work Plane dialog. 2 On the Design Bar. and then select the lower right corner of the door opening for the second corner of the rectangle. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry In this exercise. click Set Work Plane. Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry | 503 .

TIP When you add the witness line to the exterior face of the extrusion. then click to specify the dimension witness line. 9 In the Project Browser under Elevations. click Finish Sketch. use the TAB key to toggle to the extrusion reference. 504 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 11 Add a horizontal dimension from the exterior face of the door extrusion to the interior face of the door extrusion.8 On the Design Bar. 10 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. double-click Left.

select Front/Back. Level. 14 In the Project Browser. under View Specific Display. Specify the visibility of the door leaf in plan view 15 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 17 On the Options Bar. and clear Plan/RCP. 19 Under Detail Levels. under Floor Plans. Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry | 505 . Left/Right. 16 Select the door leaf extrusion. click Modify and select the dimension. and click OK. double-click Ref. 13 On the Options Bar. and Fine are selected. and When cut in Plan/RCP.12 On the Design Bar. Medium. 18 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. click Visibility. verify that Coarse. select Thickness for Label.

Assign the Oak Door material to the door frame 14 Select the interior door frame extrusion. It also defines its appearance when rendered. Assign the Oak Door material to the door leaf 8 Select the door leaf extrusion. and click OK. 4 In the Materials dialog. The solid geometry of the door is now complete. Assigning Materials to the Door Components In this exercise. click 11 In the Materials dialog. and click OK. 15 On the Options Bar. Create a new material based on the existing red oak material 1 On the Settings menu. navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Oak. The door leaf is assigned the new Oak Door material. select Oak Door for Name. under AccuRender. 506 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. click . 16 In the Element Properties dialog. 6 Click OK. for Material. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. click OK.20 On the Options Bar. select Panel for Subcategory. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. enter Oak Door for Name. This material designation controls how it displays in shaded and hidden line views. 13 On the Design Bar.No Gloss. 2 In the Materials dialog. under Materials and Finishes. click . select Oak Door. click . click for Texture. for Material. click Modify.Dark.Red/Stained. you assign a material to the door leaf. 9 On the Options Bar. 5 In the Material Library dialog. 7 In the Materials dialog. 3 In the New Material dialog. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. click Materials. “Assigning Materials to the Door Components” on page 506. under Name. click OK. click OK. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. click Duplicate. 19 Repeat the previous five steps for the exterior frame extrusion. click 17 In the Materials dialog. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK.

under 3D Views. Flex the door model 23 Zoom out to view the entire door. The Oak Door material is now assigned to the door leaf and door frame. and select Shading with Edges. click the Model Graphics Style control. double-click View 1.The door frame is assigned the new Oak Door material. 22 Zoom in on a door corner. 21 On the View Control Bar. View the new door 20 In the Project Browser. Assigning Materials to the Door Components | 507 . under Views (all).

By flexing the new component. 25 In the Family Types dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. you ensure it adjusts to the changes it may encounter once loaded into a project. Click Apply. enter 125 mm for Frame Width. 26 Return the door parameters to their original values. 24 On the Design Bar. “Defining New Door Types” on page 508 Defining New Door Types In this exercise. 28 Proceed to the next exercise. 508 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Family Types. Enter 1500 mm for Width. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. enter 75 mm for Frame Width. Under Other. Enter 1000 mm for Width. and click OK. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. In the Family Types dialog. Define new door types with various heights and widths 1 On the Design Bar. enter 925 x 2000mm for Name. 27 Click OK.Flexing the new family is an important part of the design process. under Family Types. click Family Types. Try to move the dialog off to the side so you can still see the door family next to it. Notice the door geometry adapts to the new dimension values. click New. 3 In the Name dialog. 2 In the Family Types dialog. enter 2000 mm for Height. This allows you to apply changes made in the dialog and see how the new door reacts. Under Other. Click Apply. enter 2500 mm for Height. you define new door types based on the door model that you have created.

click Wall. 12 On the File menu. enter 2100 mm for Height. and click OK. select Project. Training Door. 13 Navigate to the folder of your choice and save the new door family with the name. 16 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. and click OK. 18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Use the default wall selection in the Type Selector.rte. 19 On the Options Bar.4 In the Family Types dialog. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. click Training Files. 15 In the New Project dialog. navigate to the location where you saved the door family. enter 2134 mm for Height. Defining New Door Types | 509 . 10 In the Family Types dialog. click Browse. 5 Under Family Types. enter 750 x 2100mm for Name. 8 Under Family Types. Define the second new door type. Load the new door family into a new project 14 On the File menu. 17 Under Create new. click Save. 7 In the Family Types dialog. 20 In the Open dialog. enter 1220 x 2134mm for Name. Enter 1220 mm for Width. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 11 Click OK. under Template file. Training Door.rfa. click New. 9 In the Name dialog. click New.rfa. Click Apply. Enter 925 mm for Width. Click Apply. and click Open. You now have three new door types defined within your door family. select it. 6 In the Name dialog. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Enter 750 mm for Width. and click OK. click Door. Place new door types in the project 21 On the Design Bar. Define the third new door type. Click Apply. 22 Draw a wall segment 8000mm long. click Load. click New ➤ Project. enter 2000 mm for Height.

27 Add the door to the left side of the wall as shown. 29 Add this door to the center of the wall as shown. 25 On the Design Bar. select Training Door : 750 x 2100mm. 24 On the View Control Bar. click . 28 In the Type Selector.23 On the View toolbar. and select Shading with Edges. click Door. 26 In the Type Selector. 510 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click the Model Graphics Style control. select Training Door : 925 x 2000mm.

and mullion offset. This completes the lesson. Creating a Window Family | 511 . You create the window frame. height. and create the window sash as a sweep. 32 You can close all files without saving. you assign new dimension values to the window to create new types within the window family. default sill height. and specify values for the window width. You now have three new flush exterior doors based on the new door family prototype. Creating a Door Family.30 In the Type Selector. Creating a Window Family In this lesson. select Training Door : 1220 x 2134mm. Finally. 31 Add the third door type to the right side of the wall as shown. you create a custom window family based on the definition of a fixed rectangular window with nine lights. You then assign parameters to the window family to allow for the creation of different-sized versions of the nine-light prototype. glazing and mullions as extrusions.

click New ➤ Family. 4 Maximize the Elevation: Exterior view. is one of the type parameters. Create a new family based on the default window template 1 Close any open projects or families. The label name. this is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit. click Training Files. 6 Two dimension strings display with their labels. 5 Enter ZF. these specific type parameters are adjustable once the window is part of a project. Height and Default Sill Height. When you add labels to dimensions. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Window. and the height of the top and bottom row of lights is adjustable.Specifying the New Window Parameters In this exercise. you specify the parameters for the new window family. The window type has a variable height and width. 2 On the File menu. also one of the window properties. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. 512 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . equally spaced vertical mullions.rft.

Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Sweep. enter 1300 mm for Height. “Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry” on page 513. click . 11 Proceed to the next exercise. Move the dialog off to the side so you can see the window opening. Creating sweep geometry requires first sketching the sweep path. Snap the cursor to each corner. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. The profile is swept along the path to create the solid geometry. Create a sweep path for the window frame solid geometry 1 On the Design Bar. This is the starting point for the new window. 5 Sketch a rectangle to represent the sweep path starting at the upper left corner of the opening and ending at the lower right corner. and click Apply. Enter 1800 mm for Width. 3 On the Design Bar. then sketching the sweep profile. Notice how the window opening adapts to the changing dimension values. 2 On the Design Bar. you create the solid geometry of the window frame with a sweep. 4 On the Options Bar. Change the height and width values again. and click Apply. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry In this exercise. 9 Enter 1000 mm for Height and 2000 mm for Width. This process is called “flexing the model. click Lines. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry | 513 . 8 In the Family Types dialog. click Family Types.Modify the new window type height and width parameters 7 On the Design Bar. click Sketch 2D Path. 10 Click OK. Click Apply.” and it is done to avoid conflicts and to ensure that all model geometry adjusts to changes as designed.

6 Click the locks so the sweep is locked to the opening size. and select 1:10. click Finish Path. The red dot indicates the intersection of the sweep path and the profile plane. 11 Zoom in on the red dot in the middle of the wall. click the Scale control. 10 On the View Control Bar. select Elevation: Right. click Sketch Profile. click Ref Plane. and specify an offset of 50 mm. and click Open View. Add a reference plane for the sweep profile 8 On the Design Bar. 9 In the Go To View dialog. 14 Pick the exterior wall face so that a reference line is offset 50 mm to the left of the exterior wall face as shown. 13 On the Options Bar. 514 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click . 7 On the Design Bar. 12 On the Design Bar.

sketch the frame profile approximately as shown. and click OK. 25 Below the red dot. select Prefer: Wall faces. 18 On the Design Bar. and select the reference plane. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry | 515 . enter Sash for the Name. Sketch the window frame profile 23 On the Design Bar. 17 Add a dimension between the exterior wall face and the new reference plane.15 On the Design Bar. click Modify. and select the dimension. 19 Drag the value control off to the side as shown. 21 On the Options Bar. click Modify. 16 On the Options Bar. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. click . select Chain and click . 24 On the Options Bar. click Dimension. under Identity Data. click Lines. 20 On the Design Bar.

the exact dimensions are not critical. and drag it to the interior face of the wall. However. 26 On the Design Bar. click it to constrain the left edge of the frame to the interior face. and drag it to the exterior face of the wall. 28 Select the left edge of the frame section.NOTE When you sketch the frame profile. When the lock displays. click Modify. 27 Select the right edge of the frame section. the frame profile should extend beyond the edges of the wall. 516 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . When the lock displays. Precise dimensions are assigned to the frame profile in subsequent steps. click it to constrain the frame to the exterior wall face.

30 On the Design Bar. Drag it to the left and align it with the Sash reference plane. TIP After adding the dimension. click it to lock the line to the reference plane. click Modify. 31 Add a vertical dimension of 40 mm to the left side of the frame and another vertical dimension of 20 mm to the right side of the frame.29 Select the short line parallel and to the right of the Sash reference plane. When the lock displays. click Dimension. select the line you want to move. and specify the dimension value. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry | 517 . as shown.

click . zoom out until it displays. click the lock to constrain the present value. 35 Select the horizontal reference plane that intersects the red dot. click Finish Profile. 518 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . When the lock displays. 37 On the Design Bar. Lock the alignment when the lock icon displays.Modify each dimension if necessary. 33 Select the 20 mm dimension. 34 On the Tools toolbar. click the lock to constrain the present value. select the top horizontal line of the frame profile. click Finish Sweep. When the lock displays. 36 On the Design Bar. Align the new profile to the window opening edge 32 Select the 40 mm dimension. Next. this is the top of the window opening. TIP If you don’t see the lock icon.

3 In the Work Plane dialog. Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry | 519 . Pick the sash profile lines 6 Place the cursor over the left side of the frame. expand 3D Views. double-click Exterior. under Specify a new Work Plane. click Set Work Plane. and click OK. Chain of walls or lines. and select Lock.45 mm for Depth. click Lines. If necessary. click . click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 40 Proceed to the next exercise. under Elevations. under Views (all). and enter . 5 On the Options Bar. press TAB to cycle through the selection options. 2 On the Design Bar. Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry In this exercise. 4 On the Design Bar. you create the solid geometry of the window sash with an extrusion. 38 In the Project Browser. and select the option. Specify the window sash extrusion parameters 1 On the Design Bar. 39 In the Project Browser.The window frame profile is swept around the window opening. “Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry” on page 519. and double-click View 1. select Reference Plane: Sash for Name. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. spin the model so you can see the interior of the frame.

click Finish Sketch. 8 Specify the upper left inside corner of the window frame for the first corner of the rectangle. Draw offset extrusion lines 7 On the Options Bar. ■ Click . ■ ■ Enter . and then specify the lower right inside corner for the second corner of the rectangle. set the following options: Click . 520 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . You specify a negative offset value to indicate an extrusion direction inside of the window frame. 9 On the Design Bar. and lock icons display on each line.50 mm for Offset.The entire sash outline is selected.

Spin the model if necessary to view the sash and frame at various angles. The window sash extrusion is now complete.10 In the Project Browser. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. under Elevations. you create the solid geometry of the window glass with an extrusion. under 3D Views. double-click View 1. 11 In the Project Browser. Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry In this exercise. double-click Right. Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry | 521 . Notice the sash is aligned with the Sash reference plane. “Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry” on page 521.

3 On the Options Bar. and enter 30 mm for Offset. Add a reference plane to specify the glass work plane 1 In the Project Browser. click . 522 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 2 On the Design Bar. under Elevations. as shown. 4 Select the left edge of the sash so that a vertical reference plane is added 30 mm to the right. click Ref Plane.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. double-click Right.

6 Add a horizontal dimension of 30 mm between the left edge of the sash and the reference plane. select Reference Plane: Glazing for Name. click . under Specify a new Work Plane. enter -12 mm for Depth. 8 Select the reference plane. Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry | 523 . click Set Work Plane. 9 On the Options Bar. double-click Exterior. click . 11 In the Project Browser. click Modify. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. under Elevations. and click OK. and select Lock. 13 On the Design Bar. under Identity Data. enter Glazing for the Name instance parameter.5 On the Design Bar. Pick lines to define the glass extrusion 12 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. 15 On the Design Bar. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 16 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 7 On the Design Bar. click Lines. 17 Select each of the sash extrusion lines to create the glass boundary. 14 In the Work Plane dialog.

sash. 524 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . View the window model with frame. 21 On the Options Bar. you can control subcategory visual style using the Objects Styles dialog. 23 On the Design Bar. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. specify Glass for the Subcategory instance parameter.18 On the Design Bar. double-click Right. and glass 19 In the Project Browser. NOTE Assigning subcategories to model elements is important. under Elevations. click Modify. After the family is loaded into a project. 20 Select the glass extrusion. click . under Identity Data. click Finish Sketch. and click OK.

enter 1500 mm for Height. Flex the window model 25 On the Design Bar. double-click View 1. Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters. Click Apply. Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry | 525 . do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. make sure the window frame stretched with the opening and that the glass extrusion remains attached to the interior edge of the sash. Enter 1500 mm for Width.24 In the Project Browser. it is important to verify that all model elements adapted to the changes as expected. Most problems can be resolved by aligning and locking lines. click Family Types. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. Spin the model if necessary to view the sash and frame at various angles. under 3D Views. You should flex the model at regular intervals to catch problems early. Move the Family Types dialog off to the side so you can see the window model. 26 In the Family Types dialog. NOTE After flexing the model. Under Other. For example.

Precise dimensions are assigned to the reference planes in subsequent steps. you create the solid geometry of the window mullions based on reference planes and extrusions. 28 On the Edit toolbar. click Ref Plane. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry In this exercise. under Elevations. click to return the window to its original dimensions. 4 On the Design Bar. 29 Proceed to the next exercise.27 Click Cancel. double-click Exterior. Add reference planes to specify the location of the new window mullion centerlines 1 In the Project Browser. click Dimension. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 2 On the Design Bar. the exact location is not critical. NOTE When you draw each reference plane. “Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry” on page 526. 3 Add two horizontal and two vertical reference planes inside of the window opening to approximate the mullion centerline locations as shown. 526 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

6 Add a dimension between the bottom of the window opening (bottom reference plane) and the horizontal reference plane above it. Do not be concerned with dimension values. click Modify. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 527 . Do not be concerned with dimension values. as shown. Add a mullion offset family parameter 7 On the Design Bar. After adding the dimension.Add a multi-segmented dimension referencing all of the vertical reference planes except the center (Left/Right) as shown. 5 Add a dimension between the top of the window opening (top reference plane) and the horizontal reference plane below it. as shown. 8 Select the dimension on the upper-right that references the top two horizontal reference planes. click the EQ symbol to make the dimension segments equal.

10 In the Parameter Properties dialog. Under Parameter Data. Select Instance. 13 Select the horizontal reference plane second from the bottom.9 On the Options Bar. 12 In the Family Types dialog. specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Type. under Dimensions. select Dimensions. enter Mullion Offset for Name. 528 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .> for Label. 11 On the Design Bar.. Notice the dimension value becomes editable. click Family Types. Click OK. select <Add parameter. Under Group parameter under. select Family parameter. enter 350 mm for Mullion Offset. you may want to drag the dimension value as shown.. and click OK. TIP Due to the length of the dimension label.

click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 20 On the Design Bar. enter 14 mm for Depth. 16 Select the dimension on the lower-right. and click . select Mullion Offset for Label. it is critical that the short horizontal lines align with the horizontal edges of the sash. 21 In the Work Plane dialog. Create the vertical mullion extrusions 19 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 24 Sketch a rectangle centered on the left vertical mullion reference plane approximately as shown.14 Click the dimension value. click Set Work Plane. under Specify a new Work Plane. move the dimension value as shown. 17 On the Options Bar. click Lines. and enter 350 mm as the new value. 15 On the Design Bar. However. Do not be concerned with precise dimensions. 18 On the Design Bar. 22 On the Design Bar. select Reference Plane: Glazing for Name. click Modify. and click OK. Watch the Status Bar to be sure that the lines are snapping to the sash. 23 On the Options Bar. As you did before. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 529 .

click Dimension. 26 On the Design Bar. 530 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Move the dimension values as shown. Click the EQ symbol to make both horizontal dimensions equal. 25 Click both of the locks so the mullion adapts to changes in window height. notice lock icons display on the interior horizontal edges of the sash.After you complete the sketch. 27 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge of the mullion extrusion to the reference plane centered between the vertical mullion extrusion sketch lines. and to the right edge of the mullion extrusion.

enter Mullion Width for Name. and place it above the dimension you placed in the previous steps. Select Type. Click OK. Under Group parameter under. Move the Mullion Width value to the left as shown. specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Type. Under Parameter Data.28 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge to the right edge of the mullion extrusion. select Family parameter. select Dimensions. select <Add parameter> for Label. click Modify. and select the dimension you added in the previous step. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 531 . 31 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 30 On the Options Bar. 29 On the Design Bar.

and on the Options Bar. Move the dialog off to the side so you can see the window in the drawing area. select Mullion Width for Label. follow these basic steps: ■ Sketch the rectangle similar to the mullion on the left.32 Repeat the previous steps to create an identical mullion centered on the right vertical reference plane as shown. ■ ■ Do not be concerned with the value of the mullion width. Remember. 35 In the Family Types dialog. click Family Types. 532 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click Apply. Add a dimension between the left and right mullion edges. Select the dimension. Specify the mullion width parameter 34 On the Design Bar. This is changed in later steps. enter 40 mm for Mullion Width. click Finish Sketch. NOTE Do not lock the lines to the sash edge as you did previously. ■ Dimension mullion edges and the reference plane at the center of the mullion and click the equality constraint. 33 On the Design Bar.

38 On the Edit toolbar.Notice the mullions remain centered and equally spaced on the reference planes. and aligned with the sash edge. it is important to verify that all model elements adapted to the changes as expected. Click Apply. enter 1500 mm for Height. Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters. you should pay close attention to the new mullions and make sure they remain centered. In this case. or undoing the same. 41 In the Work Plane dialog. Enter 1500 mm for Width. Most problems can be resolved by aligning and locking lines. NOTE After flexing the model. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. 40 On the Design Bar. under Specify a new Work Plane. Under Other. and click OK. You should flex the model at regular intervals to catch problems early. evenly spaced. Sketch the horizontal mullion extrusions 39 On the Design Bar. and the mullions stretch with the new window height. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. select Reference Plane : Glazing for Name. click Set Work Plane. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. click to return the window to its original dimensions. 37 Click Cancel. Flex the window model 36 In the Family Types dialog. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 533 .

46 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge of the mullion extrusion to the reference plane at the center of the mullion.42 On the Design Bar. Click the EQ symbol to make both vertical dimensions equal. click Dimension. Do not be concerned with the dimension value. as shown. and then click the lock icons to lock the left and right edges to the edge of the sash. 47 On the Design Bar. 49 On the Design Bar. 45 On the Design Bar. 48 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge to the bottom edge of the mullion extrusion. click Dimension. 534 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and move the EQ values off to each side as shown. and select the dimension you added in the previous step. 44 Sketch a rectangle centered on the upper horizontal mullion reference plane approximately as shown. click . and then to the bottom edge of the mullion extrusion. 43 On the Options Bar. Notice the Depth value on the Options Bar remains at the previously specified value. click Lines. click Modify.

select Mullion Width for Label. Remember. select Mullion Width for Label. click Finish Sketch. and on the Options Bar. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 535 . Move the dimension value as shown.50 On the Options Bar. 51 Repeat the previous steps to create an identical mullion centered on the lower horizontal reference plane as shown. follow these basic steps: ■ Sketch the rectangle similar to the mullion you just completed. Add a dimension between the upper and lower mullion edges. NOTE Do not lock the lines to the sash edge as you did previously. Select the dimension. ■ Dimension mullion edges and the reference plane at the center of the mullion and click the equality constraint. ■ ■ 52 On the Design Bar.

If necessary. 536 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 55 In the Project Browser. double-click View 1. Join the mullion geometry 53 On the Tools menu. click Join Geometry.The horizontal mullion extrusions are now complete. 54 Select the horizontal mullions. spin the model to get a good view of the mullions. under 3D Views. and select the vertical mullions.

57 On the Design Bar. Under Other. so when you open the Family Types dialog. enter 1500 mm for Height. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height.Notice the mullion extrusions are joined. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Click Apply. Flex the window model 56 Adjust the location of the window model within the drawing area. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 537 . Enter 1500 mm for Width. Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters and the mullions stretch with the new window height. 59 Click Cancel. click Family Types. 58 In the Family Types dialog. you can still see the window.

2 In the Materials dialog. you assign materials to the frame. click the Model Graphics Style control. 9 Select the window frame sweep. enter Pine Frame for Name. select Stained. the sash. 6 In the Materials dialog. Assign the Pine Frame material to the frame. click to return the window to its original dimensions. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. Dark. “Assigning Materials to the Window Components” on page 538. 4 In the Materials dialog. click for Texture. Create a new material based on the existing yellow pine material 1 On the Settings menu. click OK. TIP Hold the CTRL key down as you select the sweep and various extrusions. and mullions 7 In the Project Browser. and click OK. under AccuRender. click Duplicate. and select Shading with Edges. Assigning Materials to the Window Components In this exercise. and mullions that you want to display in renderings of the new window. sash. No Gloss. 8 On the View Control Bar. navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Pine. 5 In the Material Library dialog.60 On the Edit toolbar. 538 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and the mullions. and click OK. 61 Proceed to the next exercise. sash. 3 In the New Material dialog. Yellow/. double-click Exterior. click Materials. under Elevations.

24 In the Project Browser. verify that Coarse. Modify the glass visibility 19 In the Project Browser under Elevations. verify that Coarse. 18 On the Design Bar. click OK. Assigning Materials to the Window Components | 539 . 13 In the Materials dialog. select Edit for Visibility. under Graphics. click Visibility. Medium. 20 Select the glass extrusion. 12 Under Materials and Finishes. 23 Under Detail Levels. click . select Pine Frame for Name. 16 Under Detail Levels.10 On the Options Bar. under 3D Views. select Front/Back and When cut in Plan/RCP (if category permits). select Front/Back and When cut in Plan/RCP (if category permits). under View Specific Display. click Modify. click for Material. 15 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. and Fine are selected. Medium. double-click Right. under View Specific Display. and click OK. The window frame is assigned the new Pine Frame material. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click View 1. 21 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. clear the other view options. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. under Identity Data. and Fine are selected. 22 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. and click OK. select Frame/Mullion for Subcategory.

you define new window types based on the window model that you just created. 540 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and glass display their assigned materials. 26 Proceed to the next exercise. You begin by adding a formula to the mullion offset parameter to specify horizontal divisions of one third the overall height of the window. “Defining New Window Types” on page 540. sash. Defining New Window Types In this exercise.25 Zoom in on a window corner. mullions. The window frame. You then create multiple window types that will be available to the user after the family is loaded into a project.

and click Apply. Add a mullion offset formula to the family type 1 Zoom to fit and move the window model off the side of the drawing area so it will be visible after you open the Family Types dialog. verify that 2000 mm is specified for Height. 2 On the Design Bar. 3 In the Family Types dialog. Flex the window model 4 In addition to flexing the model after the addition or modification of model geometry. it is also a good idea to flex the model after a new formula is applied. and click Apply.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. In the Family Types dialog. click Family Types. Defining New Window Types | 541 . enter Height/3 in the Formula column for Mullion Offset. The horizontal mullions are now spaced apart at one third the height of the window.

The window height is doubled. Enter 1250 mm for Height. click New. enter 2500 w x 1250mm h for Name. Define new window types with various heights and widths 6 In the Family Types dialog. and click OK. Click Apply. and click Apply. 5 In the Family Types dialog. 542 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 7 In the Name dialog. verify that the following parameter values are specified: ■ ■ ■ Enter 2500 mm for Width. 8 In the Family Types dialog. under Family Types. but the one third height spacing is maintained in the horizontal mullions. enter 1000 mm for Height.

click Window. Training Window. 14 In the Family Types dialog. Load the new window family into a new project 17 On the Standard toolbar. 19 On the Options Bar. Defining New Window Types | 543 . specify the following parameter values: ■ ■ ■ Enter 2600 mm for Width. click Load. click New. Enter 1500 mm for Height. enter 2600 w x 1300mm h for Name. Define the final window type 12 Under Family Types. 16 Navigate to the location of your choice and save the new window family with the name. click to start a new project based on your default template. Click Apply. 13 In the Name dialog.9 Under Family Types. Enter 1300 mm for Height.rfa. You now have three new window types defined within your window family. 18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. 15 On the File menu. click New. 11 In the Family Types dialog. enter 1800 w x 1500mm h for Name and click OK. click Save. Click Apply. 10 In the Name dialog. specify the following parameter values: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 1800 mm for Width. Click OK.

31 On the Design Bar. 33 Zoom in on the center window. 23 On the Design Bar. 25 In the Type Selector. 26 Add the window to the left side of the wall. and select Shading with Edges. select Training Window : 1800 w x 1500mm h. navigate to the location of your Training Window. clear Tag on Placement. click Wall. select Training Window : 2500 w x 1250mm h. This is because you set the visibility values to display when cut in plan/RCP. and click Open. 28 Add this window to the center of the wall. 32 On the View menu.rfa file. click Thin Lines. 30 Add the third window to the right side of the wall. 22 Draw a generic wall segment 12000 mm long. 34 On the View toolbar. 29 In the Type Selector. 35 On the View Control Bar. click .20 In the Open dialog. 544 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select Training Window :2600 w x 1300mm h. click Window. click Modify. Place new window types in the project 21 On the Design Bar. Notice the detail that displays. click the Model Graphics Style control. select it. 24 On the Options Bar. 27 In the Type Selector.

elevation. Solid geometry: Use solid geometry as often as possible to represent a family because it automatically gives you the correct plan. you plan. Creating solid geometry: Based on the 4 ways to create solid geometry in Revit Architecture (Solid Extrusion. Solid Revolve. and create a complex window family with a complex opening. ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a Complex Model Family | 545 . Instance parameter means. Basically. that each family in a project can have a different value for an instance parameter. line patterns. Planning a Complex Model Family Before you start to create a complex model family. Revit Architecture allows you to specify a parameter as instance or type parameter. The window family includes nested families for the outer sill and uses shared parameters for evaluation purposes. Solid Blend. Formulas between parameters drive the behavior of parts of the family. you should sketch the design of the family and make notes of the desired behavior: ■ Subcategories: Solid geometry. a parameter drives geometry in a family. sketch. Linework: You can create model lines and symbolic lines in a family. For example. Model lines are displayed in every view. where type parameters drive the geometry for each family type.You have three new fixed nine-light windows based on a new window family prototype. Parameters: You should carefully define the parameters in a family. where symbolic lines are view direction specific: they show only in views that are parallel to the view where they have been created. This completes the Creating a Window Family lesson. Creating a Complex Model Family In the following exercises. line colors. A large number of parameters reduce the performance of the family. You can also switch on/off selected subcategories in a project. Solid Sweep) you can decide in which view you start to create your solid geometry. model lines. and symbolic lines are usually assigned to selected Subcategories. and materials of the subcategories. and section views of a family. This allows you to drive lineweights. the easiest way to create a window frame is to create an extrusion including two rectangles for the frame edges in an elevation view of the family.

By family type: Each type of the family can have different material assignments for selected solids in the family. and Elevation views. A Family parameter does only appear in the family itself. 546 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and should account for instances when either of the casements is toggled off. you should define different widths for each of the casements. By category: The solid material gets its material from the selected category or subcategory in a project. Various parameters drive the behavior of the family. Sketching the requirements The window family should be modelled with different detail levels in Plan. Section.■ Scheduling/exporting parameters: Revit Architecture differs between different parameter types. Medium and Fine. you can use a parameter with the Parameter Data Type Yes / No. Detail Level View Plan Coarse Medium Fine Section Elevation Additionally. where a Shared parameter can appear in schedule and tags and can be exported to ODBC. Assigning material: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Directly: The solid geometry in the family has material explicitly assigned. ■ Visibility settings: If specific visibility settings are required for selected geometry or linework. By instance: Each single instance of the family can have different material assignments for selected solids in the family. Level of detail: Revit Architecture allows you specify the visibility of each solid form and line geometry for the Detail Levels Coarse.

The window contains the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A: Insertion depth B: Frame depth C: Frame width D: Sash width E: Center post width F: Wall offset G: Left width H: Right width I: Width J: Wall offset top K: Top frame height L: Bottom frame height M: Height Outer sill: ■ ■ ■ Fixed front height: 30mm Fixed back height: 50mm Fixed offset: 30mm ■ Glass fixed width: 20mm Selecting a Family Template In this exercise. and click Open. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. 2 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. The family template uses a wall as host. Selecting a Family Template | 547 . click Training Files. select Metric Window. create a second wall type with a different wall thickness so that you can test the family. navigate to Metric ➤ Templates. 1 Close all open projects or families. you open a template that you use as the basis for the complex window family. One test scenario consists in switching between the wall types with different thicknesses to check whether the constraints work correctly.rft. The family editor is opened with a new window family. You should test your family often as you incrementally build geometry in the next steps.

Prepare the centered reference planes 1 Select the Center (Left/Right) reference plane. 548 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Under Other. 7 Create a vertical reference plane to the right of the Left reference plane. and on the Options Bar. click 5 In the Element Properties dialog. . and click OK. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. and on the Options Bar. This requires that the standard rectangular opening be deleted and replaced with voids cut out from the default wall. This means that the exterior wall layers that have wraps assigned will end at this reference plane. Verify that Defines Origin is selected. 8 Create a vertical reference plane to the left of the Right reference plane. for Construction ➤ Structure. refer to the command line to verify what is selected. TIP Press TAB until the reference plane is highlighted. select Basic Wall : Wall 1. and click . for Name. enter 400. for Structure ➤ Thickness. for Is Reference. accept the default name. 3 Select the horizontal reference plane. 9 In the Edit Assembly dialog. under Other. so you model the new opening first. 10 Click OK 3 times. select Weak Reference. Click OK. 9 Click Modify. in the Edit toolbar. click Ref Plane. In the Type Selector. select Wall Closure. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ Under Construction. ■ ■ ■ ■ For Identity Data ➤ Name. click Edit/New. click Edit. Create reference planes for the opening 6 On the Design Bar. enter Insertion Edge. 11 Switch back to the previous wall settings: ■ ■ Select the wall. and click OK. click . select Defines Origin. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. Creating the Skeleton for a Complex Wall Opening The window contains a more complex wall opening than a standard rectangular opening. 7 In the Name dialog. 5 Select the Center (Left/Right) reference plane. click Duplicate. .4 Select the wall. click 2 In the Element Properties dialog.

drag the Interior horizontal reference plane to the left side. and select Instance. 12 Using the same method. 22 Dimension the Left and Wall Offset Left vertical reference planes. click Dimension. 13 Select the Exterior horizontal reference plane on the top wall edge. Dimension vertical reference planes 21 On the Design Bar. Dimension horizontal reference planes 15 On the Design Bar. 23 Click Modify. For Group parameter under. This parameter is defined as an instance parameter. 20 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. click Dimension. Click OK. for Identity Data ➤ Name. 16 Dimension the Exterior and Insertion Edge horizontal reference planes. use the blue circle grip to drag the left edge of the reference plane to line up with the left side of the Insertion Edge reference plane.10 Select the first reference plane you created. select Add Parameter. refer to the status bar to verify what is selected. enter Insertion Depth. on the Options Bar. you can more easily select it because it doesn’t overlap with other elements in the drawing. By extending the reference pane. The horizontal reference plane defines the inner edge and the new vertical reference planes define the left and right edges of the wall offset for the opening. 18 Select the Exterior reference plane. enter Wall Offset Left. name the other new reference plane Wall Offset Right. 19 Select the dimension. dimension the vertical reference planes. select Constraints. for the temporary dimension. Creating the Skeleton for a Complex Wall Opening | 549 . for Name. Next. 14 Using the same method. enter 75. because each inserted value should have a different insertion depth. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. for Label. and click . TIP Press TAB until the reference plane is highlighted. 17 Click Modify.

under Elevations. you apply the same method to reference planes in an elevation view. 30 On the Design Bar. The skeleton for the opening is complete. 37 Select the Wall Offset Top reference plane. select Construction. 25 Select the dimension. double-click Exterior. For Group parameter under. click Dimension. select Add Parameter. for Name. enter 100. for the temporary dimension. enter Wall Offset Top. select Construction. The reference planes and parameters for the plan view are defined. 32 Click Modify. 28 Select the dimension.24 Select the Wall Offset Left reference plane. 26 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. 31 Create a horizontal reference plane below the Head reference plane. on the Options Bar. and click . 39 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. for Label. enter 100. Click OK. for Identity Data ➤ Name. 38 Select the dimension. 33 Select the new reference plane. and press ENTER. for Name. Dimension reference planes in elevation 29 In the Project Browser. select Add Parameter. for Label. for Label. Click OK. Next. and click OK. enter Wall Offset. select Wall Offset. click Ref Plane. on the Options Bar. dimension the Right and Wall Offset Right reference planes. 550 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 27 Using the same method. For Group parameter under. 35 On the Design Bar. for the temporary dimension. 36 Dimension the Head and Wall Offset Top reference planes. on the Options Bar. enter Wall Offset Top.

and lock the alignment. 6 On the Tools toolbar. and Wall Offset Right reference planes. 3 In the Work Plane dialog. 4 On the Design Bar. for Name. under Floor Plans. Modelling a Complex Wall Opening | 551 .40 Save the file as Casement Window. 2 On the Tools toolbar. lock the other sketch lines to the Insertion Edge. 8 Using the same method. click (Align). select Reference Plane : Sill. Modelling a Complex Wall Opening You model the opening with voids that are cut from the wall geometry. Level. 1 In the Project Browser. under Specify a new Work Plane. and sketch the extrusion as shown. 7 Select the Exterior reference plane. Wall Offset Left. click (Plane). 5 On the Options Bar. select the top edge of the sketch. and click OK.rfa. click Void Form ➤ Void Extrusion. click . double-click Ref. NOTE Zoom in as necessary so that the rectangle does not snap to reference planes.

create and constrain a void extrusion for the inner part of the opening as shown. under Elevations.9 On the Design Bar. 14 Align the bottom edge of the smaller void to the Sill reference plane. the voids need to be cut from the wall geometry. Also. click (3D). click Finish Sketch. 552 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and Left reference planes. align and constrain the top and bottom edges of the other void to the Head and Sill reference planes. click (Align). and press DELETE. Right. 16 On the Views toolbar. Lock the sketch lines to the Insertion Edge. 13 Align the top edge of the smaller void to the Wall Offset Top reference plane. 12 On the Tools toolbar. and lock the alignment. 15 Using the same method. In order to use the voids as a new opening. NOTE Create the void extrusion directly below the one you just created. 10 Using the same method. 17 Select the left vertical edge of the default opening (Opening Cut). and lock the alignment. you need to delete the standard rectangular opening cut. Interior. 11 In the Project Browser. double-click Exterior.

cut the second void from the wall.The opening in the wall is deleted. Next. 19 Select the void. Modelling a Complex Wall Opening | 553 . The first void is cut from the wall. 18 On the Tools toolbar. and then select the wall geometry. click (Cut Geometry). 20 Using the same method. you control correct behavior of the new wall opening by changing the wall offset parameters.

8 Create a vertical reference plane to the left of the Wall Offset Right reference plane. enter 50mm. 6 Dimension the Left and Frame Left vertical reference planes. Level. 9 Select the reference plane. 5 On the Design Bar. for the temporary dimension. double-click Ref. 22 In the Family Types dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Construction ➤ Wall Offset Top. Click OK. For Wall Offset. select Not a Reference. enter 50mm. 2 Create a vertical reference plane to the right of the Wall Offset Left reference plane. For Other ➤ Is Reference. click Family Types. Creating Window Frame Geometry The reference planes and parameters for the window frame are defined in the plan and exterior elevation views. click Dimension. Note that the opening has changed correctly.Change wall offset parameters 21 On the Design Bar. 7 Select the Frame Left reference plane. 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Select the reference plane. Click OK. enter 100mm. For Identity Data ➤ Name. under Floor Plans. 554 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click . and click 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . enter Frame Left. You can also test the opening by flexing the wall types and thicknesses.

For Other ➤ Is Reference. for Label.10 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Identity Data ➤ Name. name it Frame Interior. click Dimension. select Frame Width. for the temporary dimension. create a horizontal reference plane below the Insertion Edge reference plane. enter 100mm. on the Options Bar. enter Frame Width. For Group parameter under. 16 Select the left dimension. for Label. Creating Window Frame Geometry | 555 . for Name. 14 Select the right dimension. 12 Dimension the Right and Frame Right vertical reference planes. select Construction. 11 On the Design Bar. on the Options Bar. enter Frame Right. select Not a Reference. and create a Frame Depth type parameter dimension as shown. 13 Select the Frame Right reference plane. Click OK. 17 Using the same method. Click OK. select Add Parameter. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data.

19 Using the same method used previously. The exact vertical position of the reference planes is not important. and create a Center Post Width type parameter dimension. NOTE The positioning of the center post will be specified later in the exercise.18 Create 2 more vertical reference planes to the left of the Center (Left/Right) reference plane. 556 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . name the reference planes Center Post Left and Center Post Right. dimension the planes at 120mm.

create a horizontal reference plane below the Wall Offset Top reference plane. For Group parameter under. enter Frame Bottom. select Add Parameter. Click OK. Creating Window Frame Geometry | 557 . 31 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. 25 Dimension the Sill and Frame Bottom horizontal reference planes. enter Frame Height Bottom. for Label. and dimension the Head and Frame Top reference planes at 150mm. Click OK. 21 Create a horizontal reference plane above the Sill reference plane.Create parameters in elevation 20 In the Project Browser. For Group parameter under. name it Frame Top. for the temporary dimension. enter Frame Height Top. enter 150mm. on the Options Bar. select Construction. For Identity Data ➤ Name. 30 Select the other dimension. under Elevations. For Other ➤ Is Reference. select Not a Reference. 29 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. 24 On the Design Bar. 27 Using the same method. 26 Select the Frame Bottom reference plane. 22 Select the reference plane. and click 23 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . for Label. click Dimension. on the Options Bar. select Construction. select Add Parameter. 28 Select the lower dimension. Click OK. double-click Exterior.

35 In the Name dialog. 38 In the Family Types dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. For Width. For Frame Width. and click OK.The skeleton of the window frame is complete. 558 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . for Insertion Depth. for Wall Offset Top. 36 Under Family Types. enter 1500 x 1400 1-Swing Sash 400 and Click OK. add 2 window types with different parameters to check whether the parameters work correctly. enter 80mm. enter 100mm. 37 In the Name dialog. enter 50mm. 33 In the Family Types dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. for Insertion Depth. enter 50mm. For Frame Width. enter 70mm. enter 100mm. enter 50mm. enter 2000mm. enter 80mm. You create 2 family types for the Casement Window family. Before you model the frame geometry. for Wall Offset Top. Create family types 32 On the Design Bar. click New. Family types allow you to set different values for parameters and to save this state as a specific type of the window family. A family type manages type parameters only. enter 100mm. for Height. For Wall Offset. Under Construction. enter 1500mm. enter 80mm. instance parameters can be changed on an instance level for each inserted window instance. Under Dimensions. click Family Types. For Wall Offset. enter 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200. for Frame Depth. Additional values for new parameters will be set continuously after each reasonable step of completeness. click New. Under Other. 34 Under Family Types. enter 60mm. enter 100mm. For Frame Height Top. For Frame Height Bottom. Under Construction. For Center Post Width.

Under Other. For Center Post Width. Rectangle position in view Left Right Outside (larger rectangle) Lock to reference planes Frame Top. and click OK. select Reference Plane : Frame Interior. 45 On the Tools toolbar. 43 On the Design Bar. NOTE Refer to the following table for information on the alignment reference planes. enter 1500mm. one on the right. enter 1400mm. Under Dimensions. For Width. Frame Bottom. 40 Under Name. and lock the alignments to create a constraint for all edges as shown. Left Creating Window Frame Geometry | 559 . NOTE Create 3 rectangles: One on the left. Model frame geometry 41 On the Tools toolbar. Frame Left. and click OK. click . Head. Frame Bottom. For Frame Height Bottom.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Frame Height Top. Frame Top. enter 80mm. Sill. under Specify a new Work Plane. Note that the reference planes adjust to the new dimensions. enter 120mm. click (Align). 46 Align all sketched edges to the reference planes. 42 In the Work Plane dialog. select 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200. and sketch the extrusion with 3 rectangles as shown. for Height. and a third rectangle outside the intersection of the reference planes. Center Post Right. Frame Right. for Name. for Frame Depth. 39 Click Apply. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Center Post Left. 44 On the Options Bar. enter 120mm. enter 70mm. Right. click (Plane).

.47 On the Design Bar. Under Detail Levels. 56 Click OK twice. 53 Select the extrusion solid geometry. 55 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog: ■ ■ Under View Specific Display. click (3D). For Graphics ➤ Visibility/Graphics Overrides. Align the top edge of the extrusion to the Insertion Edge reference plane. 560 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Frame material will be assigned later in the tutorial. 49 On the Tools toolbar. 48 In the Project Browser. double-click Ref. and click 54 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Identity Data ➤ Subcategory. under Floor Plans. click Edit. 52 On the Views toolbar. clear Plan/RCP. and lock the alignment. 51 Click Modify. clear Coarse. select Frame/Mullion. click Finish Sketch. and lock the alignment. 57 On the View Control Bar. Align the bottom edge of the extrusion to the Frame Interior reference plane. The window frame is complete. click 50 Align edges: ■ ■ (Align). Level.

5 Select the leftmost reference plane you just created. 60 Select 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200. double-click Ref. because the visibility settings are different for the left and right sashes. and click Apply. click Family Types. Changing the scale makes it easier to work in detail. under Name. click Scale ➤ 1:10. Defining the Window Sash Parameters | 561 . 3 On the Views toolbar. 4 Create 4 vertical reference planes as shown. and click 6 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ . 2 On the View Control Bar. For Identity Data ➤ Name. select 1500 x 1400 1-Swing Sash 400. However. and click OK. enter Sash Left Left. under Floor Plans. you model each sash separately. Defining the Window Sash Parameters You use known modelling procedures to create the geometry for the window sash. 59 In the Family Types dialog. Define parameters in plan view 1 In the Project Browser. Level. click (Thin Lines) to work with heavier lineweights.Test the family again 58 On the Family tab of the Design Bar.

18 On the Design Bar. 562 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 15 Click Modify. select Construction. double-click Exterior. on the Options Bar. add parameters to the remaining dimensions. 14 Create a horizontal reference plane above the Frame Bottom reference plane. 7 Using the same method.■ ■ For Other ➤ Is Reference. enter Sash Bottom. 12 Using the same method. working from left to right: Reference Plane 2 3 4 Properties Name: Sash Left Right Is Reference value: Not a Reference Name: Sash Right Left Is Reference value: Not a Reference Name: Sash Right Right Is Reference value: Not a Reference 8 Dimension the reference planes with adjacent reference planes for the window frame as shown. select Not a Reference. select Sash Width. 9 Select the left dimension. enter Sash Width. select Not a Reference. specify each dimension as 50mm. For Identity Data ➤ Name. and click 17 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . Click OK. Click OK. specify the properties for the remaining new reference planes. Click OK. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. for Label. 11 Select the next dimension. Define parameters in elevation view 13 In the Project Browser. click Dimension. on the Options Bar. select Add Parameter. 16 Select the reference plane. For Other ➤ Is Reference. For Group parameter under. You can drag dimension text to the left or right side using the Drag Text grip. under Elevations. for Label.

22 Select the Sash Top reference plane. on the Options Bar. 27 Click Apply. for the temporary dimension. Dimension the Frame Top and Sash Top reference planes. and sketch 2 rectangles to form the right sash extrusion as shown. 32 Align all sketched edges to the reference planes. enter 50mm. 24 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. Specify it as Not a Reference. and click OK. click . 31 On the Tools toolbar. select Sash Width. extend the 2 window types with different values for the new parameter to check whether the parameter work correctly. for Sash Width. 25 For Name. click Family Types. 26 Under Construction.19 Dimension the Frame Bottom and Sash Bottom reference planes. The skeleton of the window sash is complete. create a horizontal reference plane below the Frame Top reference plane: ■ ■ ■ Name it Sash Top. 21 Using the same method. and lock the alignment to create a constraint for all edges as shown. Note that the reference planes adjust to the new dimension. for the temporary dimension. 20 Select the Sash Bottom reference plane. 28 For Name. select 1500 x 1400 1-Swing Sash 400. enter 50mm. enter 70mm. select both dimensions. click (Align). 23 While pressing CTRL. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Defining the Window Sash Parameters | 563 . select 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200. Before you model the sash geometry. for Label. Create solid extrusions 29 On the Design Bar. 30 On the Options Bar.

43 On the Views toolbar. 40 Click Modify. and lock the alignment. 42 Switch back to the Ref. Sash Right Right. enter 1500. 564 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .NOTE Refer to the following table for information on the alignment reference planes. 41 Using the same method. double-click Ref. for Cut plane ➤ Offset. 37 In the View Range dialog. Sash Bottom. Level floor plan view to align the edges as you did for the right sash. NOTE Modifying the cut plane offset value allows you to see the sash extrusion in the view. Center Post Right. Level. 35 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. click Edit. for Extents ➤ View Range. Align the top edge of the extrusion to the Insertion Edge reference plane. 36 In the Element Properties dialog. click (3D). Sash Right Left. Frame Bottom. 33 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and click OK twice. 38 On the Tools toolbar. switch to the Exterior Elevation view and create the solid extrusion for the left sash. Align the bottom edge of the extrusion to the Frame Interior reference plane. click Finish Sketch. 34 In the Project Browser. Frame Right. Rectangle position in view Outside Inside Lock to reference planes Frame Top. under Floor Plans. and lock the alignment. click 39 Align edges: ■ ■ (Align). Sash Top.

click the rectangular button on the right side. enter Sash Right. For Identity Data ➤ Subcategory. note the parameters you have just created with checkboxes in the Value column. and click . and click 45 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ .44 While pressing CTRL. 6 Using the same method. select Construction. clear Plan/RCP. Defining Visibility Parameters You add visibility parameters so that you can display the left and right sashes separately. For Graphics ➤ Visibility. select the 2 extrusions. Defining Visibility Parameters | 565 . 46 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog: ■ ■ Under View Specific Display. For Group Parameter under. 3 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. click Family Types. 1 Select the right solid geometry of the window sash. click Edit. clear Coarse. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. Under Detail Levels. click Add parameter. 47 Click OK twice. for Graphics ➤ Visible. 5 Click OK 3 times. select Frame/Mullion. 2 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 On the Design Bar. create a visibility parameter for the left sash named Sash Left.

9 Select 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200. Click OK. NOTE Any 3D geometry assigned to a Yes/No parameter is still visible in the family editor. 5 On the Design Bar. 6 Using one dimension string. select Not a Reference. Glass Axis Left. dimension the Insertion Edge. 8 In the Project Browser. 3 Select the reference plane. 7 Click EQ to center the reference plane for the glass axis between the reference planes for the window frame. and click OK. under Elevations. 9 Create 3 more reference planes as shown. the geometry is only greyed out if the visibility parameter is not assigned. For Identity Data ➤ Name. Glass Axis. and Glass Axis Horizontal. 10 Under Construction. enter Glass Axis. and click 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . double-click Exterior. This is because the glass width and height will be extended to the window frame if the sash is switched off. For Other ➤ Is Reference. 566 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . clear Sash Left. Creating Reference Planes for the Glass Geometry The glass geometry will be dimensioned directly in the sketch. Level. click Dimension. double-click Ref. and name them Glass Axis Right. 1 In the Project Browser. The glass is located in the center of the frame / sash with a fixed thickness of 20mm. select 1500 x 1400 1-Swing Sash 400. and click Apply. and Frame Interior reference planes. not aligned to reference planes.Test the family 8 For Name. 2 Create a horizontal reference plane between the Insertion Edge and Frame Interior reference planes. under Floor Plans.

You create parameters that define the dimensions of the glass geometry. 4 On the Options Bar. under Specify a new Work Plane. and click OK. Creating the Glass Geometry In this exercise. and sketch the right glass extrusion as shown. Creating the Glass Geometry | 567 .10 For each of the new reference planes. Sketch the right glass extrusion 1 On the Tools toolbar. you use extrusions to create the glass for the complex window family. select Reference Plane : Glass Axis. click . click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. for Name. click (Plane). 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. create EQ dimensions with the adjacent sash reference planes. This centers the glass reference planes between the window sashes. 2 In the Work Plane dialog.

click Dimension. enter Glass Length Right. 7 Click EQ. select Other. the Glass Axis Right reference plane. for Label. 568 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .Dimension the sketch 5 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. dimension the left edge of the sketch. Click OK. 6 Using one dimension string. dimension the top and the bottom of the sketch. and the right edge of the sketch. on the Options Bar. click Dimension. dimension the top and bottom edge of the sketch. 10 Dimension the left edge and right edge of the sketch. select Add Parameter. 13 Using the same method. and create a Glass Height Right parameter. 11 Select the dimension line and. 12 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. 8 Using the same method. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. For Group Parameter under.

create the glass geometry for the left sash with the new parameters Glass Height Left and Glass Length Left. For Extrusion Start. click (3D). Under Detail Levels. enter -10. Creating the Glass Geometry | 569 . and click 16 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ . Create the left glass extrusion 19 Using the same method. 17 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog: ■ ■ Under View Specific Display. Assign properties 15 Select the glass geometry.0.0. clear Plan/RCP. For Constraints ➤ Extrusion End. enter 10. select Glass. click Edit.14 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. 18 Click OK twice. 20 Assign the same Element properties to the left extrusion that you assigned to the right. For Graphics ➤ Visibility. clear Coarse. 21 On the Views toolbar. For Identity Data ➤ Subcategory.

as it will minimize performance hits.22 On the View Control Bar. Creating Formulas to Define Width Formulas are one of the many powerful aspects of Revit Architecture Families . They can also be used to control Yes/No parameters. x raised to the power of y log sqrt(Value) sin cos tan asin acos atan exp abs 570 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Expressions for formulas Mathematical Function Addition Subtraction Multiplication Division Exponentiation Logarithm Square Root Sine Cosine Tangent Arcsine Arccosine Arctangent e raised to an x power Absolute Value Expression + * / x^y. where all of the parameters for a family are listed. set the height to 2000) as well as mathematical expressions. However.used to control families in many ways. Formulas are typed directly into the Family Types dialog box. Formulas can use logic such as IF statements (IF the width is 1000. The formulas in the following chapters of this tutorial should give you mainly an impression of how complex formulas can be set. you should do it. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading With Edges. if you can build your family without using formulas.

double-click Ref.(2*30) Simple IF IF ( <condition>.AND IF ( AND (x = 1 . <result-if-false>) IF ( Length < 35' . For Group parameter under. click Add. Click OK. 3 Dimension the Frame Left and Center Post Left reference planes. 5' . <result-if-true>. 8' ) ) ) IF . NOTE Do not dimension the right sash using the same method. For Type of Parameter.11 Samples for formulas Standard Width . 2' 6" . The width of the right sash will be determined using formulas. Creating Formulas to Define Width | 571 . 8 On the Design Bar. 3 ) Multiple IF IF ( Length< 35' . 3 ) Yes/No Controlling the state of a Yes/No parameters A with a next Yes/No parameter B: Not (B) Position the center post 1 In the Project Browser. enter 1000. for Label. 8 . click Dimension. enter Width Sash Right. for the temporary dimension. 2'-6". on the Options Bar. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name."A" is less than or equal to "B": IF ( NOT ( A > B ) . Level. 2 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. select Dimensions. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name.OR IF ( OR ( A = 1 . select Add Parameter. 9 In the Family Types dialog. under Floor Plans. 3'-0" ) Simple IF . 8 . IF ( Length < 55' . 8 . 6 Select the dimension. B = 3 ) . under Parameters. y = 2). 4 Click Modify. 3' . This would overconstrain the family.6. select Length. 3 ) Simple IF . enter Width Sash Left. 5 Select the Center Post Left reference plane. click Family Types. IF ( Length < 45' .

Frame Height Top . Width Sash Right).2 * Sash Width). Height . 19 In the Family Types dialog.Center Post Width 12 Press ENTER.2 * Sash Width). enter if(Sash Right. enter if(Sash Left. In the Formula row for Glass Height Right. for Dimensions ➤ Width Sash Right ➤ Formula. ■ Click Apply. Height . select 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200. click Family Types. select 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200. enter 400. the new value is 560. and click OK. and Center Post Width. 11 In the Family Types dialog.(Frame Width * 2) . You can test the formulas by switching between the different window types in the Family Types dialog. 14 Adjust the parameters: ■ For Width Sash Left.Width Sash Left) .Frame Height Top . Width Sash Left). (Height . ■ Click Apply. select Dimensions.2 * Sash Width).Frame Height Top Frame Height Bottom .Frame Height Bottom).■ ■ For Group Parameter under. ■ ■ ■ 20 Click OK. Frame Width.Frame Height Top .2 * Sash Width). (Width Sash Right . (Height . The value for Width Sash Right is now calculated dependent on the values for Width. the new value is 880. In the Formula row for Glass Height Left. The value for Width Sash Right is updated by the formula entered previously. In the Formula row for Glass Length Left. enter formulas: ■ Under Other. and press ENTER. The value is greyed out. in the Formula row for Glass Length Right. Click OK. Test the family 13 Under Name. Width Sash Left. enter if(Sash Right. and press ENTER. Define glass width and length 18 On the Design Bar. The value for Width Sash Right is updated by the formula entered previously.Frame Height Bottom . (Width Sash Left . 572 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and cannot be changed in the Family Types dialog. enter if(Sash Left.Frame Height Bottom). 15 For Name. enter the formula to get the calculated width: (Width . select 1500 x 1400 1-Swing Sash 400. The glass dimensions are now dependent on the visibility settings for the window sashes. 16 Adjust the parameters: ■ For Width Sash Left. 17 For Name. enter 1200.

9 On the Options Bar. 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. under Elevations.Creating Elevation Lines The best method to create the elevation lines for the sashes is to create them in the exterior elevation view. 5 On the Tools toolbar. and click OK. 8 In the Type Selector. click (Plane). note the Elevation Swing subcategory. double-click Exterior. clear Chain. Creating Elevation Lines | 573 . 10 Create single symbolic lines as shown. expand Windows. 6 In the Work Plane dialog. under Category. and lock all alignment constraints. 4 In the Project Browser. under Specify a new Work Plane. click Symbolic Lines. select Reference Plane : Insertion Edge. 7 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. for Name. 3 Click OK. They should be placed on a selected subcategory. 2 In the Object Styles dialog. select Elevation Swing [projection].

3 In the Materials dialog. and click OK three times. 15 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. and click . check whether the solid geometry has the correct subcategory assigned. and click OK. and click the button on the right side of the column. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 6 In the Material Library dialog. click Visibility. and select Whites. the object styles settings of the project define the default material. select the rectangular button on the right side. Material parameters override the material assignment of the subcategories in the Object Styles dialog. this subcategory is added to the project and has the material assignment from the family. When you assign default materials in a family.Matte. associate the symbolic lines on the right side with the Sash Left family parameter. you create material parameters for the frame. When the family is added to a project and the subcategory does not exist in the project. while pressing CTRL. sash. The default material is assigned to the Frame/Mullion category. Assigning Default Materials You can assign a default material for each subcategory. expand accurender ➤ Solid Colors. enter Window Frame. If the subcategory already exists in the project. under AccuRender.11 In the drawing area. 7 Select Cool. for Windows ➤ Frame/Mullion. 12 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. click in the Material column. and click OK. under Category. and click Duplicate. Creating Material Parameters Material parameters for selected solid geometry make the family more flexible in terms of materials assignments for different window types. clear Coarse. 574 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select all symbolic lines. select Default. 13 While pressing CTRL. Next. and glass. for Visible. 5 In the Materials dialog. under Graphics. 16 Click OK twice. 2 In the Object Styles dialog. select Sash Right. for Name. 18 Save the file. under Detail Levels. 4 In the New Material dialog. and on the Options Bar. click . unless the default value is < By Category >. 17 Using the same method. Assign a default material 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. for Name. select the 2 symbolic lines on the left side.

click the rectangular button on the right side. for Materials and Finishes ➤ Material. enter Frame. You can override it on a type level. The Back and Center (Left/Right) reference planes define the origin of the family. You can then model parts of the family separately from the main family model. and a fixed dimension for the sill overhang. Open the families and explore the design of them. The concrete sill family consists of a solid extrusion. click Add parameter. . create 2 material parameters named Sash and Glass. Creating Nested Families Families can be imported into families. the solid geometry has the material that is assigned to its subcategory in the Object Styles dialog. 9 Click OK. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. you learn how to import window sill families into the window family and associate parameters of the nested families to the main family. a Depth instance parameter.1 On the Views toolbar. parameters of nested families can be associated with parameters of the main family. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. 4 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. double-click Ref. Using family type parameters in the main family. and associate the sash and glass solid geometry with the respective parameter. navigate to Metric/Families/Windows/m_Concrete Sill. 6 Click OK three times. and click 3 In the Element Properties dialog. If this parameter is defined as shared. which nests them. Creating Sill Families There are 2 window sill families available in the training folders. 10 Save the file. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. you can switch between imported families of the same category. select Materials and Finishes. under Floor Plans. 8 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. Level. Note the new Material parameters under Material and Finishes. In this lesson. click Family Types. Concrete sill family 1 Close all open projects or families. 4 In the Project Browser. The default value is By Category. Creating Nested Families | 575 . When the family is loaded into a project. click Training Files. click (3D). 2 Select the solid geometry of the window frame. 7 Using the same method.rfa. a Width type parameter. and click Open. For Group parameter under.

click Training Files. has a fixed material Window Sill Concrete assigned.5 In the Project Browser. double-click View 1. 7 Select the solid geometry. 12 Select the solid geometry. under Elevations. 8 Click OK. The sill is placed on a subcategory Window Sill. The elevation view shows reference planes with fixed dimensions. and click . and click Open. 10 Click File menu ➤ Open. The Bottom reference plane defines the origin of the family. 11 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Metal sill family 9 Close all open projects or families. 6 In the Project Browser. and is visible only in detail level Fine. navigate to Metric/Families/Windows/m_Metal Sill. The sketch lines of the extrusion are locked to all exterior reference planes. 576 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click .rfa. double-click Left. under 3D views.

rfa is cleared. Both sill families were created with the Generic Model family template and changed to a window family.rfa. 5 In the Load into Projects dialog. Reference Planes.rfa. The metal sill family is now loaded into the Window family. You open the main family first. has a fixed material Window Sill Metal assigned. and Origins are as in the concrete sill family. and verify that m_Metal Sill. Loading Sill Families into the Window Family | 577 . navigate to Casement Window.rfa. 13 Click OK. 2 In the Open dialog. and click Open. Parameters. and verify thatm_Concrete Sill. Loading Sill Families into the Window Family Families opened in the family editor can be loaded directly into other families. and is visible only in detail level Fine. Load the concrete sill 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. click Load into Projects. open m_Concrete Sill. Load the metal sill 7 Click Window menu ➤ Metal Sill. and then load families into the casement window family you have created. 8 On the Design Bar. 10 Click OK. 9 In the Load into Projects dialog. The category of a family can be changed under Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters.rfa. 4 On the Family tab of the Design Bar.rfa is cleared.rfa -3D View: View1.The sill is placed on a subcategory Window Sill. select Casement Window. The concrete sill family is now loaded into the Window family. 6 Click OK. 11 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. click Load into Projects. select Casement Window. 3 Using the same method.

578 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . they appear in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Windows. you create a parameter that determines the true sill length in the window family. For Group parameter under. enter Width .rfa. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 13 Maximize Casement Window. enter Sill Length. click Family Types. 2 In the Family Types dialog. for Construction ➤ Sill Length.rfa.12 Close and save m_Metal Sill. Click OK.rfa and m_Concrete Sill. 5 Click OK. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. in the Formula column. under Families ➤ Windows ➤ Concrete Sill. Associate the parameter to nested families 6 In the Project Browser. double-click Concrete Sill. under Parameters. Create the parameter 1 On the Design Bar. select Length. As both sill families have been defined as Window families. For Type of Parameter. select Construction. click Add.2* Wall Offset. Creating a Length Parameter The sill length needs to be equivalent to the exterior width of the window family.

The Length type parameter of the nested families now has the same value as the calculated value of the Sill Length parameter of the window family. aligning it to reference planes in both plan and elevation views. expand Families ➤ Windows ➤ Concrete Sill. and click . click the rectangular button on the right side. 8 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. select Insertion Depth. Placing the Sill Family | 579 . The Width instance parameter of the nested families now has the same value as the Insertion Depth parameter of the window family. for Dimensions ➤ Length. Align the sill 10 On the Tools toolbar. Placing the Sill Family In this exercise. associate the Length parameter of the Metal Sill family. for Dimensions ➤ Width. 5 Click Modify. The sill family needs to be positioned and aligned in plan and elevation views. under Floor Plans. 10 Using the same method. 2 On the View Control Bar. and click to place it. Level. Place the family 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Ref. 11 Select the Center (Left/Right) reference plane of the window family. Associate an instance parameter 6 Select the solid geometry of the concrete sill. select the hidden Center (Left/Right) reference plan of the Sill family. 9 Click OK twice. click the rectangular button on the right side. 3 In the Project Browser. 9 Click OK twice. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. you place the concrete sill in the project. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. select Sill Length. and lock the alignment.7 In the Type Properties dialog. 4 Drag Concrete Sill into the drawing area. click (Align). 8 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog.

you add a Sill Type parameter. align the lower horizontal edge of the sill to the Insertion Edge reference plane of the Window family. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. double-click Left. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. and lock the alignment. 17 In the Project Browser. TIP If the sill does not display. align the bottom edge of the sill family. under 3D Views. 14 On the View Control Bar. click (Align). 16 Select the Sill reference plane of the window family. 15 On the Tools toolbar. 13 In the Project Browser. click and spin the wall. and lock the alignment. 18 On the View Control Bar. under Elevations. double-click View 1.12 Using the same method. Creating a Shared Parameter In order to switch the sill from concrete to metal on an instance level. 580 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . The sill is placed in the desired position.

5 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. for Label. select <Family Type>. Under Type of Parameter. click Shared parameter. click Family Types. 18 On the Options Bar. 13 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 2 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. you must define the parameter as a shared parameter. Testing Nested Families You can test the correct behavior of the nested families directly in the window family. Associate the parameter to geometry 17 In the drawing area. click Create. The metal sill replaces the concrete sill. for Group parameter under. click New. click Add. enter Sill Type. 12 In the Family Types dialog. select Metal Sill. 3 Click Apply. under Groups. 4 Under File name. select Windows. for Constraints ➤ Sill Type (default). enter Training Shared Parameter.To display the custom parameter in a schedule. and click OK. 3 In the Save As dialog. Note that the last created Shared Parameter file has been automatically opened. 7 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. 9 In the Select Category dialog. and select Instance. click New. the parameter appears on the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog in the available fields list. 2 In the Family Types dialog. Create the shared parameter 1 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. select Constraints. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog. If the family is then loaded into a project. 1 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 14 In the Shared Parameters dialog. click Family Types. select Sill Type. under Parameters. Add the parameter to a family 11 On the Design Bar. select the Concrete Sill family. and click Select. Testing Nested Families | 581 . and click Save. under Parameters. click OK. for Name. 16 Click OK twice. enter Windows. under Parameter Type. 6 In the New Parameter Group dialog. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Name. 10 Click OK 3 times. navigate to Training.

click (3D). click Load into Projects. and create a horizontal wall. use best practice to test the window in multiple wall thicknesses in the project environment.4 Click OK. click the Window tool.rfa -3D View: View 1. 8 On the Views toolbar. 582 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 5 On the Design Bar. Testing the Family in a Project Environment Finally. 3 On the Design Bar. 9 In the View Control Bar. 2 Click Window menu ➤ Casement Window. TIP If the sill does not display. click and spin the wall. This creates a new project with the default template. select Casement Window : 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200 and place the window in the wall. 6 In the Type Selector. click the Wall tool. click . 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. insert a Casement Window : 1500 x 1400 1-Swing Sash 400 in the wall. check all views at all levels of detail. 7 Using the same method. Test windows and sills 1 On the Standard toolbar.

for Constraints ➤ Sill Type. 14 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Click OK. and click . Create a window schedule 12 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities.10 Select the smaller window. Creating a Furniture Family In this lesson. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating a Furniture Family | 583 . Height. Width. select Windows. rolltop. select Metal Sill. and click OK. enter Window Schedule with Sills. and Sill Type to the Scheduled fields list. Under Name. You then assign parameters to the furniture family to allow for the creation of different-sized versions of the prototype. Note that the window sill has changed. drawer base. you create a custom furniture family based on the definition of a rolltop desk. add the fields Mark. and click OK. and drawers as extrusions. Sill Type is now displayed in the schedule table. You begin by creating the desktop. 13 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category.

and open Metric\Templates\Metric Furniture.Finally. 4 Maximize the view. Level. their exact location is not critical. click New ➤ Family. 584 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .rft. Draw additional horizontal and vertical reference planes 6 On the Design Bar. Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters In this exercise. Precise dimensions are assigned to the reference planes in subsequent steps. 5 On the View menu. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. you assign new dimension values to the furniture to create new types within the furniture family. NOTE When you draw the reference planes. click Training Files. 7 Draw two horizontal reference planes. click Ref Plane. you add reference planes and specify the parameters for the new rolltop desk furniture family. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. Floor Plan: Ref. Create a new family based on the default furniture template 1 Close all open projects or families. one above and one below the existing horizontal centerline reference plane as shown. and specify values for the furniture length and depth. The reference planes that display are part of the default furniture template. they represent the furniture centerline axes. 2 On the File menu.

Dimension the reference planes 9 On the Design Bar. 10 Near the bottom of the drawing area. Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters | 585 . and ending at the right reference plane.8 Draw two vertical reference planes. proceeding to the centerline reference plane. add a horizontal dimension string beginning at the left reference plane. as shown. one to the left and one to the right of the existing vertical centerline reference plane as shown. click Dimension.

13 Select the left reference plane. 11 Add an overall horizontal dimension underneath the dimension you just added. click Modify. 586 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 14 Change the horizontal dimension to 2000 mm. 12 On the Design Bar. It should reference the left reference plane and the right reference plane as shown.Click the EQ symbol to make the segments equal.

proceeding to the centerline reference plane.15 On the Design Bar. as shown. Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters | 587 . Click the EQ symbol to make both segments equal. add a vertical dimension string beginning at the upper reference plane. as shown. 16 On the right side of the drawing area. 17 To the right of the dimension you just created. add an overall vertical dimension from the upper reference plane to the lower reference plane. click Dimension. and ending at the lower reference plane.

select each reference plane and drag the extents to the new position.18 On the Design Bar. 19 Select the upper. click Modify. click Modify. 20 Change the vertical dimension to 1000 mm. 22 Clean up the extents of the reference planes and the dimension witness lines as shown. TIP To do this. horizontal reference plane. 588 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select each dimension and drag the witness line controls as needed. Afterwards. 21 On the Design Bar.

25 In the Parameter Properties dialog. select Dimensions. 26 Select the 1000 mm dimension. 24 On the Options Bar. select Family parameter.> for Label. specify the following: ■ Under Parameter type. For Group parameter under. select <Add parameter.. 27 On the Options Bar. Under Parameter Data. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type.. Select Type. select <Add parameter. enter Length for Name.. Click OK. Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters | 589 . 28 In the Parameter Properties dialog..> for Label. select Family parameter.Add length and depth family parameters 23 Select the 2000 mm dimension.

Flex the design 29 Adjust the location of the reference planes within the drawing area. Therefore. so when you open the Family Types dialog. enter 3000 mm for Length. Notice the reference planes adapt to the new dimension parameters. you should flex the design now to ensure the reference planes and labelled dimensions adapt to changes as expected. Select Type. These reference planes will be the skeleton that you snap the solid geometry to. 30 On the Design Bar. it will also adapt to the same changes. select Dimensions. When the solid geometry is snapped to the reference planes. you can still see the model.■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. Click OK. For Group parameter under. 31 In the Family Types dialog. 590 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Enter 1500 mm for Depth. Click Apply. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. enter Depth for Name. click Family Types.

Your lines may have a lighter weight. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. you create the solid geometry of the desktop with an extrusion. click .32 In the Family Types dialog. Click Apply. and click OK. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 On the Options Bar. 4 On the Design Bar. and enter 100 mm for Depth. 3 Select the upper left reference plane intersection for the first corner of the rectangle. 5 On the Design Bar. click Set Work Plane. Create the desktop using an extrusion 1 On the Design Bar. enter 2000 mm for Length. 8 On the Options Bar. 7 On the Design Bar. the symbolic line thickness was modified for training purposes. Level for Name. “Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry” on page 591. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. and then select the lower right reference plane intersection for the second corner of the rectangle. under Specify a new Work Plane. select Level: Ref. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. and click to select all four symbolic lines. Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry In this exercise. NOTE In the image below. click . click Symbolic Lines. click Lines. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. press TAB until the chain of lines is offered as a selection option. Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry | 591 . 9 Move the cursor over one of the symbolic lines. Click OK. 6 In the Work Plane dialog.

The desktop extrusion extends 100 mm above the reference level. Add height and thickness dimensions 17 On the Design Bar. 15 Move the cursor over the bottom edge of the desktop. press TAB until Extrusion : Shape handle displays in the Status Bar. and select the bottom edge. 592 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Dimension. double-click Front. Move the desktop up 12 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 13 Move the cursor over the top edge of the desktop. under Elevations. 16 Drag the bottom edge of the desktop up until the desktop is 100 mm thick. press TAB until Extrusion : Shape handle displays in the Status Bar. 11 In the Project Browser.10 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. and select the top edge. 14 Drag the top edge of the desktop upward until the temporary dimension value is 750 mm.

24 Select the 100 mm dimension. click Modify. click Modify. select Dimensions. Click OK. 19 Add a vertical dimension from the bottom of the desktop to the top edge. 27 On the Design Bar..18 Add a vertical dimension from the reference level to the top edge of the desktop. Under Parameter Data. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type.> for Label. Select Type.. 22 On the Options Bar. Click OK.. enter Height for Name. 21 Select the 750 mm dimension. 26 n the Parameter Properties dialog. as shown. Add height and thickness family parameters 20 On the Design Bar. 25 On the Options Bar. For Group parameter under. select Family parameter. Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry | 593 . specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. select Family parameter. enter Thickness for Name.> for Label. select Dimensions. For Group parameter under. Under Parameter Data. 23 In the Parameter Properties dialog. select <Add parameter. Select Type. select <Add parameter..

do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. and click Apply. 4 Move the cursor over the left vertical reference plane. 30 In the Family Types dialog. Click OK. 3 On the Options Bar. and enter 100 mm for Offset. Level. double-click Ref. click Ref Plane. 2 On the Design Bar. and click Apply. “Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry” on page 594. Click Apply. and click Apply. Enter 100 mm for Thickness.Flex the design 28 Adjust the location of the model within the drawing area. 594 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Offset two reference planes to locate the first drawer base corner 1 In the Project Browser. and click to locate a new vertical reference plane offset 100 mm to the right. Enter 1200 mm for Height. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry In this exercise. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. enter 2000 mm for Length. 29 On the Design Bar. you can still see the model. under Floor Plans. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. you create the solid geometry of the desk drawer base. 31 In the Family Types dialog. click . Enter 750 mm for Height. Enter 150 mm for Thickness. Notice the desk top adapts to the new dimension parameters. enter 4000 mm for Length. so when you open the Family Types dialog. click Family Types.

Lock the dimension as shown.5 Move the cursor over the upper horizontal reference plane. click Dimension. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 595 . 7 Add a dimension referencing the left vertical reference plane and the offset plane you added. 6 On the Design Bar. 8 Add a dimension to the top horizontal reference plane and the offset plane below it. and click to locate a new horizontal reference plane offset 100 mm below it. Click the lock icon as shown.

and click OK. 14 Select the intersection of the new offset reference planes for the first corner of the rectangle. 12 On the Design Bar. two lock icons display. under Specify a new Work Plane. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion.Sketch the left drawer base 9 On the Design Bar. click Set Work Plane. 11 In the Work Plane dialog. 596 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Lines. and then specify a point 300 mm to the right and 800 mm down for the second corner of the rectangle. After you complete the rectangle. 10 On the Design Bar. 15 Click both of the lock icons to lock the edges of the extrusion to the reference planes. click . select Level: Ref. 13 On the Options Bar. Level for Name. as shown.

17 Add a vertical dimension from the lower reference plane to the lower edge of the drawer base. 21 Select the vertical centerline reference plane as the mirror axis. You can also highlight the entire line chain. . Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 597 . 20 On the Tools toolbar. TIP You can select multiple elements by holding the CTRL key down. click the Mirror tool.16 On the Design Bar. using the TAB key. and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension. 19 Select the four sketched lines. click Dimension. Mirror the left rectangle to create the right drawer base 18 On the Design Bar. click Modify.

22 On the Tools toolbar. 598 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 24 Select the top horizontal line of the right drawer extrusion as shown. click . 23 For the align-to reference. select the horizontal reference plane second from the top. as shown below at the cursor.A duplicate of the left drawer base is mirrored to create the right drawer base.

26 On the Design Bar. and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension.A lock icon displays. 27 Add and lock the following two dimensions to the right drawer extrusion: ■ Add a dimension from the right vertical reference plane to the right edge of the drawer base. 25 Click the lock icon to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane. ■ Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 599 . and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension. Add a dimension from the lower reference plane to the lower edge of the drawer base. click Dimension.

enter Drawer Base Width for Name. select Dimensions.. Select Type. 600 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . one on each extrusion that references the width of the drawer base. 29 Select the dimension referring to the drawer width on the left extrusion. Click OK. Under Parameter Data.> for Label.. select <Add parameter. as shown. 31 In the Parameter Properties dialog.28 Add two final dimensions. select Family parameter. For Group parameter under. 30 On the Options Bar. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type.

click . under Elevations. Extend the drawer base extrusions up to the desktop 36 In the Project Browser. 34 On the Design Bar. 37 On the Tools toolbar. 35 On the Design Bar.32 Select the dimension referring to the drawer width on the right extrusion. select Drawer Base Width for Label. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 601 . 33 On the Options Bar. double-click Front. click Modify. 38 Select the lower edge of the desktop as the align-to reference. click Finish Sketch.

45 On the View Control Bar. you can still see the model.39 Select the upper edge of the drawer base. 42 On the View menu. 602 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click OK. 43 Click the Annotation Categories tab. click Modify. 44 Clear Show annotation categories in this view. 41 On the View toolbar. 40 On the Design Bar. However. click . notice that annotations display in this view. click Visibility/Graphics. click the Scale control and select 1:20. After the alignment. The solid geometry for the desk drawer base is now complete. a lock icon displays. click it to lock the alignment. Flex the design 46 Adjust the location of the model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog.

Enter 100 mm for Thickness. 49 In the Family Types dialog. 48 In the Family Types dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. and click Apply. under Elevations. Click Apply. you create the solid geometry of the desk rolltop.47 On the Design Bar. and click Apply. 50 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry In this exercise. enter 2000 mm for Length. Create the rolltop extrusion 1 In the Project Browser. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. “Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry” on page 603. Click OK. Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry | 603 . Enter 750 mm for Height. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. double-click Right. click Family Types. enter 4000 mm for Length. and click Apply. Enter 1200 mm for Height. Enter 150 mm for Thickness. Notice the desk adapts to the new dimension parameters.

7 Sketch the rectangle beginning at the intersection of the desktop and the right reference plane. then the lower horizontal sketch line. select Reference Plane: Center (Left\Right) for Name. and click the lock icon to lock the alignment. 8 On the Tools toolbar. and click OK. 604 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .2 On the Design Bar. click Lines. 4 In the Work Plane dialog. 3 On the Design Bar. 6 On the Options Bar. then move the cursor up 300mm and to the left 400mm. under Specify a new Work Plane. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. as shown. click . click Set Work Plane. 5 On the Design Bar. click . and click to specify the upper left corner. 9 Select the desk top.

and lock it. 11 On the Design Bar. and lock it. Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry | 605 . then select the right parallel sketch line.10 Select the right vertical edge of the desktop extrusion. and lock the alignment. Add another dimension to both horizontal sketch lines. 12 Add one dimension referring to both vertical sketch lines. click Dimension.

. Do not be concerned with the precise dimension of the arc radius. 606 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .13 On the Design Bar. and then move the cursor down and to the right until you create and arc similar to the image below. TIP You may need to click the down arrow button. click Finish Sketch. and then select the fillet arc tool from the menu. click the Fillet arc tool. 14 On the Options Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. 15 Select the left vertical sketch line. click Lines. the upper sketch line.

select the left edge of the rolltop. click . 18 On the Tools toolbar. under Elevations. and click the lock icon. Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry | 607 . 20 Select the right edge of the right drawer base. and click the lock icon. Align the left and right edges of the rolltop with the drawer bases 17 In the Project Browser.The rolltop extrusion outline is complete. double-click Front. select the right edge of the rolltop. 19 Select the left edge of the left drawer base.

click . Enter 200 mm for Thickness. If not. You can also use dimension constraints. The desk should adapt to all the changes. enter 4000 mm for Length. Enter 1500 mm for Depth. and click Apply. 608 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 23 On the Design Bar. Flex the design 22 Adjust the location of the desk model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog. and click Apply.21 On the View toolbar. and click Apply. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. you may need to align and lock problematic edges that did not remain aligned. 24 In the Family Types dialog. The solid geometry of the rolltop is now complete. click Family Types. you can still see the model. Enter 1500 mm for Height. and click Apply.

Enter 1000 mm for Depth. select Pick a Plane. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. you create the solid geometry of the drawers and apply material to the desk. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. under Specify a new Work Plane. “Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry” on page 609. Enter 750 mm for Height. enter 2000 mm for Length. 2 On the Design Bar. Click OK. and click OK. 26 Proceed to the next exercise. Click Apply. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.25 In the Family Types dialog. Create the desk drawer extrusions 1 On the Design Bar. Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry In this exercise. 4 Select the front plane of the right drawer base. Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry | 609 . click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. click Set Work Plane. 3 In the Work Plane dialog.

12 On the Options Bar. zoom the view until you do. 11 On the Tools toolbar. 13 To constrain the four upper drawers. NOTE Adding and locking these dimensions is very important. and repeat the previous step by selecting the right vertical lines of the 610 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . these locked dimension assure that the drawers flex as expected. 10 Add a dimension between the vertical edges of the drawer base and the vertical lines of each bottom drawer. . If you modify the desk length or the drawer base width. After selecting the line of an upper drawer. click Dimension. click . Lock each dimension as you add it. NOTE The exact configuration of the rectangles representing the drawer fronts is not critical. click the lock that displays to lock the alignment. 7 On the Options Bar. If you cannot see the locks on the dimensions. 14 On the Tools toolbar. double-click Front. under Elevations. click drawer set on the left.5 In the Project Browser. select Multiple Alignment. click . click Lines. 6 On the Design Bar. 9 On the Design Bar. select the left vertical line on the left lowest drawer first. 8 Sketch six drawers similar to the image below. There should be four dimensions as shown. and then select the corresponding left vertical lines of the two drawers above it.

navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Cherry and select Stained. and click OK. Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry | 611 . Apply material to the desk 21 Draw a pick box around the entire desk to select all the extrusions. click . 25 In the New Material dialog. click for Texture. 27 In the Material Library dialog. under Constraints. click . Cherry. 31 On the View Control Bar. click . 28 Click OK. 20 On the View toolbar. 19 On the Design Bar. These steps ensure the top drawers remain aligned and flex with the constrained bottom drawer. and repeat the previous two steps on the right set of drawers. click Duplicate.Wood. enter 20mm for Extrusion End. Polished. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. click Modify. 29 In the Materials dialog. click OK. click Extrusion Properties. click 24 In the Materials dialog. click the Model Graphics Style control. click Finish Sketch. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. Dark. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. 22 On the Options Bar. 16 On the Design Bar.15 On the Tools toolbar. under Materials and Finishes. under AccuRender. 17 On the Design Bar. click OK. enter Desk . for Material. 26 In the Materials dialog. and select Shading with Edges.

35 In the Family Types dialog. you can still see the model. Enter 750 mm for Height. Click Apply. enter 2000 mm for Length. Enter 1500 mm for Depth. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. and click Apply. “Defining New Furniture Types” on page 612. you define new furniture types based on the rolltop desk model that you just created.Flex the design 32 Adjust the location of the desk model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog. The desk should adapt to all the changes. If not. Click OK. click Family Types. 612 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 33 On the Design Bar. You can also use dimension constraints. enter 4000 mm for Length. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. Defining New Furniture Types In this exercise. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 36 Proceed with the final exercise in this lesson. and click Apply. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. you may need to align and lock problematic edges that did not remain aligned. 34 In the Family Types dialog. and click Apply. Enter 200 mm for Thickness.

and click Open. to start a new project based on your default template. under Family Types.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 19 In the Type Selector. select Rolltop Desk 200 x 1000mm. 4 In the Family Types dialog. 17 On the Options Bar. enter Rolltop Desk 2000 x 1000mm for Name. 20 Specify a point in the drawing area to add the first desk. 9 In the Name dialog. click 14 On the View toolbar.rfa file. click the Model Graphics Style control and select Shading with Edges. click New. 8 Under Family Types. 11 On the File menu. enter Rolltop Desk 2250 x 1250mm for Name.rfa. and click OK. enter 2250 mm for Length and 1250 mm for Depth. click New. Training Furniture. click . 6 In the Name dialog. 15 On the View Control Bar. Define new furniture types with various widths and depths 1 On the Design Bar. 3 In the Name dialog. 5 Under Family Types. click Apply. 7 In the Family Types dialog. and click Apply. You now have three new furniture types defined within your furniture family. and click OK. navigate to the location of your Training Furniture. click Save. and click OK. click Family Types. enter Rolltop Desk 2100 x 1100mm for Name. verify that Length is 2000 mm and Depth is 1000 mm. Defining New Furniture Types | 613 . click New. Load the new furniture family into a new project 13 On the Standard toolbar. select it. 18 In the Open dialog. 2 In the Family Types dialog. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. click Load. 12 Navigate to the folder of your choice and save the new furniture family project with the name. enter 2100 mm for Length and 1100 mm for Depth. click Component. 10 In the Family Types dialog. and click Apply.

23 In the Type Selector. Creating a Baluster Family In this lesson. Balusters are simply profile extrusions with an assigned height family parameter.21 In the Type Selector. select Rolltop Desk 2100 x 1100mm. you create a custom baluster and apply it to a set of stair railings. and click to add the third desk. Drawing a Baluster In this exercise. 22 Specify a point to the right of the first desk. you draw a baluster with an extrusion. This completes the Creating a Furniture Family lesson. 614 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and add the second desk. You now have three new rolltop desks based on the new rolltop desk furniture family prototype. select Rolltop Desk 2250 x 1250mm. 24 Specify a point in the drawing area to the right of the previous two desks.

NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs. click Lines. 4 On the Design Bar. Top and bottom cut angles for the baluster are also displayed. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit. The bottom of the baluster is at the reference level and the baluster has an assigned default height of 750mm. and click OK. the baluster profile should be centered on the vertical and horizontal reference planes. Drawing a Baluster | 615 . their exact location is not critical. click Training Files.rft. expand Views (all). 5 On the Design Bar. 9 On the Design Bar. However. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Baluster. The reference planes that display are part of the default baluster template. Level. and double-click Ref. 7 On the Design Bar. Draw your profile approximately 30mm wide by 60mm deep.Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. click Finish Sketch. Level for Name. click Set Work Plane. click New ➤ Family. 2 On the View menu. Create a new family based on the default profile template 1 Expand the left elevation view. 8 Draw the closed baluster plan profile as shown. Draw the baluster plan profile 3 In the Project Browser. select Ref. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. expand Floor Plans. In the left pane of the New dialog. 6 In the Work Plane dialog.

6 On the Design Bar. 4 On the Design Bar. click Stairs. click Modify and select the extrusion. click . By default. Load the new baluster family into a new project 1 On the File menu. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. The new custom baluster is now complete. Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run In this exercise. double-click Front. click the Modelling tab.rfa. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 15 Save the new baluster family with the name Training Baluster. 5 Draw a straight stair run as shown. 616 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 13 Select the top reference plane and select the top edge of the extrusion.Extend the baluster extrusion to the top reference plane 10 In the Project Browser under Elevations.rte. click New ➤ Project. you assign the new baluster that you just created to a stair run. 11 On the Design Bar. 14 Click the lock icon. 2 In the left pane of the New Project dialog. click Finish Sketch. click Training Files. 12 On the Options Bar. the extrusion has a height of 250mm. Draw a straight stair run 3 On the Design Bar. 7 On the File menu.

rfa file. click Modify and select the existing railing. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. click Orient ➤ Southwest. click OK.8 In the Open dialog. 15 In the Type Properties dialog. 16 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog. Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run | 617 . navigate to the location of your Training Baluster. and click Open. select Training Baluster : Training Baluster for the Regular baluster. 20 In the Type Properties dialog. click OK. Apply the custom baluster to the stair run 12 On the Design Bar. select it. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. 19 Click OK. 10 On the View menu. under Baluster Family. click Shading with Edges. click . 18 Specify Start and End posts as Training Baluster. 17 Clear Use Balusters Per Tread on Stairs. click Edit/New. 22 Zoom in on the new balusters. 9 On the View toolbar. 11 On the View menu. click Edit for Baluster Placement. 13 On the Options Bar. click .

Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. You then create an in-place sweep based on a 2D path and apply the host sweep to a wall. under Floor Plans. The new sweep profile is now complete.rft. Create a new family based on the default profile template 1 On the Design Bar. you create five different profiles: a sweep. balusters.The stair run is now assigned the new baluster that you created. and other sweep-defined objects. their exact location is not critical. 618 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 3 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . Create profiles to define frequently used shapes in your details. Creating Profile Families A profile is a series of closed two-dimensional lines and arcs. you draw a sweep profile. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs. Level is open. click New ➤ Family. However. draw the sweep profile with line and arc segments as shown. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile-Rail. click New ➤ Family. This completes the Creating a Baluster Family lesson. click Training Files. In the left pane of the New dialog. click Training Files. Drawing a Rail Profile In this exercise. you create a rail profile. the sweep profile should begin at the reference plane intersection. soffits. Create a new family based on the default rail profile template 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Ref. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. 2 Starting at the reference plane intersection. Drawing a Sweep Profile In this exercise. Use profiles to define object cross sections such as railings.Sweep. a reveal.rft. a stair nosing. and a host sweep. cornices. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile. In this lesson. click Lines.rfa. In the left pane of the New dialog. a railing.

with the vertical reference plane labeled as the rail centerline and the horizontal reference plane labeled as the rail top. In the left pane of the New dialog. with the vertical reference plane labeled as the riser face and the horizontal reference plane labeled as the tread surface.rfa.The reference planes that display are part of the default rail profile template. their exact location is not critical. Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile In this exercise. However. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile-Stair Nosing. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection. click Training Files. the top of the rail profile should coincide with the rail top reference plane. Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile | 619 . click New ➤ Family.Rail. The rail height is measured from the floor elevation to the rail top. click Lines. The new rail profile is now complete. draw the rail profile with line segments as shown. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs. The reference planes that display are part of the default stair nosing profile template. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. 4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . Additional text specifies the lower-left quadrant as the location for the stair nosing. Draw the rail profile 2 On the Design Bar.rft. you create a stair nosing profile. Create a new family based on the default stair nosing profile template 1 Notice the existing planes and text provided within the template.

you must draw the stair nosing in the lower-left quadrant. the top of the stair nosing profile should coincide with the tread surface reference plane and the right edge of the stair nosing profile should coincide with the riser face reference plane. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection. Drawing a Reveal Profile In this exercise. verify that Ref. Create a new family based on the default reveal profile template 1 In the Project Browser. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu.rfa. under Floor Plans. their exact location is not critical. Level is open. 620 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . In addition. and the wall body indicated to the right of the wall face reference plane.Stair Nosing. click Lines. 4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . Reveal profiles are used with the Reveal tool in the project environment to define a wall cutout. click New ➤ Family. you create a reveal profile. with the vertical reference plane labeled as the wall face. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile-Reveal.Draw the stair nosing profile 2 On the Design Bar. However.rft. draw the stair nosing profile with line and arc segments as shown. The reference planes that display are part of the default reveal profile template. The new stair nosing profile is now complete. In the left pane of the New dialog. The horizontal reference plane represents the offset from floor level to the reveal. click Training Files.

Level is open. under Floor Plans.Draw the reveal profile 2 On the Design Bar. Host Sweep profiles are similar to reveal profiles and are used with the Host Sweep tool in the project environment to define a shape to add to a host surface. verify that Ref. Create a new family based on the default host sweep profile template 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile-Hosted. click New ➤ Family. However. 4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . Drawing a Host Sweep Profile In this exercise. their exact location is not critical. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines. The new reveal profile is now complete.rft. draw the reveal profile with line segments as shown. click Lines. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. you create a host sweep profile. which may be any vertical surface.rfa.Reveal. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection. In the left pane of the New dialog. the left edge of the reveal profile must coincide with wall face reference plane and the reveal must be drawn within the wall body (to the right of the wall face reference plane). Drawing a Host Sweep Profile | 621 . click Training Files.

rfa. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines. The new host sweep profile is now complete. click Training Files. The reference plane intersection is the origin of the host sweep profile. click OK. the left edge of the host sweep profile must coincide with the host face reference plane. Create a new project 1 On the File menu. Draw the host sweep profile 2 On the Design Bar. 4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . click Lines. with the vertical reference plane labeled as the host face and the host body indicated to the left of the host face reference plane. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. you apply the sweep profile that you just created to a 2D path.The reference planes that display are part of the default host sweep profile template. and the host sweep profile must be drawn outside of the host body (to the right of the host face reference plane). Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path In this exercise. draw the reveal profile with line and arc segments as shown. However. click Create. 2 In the New Project dialog. 622 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .Host Sweep. their exact location is not critical. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection. click Browse. 4 In the New Project dialog.rte. click New ➤ Project. Specify the family category 5 On the Modelling menu. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog.

expand Elevations. the exact location of the path is not critical. 9 On the Design Bar. select Profile . 17 On the View toolbar. click Finish Family. 15 On the Design Bar. 19 Zoom in on the right end of the sweep.Sweep. expand Views (all). enter Sweep for Name. 14 In the Type Selector. Modify the sweep profile configuration 18 In the Project Browser.6 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. and double-click South. Apply the sweep profile to the 2D path 12 On the Options Bar. click Finish Path. click Lines and sketch the 2D path approximately as shown. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Sweep. beside Load Profiles. Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path | 623 . click Sketch 2D Path. navigate to the location of Profile . 13 In the Open dialog. 11 On the Design Bar. click Load Profiles. click . select it. click Ref Plane.Sweep. Sketch the 2D sweep path 8 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. select Generic Models for Family Category. and click OK. 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 7 In the Name dialog.rfa. 10 On the Design Bar. and click OK. and click Open. click Finish Sweep. NOTE When you sketch the 2D path.

27 On the View toolbar. and open Metric Templates\DefaultMetric. click Finish Family. Create a new project 1 On the File menu. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. click Edit. click 24 In the Element Properties dialog. click . click New ➤ Project. click Browse. Under Other. on the Options Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ .rte. The sweep profile application is now complete. click Training Files. 22 Select the sweep profile and. enter 600 for Vertical Profile Offset. 26 On the Design Bar. 2 In the New Project dialog.21 Draw a vertical reference plane coincident with the left edge of the profile as shown. 23 Select the sweep profile again and. Under Constraints. Draw a wall group 5 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you apply the host sweep profile that you created to a group of walls. Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls In this exercise. Enter 25 degrees for Angle. click OK. 624 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Wall. select Profile Is Flipped. on the Options Bar. 25 Click OK. 4 In the New Project dialog.

click Host Sweep ➤ Wall Sweep. 6 Draw four walls as shown. verify that Horizontal is selected. their exact location is not critical. 9 On the Options Bar. 8 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.NOTE When you draw the walls. 7 On the View toolbar. click . Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls | 625 . 10 Select a point on the left wall for the wall sweep. 11 Select a point on the right wall for the next wall sweep.

navigate to the location of Profile . Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. Creating a Room Tag In this lesson. Replace the default wall sweep with the new host wall sweep 13 On the File menu. The reference planes that display are part of the default room tag template. click Modify. click . 21 Move the cursor to rotate your viewpoint to view the host sweep from underneath. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit.rfa. you create a room tag which displays room name. . Create a new tag based on the default room tag template 1 On the View menu. 17 In the Type Properties dialog. click OK. Specifying Room Tag Parameters In this exercise. and open Metric\Templates\M_Room Tag. and click Open. and area with labels added to extract project data. 20 In the Dynamic View dialog. This completes the Creating Profile Families lesson. click 16 In the Element Properties dialog. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family.Host Sweep.Host Sweep for Profile. on the Options Bar. you specify the room tag parameters. select Profile . and click OK.12 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Open dialog. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. click New ➤ Annotation Symbol. under Construction.Host Sweep : Profile . click Edit/New.rft. In the left pane of the New dialog. click Spin [Shift]. click Training Files. The default wall sweep is replaced with your host sweep profile. floor and ceiling finish. 15 Select the wall sweep and. 19 On the View toolbar. 626 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select it.

select Underline. click OK. 15 In the Select Parameter dialog. select Area. Add a 2mm label 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 18 Specify a point below the Name label for the next label location. click Edit/New. select Floor Finish. and click OK. and click OK. select Name. 12 In the Type Selector. 21 In the Select Parameter dialog. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. clear Underline. 13 On the Options Bar. click . and click OK. select Label : 2mm. 14 Specify the location for the first label as shown. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate.Edit the 3mm label 2 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 22 Specify a point below the Ceiling Finish label for the last label location. verify that Label : 3mm is displayed. verify that Center and Middle are selected for Text Alignment. 7 In the Type properties dialog. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. 3 On the Options Bar. click Edit/New. 20 Specify a point below the Floor Finish label for the next label location. select Ceiling Finish. 17 In the Type Selector. 23 In the Select Parameter dialog. 19 In the Select Parameter dialog. The name label is displayed with the text underlined. 16 Zoom in on the label. Combine labels into a room tag 11 On the Design Bar. click Label. and click OK. and click OK. click Label. 8 In the Name dialog. enter 2 for the Text Size parameter. Specifying Room Tag Parameters | 627 . enter 2mm for Name. and click OK.

click New ➤ Annotation Symbol.The Area label has a predefined value of 150 SF. Sketch a north arrow symbol 2 On the Design Bar. 4 Specify the reference plane intersection for the circle center point. 628 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Create a new annotation symbol based on the default generic annotation template 1 In the Project Browser. 24 Save the new room tag with the name Finish Area Tag. Notes included with the template specify annotation parameters. click . you create a custom north arrow annotation symbol with a circle and lines.rfa. and open Metric\Templates\Generic Annotation. Creating an Annotation Symbol In this lesson. In the left pane of the New dialog. The new room tag is now ready for use.rft. you create a custom north arrow annotation symbol and place it in a new project. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol In this exercise. The reference planes that display are part of the default generic annotation template. This completes the Creating a Room Tag lesson. notice that there is only one view available. 3 On the Options Bar. click Lines. click Training Files.

Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol | 629 . 10 On the Design Bar. 9 Draw a vertical line from the center point to the bottom of the circle. 7 Draw a horizontal line from the left side to the right side of the circle through the center point. click Modify. 8 Draw a vertical line from the top to the center point of the circle.5 Drag the cursor and specify a radius of 8mm. 6 On the Options Bar. click .

14 In the Object Styles dialog.The new north arrow annotation symbol is ready to edit. 19 Save the new north arrow with the name. 6 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog.rfa. click Modify. click New ➤ Project. The north arrow annotation symbol is now complete. verify that Generic Annotations is selected for Subcategory of. select North Line. click Modify. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. and click OK. Adding the New North Arrow to a Project In this exercise. Load the new north arrow into a new project 1 On the File menu. 5 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select A1 metric. 18 Select the template notes and press DELETE. Add an annotation objects subcategory 11 On the Settings menu. click OK. 16 In the Type Selector. enter North Line for Name. click New. 630 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and select the upper vertical line. in the North Line row. 9 On the File menu. 7 Click OK. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family.rte. 8 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. click Browse. under Modify Subcategories. 2 In the New Project dialog. and click OK. click Training Files. 12 In the Object Styles dialog. Apply the new line weight to the upper vertical line 15 On the Design Bar. 17 On the Design Bar. select 3 for Line Weight. Training North Arrow. 13 In the New Subcategory dialog. click Sheet. 4 In the New Project dialog. you add the new north arrow annotation symbol that you created to a project. click Object Styles.

In the left pane of the New dialog. 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. navigate to the location of Training North Arrow. and labels. 12 In the Type Selector. click Symbol. Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet In this exercise. Create a new family based on the default titleblock template 1 The default titleblock template consists of 4 border lines. Creating a Titleblock Family | 631 . select Training North Arrow. You customize the titleblock with a new text style. click Modify.rft. graphics. click New ➤ Titleblock. 13 Specify a point in the lower right corner of the sheet to place the symbol. and your project data.10 In the Open dialog. click Training Files. 14 On the Design Bar. you create a custom titleblock sheet based on the A0 metric titleblock template. Creating a Titleblock Family In this lesson. and click Open. you draw all of the linework necessary to create a custom A0-size sheet. select it. and open Metric\Templates\A0 Metric. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. The titleblock has linework. This completes the Creating an Annotation Symbol lesson. text.rfa.

9 Draw a horizontal line 140mm below the upper inside border as shown. and enter -25 for Offset. 6 Move the cursor over the right inside border line. 7 On the Options Bar. click . and click . click Lines. 10 Draw a horizontal line 120mm below the last horizontal line as shown. and click to draw a new vertical line. 11 Draw a horizontal line 120mm above the lower inside border as shown. 4 Specify the upper left corner of the sheet for the first rectangle corner.Sketch the inside border 2 On the Design Bar. . click . 3 On the Options Bar. and enter 140 for Offset. 632 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Add vertical and horizontal lines 5 On the Options Bar. click 8 Enter 0 for Offset. and then specify the lower right corner of the sheet for the second corner of the rectangle.

19 Move the cursor over the fourth horizontal line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. select Wide Lines. and enter 20 for Offset. Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet | 633 . and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. 16 In the Type Selector. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. 22 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line. 26 Zoom out to view the entire sheet. 13 In the Type Selector. click Modify. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. 23 Move the cursor over the seventh horizontal line. 24 Move the cursor over the eighth horizontal line. 18 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line.12 On the Design Bar. 25 On the Design Bar. 20 Move the cursor over the fifth horizontal line. 14 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. enter 30 for Offset. click Modify. press CTRL. 21 On the Options Bar. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. click Lines. select Title Blocks. and select the second and third horizontal lines. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. click . 17 On the Options Bar. 15 On the Design Bar.

4 Zoom in on the logo. you add a company logo.jpg. and open Common\Company Logo. 6 On the Options Bar. and labels to your titleblock. Add a company logo 1 On the File menu. click Training Files. click Import/Link ➤ Image. 3 Place the image in the upper right corner of the sheet as shown. 8 In the Type Properties dialog.The titleblock linework is now complete. Create a new 10mm text style 5 On the Design Bar. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock In this exercise. click . click Duplicate. click Edit/New. click Text. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 634 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . text notes. 7 In the Element Properties dialog.

and select Bold. and drag the text note down as shown. enter 10 for Text Size. enter 10mm Bold for Name. under Text. select Text : 8mm. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 635 . in the text box. 16 Draw a text box below the initial text. 14 Click outside of the text box to complete the text. Press ENTER to add each new line of text and click outside of the text box to complete the text. 11 Click OK twice. and click OK. click Modify. Add company name text 12 Draw a text box under the first horizontal line as shown. Add company address and phone number text 15 In the Type Selector. and add an address and phone number as shown. 17 On the Design Bar. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. 18 Select the drag handle. and select the last text note. 13 Enter Arch Design Inc.9 In the Name dialog.

and select the consultant text note. click Text. click . and enter the following text: ■ ■ ■ ■ Consultant: Address: Address: Telephone: 22 On the Design Bar. select Constrain and Multiple. 636 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Add consultant name. 21 Draw a text box below the second horizontal line. 23 On the Edit toolbar. click Modify. and phone number text 20 On the Design Bar. address. 25 Click inside the Consultant text group.19 Click outside the text box to complete the modification. 24 On the Options Bar.

26 Move the cursor down 120mm and click to specify the first copied text note position. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 637 . 27 Move the cursor down another 120mm and click to specify the second copied text note location.

under Text. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. enter 5 for Text Size. and enter Checked By:. click Edit/New. 36 Draw a text box in the lower right space of the titleblock. click Text. select Text : 5mm. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. 34 Click OK twice.Create a new 5mm text style 28 On the Design Bar. 37 Draw a text box in the next space up. 29 On the Options Bar. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. click . enter 5mm for Name. and click OK. click Duplicate. and enter Sheet Number:. and enter Drawn By:. 39 Draw a text box in the next space up. and enter Date:. 38 Draw a text box in the next space up. 32 In the Name dialog. 638 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Add drawing data text 35 In the Type Selector.

and click OK. and click to specify the label location. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 639 . select Right and Bottom for Text Alignment. The label displays a default value wrapped to 3 lines. click Label.Add drawing data labels 40 On the Design Bar. 42 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Date field. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. 41 On the Options Bar. 44 Select the left drag handle on the label. select Project Issue Date. 43 In the Select Parameter dialog.

select Label : 15mm Label. and click to specify the label location. 50 On the Options Bar. 640 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . enter 15mm Label for Name. select Sheet Number.45 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Drawn By field. 51 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 15 for Text Size. NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. and click OK. and click to specify the label location. 58 In the Select Parameter dialog. and click to specify the label location. and click OK. select Checked By and click OK. 60 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Date field. select Project Number. Create a new 15mm label style 49 On the Design Bar. 59 On the Options Bar. and click to specify the label location. 57 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Sheet Number field. and click OK. 55 Click OK twice. click Label. 54 In the Type Properties dialog. 47 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Checked By field. 46 In the Select Parameter dialog. 53 In the Name dialog. click . NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. click Center and Middle. 52 In the Type Properties dialog. under Text. 48 In the Select Parameter dialog. select Drawn By. 61 In the Select Parameter dialog. Add sheet number and project data labels 56 In the Type Selector. click Edit/New. click Duplicate. and click OK.

Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 641 . and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. 68 Select the left drag handle on the label. and click OK. and click to specify the label location. and click OK. select Project Name. 64 In the Select Parameter dialog. 66 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Name field. 65 Select the left drag handle on the label. 63 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Number field. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. Create a 4mm label style 69 On the Design Bar.62 Select the left drag handle on the label. select Client Name. click Label. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. 67 In the Select Parameter dialog. and click to specify the label location.

8 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. select Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. enter 4mm Label. 72 In the Type Properties dialog. 4 In the New Project dialog. 74 In the Type Properties dialog. 80 On the Design Bar. The titleblock graphics. 9 Click OK. click Duplicate. you add the titleblock that you created to a new project. 78 Place the cursor in the border area below the left side of the Sheet Number field. and click OK. 77 On the Options Bar. 5 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and labels are now complete. click New ➤ Project. 73 In the Name dialog.rfa. enter 4 for Text Size. and then adjust the width of the File Path field so that it is approximately equal to the width of the Sheet Number field. under Text. 79 In the Select Parameter dialog. select 4mm Label. click Browse. click Edit/New.70 On the Options Bar.rte. select File Path. Load the new titleblock family into a new project 1 On the File menu. select it. 71 In the Element Properties dialog. navigate to the location of Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. Add Project Path label 76 In the Type Selector. 7 In the Open dialog. 81 Save the new titleblock family with the name Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. click OK. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. and click OK. click Sheet.rfa file. 642 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Adding the Titleblock to a New Project In this exercise. 2 In the New Project dialog. 6 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. text. and click to specify the label location. 75 Click OK twice. click . click Left and Middle. click Training Files. click Load. click Modify. and click Open.

Enter In Progress for Project Status. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter January 1. 13 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. click Modify and select the titleblock. Enter Office Building for Project Name. 14 On the Settings menu. 15 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. click . 11 On the Options Bar. click Project Information. Enter 2005-01 for Project Number. 16 Click OK.Modify titleblock properties 10 On the Design Bar. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Name for Drawn By. Enter Jane Smith for Client Name. 2005 for Project Issue Date. under Other. Adding the Titleblock to a New Project | 643 .

and open Common\c_Pantheon. you create the dome roof with a revolved form. In the left pane of the Open dialog. NOTE This project was created using an imperial template and components. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. format the Area to use 2 decimal places. and add a dome roof and a concave floor with revolved forms as in-place families. click Orient ➤ Southeast. click Training Files.This completes the Creating a Titleblock Family lesson. Set the Length units to millimeters. To change the units of measurement to meters. You create an in-place family in your current project rather than in the Family Editor. 644 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Creating In-Place Families In this lesson. on the Settings menu. you start with an incomplete building information model of the Pantheon. In-place families interact with the building model according to their assigned family category. Open the existing Pantheon building model 1 On the View menu.rvt. Sketch the roof cross-section with a closed profile in an elevation view. and set the suffix to None. set the Area to Square meters. click Project Units. Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family In this exercise.

expand Views (all). you add a dome roof with oculus (circular opening) to the Pantheon building model. 7 On the Design Bar. click Set Work Plane. 9 Select the Center East/West reference plane as shown. and click OK. select Section: Wall Section . 8 In the Work Plane dialog. 2 In the Project Browser. Specify the Roofs family category 3 On the Modelling menu. click Create. 4 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Revolve. enter Dome for Name. Specify the dome roof revolved form parameters 6 On the Design Bar. Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family | 645 . select Pick a Plane.Next. 5 In the Name dialog. 10 In the Go To View dialog. expand Elevations. select Roofs for Family Category.Center. and double-click South. and click Open View. and click OK. and click OK.

13 Specify the bottom endpoint of the Center East/West reference plane for the start point of the axis. and then specify the top endpoint of the reference plane for the endpoint of the axis. click . Draw the axis of rotation for the dome roof revolved form 11 On the Design Bar. click . click Lines. 12 On the Options Bar. 16 Specify the intersection of the Upper Cornice horizontal reference plane and vertical axis as the circle center point. click Axis. 646 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Draw the lower face of the dome roof 14 On the Design Bar. 15 On the Options Bar.The center wall section view is displayed.

19 On the Options Bar. until it creates an intersection with the level 1 reference plane. and draw the five rim profile line segments in the shape of a reverse C as shown.17 Move the cursor out. Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family | 647 . The reference planes that display are guides for drawing the oculus rim profile. and select Chain. The circle is tangent to the interior wall face and the level 1 reference plane at the floor line. 21 Snap to reference plane intersections. 20 Specify the reference plane intersection for the start point of the rim profile as shown. Draw the oculus rim profile 18 Zoom in on the top of the circle. click .

25 Select the intersection of the circle and the lower left vertical line of the profile as shown. 23 On the Options Bar. select Delete Inner Segment. The circle is trimmed between the rim profile and the first split point. click . Draw the upper face of the dome roof 26 On the Design Bar. 24 Select a point on the circle to the right of the rim profile. 27 On the Options Bar.Split the circle 22 On the Tools toolbar. 648 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click . click Lines. 28 Specify the endpoint of the upper left rim profile line segment as the arc start point.

click Lines.29 Specify the top of the stairs in the wall section as the arc endpoint. and then select a point on the arc above the tangent point as the segment to keep. Draw two lines to close the dome roof profile 31 On the Design Bar. 32 On the Options Bar. click . 33 Draw a horizontal line from the arc endpoint to the interior edge of the wall. Trim the arc below the tangent point 34 On the Tools toolbar. 35 Select the interior face of the wall. Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family | 649 . and then draw a vertical line down the interior wall face to the lower dome roof face tangent point. 30 Specify a point on the arc approximately as shown. click and select Chain.

and click OK.The dome roof closed profile is now complete. 2 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. 39 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. click Finish Sketch. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. select Concrete . click Revolution Properties. Specify the concave floor revolved form parameters 1 On the Modelling menu. 40 On the Design Bar. click OK. 41 On the Design Bar. The dome roof in-place family is now complete. Specify lightweight concrete for the dome roof material 36 On the Design Bar. click Finish Family. 650 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . under Materials and Finishes. you create the concave floor slab for the Pantheon building model. click . 42 On the View toolbar.Cast-in-Place Lightweight Concrete for Name. 38 In the Materials dialog. select Floors for Family Category. click Create. Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family In this exercise. click for Material.

select Pick a Plane. 11 On the Options Bar. double-click South.3 In the Name dialog. enter Concave Floor for Name. and click OK. 12 Specify the bottom endpoint of the Center East/West reference plane for the start point of the axis. click . Draw the axis of rotation for the floor revolved form 10 On the Design Bar. 5 On the Design Bar. Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family | 651 . 7 In the Work Plane dialog. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Revolve. 4 In the Project Browser under Elevations. select Section: Wall Section . and click Open View. click Axis. 6 On the Design Bar. 8 Select the Center East/West reference plane as shown. and then specify the top endpoint of the reference plane for the endpoint of the axis. click Set Work Plane. and click OK. 9 In the Go To View dialog.Center.

17 Specify the intersection of the level 1 reference plane and the interior wall edge for the next point of the floor profile as shown. and specify the next point for the floor profile as shown. 16 Drag the cursor up 800 mm. NOTE You may need to zoom in closer to the intersection to select the first point. for the start point of the floor profile as shown. 14 On the Options Bar.O. 15 Specify the intersection of the T.Draw the concave floor profile 13 On the Design Bar. click Lines. Footing level line and the axis. click . and select Chain. 652 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

you start with the selection of a family template.O. Based on the template you select. Specify cobblestone for the concave floor material 20 On the Design Bar. 24 On the Design Bar.Exploring Family Templates Revit Architecture ships with a large number of family templates. double-click 3D Section View. 19 Specify the intersection of the of the T. annotation families. select Cobblestone for Name. click Finish Family. Appendix A . Footing level line and the interior wall edge for the next point of the floor profile.Exploring Family Templates | 653 . 26 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. click for Material. Appendix A . 21 In the Element Properties dialog. 22 In the Materials dialog. Revit Architecture differs between templates for model families. click OK. the new family has specific default contents. click Revolution Properties. This completes the Creating In-Place Families lesson.O. Footing level line and the axis for the last point of the floor profile. When you create a new family. and title blocks. click Finish Sketch. The concave floor closed profile is now complete. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. such as reference planes and sub-categories.18 Specify the intersection of the T. and click OK. 25 On the Design Bar.

Contains sample wall geometry. Category: None Baluster . Geometry can be locked to upper and lower reference level in elevation views.rft Baluster Description Family template for baluster families. The following table gives an overview of the templates for model families: Template Name *.Post Family template for posts of balusters. Wall based families can only be placed on wall faces in a project. 654 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .Model Family Templates The templates for model families are in Documents and Settings/All Users/Application Data/Autodesk/RAC 2008/Metric Templates. Category: Casework Casework Family template for casework. Category: None Casework wall based Family template for casework.

contains a reference line and left and right reference planes. Includes the filled region tool. includes the filled region tool. If a column intersects a wall. Geometry can use length parameter as “stretch” value. Geometry can be locked to upper and lower reference level in elevation views. Category: Detail Items Model Family Templates | 655 .Template Name *. the column inherits the material of the wall. Category: Columns Curtain Wall Panel Family template for filling elements of curtain walls.rft Description Column Family template to create columns. Category: Curtain Panels Detail Component line based 2D family. is used to create 2D detail components. Category: Detail Items Detail Component 2D family.

Curtain Wall Description Family template for door elements of curtain walls. 656 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Category: Electrical Equipment Electrical Fixture ceiling based Family template to create electrical equipment families. Category: Curtain Panels Door Family template for doors. Contains a sample ceiling geometry.Template Name *. Category: Doors Electrical Equipment Family template to create electrical equipment families. Ceiling based families can only be placed on any ceiling in a project.rft Door .

Template Name *. Category: Electrical Fixtures Electrical Fixture Family template to create electrical equipment families. Contains sample wall geometry. Category: Electrical Fixtures Entourage Family template to create entourage families. Wall based families can only be placed on wall faces in a project. Category: Furniture Model Family Templates | 657 . Category: Entourage Furniture System Family template to create furniture system families.rft Description Category: Electrical Fixtures Electrical Fixture wall based Family template to create electrical equipment families. Category: Furniture Systems Furniture Family template to create furniture families.

Contains sample floor geometry. Face based families can only be placed on any face in a project. Floor based families can only be placed on a floor face in a project. Category: Generic Models Generic Model floor based Family template to create any generic model geometry. Ceiling based families can only be placed on ceiling in a project. Contains a sample ceiling geometry.rft Generic Model ceiling based Description Family template to create any generic model geometry.Template Name *. Category: Generic Models Generic Model face based Family template to create any generic model geometry. Category: Generic Models 658 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

Category: Generic Models Generic Model roof based Family template to create any generic model geometry.Template Name *. Geometry can use length parameter as “stretch” value. Roof based families can only be placed on any roof face in a project. Contains a reference line and left and right reference planes. Contains sample roof geometry. Model Family Templates | 659 . Wall based families can only be placed on wall faces in a project. Category: Generic Models Generic Model wall based Family template to create any generic model geometry. Includes the filled region tool. Category: Generic Models Sample: Wall Opening with 2D graphics in plan view and a void extrusion. Contains sample wall geometry.rft Generic Model line based Description Family template to create any generic model geometry.

rft Generic Model Description Family template to create any generic model geometry. Category: Lighting Fixtures Lighting Fixture roof based Family template to create lighting fixtures. Contains sample floor geometry. The family has illumination properties for the rendering tools. Roof based families can only be placed on a roof face in a project. The family has illumination properties for the rendering tools. Category: Generic Model Lighting Fixture floor based Family template to create lighting fixtures. Contains sample roof geometry. Category: Lighting Fixtures 660 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .Template Name *. Floor based families can only be placed on a floor face in a project.

Contains sample wall geometry. Contains the same defaults as the Lighting Fixtures. Category: Lighting Fixtures Lighting Fixture Family template to create lighting fixtures. Category: Lighting Fixtures Model Family Templates | 661 . Category: Lighting Fixtures Linear Lighting Fixture floor based. The family has illumination properties for the rendering tools. The family has illumination properties for the rendering tools. Linear Lighting Fixture Family templates to create linear lighting fixtures. Contains sample ceiling geometry. Linear Lighting Fixture roof based. The family has illumination properties for the rendering tools. The family has illumination properties for the rendering tools.rft Lighting Fixture ceiling based Description Family template to create lighting fixtures.Template Name *. Category: Lighting Fixtures Lighting Fixture wall based Family template to create lighting fixtures. Wall based families can only be placed on a wall face in a project. Linear Lighting Fixture ceiling based. Linear Lighting Fixture wall based. Ceiling based families can only be placed on a ceiling face in a project.

slabs. gross surface area. Contains sample wall geometry. Masses can report gross volume. and roofs Massing families can also be generating floor area faces. Wall based families can only be placed on wall faces in a project. Contains sample ceiling geometry. Category: Mechanical Equipment 662 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Category: Mechanical Equipment Mechanical Equipment wall based Family template to create mechanical equipment families. Ceiling based families can only be placed on ceiling faces in a project. Category: Mass Sample: Mass families from the content library. and gross floor areas.Template Name *. Faces of masses can be used to create other model elements like walls.rft Mass Description Family template to create massing families. Mechanical Equipment ceiling based Family template to create mechanical equipment families.

Category: Plumbing Fixtures Plumbing Fixture Family template to create plumbing fixture families. Category: Parking Planting Family template to create planting families. Wall based families can only be placed on wall faces in a project. Category: Plumbing Fixtures Model Family Templates | 663 . Category: Planting Plumbing Fixture wall based Family template to create plumbing fixture families.rft Mechanical Equipment Description Family template to create mechanical equipment families. Contains sample wall geometry.Template Name *. Category: Mechanical Equipment Parking Family template to create parking families.

mullion. Profile usage can be explicitly assigned. Category: Profiles. Families based on this template can be used in a project with the tools in the Modelling menu ➤ Host Sweeps. A profile is only used in combination with system families.rft Profile Description Family template to create 2D profiles. A profile is only used in combination with system families. Profile usage can be explicitly assigned. Profile-Rail Family template to create 2D profiles for rails. Category: Profiles. Category: Profiles. Category: Profiles.Template Name *. 664 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . wall sweep) can be explicitly assigned under Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. A profile is only used in combination with system families. Contains default reference planes Rail Centerline and Rail Top. Profile-Hosted Family template to create 2D profiles for hosts. Profile-Reveal Family template to create 2D profiles for wall sweeps and wall reveals. gutter. A profile is only used in combination with system families. slab edge. Profile usage (fascia.

Category: Entourage Site Family template to create Site families. Contains sample wall geometry. RPC Family Family template for models using the Real People Collection product family.Template Name *. Category: Specialty Equipment Model Family Templates | 665 . Category: Site Speciality Equipment wall based Family template to create specialty equipment families. Wall based families can only be placed on wall faces in a project. Category: Profiles. Category: Specialty Equipment Speciality Equipment Family template to create specialty equipment families. The family has an rpc file link included. A profile is used only in combination with system families.rft Profile-Stair Nosing Description Family template to create 2D profiles for stair nosing.

Spot Lighting Fixture ceiling based. The family has illumination and spot properties for the rendering tools. such as beams and braces. Spot Lighting Fixture Structural Column Description Family templates to create spot lighting fixtures. Under Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. 666 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Under Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters.rft Spot Lighting Fixture floor based. it moves its position if the base of the structural column is moved. specific setting for symbolic representation and the structural material type can be defined. Geometry can be locked to upper and lower reference level in elevation views. Category: Structural Columns Structural Foundation Family templates to create structural foundation families.Template Name *. If a structural foundation family is placed below a column. the column cuts out the wall. The family templates contain specific reference planes for members and stick symbols. A structural column can be defined as a room-bounding element if the structural material type is set to concrete or precast concrete. If a structural column intersects a wall. Beams can be placed on structural columns. Contains the same defaults as the Lighting Fixtures. specific settings for symbolic representation and the structural material type can be defined. Category: Structural Foundations Structural Framing . Category: Lighting Fixtures Family template to create structural columns. Spot Lighting Fixture wall based.Beams and Braces Family template to create structural framing families. Spot Lighting Fixture roof based.

Category: Structural Framing Window . Category: Curtain Panels Window with trim Family template for windows including trim on the exterior side.Template Name *.Curtain Wall Family template for window elements of curtain walls.Complex and Trusses Family template to create structural framing families.rft Description Category: Structural Framing Structural Framing . such as trusses. Category: Windows Model Family Templates | 667 .

Category: Callouts Family template for door tags.Template Name *. Category: Multi-Category Tags Family template for room tags. Category: Windows Annotation Family Templates The templates for annotation families are in Documents and Settings/All Users/Application Data/Autodesk/RAC 2008/Metric Templates/Annotation. The category can be set under Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. Category: Section Marks Family template to define the symbol for spot elevations. text. Category: Generic Model Tags Family template for the grid heads. Category: Room Tags Family template for section heads.0mm has a size of 2. The intersection of 2 reference planes defines the insertion point of a tag. Annotation families are scale-dependent. Category: Generic Annotation Family template for tags. Symbol size. A MultiCategory tag needs a shared parameter as filter parameter. Category: Door Tags Family template for generic annotations. and parameter text size are always related to the current scale of the View Control Bar. click Tag ➤ Multi-Category to add a tag. text size. On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Category: Level Heads Family template for Multi-Category tags. Category: Grid Heads Family template for level heads. Annotation families consist mainly of lines.rft Window Description Family template for windows.0mm on a plotted sheet. filled regions. the same shared parameter is added to a project as a project parameter and can be used to filter selected elements to be tagged with the MultiCategory tag. In the family the intersection of the horizontal and right reference planes define connection location with the system section line.rft Callout Head Door Tag Generic Annotation Description Family template for the tag of a callout. The following table gives an overview of the templates for annotation families: Template Name *. Thus. and parameters. parameter text created with a text height of 2. Category: Spot Elevation Symbols Generic Tag Grid Head Level Head Multi-Category Tag Room Tag Section Head Spot Elevation Symbol 668 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . The category can be set under Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters.

rft ■ B .rft Titleblock Family Templates | 669 .5.rft ■ D . Category: View Titles Family template for window tags. Imperial ■ A . the title block can be assigned to a sheet using View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet.rft Metric ■ A0 metric. In a project. all loaded title block families are listed for selection.Template Name *.rft ■ C .rft ■ A1 metric.rft ■ A4 metric. In the Select a Titleblock dialog.24 x 18.rft ■ A2 metric. text.17 x 11. and parameters.rft View Title Window Tag Description Family template to define view title of a view in a sheet. Title block families consist mainly of lines for the plan border.42 x 30. The following table gives an overview of the templates for title block families: Template Name Comments Family templates for title blocks using common standard sizes. filled regions.rft ■ E1 . Category: Window Tags Titleblock Family Templates The templates for titleblock families are in Documents and Settings/All Users/Application Data/Autodesk/RAC 2008/Metric Templates/Titleblocks.rft ■ New Site Metric. You import images to your title block.rft ■ A3 metric.36 x 24.11 x 8.

670 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

This type of component uses a broad spectrum of design techniques within the Family Editor. you will understand the process. you learn specific techniques and best practices that you can apply broadly when creating other families in Revit Architecture 2008. In this case. you learn the process and methodology of creating a new family.Parametric Component Design Techniques 17 In this tutorial. methodology. formula-based parameters. and detail level controls. not specifically how to make a floor truss. you create a new parametric component within the Family Editor. At the end of this tutorial. the length of the trimmable truss determines the size and grade of the truss chords. In exercises that become increasingly complex. 671 . assigned subcatecories. The parametric component that you design in this tutorial is an open web wood floor truss. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you the proper approach to parametric component creation. and the specific techniques for creating a parametric component. During this tutorial. The truss also has multiple types. In the center of the truss is a mechanical service clearance to accommodate HVAC systems.

you select the best available template with which to begin the new structural beam family. it is not the best solution. 2 What additional design requirements affect the design plan for this beam family? Additional design requirements ■ ■ ■ The truss should automatically adjust depth as the length changes. you should avoid over-designing the component. Your assignment is to create a truss that adapts parametrically to changes in the building design. The design requirements dictate how simple or complex a family must be. and also works intuitively with them. a 2x3 truss and a 2x4 truss. Two types should be created. In this case. Determining Component Needs In this exercise. the beam design must be advanced in order to have the flexibility that the specs require. Decide component type and design requirements 1 What type of component are you designing? In this case. For every complexity added to a family. If the design requirements can be met with a simple design. Take this into consideration during your design planning. For training purposes. Using the new family within a project 3 How will you use the family within a project? 672 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques .Planning a Parametric Component Family Creating a new parametric component family is no different than any other design process. In this lesson. imagine that your firm specializes in light commercial and residential design. Although this solution is possible. This decision dictates which family template you begin with. beams. Because this component has to interact closely with other structural components. If the component did not have to interact so closely with other structural components. In the next exercise. planning ahead is one of the most important steps. it is an open-joist wood floor truss. Knowing why you are creating a particular family and what you need it to do will drive the specific design process. It should also be an available option within a beam system. you determine the requirements of the new component. In this case. there is a computing performance cost that must be paid within the project. A rectangular mechanical clearance opening must be centered within the beam. then you should design only what is needed to satisfy the requirements. this must be a structural beam component. a generic floor-based component might work. NOTE When creating a new family. and structural walls. In addition. you accomplish two main tasks: you determine the component needs and select the family template that is suited to those needs. the design specification requires that the floor truss snaps to columns. the component should use the point-to-point insertion method with the joist web members adjusting parametrically.

Selecting the Family Template | 673 . especially if you are going to be nesting subcomponents that may require separate scheduling. Depending on the family you are designing. This critical decision reduces the quantity of template options. ■ What materials remain constant throughout a project? The chord and web material will always be wood. would require Instance or Type parameters. ■ What types are most commonly used? In this training case. You have completed the planning stage for the new family.For instance: ■ What materials need the most control? These materials. 4 Continue with the next exercise. you determined that the component type is a structural beam. the planning stage and questions may differ. the means by which you gather the information you require within the schedule needs to be built into the component. “Selecting the Family Template” on page 673. In the previous exercise. These materials can be applied using Object Styles. Selecting the Family Template In this exercise. such as wood type. only the 2x3 and 2x4 trusses with wood web members are required. you determine which family template provides the best starting point for the new beam family. ■ How will the component need to be scheduled? This is an important question. In addition.

However.Beams and Braces. and open Metric\Templates. Select it so that the preview displays. There are two structural framing templates provided. you will access them from the Training Files folder. The New dialog opens to the templates folder that is specified in your Settings ➤ Options dialog. scroll to the structural framing templates. 6 In the New dialog. Usually. Like most generic family templates.rft. the template name often includes information how the component would be used with a project. Notice that most of the template names include the component type. for example: wall based or floor based.rft 674 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . click Training Files. NOTE Do not double-click the template or open it. ■ Metric Structural Framing . notice the preview. You should be in the Metric Templates folder. this is where you access family templates. 2 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 4 Scroll through the various template options.Review the template options 1 Close any open projects or families. On the right side of the New dialog. it provides two intersecting reference planes: Center (left/right) and Center (front/back). to ensure you are using the templates referenced in this tutorial. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. In addition. 5 Select Metric Generic Model floor based.

rft.Beams and Braces. spacing. ■ Metric Structural Framing . Floor Plan: Ref. and display functions required by structural beams. Notice this template offers three vertical planes on each side of the center (left/right) reference plane. Level.rft to open it. These planes are designed specifically to accommodate point-to-point beam insertion and the special snapping and display requirements of beam components. it is not the best starting point for the beam family. 8 Select Metric Structural Framing . Level Selecting the Family Template | 675 .rft This template is designed for complex framing components and trusses.Complex and Trusses.rft and notice the preview.This template is design specifically to accommodate point-to-point insertion and the specific snapping.Complex and Trusses. Although the template name suggests this is the appropriate template. This template is the best starting point for the new family. Open the family template 9 Double-click Metric Structural Framing . Floor Plan: Ref. It provides two intersecting reference planes: Center (left/right) and Center (front/back). and notice the preview. Because of its simplicity. it is not designed to create a component capable of point-to-point insertion. 10 Maximize the view. 7 Select Metric Structural Framing .Beams and Braces.

When a beam family based on this template is added to a project. double-click Ref. 11 In the Project Browser. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you started in the previous exercise. 2 Place the cursor over the leftmost vertical reference plane until the tooltip displays the name of the plane. Notice that the beam extrusion is centered on the level line. you can see the rectangular beam extrusion and a symbolic line. Like many templates. the top of the beam extrusion is aligned to the associated level of the plan view. using reference planes and lines is considered more reliable and is therefore a best practice. and dimensions that provide a skeleton for the solid geometry. Reference Plane: Left. lines. under Floor Plans. As you add solid geometry later in the tutorial. Review existing reference planes 1 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. creating a skeleton to build upon is the foundation of a new component family. 12 In the Project Browser. the geometry supplied can be used or discarded as needed. you add the reference planes. This beam extrusion is supplied within the template as a starting point. double-click Front. “Creating the Component Skeleton” on page 676. it is not necessary to create a skeleton of reference planes or lines and then align and lock the solid geometry to it. Dimensioning the solid geometry directly also works. double-click View 1.In this view. 13 Proceed to the next lesson. you snap and lock the solid geometry to these reference planes and lines. under Elevations. These reference planes act as part of the skeleton to which the solid geometry will align and lock. TIP The name also displays on the Status Bar. Creating the Component Skeleton In this lesson. Therefore. Level. NOTE When creating or modifying a family. 676 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Adding Reference Planes In this exercise. you add reference planes to the beam design. however.

■ Stick Symbol Left and Stick Symbol Right: Adding Reference Planes | 677 . In the image below. The reference planes and their respective explanations are listed below. ■ Left and Right: These two planes mark the points where the beam intersects with other columns. two steel columns and a steel beam have been added to a project. In the project plan view image below. NOTE The reference planes shown in the project image below were added as a training reference.3 Repeat this step for the other two vertical planes on the left side. The two arrows point to the snap points that the left and right reference planes refer to. they do not display when the family is loaded into a project. The six reference planes shown in the project below were added as a training reference. The reference planes in this template are designed to accommodate the point-to-point insertion of a beam component. notice the location of the beam extents. ■ Member Left and Member Right: These two planes refer to the left and right extent of the beam solid geometry when displayed in a medium or fine display view of a project. Reference planes that display within a family file do not display within a project.

In a later exercise. Delete existing solid geometry 4 Select the rectangular beam extrusion. 5 On the Edit Toolbar. You will use these two reference planes to control the beam width and keep it centered on the reference plane: Center (Front/Back). click Ref Plane. NOTE Be careful not to select the symbolic line. Add new reference planes 6 On the Design Bar. you add the solid geometry for the truss as a sweep.These two planes refer to the extents of the stick symbol when it is loaded into a project and the plan view display setting is coarse. 8 Add a reference plane approximately 50 mm below the horizontal reference plane: Center (Front/Back). it is important to be familiar with the template so you do not create duplicate or conflicting planes. Before adding new reference planes. Each family template has a different set of reference planes established within it. 7 Add a reference plane approximately 50 mm above the horizontal reference plane: Center (Front/Back). 678 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . click .

and select the Level: Ref. 11 Add a reference plane approximately 150 mm below the Level: Ref. 15 Place the cursor over the top horizontal reference plane. TIP You can also use the mirror tool to accomplish this task. click Ref Plane. under Elevations. 12 Add a reference plane approximately 150 mm above the Level: Ref. When a copy of the reference plane displays below it. Adding Reference Planes | 679 . The next four reference planes that you add mark the thickness of the truss chords. 13 On the Design Bar. TIP You can control the direction of the offset by moving the cursor slightly to either side of the line you intend to pick. and specify an Offset of 38 mm. select the lower horizontal reference plane. double-click Front. click Ref Plane. Level. This beam requires additional reference planes to complete the truss skeleton. click on the Edit toolbar. 10 On the Design Bar. planes to control beam depth 9 In the Project Browser. 14 On the Options Bar. These two reference planes mark the top and bottom extents of the beam.Add ref. Level. To do this. click . click to place it. Level as the mirror axis.

16 Place the cursor over the lower horizontal reference plane and when a copy of the reference plane displays above it. 17 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Member Left. 680 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 19 On the Options Bar. You have completed the reference planes that make up the skeleton of the chords. you must add four additional reference planes to accommodate the center chase. click to place it as shown. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the right of it. 18 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Member Right. Before you move on to the next exercise. specify an Offset of 200 mm. click to place it as shown. click to place it as shown. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the left of it.

21 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right). 24 In the Project Browser. specify an Offset of 238 mm. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the left of it. 23 Use the Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right) to add reference planes to the left and right of it as shown below. 22 On the Options Bar. click to place it as shown. cleaning up some of the extents would make the view easier. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the right of it. click to place it as shown. under Floor Plans. Adding Reference Planes | 681 . Level.20 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right). which you do in the next exercise. Although there is nothing technically incorrect regarding the reference planes in this view. double-click Ref. Notice the reference planes that you added in the elevation view.

Make sure you remember where you saved it. navigate to the folder of your choice. In the following exercise. click Modify.25 On the Design Bar. and click Save. 26 Starting with one of the reference planes you added to define the center chase. you can make sure the new family adapts to changes in geometry as expected before adding solid geometry to it. you add some of the dimensions and constraints that control how the open web floor truss adapts to changes in its geometry. enter Wood Floor Truss for File name. you add dimensions and constraints to the to the skeleton. Repeat this step for the remaining extents so that your plan view resembles the image below. 27 Click File menu ➤ Save. You have finished creating the initial skeleton of the open web wood floor truss. By applying dimensions and constraints directly to the skeleton of the family. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. 682 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Adding Dimensions and Constraints In this exercise. select the reference plane and adjust the extents similar to the image below. NOTE You use this family for the remainder of this tutorial. 28 In the Save As dialog. “Adding Dimensions and Constraints” on page 682.

6 On the Design Bar. Adding Dimensions and Constraints | 683 . After adding the dimension. Dimension chord width 1 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. This ensures that changes to the chord width are distributed equally across the center reference plane. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. 2 On the Options Bar. 3 Select each of the horizontal reference planes and place the dimension to the left as shown. Wood Floor Truss. It allows you to dimension between parallel lines. click Modify. separate the overriding values by dragging the value controls as shown. 4 On the Design Bar. and click the EQ symbol when it displays. click . click Dimension. TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings during this procedure. This tool is the aligned dimension tool.Dataset Continue to use the dataset.rfa. 5 Select the dimension you added in the previous step.

10 Select the upper horizontal reference plane. and click the EQ symbol to apply the equality constraint.7 Add a dimension referring to the upper horizontal reference plane and the lower horizontal reference plane. double-click Front. 11 Add a dimension referring to the upper horizontal reference plane and the lower horizontal reference plane and move it to the left of the equality constrained dimension you added previously. Add the depth dimension and equality constraint 8 In the Project Browser. NOTE The center horizontal reference plane overlaps the level line: Ref. Place the dimension as shown. 684 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . and the lower horizontal reference plane. Level. the Center reference plane. under Elevations. click Dimension. You may need to use the TAB key to toggle the selection to the reference plane. place the dimension to the left as shown. 9 On the Design Bar.

add two dimensions as shown. These dimensions refer to the chord thickness. Adding Dimensions and Constraints | 685 . 15 Add four dimensions as shown. These dimensions refer to the chord thickness of the vertical members and the members that border the center chase.Dimension and constrain the center chase width 12 Add a dimension referring to the three vertical reference planes in the center of the model. Dimension chord thickness 14 On the right side of the model. and place it below the dimension you added previously. 13 Add a dimension referring to the reference planes to the left and right of the Center (Left/Right) reference plane. place the dimension under the lines as shown and click the EQ symbol to apply the equality constraint.

that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. If the component has material that varies per component. 686 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . When you label a dimension in the Family Editor. you will add additional reference planes. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating New Length Parameters In this exercise.rfa. it is important to decide how much control over the component will be required after the component is loaded into a project. Wood Floor Truss. consider making it an instance parameter. The parameters that you create when designing a family are the same parameters used within a project to control the instance and type parameters of that family. These parameters are the key to providing flexibility within a project. Throughout the tutorial. Level.You have finished adding the dimensions and constraints that control how the truss skeleton adapts to changes. you create new length parameters that control the basic dimensions of the floor truss. There are many types of parameters and various ways to create them. In this exercise. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. “Creating New Length Parameters” on page 686. dimensions. You should lean towards simplicity whenever possible. you label the dimensions to create instance and type parameters. consider making it a type parameter. 2 Select the dimension that refers to the width of the chord as shown. consider making it a type parameter. they allow you to “flex” the model in order to test your design. ■ Dataset Continue to use the dataset. double-click Ref. Things to consider when deciding “instance” or “type:” ■ ■ ■ If the component comes in standard sizes that must be maintained. Create the chord width parameter 1 In the Project Browser. In the next exercise. If the component is something that is cut or otherwise extremely flexible. consider making the material parameter an instance parameter. In addition. you label the dimensions that you added in the previous exercise. and constraints as needed. You choose whether to make it an instance or type parameter. it becomes a parameter. If the parameter controls something that usually remains constant by its nature. When you design a new family. under Floor Plans.

Under Parameter Data. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. 7 On the Options Bar. under Elevations. This indicates whether the parameter is a type or instance parameter. enter Depth for Name. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under.3 On the Options Bar. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog. Under Parameter Data. select Add parameter for Label. Click OK. 6 Select the dimension on the left that refers to the depth of the truss. Select Type. Creating New Length Parameters | 687 . Select Type. double-click Front. select Family parameter. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. ■ Click OK. select Add parameter for Label. Create truss depth parameter 5 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog. select Family parameter. enter Chord Width for Name.

Create center chase width parameter
9 Select the dimension that refers to the width of the center chase interior.

10 On the Options Bar, select Add parameter for Label. 11 In the Parameter Properties dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Parameter Type, select Family parameter. Under Parameter Data, enter Center Chase Width for Name. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. Select Type. Click OK.

Create chord thickness parameter
12 On the right side of the model, select the dimension that refers to the thickness of the lower horizontal truss chord as shown.

13 On the Options Bar, select Add parameter for Label. 14 In the Parameter Properties dialog, specify the following:

Under Parameter Type, select Family parameter.

688 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

■ ■ ■ ■

Under Parameter Data, enter Chord Thickness for Name. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. Select Type. Click OK.

TIP You may need to drag the text label downward as shown.

Apply chord thickness label to other dimensions
15 On the right side of the model, select the dimension that refers to the thickness of the upper horizontal truss chord. 16 On the Options Bar, select Chord Thickness for Label.

17 Apply the Chord Thickness label to the vertical chords and the vertical members on the left and right side of the center chase as shown.

Creating New Length Parameters | 689

18 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. In the Family Types dialog, notice the labelled dimensions display under the list of parameters and under the group, Dimensions. When you load this family into a project, these parameters will be available within the Type Properties dialog for the beam. 19 Click Cancel. 20 On the File menu, click Save. 21 Proceed to the next exercise, “Flexing the Component Model” on page 690.

Flexing the Component Model
One of the most important steps in the process of creating a new parametric component is the flexing of the model. Flexing the model means to change parameter values, thus forcing the model to adapt to the changes. This is not limited to length parameters. If you add a new material parameter, you should also test it to make sure it works as expected. You should flex the model after any major change to the design.

You should flex a new family after:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Adding or modifying an element. Adding or modifying a parameter. Adding a new constraint. Nesting a component. Adding or modifying a parameter formula.

When you flex a family, you should always do it from the Family Types dialog, rather than by manually stretching or manipulating the objects within the family. When you change a parameter value and apply the change, this is the most accurate way of testing how the family will behave within a project.

690 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

In this exercise, you flex the model to test the various length parameters that you added in the previous exercise. Even though you have yet to add any model geometry to the family, it is important to verify that the reference lines adjust to changes as constraints are maintained. After you verify this, you can add the model geometry to the skeleton and be relatively certain that it will also flex as expected. Dataset Continue to use the dataset, Wood Floor Truss.rfa, that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.

Preparing the family for flexing
1 When flexing the model, you need to be able to see the model within the drawing area and also apply new values within the Family Types dialog:

Maximize the Revit window and adjust the zoom settings so the model is in one corner of the drawing area. When you open the Family Types dialog, you can drag it to the opposing corner. or

Reduce the Revit window and keep the model centered in the drawing area. When you open the Family Types dialog, you can drag it off the Revit window as shown.

Adjust your display using one of the two methods before opening the Family Types dialog. 2 On the Design Bar, click Family Types, and drag the dialog so that you can view the model.

Flex the truss depth
3 In the Family Types dialog, under Dimensions, enter 600 mm for Depth, and click Apply. Notice the depth of the truss adapts to the change in dimension value. Also notice the equality constraint spreads the additional depth evenly above and below the Ref. Level. In addition, notice that the reference planes marking the chord thickness adapted to the change in depth while maintaining their specified value. Verifying that the entire model adapts to changes and making sure nothing “breaks” is the essence of flexing.

Flexing the Component Model | 691

4 Enter 450 mm for Depth, 80 mm for Chord Thickness, 800 mm for Center Chase Width, and click Apply. Notice that the model adapts to all of the changes.

Reset parameters
5 In the Family Types dialog, reset the parameters back to their original values:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Enter 300 mm for Depth. Enter 38 mm for Chord Thickness. Enter 400 mm for Center Chase Width. Click Apply. Click OK.

When working within the Family Editor, you should always flex the design after you add new elements or modify the existing design in any way. 6 On the File menu, click Save. 7 Proceed to the next lesson, “Adding Solid Geometry” on page 693.

692 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Adding Solid Geometry
In this lesson, you add the solid geometry using extrusions for the chords and trimmable plywood ends. After creating the extrusions, you constrain them using a combination of locked alignments and labelled dimensions. After flexing the design, you load the truss into a project to verify that it works as designed.

Creating Solid Extrusions
In this exercise, you create the top and bottom chords of the truss. After adding the chords, you align and lock their position. Dataset Continue to use the dataset, Wood Floor Truss.rfa, that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.

Add chord extrusions
1 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Left. 2 Zoom in around the center of the truss design.

3 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 4 In the Work Plane dialog, click Name, select Reference Plane: Member Left, and click OK. 5 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 6 On the Options Bar, click , and select Lock.

7 Select the four reference planes that border the top chord as shown.

Adding Solid Geometry | 693

Notice that the sketch lines are automatically locked to the reference planes. 8 On the Tools toolbar, click .

When using the Trim tool, click the part of the line you want to keep. 9 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the top chord sketch as shown.

10 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 11 On the Options Bar, click , and verify that Lock is selected.

12 Select the four reference planes that border the bottom chord as shown. NOTE A warning dialog displays notifying you that there are overlapping lines. You can ignore this warning because after you finish trimming, the lines will no longer overlap.

13 On the Tools toolbar, click

.

14 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the bottom chord sketch as shown.

694 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

15 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 16 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click View 1. Notice the chord extrusions and the symbolic line. The chords need to be aligned and locked to the correct reference planes in order for them to flex with changes in the geometry.

17 On the File menu, click Save. 18 Proceed to the next exercise, “Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry” on page 695.

Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry
In this exercise, you add constraints to the chord extrusions and then flex the family to verify that it works as designed. Dataset Continue to use the dataset, Wood Floor Truss.rfa, that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.

Constrain the extrusion ends
1 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Front. 2 Enter SD; this is the keyboard shortcut for Shading with Edges. This makes the chord extrusions more visible within the view. 3 Select the chord extrusions.

4 Drag the right arrow control to the right until it snaps to the reference plane: Member Right, as shown. Click the lock symbol to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane.

Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry | 695

5 Drag the left arrow control to the right until it snaps to the reference plane: Member Left, as shown. Click the lock symbol to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane.

Flex the design
6 Prepare the view for flexing in the same way you did during the flexing exercise. You’ll want to set up your screen so you can see the model truss while the Family Types dialog is open. On the Design Bar, click Family Types.

7 In the Family Types dialog, enter 6000 for Length, and click Apply. Notice that the extrusions did not move or change their length. This is because the length dimension references the extreme left and right reference planes, not the member right or member left reference planes. Therefore, you must add a new constraint before flexing the length. 8 In the Family Types dialog, enter 3000 for Length, click Apply, and click OK.

Add a new dimension and constraint
9 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 10 Add a dimension between the reference plane: Left and the reference plane: Member Left as shown. Click the lock symbol to lock the dimension value.

696 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

11 Add a dimension between the reference plane: Right and the reference plane: Member Right as shown. Click the lock symbol to lock the dimension value.

In this particular case, adding this constraint to the model has no impact on how it works within a project. This is a two-point placement beam family that uses the member left and member right reference planes as the determining extents of this component. Later in this lesson, you load this family into a project to test how it works within a project environment.

Flex the length
12 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 13 In the Family Types dialog, enter 6000 for Length, and click Apply. Notice that the extrusions adjusted to the change in length. This tells you that the constraints on the extrusion ends are working.

TIP If one of the extrusion ends did not adjust as expected, use the Align tool and add the constraint. Afterwards, flex the model once again to make sure the fix works as expected. 14 Click OK.

Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry | 697

In a later exercise, you add the web members. Therefore, you need a truss long enough to add web arrays and do not need to return the truss back to its original length value.

Flex the chord width, depth, and thickness
15 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click View 1. 16 Enter SD for Shading with Edges.

17 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 18 In the Family Types dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■

Enter 600mm for Depth. Enter 200mm for Chord Width. Enter 76mm for Chord Thickness. TIP When flexing, it is important to remember the original values so you can reset them afterwards. Therefore, try picking a method, such as doubling, that allows you to easily return to the original values.

Click Apply.

The chords should adjust to each of the new values. 19 Specify the beam values shown below:
■ ■ ■ ■

Enter 286mm for Depth. Enter 89mm for Chord Width. Enter 38mm for Chord Thickness. Click Apply, and click OK.

20 On the File menu, click Save. 21 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating Additional Solid Geometry” on page 698.

Creating Additional Solid Geometry
In this exercise, you add the extrusions for the truss ends and the center chase.

Dataset

698 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Continue to use the dataset, Wood Floor Truss.rfa, that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.

Add the center chase extrusions
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Ref. Level. 2 Zoom in on the center of the truss and select the model line that represents the beam stick symbol. 3 On the View Control Bar, click the Hide/Isolate control, and click Hide Element. This will make it easier to sketch the center chase extrusions. 4 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 5 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 6 On the Options Bar, click , and verify that Lock is selected.

7 Select the four reference planes that border the left, vertical member of the center chase as shown.

Notice that the sketch lines are automatically locked to the reference planes. 8 On the Tools toolbar, click .

9 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the left, vertical member of the center chase sketch as shown.

10 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 11 On the Options Bar, click , and verify that Lock is selected.

12 Select the four reference planes that border the right, vertical member of the center chase as shown.

Creating Additional Solid Geometry | 699

NOTE A warning dialog displays notifying you that there are overlapping lines. You can ignore this warning because after you finish trimming, the lines will no longer overlap.

13 On the Tools toolbar, click

.

14 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to complete the center chase sketch as shown.

15 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 16 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Front. 17 Zoom in on the center chase.

Align and lock the new extrusions
18 On the Tools menu, click Align. This next process is very important. The ends of the chase extrusions must be aligned and locked to the horizontal reference planes coincident with the interior edges of the chords. Although you can align and lock extrusion to extrusion, it is considered a best practice to align and lock to reference planes. 19 For the align-to reference, select the reference line on the top of the lower chord as shown. You may need to press TAB to toggle the selection options.

700 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

20 Click the bottom edge of one of the chase extrusions, and after the alignment, click the lock symbol to lock the alignment.

21 Align the top edge of the chase extrusions with the reference line coincident with the lower edge of the upper chord, and lock the alignment as shown.

22 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Flex the center chase
23 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 24 In the Family Types dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■

Enter 486mm for Depth. Enter 800mm for Center Chase Width. Click Apply.

The truss should adapt to all the changes. If it does not, redo any problematic alignments and constraints. 25 In the Family Types dialog, reset the values as follows:
■ ■ ■

Enter 286mm for Depth. Enter 400mm for Center Chase Width. Click Apply, and click OK.

Clean up the view
26 Zoom to Fit.

Creating Additional Solid Geometry | 701

27 Clean up the view by moving the dimensions off to the side as shown. This will make subsequent work much easier.

Add the truss end extrusions
28 Select the Chord Thickness dimension in the lower-left corner as shown.

29 On the Options Bar, select Add Parameter for Label. 30 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Enter Trimmable End Length for Name. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. Select Instance. Click OK.

31 Select the Chord Thickness dimension in the lower-right corner of the view. 32 On the Options Bar, select Trimmable End Length for Label. 33 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 34 In the Family Types dialog, under Dimensions, enter 300mm for Trimmable End Length, click Apply, and click OK.

Sketch the right end extrusion
35 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Right. 36 Zoom around the truss elements. 37 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 38 In the Work Plane dialog, select Reference Plane: Member Right for Name, and click OK. 39 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 40 On the Options Bar, click , and verify that Lock is selected.

702 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

41 On the upper chord, select the lower horizontal reference plane; on the lower chord, select the upper horizontal reference plane. These two lines represent the upper and lower boundary of the sketch.

42 On the Options Bar, enter19mm for Offset. 43 Select the Center (Front/Back) reference plane twice to add a sketch line to each side as shown.

44 On the Tools toolbar, click

.

45 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to complete the end sketch as shown.

Creating Additional Solid Geometry | 703

46 On the Design Bar, click Extrusion Properties. 47 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, verify that 300mm is specified for the Extrusion End value, and click OK. 48 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Sketch the left end extrusion
49 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Left. 50 Zoom around the truss elements. 51 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 52 In the Work Plane dialog, select Reference Plane: Member Left for Name, and click OK. 53 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 54 On the Options Bar, click , and verify that Lock is selected.

55 On the upper chord, select the lower horizontal reference plane; on the lower chord, select the upper horizontal reference plane. These two lines represent the upper and lower boundary of the sketch. 56 On the Options Bar, enter 19mm for Offset. 57 Select the Center (Front/Back) reference plane twice to add a sketch line to each side as shown.

704 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

58 On the Tools toolbar, click

.

59 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to complete the end sketch as shown.

60 On the Design Bar, click Extrusion Properties. 61 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, specify -300mm for the Extrusion End value, and click OK. NOTE This extrusion value must be negative in order to push the extrusion towards the center of the truss. 62 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Add alignment constraints
63 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Front.

Although the truss ends line up with the reference planes controlling the length of the trimmable ends, they are not aligned and locked to those reference planes and would not pass a flex test. 64 Zoom in on the left end of the truss. 65 On the Tools menu, click Align. 66 Select the Member Left reference plane as the align-to point.

67 Select the left edge of the left end extrusion, and lock the alignment.

Creating Additional Solid Geometry | 705

68 Select the reference plane coincident with the right edge of the left end extrusion; this is the align-to point. 69 Select the right edge of the left end extrusion, and lock the alignment.

70 Repeat the previous five steps for the right end of the truss. Make adjustments to account for the right side. TIP When you finish the alignments, if you select the end extrusion, a lock displays on each side indicating the constraints to the reference planes. 71 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Flex the design
72 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 73 In the Family Types dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■

Enter 486mm for Depth. Enter 600mm for Trimmable End Length. Click Apply.

The truss should adapt to all the changes. If it does not, fix any problematic alignments and constraints. 74 In the Family Types dialog, reset the values as follows:
■ ■ ■

Enter 286mm for Depth. Enter 300mm for Trimmable End Length. Click Apply, and click OK.

75 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click View 1.

76 Save the Family. A new dataset is provided for you beginning with the next lesson. It is identical to the truss you have been designing. If you are comfortable with your design, you can continue using it in the next lesson. If you have experienced any errors or have deviated from the exercises in any way, you should close the file and begin with a fresh dataset. 77 Proceed to the next lesson, “Testing the Family in a Project” on page 707.

706 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Testing the Family in a Project
In this lesson, you load the family into a project to test it in a real-world environment. After you load it into the project, you add several beam instances and then modify the shape of the foundation to see how the beams adapt.

Loading a Family into a Project
In this exercise, you load the truss family into a project that consists of foundation walls, a sill, and a rim joist. NOTE Close any open families or projects. The truss family that you use in this lesson is identical to the truss you have created in the previous exercises. Although you could continue using the previous family, it is recommended that you use the new family in order to ensure consistency. Datasets

Open the truss family
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\m_Wood Floor Truss_1.rfa.

Open the project file

Click File menu ➤ Open.

Testing the Family in a Project | 707

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_WWF1.rvt.

Load the truss family into the project
1 On the Window menu, clickm_Wood Floor Truss_1.rfa. 2 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. The truss family is loaded directly into the only other open file. If you had multiple projects or families open, a dialog would have displayed asking for you to specify which projects you wanted to load the family into. Notice that the project file is now active. 3 In the Project Browser, expand Families, expand Structural Framing, and notice that the Wood Floor Truss_1 family has been loaded. 4 Proceed to the next exercise, “Testing a Family Instance in a Project” on page 708.

Testing a Family Instance in a Project
In this exercise, you add several instances of the truss family to the project, and then modify the project to see how the beams adapt. Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you used in the previous exercise.

708 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1. add three vertical beams that snap to the rim joist at each end. select m_Wood Floor Truss_1. right-click in the Design Bar.Add beams to project 1 In the Project Browser. 2 In the Project Browser. and a wood rim joist. verify that Chain is not selected. and double-click 3D . The rim joist was added as a beam. therefore. the truss family you loaded will interact with it as one beam does to another. and click Structural.Southeast Isometric. expand Views. 4 In the Type Selector. This project consists of foundation walls. 5 On the Options Bar. TIP If the Structural tab of the Design Bar is not active. Testing a Family Instance in a Project | 709 . a slab. click Beam. expand 3D Views. 6 Using point-to-point insertion. a wood sill.

Southeast Isometric. 8 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views.NOTE Do not be concerned with the exact location of the three beams. under Floor Plans. Try to make them approximately equidistant as shown. you are merely testing the new floor truss to verify that it adapts to the changes. double-click Level 1. 9 Select Grid 2 and drag it downward until the walls form an approximate square. double-click 3D . NOTE Make sure you drag the grid line. 710 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Notice the wood truss sits on top of the sill and attaches to the rim joist as expected. 7 In the Project Browser. not the wall or rim joist. You do not need to be precise.

Notice the wood truss adjusted to the changes. under 3D Views. 13 In the Save as dialog. The project and family need to interact based on a consistent file name. navigate to a folder of your choice and save the project with its existing name. The center chase remained the same width while remaining centered. This should return the project to its original dimension. double-click 3D . In the next lesson. 12 On the File menu. click Save as.10 In the Project Browser. you nest the web components into the truss and create an array that adapts to changes in length. click Undo Drag. Testing a Family Instance in a Project | 711 .Southeast Isometric. 11 On the Edit menu. ■ ■ The truss ends remained constant and adapted to the new beam length. IMPORTANT Do not change the name of the family.

rfa is the active file. 4 On the View Control Bar. and open Metric\Families\m_Wood_Web. click Hide/Isolate. You then align and lock the web extents before applying a formula-controlled array. the wood floor truss family becomes the active view. Prepare the view for nesting 1 Make sure that m_Wood Floor Truss_1. under Floor Plans. “Working with Nested Subcomponents” on page 712. 15 On the Options Bar. click Yes.Edit a family from within a project 14 Select one of the wooden truss components. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 5 On the File menu. Working with Nested Subcomponents In this lesson. Because the family is already open. double-click Ref. and create a formula controlled array to fill in the truss. Adding a Nested Component In this exercise. click Training Files. you nest wood web members into the floor truss. Dataset Continue to use the datasets from the previous exercise. you nest two wooden web members into the truss. click Edit Family. and click Hide Element. 2 In the Project Browser. 712 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques .rfa. 3 Select the symbolic line in the center of the truss. 16 When prompted to open the truss family for editing. Load the wood web family ■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. Level. 17 Proceed to the next lesson. This will aid in the placement of the wood web.

This will be accomplished in the next exercise when you link the nested parameter with the host parameter. under Elevations. Adding a Nested Component | 713 . select the reference plane that is coincident with the left edge of the left center chase extrusion. 10 In the Project Browser. Notice the model lines that surround the web component. click Component. The geometry is driven by formula-based parameters that link to the host family. verify that m_Wood_Web: Wood Web is selected. 9 On the Design Bar. you align the web panel using these lines rather than the extrusion edges. Leave a slight gap between the chase and the web. Also notice that the depth of the web members needs to be changed. IMPORTANT Make sure you snap the center line of the web components to the center reference line of the truss. Snap the center line of the web to the center reference plane of the truss. You will align the left web component first. click Modify. Add two wood web components 6 On the Design Bar. Align the nested web components 12 Enter AL. they are visible only when you place the cursor over the component. 8 Add two instances of the wood web component as shown. 11 Place the cursor over the left wood web. 7 In the Type Selector. Do not select it. Place one wood web on each side of the center chase. double-click Front. 13 For the align-to point.This family is a single extrusion as shown. This will make aligning the wood web easier. this is the keyboard shortcut for Align. In the following steps. The extrusion is aligned and locked to invisible model lines that make it easier to array within the truss.

click Modify. it is important to note that you should avoid adding unnecessary constraints. 18 Add two reference planes as shown. In addition. 714 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques .14 Select the right vertical model line of the left web component as shown. Add reference planes for array anchors 17 On the Design Bar. Place each reference plane just to the outside of the center of the web components. 16 On the Design Bar. click Ref Plane. Each of these web components represents the starting point of the web arrays that you add later in this lesson. IMPORTANT Do not lock the alignment 15 Repeat the previous two steps to align the left edge of the right web component to the right edge of the center chase as shown. NOTE You do not have to align the top or bottom the web components because the height of the web members will adapt to the truss height after you create and link the parameters in the next exercise.

21 Select the reference plane that you added to the left of the web components center as shown. The reference plane you added in the previous step represents half the web width. Dimension and label array anchors 24 On the Design Bar.19 On the Tools menu. 25 Add the following two dimensions: Adding a Nested Component | 715 . click Dimension. 22 Click the lock to lock the reference plane to the centerline of the web component. 20 Select the center of the left web component as the align-to point. In the steps that follow. click Align. 23 Repeat the previous two steps to align and lock the right web component and the reference plane as shown. you align the reference planes to the center of the web components.

under Parameters. or the width of the center chase. 27 On the File menu. Create a new parameter for web depth 1 On the Design Bar. Place the dimension as shown. 716 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . You also add a formula to the parameter in order to maintain the web position as the truss changes depth. click Add. length. 26 On the Design Bar. navigate to the same directory in which you saved the project file and save this family there with its current name. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 In the Family Types dialog. click Save As. ■ Right web dimension ■ ■ Select the reference plane that you aligned to the center of the right web component. Place the dimension as shown. 28 In the Save As dialog. You then link the nested web parameters to the new host parameters. ■ In the next exercise. Creating Formula-controlled Parameters In this exercise. you add new parameters to control the web components. click Modify. Select the reference plane that is coincident with the left edge of the right web component and the outside edge of the center chase. Select the reference plane that is coincident with the right edge of the left web component and the outside edge of the center chase. you label these dimensions. “Creating Formula-controlled Parameters” on page 716. Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you saved in the previous exercise. click Family Types.Left web dimension ■ ■ Select the reference plane that you aligned to the center of the left web component.

under Parameter Data. In addition. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating Formula-controlled Parameters | 717 . NOTE Formulas are case sensitive. TIP You can expand the width of the Family Types dialog to facilitate typing within the formula field. and click Element Properties. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. enter Depth . Notice the web members are resized to fit more precisely between the chords.(Chord Thickness * 2) for the WebDepth Formula. click OK.3 In the Parameter Properties dialog. Link the nested component to the new parameter 6 Right-click the left web component. 12 On the Design Bar. When you refer to another parameter within a formula. Click OK. and click OK. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. select WebDepth. under Constraints. notice the center of each nested web component is locked to the reference plane that bisects it. click the button to the right of the WebHeight value. click OK. under Other. click Edit/New. ensure you enter it exactly as it is named. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. notice that “= “displays within the WebHeight button. This formula ensures that the web depth will account for any changes in the chord thickness or truss depth. 4 In the Family Types dialog. Select Length for Type. 9 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. In the Type Properties dialog. click Modify. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. Select Type. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter WebDepth for Name. 5 Click OK. Select Common for Discipline.

Create new formula-controlled parameter for center chase
13 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 14 In the Family Types dialog, under Parameters, click Add. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data, specify the following:

Enter CC for Name. This parameter is primarily for convenience. It will use a formula to add the center chase width and the thickness of the two bordering chords.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Select Other for Group parameter under. Select Common for Discipline. Select Length for Type. Select Instance. Click OK.

16 Under Other, enter Center Chase Width + (2*Chord Thickness) for CC Formula. After you enter the formula, the resulting value is displayed as an inactive field.

Create WebArrayLength formula-controlled parameter
17 In the Family Types dialog, under Parameters, click Add. 18 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Enter WebArrayLength for Name. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. Select Common for Discipline. Select Length for Type. Select Instance. Click OK.

19 Under Constraints, enter (Length - (CC+300))/2 for WebArrayLength Formula. This formula subtracts the length of the center chase and its two bordering chords plus an additional 300mm before dividing it in two to specify the length of each array. The additional 300mm is to account for the ends, which must remain at least 150mm long.

Create WebArrayNum formula-controlled parameter
20 In the Family Types dialog, under Parameters, click Add. 21 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Enter WebArrayNum for Name. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. Select Common for Discipline. Select Integer for Type. Select Instance. Click OK.

22 Under Constraints, enter WebArrayLength/(2*WebDepth) for WebArrayNum Formula. 23 Click OK.

718 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Add parameter to anchor web array
24 Select the dimension that refers to the midpoint of the left web as shown.

25 On the Options Bar, select Add parameter for Label. 26 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Enter Webhalflength for Name. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. Select Instance. Click OK.

27 Select the dimension that refers to the midpoint of the right web. 28 On the Options Bar, select Webhalflength for Label. 29 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Add formula for Webhalflength
30 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 31 Under Constraints, enter (WebArrayLength/WebArrayNum)/2 for Webhalflength Formula. 32 Click OK. Notice the location of the web components has adapted to the formula.

Creating Formula-controlled Parameters | 719

Associate web component parameters
33 Right-click the left web component, and click Element Properties. 34 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 35 In the Type Properties dialog, under Other, click the button to the right of the WebArrayLength value. 36 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog, select WebArrayLength, and click OK. In the Type Properties dialog, the button next to the WebArrayLength value should have an equals sign within it. 37 In the Type Properties dialog, click OK. 38 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. 39 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 40 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click View 1.

Because you have added and constrained new components, it is very important that you flex the model to ensure the nested components and the formulas that controls them work as expected. It is especially important to flex the model before arraying the truss so that you don’t multiply any existing problems.

Flex the design
41 Adjust the view so you can flex the truss while in the Family Types dialog. 42 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 43 In the Family Types dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■

Enter 686mm for Depth. Enter 76mm for Chord Thickness. Click Apply.

The truss should adapt to all the changes. If it does not, fix any problematic alignments and constraints.

44 In the Family Types dialog, reset the values as follows:
■ ■

Enter 286mm for Depth. Enter 38mm for Chord Thickness.

720 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Click Apply, and click OK.

45 On the File menu, click Save. 46 Proceed to the next exercise, “Arraying Nested Subcomponents” on page 721.

Arraying Nested Subcomponents
In this exercise, you array the nested web components, add alignment constraints, and link the arrays to the WebArrayNum parameter. Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you saved in the previous exercise.

Array the left web component
1 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Front. 2 Select the nested web component left of the center chase.

3 On the Edit menu, click Array. Creating an array requires two basic steps. First, you specify the move start point; then you specify the move end point. You must use precision when arraying because any error is multiplied as the array grows. 4 On the Options Bar, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Verify that Group and Associate is selected. Enter 3 for Number. Select 2nd for Move to. Select Constrain.

5 Select the bottom-right corner of the nested web extrusion as the move start point. When picking the corner, use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family.

Arraying Nested Subcomponents | 721

6 Select the bottom-left corner of the nested web extrusion as the move end point. When picking the corner, use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family.

7 Press ENTER to complete the array. 8 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Array the right nested web component
9 Select the nested web component right of the center chase. 10 On the Edit menu, click Array. 11 On the Options Bar, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Verify that Group and Associate is selected. Enter 3 for Number. Select 2nd for Move to. Select Constrain.

12 Select the bottom-left corner of the nested web extrusion as the move start point. When picking the corner, use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family. 13 Select the bottom-right corner of the nested web extrusion as the move end point. When picking the corner, use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family.

14 Press ENTER to complete the array. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 16 Zoom out to view the truss.

Align and lock the arrays
17 Zoom in on the left array of web components. 18 On the Tools menu, click Align.

722 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

19 In the left array, place the cursor over the boundary between the two left web components until the reference highlights, then select the line twice.

Because there are two overlapping lines at this location, you are aligning the two bordering web components to each other. 20 Click the lock symbol to keep the web components locked at their edges.

21 Within the left array, align and lock the two right web components.

22 Within the right array, align and lock the two boundaries between the three web components. Use the same techniques as you did in the previous three steps. NOTE This step is very important. If you do not lock the edges of the array, the web components overlap each other when you change the depth of the truss.

Label the arrays
23 Select the middle web component of the left array. 24 Notice the array line displays above the components with the array value. Place the cursor over the array line as shown and select it.

NOTE Do not select the array value. 25 On the Options Bar, select WebArrayNum for Label. 26 Select the middle web component of the right array. 27 Select the array line over the web components on the right. 28 On the Options Bar, select WebArrayNum for Label. 29 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Arraying Nested Subcomponents | 723

30 Zoom out until you can see the entire truss.

Notice the arrays appear to be too long. This is because earlier in the tutorial, you added a dimension to lock the Member Left and Member Right reference plane to the outer Left and Right reference planes. The primary reason for this was to allow for flexing the length. 31 Zoom around the left side of the truss. 32 Select the dimension between reference plane Left and Member Left as shown.

33 Delete the dimension. 34 On the Tools menu, click Align. 35 Select the reference plane, Left, as the align-to point. 36 Select the reference plane, Member Left, and lock the alignment as shown.

Notice the end of the array still overlaps the trimmable end. You will fix this in later steps by changing the parameter value.

724 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

NOTE With most beam families, you would not want to align and lock these two reference planes; however, in this case, the wood floor truss normally sits on a sill bordering a rim joist. Therefore, this solution has little, if any, significant impact. 37 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 38 Zoom in around the right side of the truss. 39 Delete the dimension between reference plane Right and Member Right. 40 Align and lock reference plane Right and Member Right.

41 Zoom out until you can see the entire truss.

Change trimmable end length value
42 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 43 In the Family Types dialog, under Dimensions, enter 150mm for Trimmable End Length. 44 Click Apply, and click OK. Notice the web arrays fit within the truss without overlapping the ends.

Flex the design
45 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click View 1, and prepare the view for flexing. 46 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 47 In the Family Types dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Enter 686mm for Depth. Enter 12000mm for Length. Enter 900mm for Center Chase Width. Click Apply.

The truss should adapt to all the changes. If it does not, fix any problematic alignments and constraints.

Arraying Nested Subcomponents | 725

TIP When flexing a complex model such as this, you should flex the model in as many ways as possible to verify it is working correctly; however, for training and time purposes, these steps have been reduced. 48 In the Family Types dialog, reset the values as follows:
■ ■ ■ ■

Enter 286mm for Depth. Enter 6000mm for Length. Enter 400mm for Center Chase Width. Click Apply, and click OK.

You have completed the design of the primary components of the truss. 49 On the File menu, click Save. 50 Proceed to the next exercise, “Reloading a Family into a Project” on page 726.

Reloading a Family into a Project
In this exercise, you reload the truss family into the project. You then increase the distance between the foundation walls to see how the truss adapts to the changes in length.

726 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you saved in the previous exercise. In addition to the truss family, the project, m_WWF1.rvt, should be open. Close any other open projects.

Reload the truss into the project.
1 Verify that the truss family is active and the 3D View, View 1, displays. 2 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 3 In the Reload Family dialog, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes. Notice the project file becomes active and the beam has updated with the latest changes.

4 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. 5 Drag Grid 2 downward until the shape of the building footprint is almost square. 6 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click 3D - Southeast Isometric. Notice the truss has adapted to the changes.

Reloading a Family into a Project | 727

7 On the Edit menu, click Undo Drag. 8 Save and close the project file and the family file. In the next lesson, you begin with a new dataset which is identical to both of these files. 9 Proceed to the next lesson, “Applying Subcategories, Materials, and Parameters” on page 728.

Applying Subcategories, Materials, and Parameters
In this lesson, you create and apply subcategories and materials. You then create a parameter to specifically control material application.

Creating and Applying Subcategories
In this exercise, you create new subcategories within the truss family. You then reload the family into the project and apply a material to the subcategory. Datasets
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_WWF2.rvt.

728 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

In this dataset, the truss was added to a beam system that occupies approximately half the building footprint. In addition, four instances of the floor truss were added to the other end of the structure.

Apply Object Styles
1 Zoom in around beam system. Notice no material has been applied to the truss. Within the family, the material values were set to By Category by default.

2 On the Settings menu, click Object Styles. 3 In the Object Styles dialog, verify that the Model Objects tab is selected, and expand the category Structural Framing. Notice that the Structural Framing category and all of the subcategories have no material value defined. In addition, notice that the subcategories do not apply to the wood floor truss that you have designed. 4 On the Structural Framing category line, click in the material field until the button displays as shown.

Creating and Applying Subcategories | 729

5 Click the button that displays in the Structural Framing Material field. 6 In the Materials dialog, click Wood - Timber for Name, and click OK. 7 In the Object Styles dialog, click OK. Notice the Wood - Timber material has been applied to all Structural Framing components.

When you apply a material to the Structural Framing category, all subcomponents of that category are assigned that material. If there was a metal beam in this building model, it would also have the wood material applied to it. If you create subcategories as you design in the Family Editor, you have more control over component visibility within a project. 8 On the Edit menu, click Undo Object Styles.

Create subcategories within the truss family
9 Select a truss that is not part of the beam system. 10 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 11 Click Yes to open the family for editing. 12 On the Settings menu, click Object Styles. 13 In the Object Styles dialog, under Modify Subcategories, click New. 14 In the New Subcategory dialog, enter Wood Floor Truss for Name, and click OK.

Apply material to subcategory
15 Click in the Material field for the Wood Floor Truss subcategory, and click the button to open the Materials dialog. 16 In the Materials dialog, click Duplicate. 17 In the New Material dialog, enter Wood Floor Truss, and click OK. 18 In the Materials dialog, under AccuRender, click .

19 In the Material Library dialog, navigate to _accurender\Wood\Pine, Yellow, select Natural,No Gloss for Name, and click OK. 20 In the Materials dialog, click OK. 21 In the Object Styles dialog, click OK.

Apply the subcategory to the truss components
22 Draw a pick box around the entire truss. 23 On the Options Bar, click .

24 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Other, and click OK. Notice the chords and end extrusions remain selected.

730 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

25 On the Options Bar, click

.

26 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identity Data, select Wood Floor Truss for Subcategory, and click OK. 27 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Apply a subcategory to the nested web components
28 Place the cursor over one of the arrayed web components, press TAB to toggle to the web component and click to select it. 29 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 30 Click Yes to open the family for editing. The web component family opens in a 3D view.

31 On the Settings menu, click Object Styles. 32 In the Object Styles dialog, under Modify Subcategories, click New. 33 In the New Subcategory dialog, enter Wood Floor Truss - Webs for Name, and click OK. By creating a separate subcategory for the web components, you can apply a different material to all web components when using this truss within a project.

Creating and Applying Subcategories | 731

34 Click in the Material field for the Wood Floor Truss - Webs subcategory, and click the button to open the Materials dialog. 35 In the Materials dialog, click Duplicate. 36 In the New Material dialog, enter Wood Floor Truss - Webs, and click OK. 37 In the Materials dialog, under AccuRender, click .

38 In the Material Library dialog, navigate to _accurender\Wood\Pine, Yellow, select Natural,No Gloss for Name, and click OK. 39 In the Materials dialog, click OK. 40 In the Object Styles dialog, click OK. 41 Select the web extrusion. 42 On the Options Bar, click .

43 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identity Data, select Wood Floor Truss - Webs for Subcategory, and click OK.

Reload web component into truss family
44 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 45 In the Load into Projects dialog, select m_Wood Floor Truss_1.rfa, and click OK. 46 In the Reload Family dialog, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes.

Reload truss into project
47 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 48 In the Load into Projects dialog, select m_WWF2.rvt, and click OK. 49 In the Reload Family dialog, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes. Notice the new object subcategory styles are applied to the truss components.

50 On the Settings menu, click Object Styles. 51 In the Object Styles dialog, under Categories, expand Structural Framing.

732 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Notice the two new subcategories are listed. You can change the style of only the wood truss components without impacting other structural framing components. 52 Click OK. 53 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics. 54 In the Visibility Graphics dialog, under Visibility, expand Structural Framing, clear Wood Floor Truss Webs, and click OK. Notice the web extrusions no longer display; however, the stick symbols continue to display.

55 On the Edit menu, click Undo Visibility/Graphics. 56 On the File menu, click Save As. 57 In the Save as dialog, navigate to a folder of your preference and save the project with the current name. 58 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating Material Parameters” on page 733.

Creating Material Parameters
In this exercise, you add a new material parameter that allows you to specify a material for each truss instance. Dataset Continue to use the dataset that you saved in the previous exercise.

Open truss family for editing
1 Select a truss that is not part of the beam system. 2 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 3 Click Yes to open the family for editing.

Create material parameter
4 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 5 In the Family Types dialog, under Parameters, click Add. 6 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Enter Floor Truss Material for Name. Select Materials and Finishes for Group parameter under. Select Common for Discipline. Select Material for Type. Select Instance. Click OK.

7 In the Family Types dialog, notice the default material is By Category.

Creating Material Parameters | 733

In this case, do not assign a material to the parameter. When reloaded into a project, this component will continue to use the material assigned to the subcategory by default. This material parameter allows you to assign a material on an instance parameter. 8 Click OK.

Link truss extrusions to material parameter
9 Draw a pick box around the entire truss. 10 On the Options Bar, click .

11 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Wood Floor Truss, and click OK. Notice the chords and end extrusions remain selected. 12 On the Options Bar, click .

13 In the Element Properties dialog, under Materials and Finishes, click the button to the right of the Material value field. 14 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog, select Floor Truss Material, and click OK. 15 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. 16 Place the cursor over one of the web components, press TAB, and select the component. 17 On the Options Bar, click .

18 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 19 In the Type Properties dialog, under Other, click the button to the right of the WebMaterial value field. 20 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog, select Floor Truss Material, and click OK. 21 Click OK twice. 22 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Reload truss into project
23 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 24 In the Load into Projects dialog, select m_WWF2.rvt, and click OK. 25 In the Reload Family dialog, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes. Notice the appearance of the floor trusses has not changed. 26 Select a floor truss that is not part of the beam system. 27 On the Options Bar, click .

28 In the Element Properties dialog, under Materials and Finishes, click the Floor Truss Material field and click the button that displays. 29 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Steel for Name, and click OK. 30 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. 31 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Notice the material is applied only to the selected beam.

734 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

32 On the File menu, click Save. 33 On the File menu, click Close. 34 Close any open files. You can save the open files if you wish. In the next lesson, a new dataset is supplied. 35 Proceed to the next lesson, “Controlling Component Visibility” on page 735.

Controlling Component Visibility
In this lesson, you add controls to specify the views in which each element displays and at what detail level.

Assigning Detail Level and View Controls
In this exercise, you designate the display of elements in specific views and at specific detail levels.

Datasets
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_WWF3.rvt.

Change detail levels
1 On the View Control Bar, click Detail Level, and click Coarse.

Controlling Component Visibility | 735

Notice the rim joist no longer displays. However, notice the floor truss has not changed appearance, because you have yet to assign a detail level to each of the elements within the truss family. Currently within the truss, all elements display at all times in all views.

2 Select a floor truss. 3 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 4 Click Yes to open the family for editing.

Apply detail level controls to web components
5 Select a web component. 6 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 7 Click Yes to open the family for editing. 8 Select the web extrusion. 9 On the Options Bar, click Visibility. 10 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under View Specific Display, clear Plan/RCP. Clear Left/Right. Under Detail Levels, clear Coarse. Click OK.

11 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 12 In the Load into Projects dialog, select m_Wood Floor Truss_1.rfa, and click OK. 13 In the Reload Family dialog, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes. Notice the appearance of the floor trusses has not changed.

Assign detail level to center chase extrusions
14 Select the center chase extrusions. 15 On the Options Bar, click Visibility. 16 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under View Specific Display, clear Plan/RCP. Clear Left/Right. Under Detail Levels, clear Coarse. Click OK.

736 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Assign detail level to truss ends
17 Select the end extrusions. 18 On the Options Bar, click Visibility. 19 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■

Under View Specific Display, clear Plan/RCP. Under Detail Levels, clear Coarse. Click OK.

Assign detail level to truss chords
20 Select the truss chords. 21 On the Options Bar, click Visibility. 22 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog, specify the following:
■ ■

Under Detail Levels, clear Coarse. Click OK.

Reload truss into project
23 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 24 In the Load into Projects dialog, select m_WWF3.rvt, and click OK. 25 In the Reload Family dialog, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes. Notice that the floor truss solid geometry is not displayed.

26 On the View Control Bar, click Detail Level, and click Medium. Notice the floor truss solid geometry is displayed. 27 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. 28 On the View Control Bar, click Detail Level, and click Coarse.

Assigning Detail Level and View Controls | 737

Notice the symbolic representation of the beams.

29 On the File menu, click Save As. 30 In the Save As dialog, navigate to your preferred location and save the project with the current name. 31 Proceed to the next lesson, “Creating Component Types” on page 738.

Creating Component Types
In this lesson, you create multiple floor truss types to speed up the design process when working in a project. In the final exercise, you create a conditional formula that adjusts the truss depth based on the truss length.

Creating Multiple Component Types
In this exercise, you create multiple types for a 89x38 truss and a 64x38 truss. Although you can change the parameters of a truss within a project, creating predefined types can speed up the design process.

Open the truss family for editing
1 Select a floor truss. 2 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 3 Click Yes to open the family for editing.

Create new types
4 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 5 In the Family Types dialog, under Family Types, click New. 6 In the New dialog, enter 89x38 for Name, and click OK. 7 In the Family Types dialog, under Family Types, click New. 8 In the New dialog, enter 64x38 for Name, and click OK. 9 In the Family Types dialog, under Dimensions, enter 64mm for Chord Width, and click Apply. Notice the chord changes width. 10 Select 89x38 for Name, and click Apply. The truss returns to its original designed value. NOTE When creating new components, create types for those most frequently used in your projects. 11 Click OK.

738 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

under 3D Views. 15 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. enter the follow formula for Depth: if(Length < 6600. Creating Conditional Formulas In this exercise.rvt. Creating Conditional Formulas | 739 . you create a conditional formula that changes the depth automatically as the truss increases in length. 350. <result-if-true>. 400))) 6 Click Apply. Open the truss for editing 1 Select a floor truss. 14 In the Reload Family dialog. Load new types into the project 12 On the Design Bar. 286. 13 In the Load into Projects dialog. select m_WWF3. 2 On the Options Bar. click Save. 21 In the Project Browser.TIP You can also use new types to flex the model. 23 Proceed to the final exercise. “Creating Conditional Formulas” on page 739.Southeast Isometric. if(Length < 9000. click Beam. click Load into Projects. under Dimensions. click Family Types. 19 Add a beam next to the 64x38. Notice the two beam types. select Override parameter values of existing types. 400. select 64x38. 16 In the Type Selector. <result-if-false>) 5 In the Family Types dialog. Adding a conditional formula 4 On the Design Bar. 22 On the File menu. 18 In the Type Selector. You are going to enter a conditional formula that follows this basic rule: IF ( <condition>. click Edit Family. double-click 3D . and click Yes. 17 Add a beam in the center of the open space. select 89x38. if(Length < 7500. 20 On the Design Bar. 3 Click Yes to open the family for editing. click Modify. and click OK.

Test the conditional formula within a project 12 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. click Load into Projects. and click Apply. under Floor Plans. 10 In the Load into Projects dialog. 740 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . enter 6000 for length. 14 In the Project Browser.Flex the design 7 In the Family Types dialog. and click OK. Notice the truss depth increases. Load the truss into the project 9 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 15 Notice the change in floor truss depth. 8 In the Family Types dialog. you probably noticed a change in the amount of time the view needed to regenerate.Southeast Isometric. and click Yes. You have completed this tutorial.rvt. IMPORTANT When you changed the width of the building footprint. click Apply. 17 Close any open files. enter 8000 for length. 13 Select Grid 2 and drag it downward until it is between 8000-9000mm from Grid 1. select m_WWF3. 16 On the File menu. under 3D Views. NOTE You would have to change the depth of the sill and rim joist to accommodate this change. Regeneration time and overall performance can be affected by over-designed families. select Override parameter values of existing types. double-click 3D . 11 In the Reload Family dialog. click Save.

Using Advanced Features 7 741 .

742 | Chapter 18 Using Advanced Features .

curtain systems are usually assembled on site as a single unit. For example. you need to change the length of the wall. To change grids. Unlike windows. and you can change these elements individually. They are typically not load-bearing and are not cut for doors or windows. Like walls. grid lines. and they are not windows. to resize the system. and mullions. 743 .Curtain Systems 18 Curtain systems are not walls. To switch panel types. you need to select a panel. Like windows. they can define space and separate the exterior from the interior. or you can use a specific curtain system command. you select the grid. panel. You can add curtain systems with the wall command. A typical curtain system comprises a wall. they can usually include mullions and have glazed panels. This affects the entire curtain system.

Flat Curtain System In this lesson. you further develop the building information model by creating a flat curtain system at the entrance of the model. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. click Wall. 5 Start the curtain system where shown. 1 In the Project Browser. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. This type of curtain system is also referred to as a curtain wall. 4 In the Type Selector. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. 744 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . This floor edge will be the entrance to the building. Creating an Entrance In this exercise. and double-click Ground Floor. click Training Files. 2 Zoom in to Grid F where it meets the arc in the floor. and open Metric\m_Curtain_Walls. Creating a curtain system using the wall command 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. you create a curtain system using the wall command.

6 Move the cursor down along the edge of the floor. 9 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. Creating an Entrance | 745 . 7 Zoom in to the join between the curtain system and the exterior wall. and finish at the outside face of the exterior wall as shown. 10 Zoom in to the curtain system you just added. 8 In the Project Browser. and double-click Southeast Isometric. expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views.

you are going to subdivide the panel into several smaller panels. double-click GROUND FLOOR. and room bounding. using curtain grids. under Floor Plans. top and base attachments. top constraint. For Top Offset.11 Select the curtain system. 13 The curtain system is a single glazed panel. The curtain system is now at the same height as the other existing curtain systems. Note that a curtain system created from the wall command has similar properties to other walls: base constraint. and click (Properties). 12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Constraints ➤ Top Constraint. 746 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . select Up to level: TOP OF ROOF. Click OK. enter 1200. You want the curtain system to attach to the roof. Adding curtain grids 14 In the Project Browser.

or press CTRL + C on the keyboard. 18 In the Project Browser. 25 On the Design Bar. right-click Elevation 1 . FOURTH FLOOR. select the 3 grid lines you just placed. 20 In the drawing area. 23 Place another grid 1500 mm above the first grid. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. THIRD FLOOR. 27 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. and click to place a horizontal curtain grid 1200 mm above the ground floor level line. and resize the crop boundary as shown. click Elevation. 16 Place the elevation symbol in front of the curtain wall and click Modify on the Design Bar. and click Rename. 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. FIFTH FLOOR. click Modify.a. 24 Place another grid so that it snaps to the SECOND FLOOR level line. 22 Move the cursor along the edge of the wall. SIXTH FLOOR. double-click the elevation symbol arrow to open the new elevation view. 29 In the Select Levels dialog. select SECOND FLOOR. 19 Enter Entrance Elevation. Creating an Entrance | 747 . 17 Click the elevation arrow to display the crop boundary. while pressing CTRL. and click OK. and SEVENTH FLOOR.15 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 26 While pressing CTRL. click Curtain Grid. and click OK.

32 Move the cursor along the GROUND FLOOR level (left of the vertical grid line) until it snaps to the midpoint of the larger vertical panel. 33 On the Design Bar.The selected grid lines are now at each of these levels. click Modify. click Curtain Grid. 748 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . TIP To be sure that the curtain grid is at the midpoint of the panel. Click to place another grid line. watch the tooltips and the Status Bar. Click to create a vertical grid. 31 Place the cursor on grid 2 so that it highlights. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. one larger than the other. This divides the curtain wall vertically into 2 panels.

you add a doorway to the curtain system. you set up a doorway on a curtain panel. and then you replace that panel with a curtain system door panel. Creating an Entrance | 749 . and then select the segment above it. 36 Select the lowest segment of the left grid line. The two segments are removed. click Add or Remove Segments. You enter an editor that lets you select segments of the grid line to remove them. and on the Options Bar. The segment line style changes to dashed. Instead of using the Door command. 37 Click in any white space to exit the editor. 35 Select the left vertical grid line. Adding the doorway 34 Zoom in to the ground floor level in the Entrance Elevation view.Next.

750 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . 42 Place dimensions as shown.38 Using the same method. 40 On the Options Bar. click Curtain Grid. 41 Place 4 vertical grid lines as shown. 39 On the Design Bar. and lock them. TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings to view the dimensions. select One Segment. remove the horizontal segment that intersects the vertical segment removed in the previous step.

47 Click the horizontal grid line between the smaller panels. You will have to press TAB to highlight it. You are going to add more segments to an existing curtain grid.rfa. Next. The line style changes from dashed to solid to indicate a grid segment has been added. TIP The middle grid lines are centered between the long vertical grid above them. and open Metric\Families\Doors\M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl. 49 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. click Modify. click Training Files. The panel changes to a double door.43 Delete the dimensions. Creating an Entrance | 751 . Watch the Status Bar to be sure you are highlighting the panel. click OK to leave the curtain grids constrained. 44 When the warning about locked dimensions being deleted displays. 54 On the Design Bar. click once to the right of the long grid and then click once to the left of it. 48 When the grids are placed (line style have changed to solid). Do not click between the 1800 mm panels. 50 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 46 Click Add or Remove Segments on the Options Bar. 45 Select the horizontal grid line that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. 53 Use the same method to replace the other panel with a double door. 52 On the Type Selector. click in any white space to exit the editor. Use the following image as a guide. you replace the 2 larger 1800 mm panels with curtain system doors. click M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl: Store Front Double Door. To get the horizontal grid to display between the vertical grids. 51 Select the left 1800 mm panel. You now have two 1800 mm wide panels between smaller rectangular panels.

under Elevations. The glazed panels display in blue. 63 Click OK twice. not as curtain panels. double-click Entrance Elevation. 752 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. and click Wireframe. 65 On the View Control Bar. 61 With the panel still selected. click . and Material specifies the shading and patterning. double-click GROUND FLOOR to see the plan view door swings of the curtain wall doors. The glazed panel is changed to a solid panel. 64 Replace the two adjacent glazed panels with solid panels. Thickness specifies the depth of the panel. 56 In the Project Browser. 62 In the Element Properties dialog. 57 On the View Control Bar.These panels schedule as doors. click System Panel : Solid. The Offset property specifies the distance from the centerline of the curtain wall. 60 On the Type Selector. under Floor Plans. and the solid panels display in white. you change panels in front of ceilings from glazed to solid. 59 Select one of the panels below the FIFTH FLOOR level line. Changing panels 58 Zoom in to the FIFTH FLOOR level. click Edit/New to open the Type Properties of the panel. They are part of the curtain panel category. on the new curtain system you added. Next. 55 In the Project Browser. click . you replace some of the transparent panels with solid ones. This changes the graphics style of the view. Now.

66 Change the graphics style back to Wireframe. Name the file m_Curtain_Walls-in_progress. 5 Place a mullion on the horizontal grid that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. select Grid Line Segment. select Entire Grid Line. click Save As. 3 Place a mullion on the grid segment at the ground floor immediately to the right of the right set of doors. you place mullions on curtain panel grids. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 4 On the Options Bar. 67 Change the remaining glazed panels in front of ceilings to solid panels. click Mullion. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System | 753 . This completes the exercise for creating an entrance.rvt. 68 On the File menu. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System In this exercise. 2 On the Options Bar.

Two mullion join controls display.6 On the Options Bar. because their width reduces the size of the doors. 754 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . so you remove them next. 9 Delete the mullions below them. 12 Click the lower mullion join control. Now all empty grid segments have mullions on them. there are a few that you do not want. 11 Select the vertical mullion above and between the set of double doors. Removing mullions 8 Zoom in to the set of doors. however. select All Empty Segments. Changing mullion joins 10 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Mullions can change their joins to other mullions. The two mullions below the doors are not necessary. 7 Place the cursor on any empty grid segment on the curtain system and click. You are going to change some mullion joins.

TIP After selecting the vertical mullion. and click Join Conditions ➤ Break at Join to break the mullion at both joins. Finally. you learned how to add mullions and change their joins. Curved Curtain System In this lesson. This also completes the lesson on creating a flat curtain system. you can also right-click. 14 On the Design Bar.The bottom of the mullion meets the top of the horizontal mullion. The curtain wall is sketched as an arc. Curved Curtain System | 755 . Adding a Curved Curtain System In this exercise. You also create a custom curtain panel for the system. you create a curved curtain system near the entrance of the model that was just completed. click Modify. This completes the exercise for adding mullions. 13 Click the top mullion control. You also learned how to modify grids and change panels. You learned how to create a basic curtain wall system and how to subdivide it with grids. double-click Southeast Isometric. Finally. 15 In the Project Browser. you add a curtain system using the wall command. you add both predefined and custom mullions to the system. 16 Save the file. The top of the vertical mullion now meets the bottom of the horizontal mullion above.

7 On the Options Bar. 4 In the Type Selector. 6 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. click Wall. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. 1 In the Project Browser. specify Up to level: FIFTH FLOOR. Click OK. (Arc passing through three points). 2 Zoom in to the circular space above the entrance that was just completed. 756 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . for Top Constraint. double-click GROUND FLOOR. For Top Offset. 5 Click .Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. 10 Finish the wall by clicking at the top of the arc. enter 1200. under Floor Plans. 9 Place the second point at the lower right side. click 8 Start the wall by clicking at the left edge of the circle at the centerline of the intersecting wall.

and then sixteenths. 13 Continue to place more grids by using the snap points on the arc. 14 In the Project Browser. 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. You are going to use one of these snaps points. you place grids on the system. double-click East. Divide the halves into quarters. and snap the cursor to each level line and click to add horizontal curtain grids. Do not add a grid on the GROUND FLOOR level. The curtain grid command snaps only to the curved arc. 12 Snap the cursor to the midpoint of the curved arc and click. under Elevations. eighths. Next. click Curtain Grid. Adding a Curved Curtain System | 757 . Next. you change some panels in the system. 16 On the Design Bar.The curtain wall displays as one flat panel between the first and second points placed. 15 Zoom in to the cylinder. click Modify. Watch the Status Bar to ensure you are at the midpoint.

and on the Options Bar. you create a custom curtain panel and place it into the curved curtain system.300mm. double-click Exterior. 7 Start the sketch at the upper left reference line intersection and finish at the lower right reference line intersection. 758 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . to filter out all other 19 Save the file. Remember to click elements from the selection except Curtain Panels. Next you create a custom panel and add it to the system. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Lines. This completes the first exercise for creating a curved system. select Basic Wall: Generic . select the bottom layer of panels. 2 In the left pane of the New dialog. under Elevations. 3 In the Project Browser. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel In this exercise. 6 On the Options Bar. 18 In the Type Selector. enter 100. click Training Files. click . and open Metric\Templates\Metric Curtain Wall Panel.rft. 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. for Depth.Using walls as panels 17 Using a selection box. 5 On the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 4 On the Design Bar.

Pattern. 14 On the Design Bar. and click . and click OK. All fourth floor panels are selected. 18 Load the Curtain Panel . and click 13 Sketch 2 lines that crisscross the extrusion. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 759 . 12 On the Options Bar. 17 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family.8 On the Design Bar. and return to the project file. double-click FOURTH FLOOR. 19 In the Project Browser. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close.rfa family.Pattern. 11 On the Design Bar.Pattern. and save the family as Curtain Panel . 21 In the Type Selector. under Floor Plans. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save As. All the panels change to the custom panel you created. click Finish Sketch. for Identity Data ➤ Subcategory. click Model Lines. 9 Select the extrusion. right-click. 20 Press TAB until a panel in the arc is highlighted. click Modify.rfa. select Curtain Panel . . clear Chain. select Glass. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid.

right-click. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. The structure of the curved curtain system now matches that of the main part of the building. All fifth floor panels are selected. select System Panel . 760 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . The finished arc wall should look like the following image. 29 Save the file. 27 Highlight a panel in the arc. 23 Right-click.Solid. click (Default 3D View). and then click (Dynamically Modify View). and click Flip Orientation. This completes the exercise for adding a custom curtain panel. you add both custom and predefined mullions to the curved curtain panel. 28 In the Type Selector.22 Select the curved arc curtain wall. All the panels change to the solid panel. 25 Hold SHIFT and spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel In this exercise. 26 In the Project Browser. 24 On the View toolbar. under Floor Plans. double-click FIFTH FLOOR.

double-click East.rft. except at the GROUND FLOOR level. for Profile Usage. enter 8. For vertical mullions. under Elevations. Notice that both the starting and ending points are in the same location. Creating a custom mullion in the Family Editor 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. click Lines. 7 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. Click again to specify the ending point. click Mullion. 3 Select each horizontal grid line on the curved curtain panel. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 8 On the Design Bar. 10 Place the cursor at the intersection of the reference planes and click to enter the octagon starting point. Select Radius. and click OK. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile. 9 On the Options Bar: ■ Click (Polygon). 5 In the left pane of the New dialog. and enter 50 mm for the radius. If Polygon does not display on the Options Bar. click Training Files. select Mullion. you use the Family Editor to create a custom mullion.Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. . Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 761 . 1 In the Project Browser. and select it. click ■ ■ For Sides. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters.

and open Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Cylinder Mullion . 27 In the Project Browser. select Circular Mullion for Family. 18 Place the detail component so that it snaps to the mullion profile as shown. 26 Load the Cylinder Mullion. 12 Select the lines in the octagon. double-click Southeast Isometric. clear Coarse and Medium. 23 Save the family as Cylinder Mullion. 20 Select the detail component. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. 31 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. After the new profile is loaded.rfa. clear Fine. 22 Click File menu ➤ Save As. click Modify. The detail component becomes the true representation in plan view.11 On the Design Bar. it can be added as a mullion type.rfa. click Detail Component. 19 On the Design Bar. 15 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 30 Click . 21 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. click Modify. 14 In the Family element visibility settings dialog.detail. and click OK. and spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 25 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. This controls the detail level at which the mullion profile displays.rfa family. under 3D Views. 762 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . 13 On the Options Bar. and return to the project file. 17 On the Design Bar. click Mullion. click Visibility. 28 Click . 29 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and click Visibility. click Training Files.

39 On the Design Bar. 40 In the Project Browser. you learned to create a curved curtain system. under Floor Plans. You have placed more mullions than you want. 41 Highlight a mullion in the arc. select All Empty Segments. click Modify. 35 Under Construction. and click Select Mullions ➤ On Gridline. as well as the lesson on creating a curved curtain system.32 Click Edit/New. and then apply those custom elements to the system. select Cylinder Mullion : Cylinder Mullion. 43 Save the file. 42 Press DELETE. for Profile. make custom curtain panels and mullions. 38 Click on any grid line in the entry cylinder. 34 Enter Cylinder Mullion for Name. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 763 . so you remove the unwanted ones. This completes the exercise for adding mullions. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. 36 Click OK twice. 37 On the Options Bar. click Duplicate. In this lesson. right-click. double-click GROUND FLOOR. and click OK.

1 In the Project Browser. place the cursor on the inside face of one of the walls. under Floor Plans. select Defines slope. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Click OK. and you can click to select them all. 8 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Family. Sloped Glazings Sloped glazings are useful when you are creating skylights and other glazed roofing systems. All the inside faces highlight. click Roof Properties. and press TAB. click Finish Roof. 5 On the Options Bar. a storefront system. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. 7 On the Design Bar. and a ruled curtain system. double-click TOP OF ROOF. 6 Select the inside faces of the base walls. 2 Zoom in to the skylight at the center of the building between Grids 2 and 3 and D and E. For Constraints ➤ Base Offset From Level. select System Family: Sloped Glazing. enter 600. you create additional types of curtain systems: a sloped glazing system. 4 On the Design Bar. 764 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . TIP To chain select all the walls. 9 On the Design Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint.Additional Curtain Systems In this lesson. click Pick Walls.

1 In the Project Browser. 13 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. This completes the exercise for creating a sloped glazing system. 15 Select the grid lines that define the edges of each panel in the sloped glazing. you embed curtain walls into other walls to create a storefront system. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. under Floor Plans. Storefront System In this exercise. 17 On the View Control Bar. under 3D Views. double-click GROUND FLOOR. select Entire Grid Line. 14 On the Options Bar. double-click Southeast Isometric. 16 On the Design Bar. 11 On the View Control Bar. 12 Zoom in to the skylight. click Mullion. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 2 Zoom in to the wall at the right of the model.10 In the Project Browser. click Modify. Storefront System | 765 . 18 Save the file.

6 Start the wall 1200 mm from one end of the wall on the wall centerline. 766 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems .You are going to place a storefront system in this wall. You can place the curtain wall right inside this wall. and enter 2400. click Wall. 5 On the Options Bar. select Unconnected for Height. 4 In the Type Selector. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. 7 Sketch a curtain wall along the wall centerline to the approximate length shown. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

10 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. To see how the grid layout is defined. This means that the panel heights will be exactly 2400 mm. 12 Select the storefront wall. 11 Zoom in to the new storefront wall. enter 10200 mm. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. Storefront System | 767 . For this wall. The storefront wall already has a curtain grid layout.The curtain wall cuts the original wall. click Modify. The type parameters under the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern headings create the predefined layout. 14 After you have looked at the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern parameters. and the Spacing (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to 2400 mm. and click . click Edit/New. the Layout (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to Maximum Spacing. click OK to close the Type Properties dialog and return to the Element Properties dialog that displays the instance parameters. 9 On the Design Bar. This specifies an exact length for the wall. and the Spacing (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to 1524 mm. you can look at the properties of the storefront wall. The Layout (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to Fixed Distance. even if the wall height changes. This indicates that the curtain grids are placed at even intervals along the length of the curtain wall at a distance up to 1524 mm. which is specified in the type. and press ENTER. double-click Southeast Isometric. 8 Click the temporary dimension.

enter 45 and for Horizontal Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. center. For more information about these curtain wall parameters. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Justification. By setting the Angle value. the Number is the number of vertical curtain grids you want on the curtain instance. The Justification specifies the vertical spacing at the beginning. 768 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . or end. In this exercise. you create a curtain wall based on 2 lines that have been sketched at different elevations on the model. 1 In the Project Browser. you learned how to embed a curtain wall and set up a grid layout. Under Vertical Grid Pattern. Under the Vertical Grid Pattern heading. This type of curtain system is known as a ruled curtain system. you are rotating the grid lines to an angle on the face of the panel. 20 Save the file. and Offset. see the Revit Architecture help. Curtain System by Lines In this exercise. 19 Select a curtain grid. under 3D Views. double-click Southeast Isometric. This completes the exercise on creating a storefront. click Mullion. The Horizontal Grid Pattern counterparts are the same but for the perpendicular direction. You see these same parameters for Horizontal Grid Pattern. 18 On the Options Bar. 17 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 15 To see how these parameters can affect the wall. select All Empty Segments. The Offset is the distance the spacing starts from the justification point. 16 Click OK. 2 Orient the view to the storefront wall you added in the last exercise. enter 15.The Instance Parameters list includes additional parameters that define the curtain grid layout. you find Number. Angle. for Vertical Grid Pattern ➤ Angle.

Curtain System by Lines | 769 .3 On the View Control Bar. making sure Lines : Model Lines : Line is highlighted. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Curtain System ➤ Curtain System by Lines. Press TAB to select the line if it does not immediately highlight. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. and highlight the model line. 6 Click the highlighted line. 5 Place the cursor at the top edge of the SECOND FLOOR slab. Watch the Status Bar and Tooltips to be sure you are highlighting the model line. 7 Place the cursor at the top edge of the TOP OF ROOF level.

11 Click OK. you can vary the steps to style the system the way you want. 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. 770 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . Notice there are very few properties for the ruled curtain system. A ruled curtain system does not have all the properties of a curtain wall. Next. 10 Select the panel. 9 On the Design Bar. but now that you have created a ruled curtain system. you subdivide the ruled curtain system using curtain grids. click Curtain Grid. 13 Using the midpoint curtain grid snaps. NOTE The next few steps are intended as a guide to finish the system. A panel between the 2 lines is created.8 Select the highlighted line. and then eighths. quarters. place horizontal grids that divide the panel into halves. and click .

16 In the Type Selector. and the lesson on creating additional curtain systems. you replace some of the glazed panels in front of the ceilings with solid panels. 14 Place vertical grids that snap to the midpoints on the panel and divide the panel into halves. In this lesson you learned to create a sloped glazing system. 18 Save the file. and then eighths. and define a ruled curtain system. embed a curtain system inside another wall. Finally. right-click. 17 Change the THIRD FLOOR level panels to solid.This is similar to placing the grids on the curved curtain system. This completes the exercise for creating a ruled curtain system. quarters. 15 Highlight a top level glazed panel. select System Panel : Solid. Curtain System by Lines | 771 . and click Select Panels ➤ Along Grid 2.

772 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems .

you learn how to add fascia. In addition. you learn how to create different types of roofs in Revit Architecture 2008. 773 .Roofs 19 In this tutorial. gutters. and soffits to the roofs that you create.

and then select Reference Plane : Breezeway. You create the roof by sketching the top roof profile and extruding it over the length of the breezeway. you need to select a work plane to use as a sketching guide. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 6 In the Roof Reference Level and Offset dialog. and then click Open View to select a section view parallel to the work plane in which to sketch the roof. 774 | Chapter 19 Roofs . including hip. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You do not need to create the work plane. verify Level 3 is selected for Level. 5 In the Go To View dialog. and mansard roofs. you create roofs from footprints and by extrusion. shed. 1 In the Project Browser. select Name. you learn to create several different types of roofs. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. and double-click Level 1.Creating Roofs In this lesson.rvt. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 In the Work Plane dialog. gable. a work plane named Breezeway exists for the purpose of this exercise. 4 Click OK. Creating an Extruded Roof In this exercise. expand Views (all). you create an extruded roof over a breezeway between a house and a garage. Before you can sketch the roof profile. verify that Section: Section1 is selected. and click OK. expand Floor Plans. and open Metric\m_Roofs. In this lesson. click Training Files.

8 Sketch the first reference plane 450 mm to the left of the left exterior breezeway wall face. TIP Instead of trying to place the reference plane in its exact location initially. To change where the temporary dimension is measured from (face. click the blue square on the witness line. centerline. and so on). 10 Sketch a vertical reference plane centered between the two vertical walls. Creating an Extruded Roof | 775 . Before you can sketch the profile of the roof. click Ref Plane. 9 Sketch a similar reference plane 450 mm to the right of the right exterior breezeway wall face. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. you need to define four reference planes to help determine key points on the profile sketch.The section view is automatically cropped around the area where you want to sketch the roof. you can place it in the general location and then zoom in and use temporary dimensions. This helps ensure that the plane is measured from the face of the wall rather than from the wall centerline.

Next. Use automatic snaps to link the chain to the reference plane intersections. sketch the roof profile. 776 | Chapter 19 Roofs . 14 Sketch two sloped lines to create the roof profile. Begin the sketch at the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the horizontal plane. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. select Chain. click Finish Sketch to complete the roof. 13 On the Options Bar. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Lines.11 Sketch a horizontal reference plane 450 mm below Level 2.

The roof is automatically extruded from the Breezeway work plane in one direction. 19 On the Tools toolbar. 20 Select the breezeway roof edge. Next. The roof should resemble the following illustration. Creating an Extruded Roof | 777 . 17 On the Tools toolbar. 16 On the View toolbar. and then select the exterior face of the wall. click . and then select the exterior wall face of the garage to join the roof to the garage wall. click . press TAB. Use the Join Roof command again to join the opposite end of the breezeway roof to the exterior wall of the house that joins the breezeway. Notice that the breezeway roof penetrates the house walls inappropriately. 18 Select the edge of the roof. use the Join Roofs command to adjust the length of the roof and join the roof edges to the exterior walls. click to display the model.

778 | Chapter 19 Roofs . you create a gable roof over a garage from a footprint.The breezeway walls still penetrate the roof. click Attach for Top/Base. 24 On the Options Bar. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. “Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint” on page 778. click to view the completed breezeway roof in the model. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. 26 On the View toolbar. 23 Select one of the breezeway walls. expand Sections (Type 1). click Modify. 25 Select the roof to join the wall tops to the roof. press CTRL. so you next attach the breezeway walls to the breezeway roof. You use roof slope lines to define the roof gable ends. expand Views (all). You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. 21 In the Project Browser. and double-click Section 1. and select the second wall.

8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. clear Defines slope. By default. Verify that a dashed green line displays to the right of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. 2 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. and enter 600 for Overhang. verify that Defines slope is selected. you set the roof slope as a property of the footprint slope lines. m_Roofs. Next. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 5 Select the parallel wall on the right to define the second roof slope line. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. click Modify. select both slope definition lines. the roof slope has a 750 mm rise over a 1000 mm run. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. 4 Select the left vertical wall of the garage to define the first roof slope line.rvt. 7 Select the two horizontal walls to create a closed loop and complete the roof footprint. 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 6 On the Options Bar. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint | 779 . edit the properties of the two vertical slope definition lines to change the roof pitch. 3 On the Options Bar.To complete the gable roof with the correct pitch. Verify that a dashed green line displays to the left of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. 9 Press CTRL. click Pick Walls. click .

10 In the Element Properties dialog. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. click Pick Walls. clear Defines slope. 13 On the View toolbar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. “Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint” on page 780. click Yes to attach the highlighted exterior garage walls to the roof. NOTE You add the slope defining lines in a later step. When you complete the roof.rvt. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. and double-click Level 3. expand Floor Plans. The roof requires an opening to accommodate a chimney. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. the opening that you sketched becomes a void in the roof. enter 500 mm for Rise/1000 to change the roof slope. click Finish Roof. 3 On the Options Bar. 12 When you see the informational dialog. you add a main gable roof to a house from a footprint. 11 On the Design Bar. you sketch a closed rectangular opening around the chimney. expand Views (all). click to view the gable roof and attached walls in the model. 780 | Chapter 19 Roofs . m_Roofs. After you define the roof slope lines and complete the footprint. and enter 600 for Overhang. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Dimensions. and click OK. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint In this exercise.

13 On the Options Bar. add new slope lines to the roof. and then verify that a dashed green line displays to the exterior side of the walls. sketch the chimney opening. 6 Click to select all the walls. select Defines Slope. press TAB. click .5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls. Next. Next. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan. 9 Using automatic snaps. click Lines. 11 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 12 Select the uppermost horizontal line. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 8 On the Options Bar. 10 On the View menu. 14 Select one of the shorter line segments shown in the following illustration. sketch a rectangle from the upper left corner of the exterior chimney face to the lower right corner of the exterior chimney face. click Modify. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint | 781 .

3 On the Options Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 17 When you see the informational dialog. The sketched lines cannot overlap or intersect each other. click Finish Roof. m_Roofs. Verify that a dashed green line displays on the exterior side of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the walls. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. and double-click Level 2. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. close the roof sketch. expand Views (all). 782 | Chapter 19 Roofs . Roof sketches must create a closed loop before you can create the roof. select Defines slope.rvt. click Yes to attach the walls to the roof.15 On the Options bar. and enter 600 for Overhang. “Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint” on page 782. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Next. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click to view the new roof in the model. you create a hip roof over the rear of a house from a footprint. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. expand Floor Plans. select Defines Slope. 18 On the View toolbar. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 5 Select the exterior edges of the three walls that create the rear addition to the house. 1 In the Project Browser. click Pick Walls.

13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 783 . Next. click Finish Roof. 16 On the View toolbar. 7 On the Options Bar. clear Defines Slope. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. enter 600 for Base Offset From Level. 14 Under Constraints. 9 On the Tools toolbar. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. using the following illustration for guidance. select the left vertical slope definition line. 12 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. click to display the model. 8 Select the exterior edge of the uppermost horizontal wall of the main building. 11 To trim the first line segment. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. and then specify a point near the midpoint of the line that you sketched along the wall of the main building.6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click . and click . Next. and click OK. 10 On the Options Bar. click Roof Properties. raise the roof 600 mm above the current level. click Lines. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected.

click Attach for Top/Base on the Options Bar. join the two remaining walls to the roof. click . click Modify. 22 Using the same method that you used previously. Notice that the new hip roof does not properly join to the back of the house. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. and then select the edge of the main roof to join the roofs. 19 Select one of the walls under the hip roof. Press and hold CTRL to select and join the two remaining walls at the same time. 21 Click to use the Dynamic View tool to view the remaining walls that support the hip roof. 24 Select the edge of the hip roof. Next. use the Join Roof command to fix the roof. 784 | Chapter 19 Roofs .17 Click to use the Dynamic View tool to view the back of the house. 23 On the Tools toolbar. 20 Select the roof to join the wall top to the roof. Use the Attach Top/Base command to join the walls to the roof. Notice that the walls do not join to the roof. 18 On the Design Bar.

3 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and then click to select all three of the entry way walls. you create a shed roof over the entrance to a house from a footprint. expand Floor Plans. Verify that a green dashed line displays around the exterior side of the walls before clicking to select the walls. clear Defines Slope. m_Roofs. press TAB. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls that defines the entry way. and enter 300 for Overhang. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. enter 0 for Overhang. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint | 785 .rvt. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint In this exercise.The properly joined roof should resemble the following illustration. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 6 On the Options Bar. “Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint” on page 785. click Pick Walls. 1 In the Project Browser. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and double-click Level 2. 4 On the Options Bar. expand Views (all).

Next. 19 Click 20 Click on the View toolbar to display the model. click Roof Properties. 16 Under Constraints. enter -600 for Base Offset From Level. 10 To trim the first line segment. and then select a point near the midpoint of the upper horizontal line you sketched earlier. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. to use the Dynamic View tool to rotate the model. 11 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. and press ENTER. 18 Click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. 9 On the Options Bar. Next. click Modify. and click OK. 14 Enter 500 mm for the rise value to change the roof slope. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. 8 On the Tools toolbar. 786 | Chapter 19 Roofs . you add a slope-defining line. click . and select the lower horizontal line at the front of the roof. Notice the rise value is displayed next to the slope marker. click Finish Roof to complete the roof.7 Select the exterior face of the main wall to close the sketch. select Defines slope. select the left vertical roof line. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. 13 On the Options Bar. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep.

Verify that the reference planes are located inside the shed roof sketch. Next. and select the middle segment of the slope defining line. and double-click Level 2.21 Proceed to the next exercise. click Ref Plane. click Split Walls and Lines. you need to add two reference planes. Next. you add slope arrows to the shed roof. 9 On the Tools menu. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. you need to split the slope defining line into three segments. 7 On the Options Bar. 4 In the Project Browser. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof In this exercise. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. “Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof” on page 787. m_Roofs. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof | 787 . add two new slope arrows.rvt. click Edit to activate the roof footprint sketch. click Modify. and enter 600 for Offset. 11 On the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. clear Defines Slope. and zoom in around the shed roof footprint. To help locate the position of each split. Before you can add slope arrows. 8 Select the two vertical sketch lines. 14 On the Options Bar. expand 3D Views. expand Floor Plans. 12 On the Options Bar. expand Views (all). 10 Split the slope defining line where the reference planes intersect as shown in the following illustration. and double-click 3D. verify is selected. 2 Select the shed roof over the entrance of the house. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click . 3 On the Options Bar. expand Views (all). change the longest slope line segment (the middle segment) so that it no longer defines slope. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Slope Arrow. 5 On the View menu.

. and click 19 Under Constraints. 20 Under Dimensions. 21 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 4 Select the two gable end lines (the lines without slope definition). When eave heights differ. ■ 16 Repeat steps 13 . expand Views (all). click Finish Roof to complete the roof. “Aligning Roof Eaves” on page 788.rvt. The head should snap to the midpoint of the line as in the previous steps. and move the cursor to place the arrow. select both slope arrows. 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE If the front wall is separated from the roof. and then click OK.15 Sketch a slope arrow from the reference plane to the midpoint of the lower horizontal roof line: ■ Select the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the roof line to specify the location of the slope arrow tail. you convert the gable roof over the garage to a hip roof and use the Align Eaves tool to adjust the eave heights. use the Attach Top/Base command to join the wall to the roof. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. m_Roofs. 2 Select the gable roof over the garage.15 to add the second slope arrow. Aligning Roof Eaves In this exercise. and double-click Garage Roof. the adjacent eave heights must align. you can use the Align Eaves tool to align them. 22 Click on the View toolbar to display the model. select Defines Slope. 788 | Chapter 19 Roofs . 18 Press CTRL. and then select it to specify the location of the slope arrow head. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. enter 500 for Rise/1000. 3 On the Options Bar. click Edit. When you sketch a hip roof. select Slope for Specify. Move the cursor along the roof line until the midpoint displays. click Modify. 5 On the Options Bar. Begin the tail at the right reference plane. expand Floor Plans. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.

Creating a Mansard Roof In this exercise. enter 800 mm for Rise/1000. 13 On the View toolbar. click Finish Roof. Notice how the overhang adjusts to match the eave height of the first eave. you must select one eave to use to align both eaves. click . on the File menu. This dimension is the height of the eave measured from the sketch plane. “Creating a Mansard Roof” on page 789. The eave lines display with a dimension. on the Options Bar.6 With the two gable end lines selected. click Align Eaves. 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. click to display the model. select a method to align the eaves. select Adjust Overhang to align the eaves by adjusting the overhang to match the eave height of the first eave. and click OK. 14 If you want to save your changes. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. you create a mansard roof by cutting off a hip roof at a specific level and adding another roof on top of it. 10 On the Options Bar. When aligning eaves. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 9 Select the left vertical eave to use to align the eaves. 11 Select both the horizontal eave lines. under Dimensions. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Mansard Roof | 789 . Next. click Save As. 12 On the Design Bar.

click to display the model.rvt. under Constraints. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\m_Mansard_Roof. 790 | Chapter 19 Roofs . click Modify. on the Options Bar. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you constrain the current roof so it does not rise above Level 3. expand Views (all). 6 On the View toolbar.Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click . click Training Files. 1 In the Project Browser. expand Elevations. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. select Level 3 for Cutoff Level. and double-click North. 5 Click OK to cut the top of the roof off at level 3. 3 Select the roof and. Notice the model has four defined levels: In the next steps.

Creating Fascia. 19 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 7 In the Project Browser. and then select Defines slope. expand Views (all). 17 On the View toolbar. and soffits. 14 On the Options Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.Next. 11 Select the four edges of the roof cutoff. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 18 If you want to save your changes. click Save As. After you create a roof. expand Floor Plans. gutters. and Soffits In this lesson. and double-click Level 3. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Gutters. press TAB. and soffits in Revit Architecture. and select the remaining three lines. create a new roof that starts at level 3 and completes the mansard roof. Creating Fascia. click Modify. click to display the model with the complete mansard roof. click . enter 750 mm for Rise/1000. 10 On the Options Bar. click Lines. under Dimensions. you can easily create its fascia. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Gutters. gutters. click Finish Roof. 13 Select one of the roof cutoff lines. and Soffits | 791 . and click OK. on the File menu. click . you learn how to create roof fascia.

6 In the Element Properties dialog. click Training Files. and click OK twice. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 11 Select the top edge of the roof to place the fascia.rvt. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. and open Metric\Families\Profiles\Roofs. select M_Fascia-Built-Up. select M_Fascia-Built-Up: 38 x 184mm x 38 x 286 for Profile. 8 In the Name dialog. and click OK. 12 Select all of the roof top edges to place the fascia around the building. 5 On the Options Bar.Creating Roof Fascia In this exercise. enter Built-up Fascia. and open Common\c_Condominium. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. click . 1 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. 792 | Chapter 19 Roofs . 3 Press CTRL. you learn to use the Host Sweep command to create fascia on the roof of a condominium. click Training Files.rfa and M_Gutter-Cove. and click Open. click Edit/New to access the type properties of the fascia. click Duplicate. 10 Move the cursor to the top edge of the roof.rfa. under Construction. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

Creating Gutters In this exercise. 5 Enter Cove Shape Gutter for Name. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Gutter. 2 On the Options Bar. click . and click OK three times. and click OK. 10 Click to place the gutter.rvt. click Duplicate. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click in the Value field for Material. 7 Under Materials and Finishes. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. Creating Gutters | 793 . under Construction. select Metal-Aluminum for Name. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. and then click 8 In the Materials dialog. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. . click Modify to exit the Fascia command. “Creating Gutters” on page 793. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you use the Host Sweep command to place a gutter at the bottom edge of the roof on a condominium building model.13 On the Design Bar. 3 In the Properties dialog. select M_Gutter-Cove: 125 x 125mm for Profile. 9 Move the cursor to the bottom edge of the roof. c_Condominium. click Edit/New.

expand Floor Plans. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. “Creating Soffits” on page 794. click Roof ➤ Roof Soffit.11 Continue to add gutters to the other roof edges of the building model. Creating Soffits In this exercise. c_Condominium.rvt. 3 On the Design Bar. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. 4 Select the roof. you learn how to place a roof soffit. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 794 | Chapter 19 Roofs . You add the soffit underneath the roof of the condominium building model that you used in the previous exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. click Pick Roofs. expand Views. and double-click Roof.

expand 3D Views. 9 If you want to save your changes. expand Views (all). click Save As. and double-click 3D. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and then select the soffit to join them. Creating Soffits | 795 . click Finish Sketch. on the File menu. 7 On the Tools menu. 8 Select the roof. click Join Geometry. 6 In the Project Browser.5 On the Design Bar. 10 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. Notice that the geometry of the roof and the soffit overlap.

796 | Chapter 19 Roofs .

The first step in area analysis is the definition of area schemes. Each area scheme can have multiple area plans. you learn how to use area analysis tools to define and label spatial relationships. 797 . Two schemes are provided by default: Gross Building and Rentable. You can edit the rentable scheme and create additional schemes. You then create area plans for each scheme as needed.Area Analysis 20 In this tutorial. Finally. you create area schedules and color fill plans based on the area schemes and plans.

■ ■ Gross Building: Total constructed area of a building. These schemes define spatial relationships. under Length. click OK. For Rounding. For Unit Suffix. select 2 decimal places. you create a color fill plan and area schedule based on the area schemes and plans. 798 | Chapter 20 Area Analysis . select Square meters. right-click in the Design Bar. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. 2 In the Project Units dialog. There are two schemes currently defined: Gross Building and Rentable. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Units. select mm. If you are using metric units. NOTE Images in this exercise reflect Imperial values. 7 In the Room and Area Settings dialog. your values will be different. select Millimeters. Creating Area Schemes and Plans In this exercise. Click OK. TIP If the Room and Area tab is not visible. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. View predefined area schemes 5 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. and verify that Level 1 is the active view. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. click Settings. For Unit Suffix. click the Area Schemes tab. 3 Under Area. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. expand Views (all). Set units of measurement to metric 1 On the Settings menu. 4 In the Project Units dialog. and click Room and Area.Using Area Analysis Tools In this lesson. select m2 Click OK. and open Common\c_Area. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas.rvt. Rentable: Area measurements based on the standard method for measuring floor area in office buildings. In the final exercise. click Project Units. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Units. click Training Files.

13 In the Project Browser. When you select Yes in this dialog. 9 Click Cancel. 11 In the New Area Plan dialog. you can create a copy of the area plan with subsequent changes to the original area plan duplicated in the copied plan. 12 When the informational dialog displays. Create a gross building area plan 10 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. click the Room Calculations tab. ■ At specified height: You specify the height above the level that area is calculated. as well as selecting whether to have room volumes calculated automatically. Click OK.Although you can create new schemes that are based on the Rentable scheme. notice there is a new view type called Area Plans (Gross Building). do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Gross Building for Type. click Area Plan. forming a closed loop. click Yes to create the boundary lines automatically. under Views (all). and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 799 . you must manually add these boundary lines. ■ ■ Verify that the scale is 1/8'' = 1'-0''. NOTE If you clear Do not duplicate existing views. area boundary lines are automatically placed on the exterior walls of the building model. or 0. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. the system-computed height defaults to the level. You can specify the boundary location to be used for room area calculations. You can specify the height where the room area is calculated. Expand Area Plans (Gross Building). If you select No. ■ At system computed height: Generally defaults to or 1000 mm above the level. it is not necessary in this exercise. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. NOTE If the room area includes a room separation line. 8 In the Room and Area Setting dialog.

Click OK. click Area Plan. To modify the area. NOTE An area tag measures area based on the area plan boundary lines. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. The Area Tag command is used to tag existing areas. 17 In the New Area Plan dialog. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. rather than the area tag. An area is represented by two crossed reference lines. NOTE The Area command is used to create and tag new areas. you create a new area plan for rentable space. 18 Click Yes to automatically define the area boundary lines.14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. Create a rentable area scheme and plan 16 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. and store area. The area reference lines are for design purposes only and do not print. you must select one of the reference lines. A room tag measures the area enclosed within the room-defining walls at the boundary location specified in Room and Area Settings. Next. common areas. click Area. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Rentable for Type. 15 Click in the middle of the room on the lower left corner of the building model to place the tag. 800 | Chapter 20 Area Analysis . You add and use area boundary lines to define the office areas.

you can either draw them or pick them. you can select the option "Apply Area Rules" so that the area boundary lines adjust to the area type. if the window glass is greater than 50% of the wall height. click Area. 24 In the upper left corner of the building model. 23 On the Design Bar.Notice that the area boundary lines are on the inner face of the exterior walls. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 801 . When you add area boundary lines. click inside the middle of the room to place the tag. 22 Select all the interior walls by clicking them one at a time. Although the rule for these lines is to follow the inside face of the wall. click Area Boundary. Notice that there is a new view type called Area Plans (Rentable). Add area boundary lines 20 On the Design Bar. If you do not select this option. Expand Area Plans (Rentable). and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. When you pick the walls. the area boundary lines do not update automatically. verify that Pick Lines and Apply Area Rules are selected. NOTE The area lines follow some of the windows hosted by the exterior wall. 19 Zoom out until you can see the entire building model. 21 On the Options Bar. the area boundary lines are placed on the face of the glass.

NOTE If you have difficulty selecting the area. click . 26 Select the area you added to the room in the upper left corner of the building model. and click to select the area. click . 802 | Chapter 20 Area Analysis . 27 On the Options Bar. 31 On the Design Bar. click Area. click Modify. Click OK. 30 Add the area to the room on the lower left corner of the building model. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. 32 On the Options Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Tenant 1 for Name. click Modify and select the area. 29 On the Design Bar.25 On the Design Bar. place the cursor over the Area Tag and press Tab until Area displays in the status bar. Select Office area for Area Type.

and select Major Vertical Penetration for Area Type. Click OK. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Tenant 2 for Name. 35 Add an area to the building model core.33 In the Element Properties dialog. Name the areas Tenant 3 and Tenant 4. and Tenant 4 in the lower right. enter Core for Name. 34 Using the techniques learned in previous steps. Select Office area for Area Type. In the Element Properties dialog. add an area in the common space to the right of the double doors hosted by the west exterior wall. Tenant 3 should be in the upper right. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Circulation for Name. 36 Add the last two areas to the two spaces on the right side of the building model. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 803 . Select Building Common Area for Area Type. Click OK. and select Store Area for Area Type.

the area boundary lines have adjusted to the new area type. In this exercise.Notice that within the two store areas. click Color Scheme Legend. 2 Move the cursor under the left corner of the building model. 38 Navigate to your preferred directory. and click Save. 804 | Chapter 20 Area Analysis . NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. and click to place the legend. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. name the project Area-in progress. In the next exercise. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule.rvt. Create a color scheme legend 1 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 37 On the File menu. NOTE This project is required in its current state if you intend to continue with the next exercise. click Save. You added and modified the area boundaries and applied area tags to define spaces. you used the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans In this exercise.

click the Fields tab. 5 In the New Schedule dialog.3 When the dialog displays. under Category. and click OK. The fields you selected in the Schedule Properties dialog are displayed as column headings within the schedule. 6 In the Schedules Properties dialog. 9 Click OK. Create an area schedule 4 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans | 805 . click Schedule/Quantities. select Area Type and click Add. click OK to make the required visibility setting changes. 8 Add the fields Area and Name. 7 Under Available fields. select Areas (Rentable).

806 | Chapter 20 Area Analysis .

807 . curtain systems.Massing 21 You can use massing tools during the initial design process to convey a potential design concept without the level of detail usually found in a project. you can specify the view to display massing elements. You can create and modify the geometric shapes that aggregate to form the building model shell. you convert to the basic shell elements of the building model. After you make building elements. Massing elements and building elements are not linked automatically. building elements. In this tutorial. and roofs. After you create the basic geometric shape of the building model. you then need to update the building face. or both. If you modify a massing face. you can pick massing faces and make building model elements such as walls. floors. you create a new building model using the various massing tools to add and cut mass. You then modify the building model in both the massing view and the shell view to see how changes propagate throughout the project. At any time.

under Floor Plans. click Create Mass. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model In this exercise. 3 Click OK in the Show Mass mode informational dialog. and cutting geometry. and open Metric\m_Massing_Start. 5 On the Design Bar. You assign the default wall. the building model uses those element types to define the walls. and click Massing.Using Massing Tools In this lesson. sweeps. TIP If the Massing tab is not available on the Design Bar. and floors.rvt. under Views (all). Adding a mass element 1 In the Project Browser. The Design Bar title changes to Mass. 808 | Chapter 21 Massing . you create the basic geometric shape of the building model using various massing tools. you create the basic geometric shape of a building model by adding solid and void extrusions. and roof types so that when you convert the massing elements to shell elements in the final exercise. double-click Level 1. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. In the left pane of the Open dialog. roofs. right-click anywhere over the Design Bar. 4 Click OK in the Name dialog to accept the default name Mass 1. click Training Files. floor. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar.

12 On the Design Bar. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 809 . 19 Click the edges of the form to create sketch lines as shown. click the Value for Material. under Floor Plans. 8 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 1. click Lines. 9 In the Element Properties dialog.6 On the Sketch Design Bar. under Materials and Finishes. and then click . on the Options Bar. Watch the Status Bar in the lower-left corner of the screen to be sure you are highlighting the Form : Extrusion : Shape Handle. select Mass (Opaque) for Name. 13 On the View toolbar. click Finish Sketch. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. and click OK. This means the sketch line is placed 1550 mm from the position you pick with the cursor. click . and click 17 On the Options Bar. 15 On the Design Bar. under Constraints. Create next extrusion form 14 In the Project Browser. 10 In the Materials dialog. 18 Place the cursor in the drawing area on an edge of the existing form so that the edge is highlighted. enter 1550 mm for the Offset. 16 On the Sketch Design Bar. and click 7 Sketch the shape as shown using the exact values. under Views (all). and click OK. TIP You may want to dimension and constrain the lines to maintain the exact dimensions. click Lines. enter 25000 for Extrusion End. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. click Extrusion Properties. on the Options Bar.

Be sure to click to the inside of the extrusion. and click OK. 28 In the Work Plane dialog. double-click West. 20 On the Design Bar. 24 On the Design Bar. under Views (all). select Pick a plane. 30 Click to select the face. under Materials and Finishes. TIP If necessary. 29 In the drawing area. 25 In the Project Browser. and click OK. enter 25000 for Extrusion Start and 27500 for Extrusion End. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. The second form is on top of the first form. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. click Extrusion Properties. select Mass (Transparent) for Name. under Elevations (Building Elevation). and then click . under Constraints. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Blend. 810 | Chapter 21 Massing . Continue creation of next massing form 26 In the Project Browser. highlight the larger form. and click OK. click the Value for Material. press TAB to highlight the entire face. 22 In the Materials dialog. 27 On the Design Bar. under Views (all). double-click {3D} to see the results. click Finish Sketch.

you draw a sketch line that acts as a construction line to create an arc. 33 On the Options Bar. click . click . click Lines. 36 On the Options Bar. 37 Sketch the arc as shown with the top of the arc snapping to the top of the construction line. and click Arc passing through three points from the menu. Next. and click to select the line start point. and click on the Options Bar. Sketch the blend base 32 Select the top of the larger extrusion as shown. TIP If you do not see this option. click the arrow next to the drawing options. 34 Place the cursor at the midpoint of the sketch line as shown. The triangle indicates that the cursor is at the midpoint. 35 Sketch a line 6000 mm up as shown. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 811 .31 On the Sketch Design Bar.

click Edit Top. 47 On the Options Bar. click 48 Create an arc as shown. 42 Move the cursor straight up and click at the top horizontal line of the smaller extrusion as shown. under Views (all). on the Options Bar. 44 In the Project Browser. double-click East. click Lines and. under Elevations (Building Elevation). . 40 On the Edit toolbar. click 46 Sketch the horizontal line as shown. 45 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 812 | Chapter 21 Massing . .38 On the Design Bar. Sketching the blend top 43 On the Design Bar. 39 Select the arc and the horizontal line. click . and delete the vertical construction line. 41 Click the cursor at the midpoint of the horizontal sketch line as shown.

50 In the Element Properties dialog. click Blend Properties. 51 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. verify that Mass (Opaque) is selected for Material and that -92000 is specified for Second End. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model In this exercise. click . you use the massing tools to cut geometry from the shapes you have created. 52 On the View toolbar. you created two extrusions and a blend that form the basic geometric shape of the building model. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model | 813 . Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model.49 On the Design Bar. you use a void extrusion to cut geometry from one of the massing shapes you added in the previous exercise. In this exercise. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the resulting building model. 53 Proceed to the next exercise. and click OK. In the next exercise.

When sketching the void extrusions in the steps that follow.Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 2 In the drawing area. under Floor Plans. click Lines and. 12 On the Design Bar. as shown. These reference planes act primarily as sketching aids. place three more reference planes 15000 mm apart from left to right. 1 In the Project Browser. Sketch extrusion voids 8 On the Design Bar. 13 Under Constraints. 814 | Chapter 21 Massing . click NOTE If the file is currently in shaded mode. double-click Level 1. 6 Place another reference plane 15000 mm to the right of the first reference plane. 5 Place the cursor near the left edge of the massing element so that the edge is highlighted. When sketching each extrusion. click Void Form ➤ Void Extrusion. 11 Sketch two additional void extrusions as shown. and sketch the first void extrusion as shown. m_Massing_Start. on the Options Bar. on the View Control Bar. 15 On the Design Bar. you specify the intersection of the reference planes and the top and bottom edges of the massing element. and then click Hidden Line. snap the corners to the intersections. click and select Chain. 9 On the Design Bar. 4 On the Options bar. 14 Click OK. 10 Enter SI for intersection snap. enter 12000 for Extrusion End. 7 Using the same technique. and 0 for Extrusion Start. click Ref Plane.rvt. click Extrusion Properties. click Finish Sketch. select the mass. and place the first reference plane 15000 mm to the right. click and enter 15000 for Offset. under Views (all). Add reference planes 3 On the Mass tab of the Design bar.

19 Save the file as m_Massing_Complete. and click OK. click Family Types. In this exercise. You then load that mass family file and others into a project. enter 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm for Name. click Training Files. click New. Finally. Using Mass Family Files in a Project In this lesson. under Other.rvt. 3 In the Name dialog. Creating New Mass Family Types In this exercise. click Save As.rfa. and 18000 mm for Depth. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.16 On the View toolbar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 17 On the Mass Design Bar. you open a predefined mass family file and create new types from it. 12000 mm for Height. and open Metric\Families\Massing\Box. you create new family types from a mass family file. you cut voids through an extrusion you added in the first exercise. click Finish Mass. click . You place several instances of the mass families into the project. Creating three new family types 1 On the Design Bar. 2 In the Family Types dialog. you use the Join Geometry command to join several instances of the mass elements. 4 In the Family Types dialog. and click Apply. 18 On the File menu. Using Mass Family Files in a Project | 815 . enter 15000 mm for Width.

You also load other existing mass families and place them.rvt. 6 Enter 68000 mm for Width. 7 Click New and enter 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm for Name. and click Apply. you opened a mass family file and created three new types of this family file. 9 Click OK. Loading and Placing New Mass Families In this exercise.5 Click New and enter 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm for Name. and 6000 mm for Depth. and 9000 mm for Depth. TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model. and open Metric\m_Massing_In-place. and click OK. 1 If not already selected. and click OK.rfa. 816 | Chapter 21 Massing . 11 Save the file as Box-Training. and click Apply. 8 Enter 46000 mm for Width. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 11000 mm for Height. click on the View toolbar to show the massing model. In this exercise. 10 On the File menu. you load and place the new family types that you created from the previous exercise. click Save As. 18000 mm for Height. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to accurately place the mass families. 25 In the drawing area. 12 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material instance parameter. 21 On the Options Bar. click Training Files. 4 On the File menu. click Modify. under Views (all).rfa. 24 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 5 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 22 Place the cursor in the drawing area. Arc Dome. 9 Place the box mass family on the in-place mass family as shown. select Triangle: 15000 x 45000 x 10500. select the 3 boxes. Loading and Placing New Mass Families | 817 . 10 On the Design Bar. 7 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. and click . 3 On the View Control Bar. 20 In the Type Selector. and open the Metric\Families\Massing folder. Semi Barrel Vault. 14 In the Type Selector. and click . 6 Open the Box-Training. and use the Move command on the Edit toolbar to place the triangle as shown. click Place Mass.2 In the Project Browser. double-click Site. 15 Place 3 of these box families on the larger box family as shown. enter 90 for Angle. 8 In the Type Selector. 13 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar.rfa. 18 Specify Mass (Opaque) for the Material instance parameter. select the triangle. 11 Select the box. select Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm. click Modify. and Triangle. and click OK twice. select Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. 17 Press CTRL. and click OK twice. 23 On the Options Bar. click Place Mass.rfa family files. under Floor Plans. 19 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar.rfa. 16 On the Design Bar. select Rotate after placement. click Place Mass. and click to place the mass.

You also loaded other existing mass families and added them to the building model. 33 On the View toolbar. and click . In the next exercise. In this exercise. select Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm. 28 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. you join these mass elements.26 Select the triangle. Notice that the triangle and the box masses that you just placed all overlap. click Orient ➤ Northeast. 818 | Chapter 21 Massing . and click OK twice. 30 Place the box mass family as shown. you loaded and placed the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. 27 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material instance parameter. and click OK twice. 29 In the Type Selector. click . 31 Select the box and click . click Place Mass. 32 Specify Mass (Opaque) for the Material instance parameter. 34 On the View menu.

rvt file. Join geometry 1 On the View toolbar. you join and modify the mass elements you placed from the previous exercise. and then press ESC to see the result. click 2 On the Tools toolbar. click . 4 Select the triangle. the first mass element selected cuts volume from any subsequently selected mass element. .Joining Mass Elements In this exercise. NOTE When you join geometry. 3 Select the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm mass element as shown. Joining Mass Elements | 819 . Dataset ■ Continue using the m_Massing_In-place.

820 | Chapter 21 Massing . double-click Site. under Floor Plans. and snap to the midpoint of the edge. TIP Pressing SHIFT while dragging the cursor locks the axis orthogonally. Mirror the modified mass element 7 With the smaller box still selected. click 8 On the Options Bar. on the Edit toolbar. 6 Select the right edge of the Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm and drag it to the left edge of the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm as shown. 10 Click to select the mirror axis start point.Modify existing massing elements 5 In the Project Browser. 9 Position the cursor over the upper edge of the middle box. click for Axis. 11 Drag the cursor down to create a vertical axis of reflection as shown. enter SM. under Views (all).

.12 Click to mirror the existing massing element. click 14 On the Tools toolbar. In this exercise. You also modified and mirrored a mass element before joining its geometry with that of another element. click . 17 Press ESC to see the result. you joined mass elements together. The first selected mass element cut geometry from the subsequently selected mass element. Joining Mass Elements | 821 . 15 Select one instance of the modified Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm first. and then select the triangle. 16 Repeat for the other instance of the modified mass element and the triangle. Join geometry 13 On the View toolbar.

under Views (all). Placing semi barrel vaults 6 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. select Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500. 11 Place a semi barrel vault where shown. click Toolbar ➤ Design Options. click . Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_In-place. Mass Elements in Design Options In this exercise. select Rotate after placement.rvt. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to place the mass precisely. click Place Mass. enter 90 degrees for Angle. 4 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. under Floor Plans. clear Curved. and then click OK. do not clear the check mark. 10 On the Options Bar. 5 In the Project Browser. you continue using the same file from the previous lesson. and select the triangle mass element. 8 On the Options Bar. You then make one of the design options the primary one for the model. (If Design Options is already selected. 822 | Chapter 21 Massing . select Sloped (primary). you place the mass elements from the previous exercise into Design Options. click Modify. You add mass elements to design options to experiment with different versions of the design. 9 Place the cursor in the drawing area and click to place the mass. You then switch between different design options to get different versions of the design. 2 On the Window menu. 7 In the Type Selector. 1 On the Design Bar.) 3 On the Design Options toolbar.Using Mass Elements with Design Options In this lesson. double-click Site.

select the 2 semi barrel vaults. click Modify. 18 In the Type Selector. click .12 Place another semi barrel vault as shown. under Views (all). 20 On the Design Bar. and click . double-click North. 23 In the Project Browser. 15 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material property. click Modify. select Arc Dome: 6000R x 2750H. Mass Elements in Design Options | 823 . 19 Place 3 arc domes as shown. 21 In the drawing area. 13 On the Design Bar. and click . Placing arc dome mass elements 17 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. and click OK twice. TIP Use the snap control lines to assist in placing the domes. select the three arc domes. 22 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material property. and click Wireframe. and click OK twice. click Place Mass. under Elevations. 14 In the drawing area. 16 On the View Control Bar.

TIP To find the correct shapes. and click OK.24 On the View Control Bar. 32 Click the value for Design Option. and click OK. 31 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. It will indicate when you locate an arc dome or semi barrel vault. While pressing CTRL. click to select each of the arc domes and semi barrel values. under 3D Views. click the Design Options tab. click Visibility/Graphics. select Curved from the Design Option menu. and watch the status bar. 824 | Chapter 21 Massing . 29 In the Project Browser. and click Wireframe. clear Sloped. 30 On the View menu. 27 On the Design Options toolbar. select Curved. click . 25 Move the three arc domes to the position shown. under Views (all). 28 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. move the cursor over shapes in the drawing. Create a Design Option set 26 Select the 3 arc domes and the 2 semi barrel vaults. click . double-click {3D}.

36 On the File menu. click Make Primary. You then switched between different design options to get different versions of the design. click Save As and save the file as m_Massing_Design_Options. click Training Files. Because it is likely that your client prefers the design option with curved shapes.rvt. and open Metric\m_Massing_Building_Components. and click Close. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating Walls by Picking Faces In this exercise. you pick massing faces to create walls.rvt. click . Creating Building Components from Mass Elements In this lesson.You can now see the shapes that are part of the curved design option. 35 Close the warning that displays. under Option. you placed mass elements into Design Options. 33 On the Design Options toolbar. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 825 . In this exercise. you use building component creation tools to make building components from mass faces. you can make it the primary option. select Curved and. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 34 In the Design Options dialog.

1 In the Project Browser. click Orient ➤ Southeast. 5 In the Type Selector. 10 Select all the faces shown in red. select Basic Wall: Exterior . click Wall by Face. 2 On the View toolbar. under Views (all). click . double-click {3D}. 9 On the Design Bar. click Wall by Face. 7 Place the cursor in the drawing area and select the face of the in-place mass family as shown. The southeast wall of the mass model is now Brick on CMU.Brick on CMU. Creating walls 4 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. and select Wall Centerline for Loc Line. double-click Level 3. under Floor Plans. 826 | Chapter 21 Massing . 3 On the View menu. 6 On the Options Bar. 8 In the Project Browser. TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model. under Views (all). click to show the massing model.

click Wall by Face. select Curtain Wall : Storefront.NOTE If a Warning dialog is displayed. ignore the warning and continue selecting wall faces. 14 In the Project Browser. 15 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 5. 18 Select all the faces shown in red. click Wall by Face. 17 Select the 3 faces shown in red. under Views (all). 13 Select the face indicated by the arrow as shown. under Views (all). 12 On the Design Bar. 11 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. Creating Walls by Picking Faces | 827 . alerting you that the highlighted walls overlap. 16 In the Type Selector. under Floor Plans. under Floor Plans.

19 In the Project Browser. you picked several massing faces and created both basic walls and curtain walls. 23 Open the 3D view to see the results. click . 22 Select all the faces shown in red. 21 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 9. click Wall by Face. under Views (all). you pick massing faces to create floors. If desired.You can ignore the warnings about walls overlapping. Creating Floors by Picking Faces In this exercise. 828 | Chapter 21 Massing . 20 On the View Control Bar. In this exercise. and click Wireframe. under Floor Plans. You can then edit the profile to clean up the overlapping geometry. you can select the overlapping curtain wall. and click Edit Profile on the Options Bar.

7 In the Floor Area Faces dialog. clear Curtain Panels. and click OK. 4 Click OK. and Walls. Curtain Systems. click Floor Area Faces. under Views (all). 1 In the Project Browser. select all levels. 2 On the View menu. 3 On the Model Categories tab. Creating floors 5 Select the in-place mass family Mass 1. double-click {3D}.rvt.Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. click Visibility/Graphics. 6 On the Options Bar. Creating Floors by Picking Faces | 829 .

and select the three 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements and the mirrored 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box masses as shown. 9 On the View menu. select Levels 1-4. 11 On the Options Bar. 830 | Chapter 21 Massing . click Modify. click Orient ➤ Northeast. click Floor Area Faces.8 On the Design Bar. 12 In the Floor Area Faces dialog. 10 Press CTRL. and click OK.

double-click Level 1. 21 Drag a pick box over the entire model to select all the floor area faces. click Floor by Face. select Level 1. 23 On the View toolbar. click Create Floors. 16 On the Options Bar. and select the semi vault barrel mass elements and the 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm box mass element as shown. click Floor Area Faces. 14 On the Options Bar. Creating Floors by Picking Faces | 831 . 20 On the Options Bar.13 On the Design Bar. click . 22 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 15 Press CTRL. 19 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 18 In the Project Browser. clear Exclude Options. verify that Select Multiple is selected. under Floor Plans. under Views (all). 17 In the Floor Area Faces dialog. click Modify.

you pick massing faces to create roofs. 832 | Chapter 21 Massing . This shows you the gross floor area of each mass. you created floors by first creating floor area faces and then picking those faces to create floors. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces In this exercise. In this exercise.24 In the Project Browser. double-click Mass Schedule. You then viewed a massing schedule that listed the gross floor area of each mass in the model. under Schedules/Quantities.

Creating roofs 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. NOTE Each time you select a face on an instance of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element family.rvt. 5 On the Options Bar. 3 Select the top face of the left 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element as shown.400mm. under Views (all). click Create Roof. 6 Create the same roof on the remaining 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. and also on the top faces of the 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box mass elements. select Basic Roof : Generic . 1 In the Project Browser. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces | 833 . click Roof by Face.Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. 4 In the Type Selector. This creates the roof and lets you pick another face to create a new roof. click Create Roof. double-click {3D}.

In this exercise. Curtain Systems. 9 On the Options Bar. select Sloped Glazing in the Type Selector. you created roofs by picking faces of massing families. 834 | Chapter 21 Massing . and then click OK. you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces. Creating Curtain Systems In this exercise. 12 Click the Model Categories tab. select Curtain Panels. 7 With the Roof by Face command still selected. click Visibility/Graphics. 8 Select the left semi barrel vault mass element. click Create Roof.Your model should now look as shown. and Walls. 11 On the View menu. 10 Repeat these steps to create a sloped glazing roof on the other semi barrel vault mass element.

and select both halves of the left arc dome mass element as shown. 5 Press CTRL. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 6 On the Options Bar. Creating Curtain Systems | 835 . double-click {3D}. be sure that Select Multiple is selected. under Views (all).Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser. click Create System. 4 On the Options Bar. select Curtain System: 1500 x 1500mm. 3 In the Type Selector. click Curtain System by Face.

7 Repeat the same steps for the two other domes. 8 With the Curtain System by Face command still selected. select the blended form on the in-place mass. 836 | Chapter 21 Massing .

Editing Elements Created from Massings In this exercise. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 837 .9 On the Options Bar. 10 Click Modify to exit the command. you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces. click Create System. you created curtain systems on non-planar faces. In this exercise.

clear Curtain Panels. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. under Floor Plans. Roofs. click Edit/New. and then click OK. click OK. 4 Select the box mass family as shown and click . Curtain Systems. and click OK. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 30000 for Width. you resize one of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements.Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. click Duplicate. click Visibility/Graphics. 7 Enter Larger Size for Name. under Views (all). 6 In the Type Properties dialog. and Walls. Floors. 3 On the Model Categories tab.rvt. 838 | Chapter 21 Massing . Next. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. 2 On the View menu. double-click Site. 1 In the Project Browser.

Editing Elements Created from Massings | 839 . 12 Drag a selection box over the box family and the dome family. 13 Use the Move tool to position the box and dome families as shown. 14 Open the 3D view to see the result.10 On the Design Bar. click Modify. clear Exclude Options. 11 On the Options Bar.

840 | Chapter 21 Massing . In the next steps. TIP To select the curtain wall. double-click Level 1. 18 In the Exclude Hosts dialog. Also. click . 17 On the Options Bar. you remake several of the building elements to fit to the new size of the massing family.The curtain system is no longer aligned with the dome family. click Remake. under Floor Plans. 15 In the Project Browser. 16 Zoom in to the upper right-hand portion of the model and select the three walls shown. remember that there are two curtain walls of this type that are overlapping here. you want to select the smaller one. under Views (all). 19 On the View toolbar. press TAB several times until the Status Bar indicates you are highlighting the Walls : Curtain Wall : Storefront. click OK.

20 Select the roof as shown. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 841 . 21 On the Options Bar. click Remake.TIP If you temporarily hide one of the resized walls. you will notice that Revit Architecture resized the floors.

842 | Chapter 21 Massing . 1 Open the 3D view. and click Remake. Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components.22 Select the arc dome curtain system. You then modified building elements to resize with the new mass family.rvt. you changed the size of an existing mass family. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility In this exercise. In this exercise. you switch the visibility of the view between the massing elements and the model (shell) elements.

Now you create a 3D view that shows only the massing. The 3D view now shows only the building shell.Turn off massing 2 Click on the View toolbar to turn off massing. 3 In the Project Browser.Massing only. 6 On the Model Categories tab. click Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. right-click on the 3D view. 5 On the View menu. 7 Clear one of the check boxes. 8 Click None to clear the selection. click All to select all categories. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 9 Select Mass. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 843 . 4 Rename the view 3D .

In this exercise. You might create the model shown. you switched the visibility of the 3D view to show either the building shell or the mass model. 844 | Chapter 21 Massing . This concludes the massing tutorial. If desired. to the building shell. such as columns and an extruded roof. you can continue adding additional Revit modeling components.

For example. when you make changes to a single instance of a model group. you not only simplify their placement. In this tutorial. and then you nest the kitchen in a 2 bedroom condominium unit group. you also simplify the modification process. By grouping objects. It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing. This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects. place. 845 . you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects. or with those working on a different project. and modify repetitive units. Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose. and all new instances that you place contain the modifications. creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed to create. all instances in the building model are updated. you create a model group for a typical kitchen. Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group. Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project.Grouping 22 Using the grouping functionality in Revit® Architecture 2008. You can also nest groups within other groups.

The new group is considered nested within the host group. expand Floor Plans. Create a group for the typical kitchen layout 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\m_Groups-Condominium. hotel rooms. Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include condominium units. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In this exercise. and Nesting Groups In this lesson. you create a model group for a typical kitchen for a condominium unit.rvt. you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods.Creating. 846 | Chapter 22 Grouping . expand Views (all). the host group is also updated automatically. In another exercise. you place 2 new instances of the kitchen group in the floor plan. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and is contained in every instance of the host group that you place in the building model. you add the new model group to a previously created group. you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units. You create the group by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity. Modifying. You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving the changes. and typical office layouts. When you make changes to a nested group. and double-click First Floor. After you create a model group. Creating and Placing a Group In this exercise. click Training Files. You mirror one instance of the group. and rotate the other instance to modify the layout position.

5 In the Create Model Group dialog. and zoom to the kitchen in the upper-left area of the floor plan. click (Group). enter Typical Kitchen. and click OK. Creating and Placing a Group | 847 . 4 On the Edit toolbar. 3 Draw a selection box around the kitchen.2 Enter ZR.

Change the origin point for the group 6 In the drawing area.The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity. and drag it to the upper-right corner of the kitchen. select the center control for the group origin. Zoom flyout. click Zoom To Fit. 8 On the View toolbar. 848 | Chapter 22 Grouping . 7 On the Design Bar. click Modify.

click Modify. Creating and Placing a Group | 849 . 11 Click in the upper-right corner of the stairwell to place a second instance. under Groups. and click Create Instance. 10 Zoom to the center of the floor plan.Place instances of the group 9 In the Project Browser. and click the upper-left corner of the lower unit to place the kitchen group. expand Model. 12 On the Design Bar. right-click Typical Kitchen.

16 Select the adjacent wall near the sink as the axis of reflection. The kitchen is now positioned correctly in the floor plan. clear Copy. 850 | Chapter 22 Grouping . 15 On the Options Bar. click (Mirror). 14 On the Edit toolbar.13 Select the first instance of the Typical Kitchen group that you just placed.

Creating and Placing a Group | 851 . 18 Click in the drawing area to the left of the kitchen. click (Rotate). and on the toolbar.17 Select the kitchen in the stairwell.

click Zoom To Fit. click Modify. 20 On the Design Bar. 852 | Chapter 22 Grouping . 21 On the Zoom flyout.19 Click above the right area of the kitchen to rotate the placement.

Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. one mirrored. and one rotated. click Save As. you make changes to an instance of a group. When you finish editing.rvt.You should now have three instances of the Typical Kitchen group in your model: one with the original orientation. name the file m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. all instances of the same group in the drawing are updated. Modify visibility of elements in a group 1 Zoom in to the kitchen on the right above the stair.rvt. 23 Navigate to your preferred directory. Save the dataset 22 On the File menu. Modifying a Group | 853 . m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. as shown. Modifying a Group In this exercise. and click Save.

6 Move the cursor over the horizontal wall. and click 4 Move the cursor over the door. 854 | Chapter 22 Grouping . and click to select the wall. press TAB. (Include group member). 5 Click (Exclude group member). and click to select the door. press TAB to highlight the wall. select the element. This element remains in the group but is not visible in the project view for this group instance. 7 Click (Exclude group member).2 Move the cursor over the wall to the left of the kitchen. press TAB. and click to select it. NOTE To display an excluded element. 3 Click (Exclude group member).

12 On the Design Bar. select Bifold-4 Panel : 1220 x 2134mm. 16 Click in the new wall on the left and on the right to place 2 sets of folding doors for a closet. select Basic Wall : Generic . 14 In the Type Selector. and click to draw a horizontal wall that extends to the left vertical wall.127mm. 11 Click at the endpoint of the short vertical wall in the kitchen entrance. 15 On the Options Bar. clear Tag on Placement. 10 In the Type Selector. click Wall. Add elements for a unique condition 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. click Modify.8 On the Design Bar. Modifying a Group | 855 . 13 On the Design Bar. move the cursor to the left. click Door.

17 On the Design Bar. click Zoom To Fit. 20 Select the Typical Kitchen group. In edit group mode. click Edit Group. select the vertical wall to the left of the long counter top. 856 | Chapter 22 Grouping . 23 In the drawing area. select Opening ➤ Wall Opening. 18 On the View toolbar. The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. move the cursor up. 21 On the Options Bar. and click near the top corner of the wall to create an opening. and the group editor toolbar initially displays in the upper left corner. the background color of the drawing area is pale yellow. 24 Click near the bottom corner of the wall. Modify geometry of a group and have changes display in all group instances 19 Zoom in to the kitchen in the left area of the floor plan. Zoom flyout. All other elements in the model are grayed out. click Modify.

Nesting Groups In this exercise. and the wall and folding doors for the closet. Nesting Groups | 857 . click Modify.rvt. enter 2134. and on the Options Bar. and click OK. click Properties. to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. All instances of the Typical Kitchen are updated to reflect the change. under Constraints. under Floor Plans. 26 Select the opening. 28 For Base Offset. for Unconnected Height. all instances of the host group are updated to contain the nested group. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. in the Project Browser. you add the Typical Kitchen group. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. Add elements to an existing group 1 If necessary. created in an earlier lesson. click Finish. enter 1000. 30 Click File menu ➤ Save. When you nest the kitchen in the 2 bedroom unit. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. which acts as the host. The kitchen group is then nested within the 2 bedroom unit group. 29 In the group editor toolbar.25 On the Design Bar. double-click First Floor.

click Edit Group. 3 On the Options Bar. select the Typical Kitchen group. click (Add to Group). 858 | Chapter 22 Grouping .2 Select the 2 Bedroom Unit group in the top area of the floor plan. 5 In the drawing area. 4 In the group editor toolbar.

6 Press TAB. double-click Second Floor. 9 Select the 2 bedroom group. You create a detail group in the First Floor plan and add the group to the Second Floor plan of the building model. and filled regions. and each of the bifold doors. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Finish. select the wall between the folding doors. you add door tags to a group. Detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements. 8 In the Project Browser. In the next exercise. Attached detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements that are associated with a specific model group. you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across projects. 7 In the group editor toolbar. such as text. under Floor Plans. Notice that the Typical Kitchen and pantry are nested within the 2 bedroom group. Working with Detail Groups In this lesson. Working with Detail Groups | 859 . such as door and window tags. and create an attached detail group containing the tags. You work with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups because attached detail groups require more manual manipulation.

click Filled Region. 2 Zoom in to the stair area in the center of the floor plan. 5 Click the upper-right endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle. under Floor Plans. 860 | Chapter 22 Grouping . m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. You then save the region and the text note as a detail group. You can add the detail group to other views of the building model.Creating a Detail Group In this exercise. 4 On the Options Bar. you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring in front of the elevators in the building model. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Draw a filled region 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. click to draw a rectangular region. double-click First Floor. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise.

11 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point. 12 Enter Tile. and select a point below the left elevator. A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors. click Text. click to add an arc leader. click Finish Sketch. click Modify. Creating a Detail Group | 861 .6 Move the cursor down and to the left. 9 On the Options Bar. Add a text note 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 10 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point. and on the Design Bar. 7 On the Design Bar.

14 On the Edit toolbar. and select the note and the filled region. 20 In the Project Browser. 862 | Chapter 22 Grouping . expand Detail. and click OK. click (Group). double-click Second Floor. under Floor Plans. 16 In the drawing area. Add a group instance to a different drawing view 19 In the Project Browser. click Modify. under Groups. enter Elevator Lobby Tile.The text note with arc leader is added to the building model. and click Create Instance. 15 In the Create Detail Group dialog. 18 On the Design Bar. right-click Elevator Lobby Tile. 17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft. as shown. Create a detail group 13 Press and hold CTRL. select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group.

you add door tags to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. Using Attached Detail Groups In this exercise. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. click Zoom To Fit. 24 Click File menu ➤ Save. under Floor Plans. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Place door tags 1 In the Project Browser. 22 On the Design Bar. 3 On the Options Bar. clear Leader. it cannot be added to a group in the same manner that a drawing component can be added. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise.rvt. and then use the door tags to create an attached detail group. Because the detail group contains variables. you must manually attach it to each instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group.21 In the drawing area. double-click First Floor. Using Attached Detail Groups | 863 . click Tag ➤ By Category. click Modify 23 On the Zoom flyout. click to place the detail group.

7 On the Options Bar.4 Place door tags in the original instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit. click (Filter Selection). select Door Tags. and click OK. draw a selection box around the right area of the floor plan including the door tags. click Modify. click Check None. click (Group). 9 On the Edit toolbar. as shown: 5 On the Design Bar. Create an attached detail group 6 In the drawing area. 8 In the Filter dialog. 864 | Chapter 22 Grouping .

11 In the Project Browser. select Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags. therefore. under Floor Plans. enter 2 Bedroom Door Tags. Using Attached Detail Groups | 865 . NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential. click Place Detail. Place a detail group in another group instance 12 In the Project Browser. for Attached Detail Group Name. double-click Second Floor. and click OK. the doors are numbered based upon the order in which you placed each group. and view that Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags is attached. 15 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog. 13 Select the model group 2 Bedroom Unit. 14 On the Options Bar. Door Tags are placed on the Second Floor instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. expand Groups\Model\2 Bedroom Unit.10 In the Create Model Group and Attached Detail Group dialog. and click OK.

When you load the group from the library into a new project. and click Save. under Groups\Model. Load the group in a new project 4 On the File menu. and click OK. 3 For File name. Save a group to a library 1 In the Project Browser. and click Open. click New ➤ Project. Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar typical layouts for repetitive units. 866 | Chapter 22 Grouping . browse to the Desktop. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. for Create new. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. verify that Project is selected. or a Revit family file (RFA) if you are working in the Family Editor. right-click 2 Bedroom Unit.rvt. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group.rvt. 5 In the New Project dialog. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. accept the default template file. you save a typical condominium layout to a library where it can be accessed by other team members for use in other projects. the file is saved as a Revit project file (RVT). you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project.16 On the Design Bar. 8 In the Duplicate Types dialog. select 2 Bedroom Unit. You also convert the group instance to a linked file to replace the group with an alternative unit layout. click OK. In this case. 7 In the Load File as Group dialog. you can then work with it in the context of the new project. You can save a group as a Revit project file (RVT) if you are working in a project. click Desktop. This enables you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects. 2 In the left pane of the Save Group dialog. verify that Same as group name is selected. click Modify. Saving and Loading Groups In this exercise. Saving and Loading Groups In this lesson. and click Save Group.

Place an instance of the loaded group 9 In the Project Browser. Saving and Loading Groups | 867 . either the selected group can be used to make a new linked file. or the group instance can be replaced with an existing linked file. 15 In the Convert Group to Link dialog. expand Groups. explaining that duplicate types were found and the types from the new project will be used. When a group is converted to a link. 13 Zoom in to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. 11 Click in the drawing area to place the group instance. click Use Existing. Convert group instance to a linked file 14 Select the group. 12 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar.A warning dialog is displayed.rvt. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 10 Right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. click Link. and click Create Instance. and expand Model. and open Common\c_2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. click Training Files. click Modify.

and the link is removed. click Remove Link. This message indicates that all instances of the linked model will be deleted from the project. click Yes to replace the existing Typical Kitchen group with the alternate Typical Kitchen group. Convert the linked model to a group 19 In the drawing area. 868 | Chapter 22 Grouping . or you can remove it at a later time from the Manage Links dialog. expand Revit Links. select the linked Revit model. verify that Attached Details is selected only. but the linked model file will still be loaded in the project. click OK. click Modify. You can remove the linked file from the project by clicking Remove Link.rvt file is added as a link to the project. The 2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. 18 In the Project Browser. 20 On the Options Bar. 21 In the Bind Link Options dialog. 25 The linked file is converted to a new model group stored in the project. 23 In the confirmation dialog.17 On the Design Bar. click Bind. and click OK. 22 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 24 In the message dialog. 26 Close the file with or without saving it.

869 . you use the site tools in Revit Architecture 2008 to add and modify site components within a project.Site 23 In this tutorial.

and double-click Site. This project file was created using the default metric template. You add property lines manually. Create a toposurface by adding elevation points 1 In the Project Browser. You add subregions to the area to define parking areas. expand Floor Plans.Using Site Tools In this lesson. and open Metric\m_First_Project. Creating a Toposurface In this exercise. you add a building pad to the site. and walkways. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. After grading the topography to create a slightly elevated and flat surface. islands. you create a toposurface using two different methods. 870 | Chapter 23 Site . 3 On the Design Bar. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. right-click in the Design Bar. click Toposurface. The exercises are sequential and must be done in order.rvt. You start by importing the site contour data and converting it to 3D contour data. enter an absolute elevation of 3000 mm. and then modify the data. you use site tools to add and modify site components within a project. Using the first method. you add parking and planting components and create a parking space schedule. 4 On the Options Bar. you create a toposurface by manually placing elevation points in the site plan. In the second part of this exercise. convert the data to a table. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. click Point. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The scale of this view is 1 : 100. In the final exercises. expand Views (all). you import contour data from a DWG file and use it to create the project toposurface. and click Site.

Creating a Toposurface | 871 . 9 Add a concentric circle of 6000 mm elevation points inside the 3000 mm contour. A toposurface must have at least three elevation points. Triangulation boundaries display only after you add the third elevation point. Use the following illustration as a reference. enter an absolute elevation of 6000 mm. 7 Add additional points to create a contour circle similar to the following illustration. 8 On the Options Bar. The circle should be approximately 55000 mm wide. 6 Add two additional points to create a triangle.5 Click in the drawing area to specify a point.

and 18000 mm absolute elevations. Use the following illustration as a reference. 15000 mm. 872 | Chapter 23 Site . click Finish Surface.TIP Do not be concerned with the exact quantity or placement of the points. 12000 mm. under Increment. enter 1500 mm. 10 Repeat the previous step for 9000 mm. 11 On the Design Bar. under Additional Contours. Try to add each circle concentrically inside the previously created circle. 12 On the Settings menu. click Site Settings. and click OK. 13 In the Site Settings dialog.

Use imported contour data to create a toposurface 17 Select the toposurface and. 16 On the View toolbar. and click Shading with Edges. 18 In the Project Browser. 19 On the Design Bar. rename the level Base Site Elevation. click Model Graphics Style. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). click the elevation value.This setting reduces the quantity of contour lines in the view. 20 Zoom in around the Level 2 head. Click Yes when prompted to rename corresponding views. modify the level names and elevations. and press ENTER. click . 23 Click the Level 1 text. on the Standard toolbar. 15 On the View Control Bar. click Yes. and double-click South. click and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. 14 On the View toolbar. rename the level Basement. click to delete it. 21 Click the Level 2 text. click Modify. Creating a Toposurface | 873 . and press ENTER. 22 When you are asked if you want to rename corresponding views. and press ENTER. enter 1000 mm. Before importing the contour data. under Views (all).

27 In the Select Layers/Levels to Import/Link dialog. under Views (all).24 In the Project Browser. Click Open. 28 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click Modify. and zoom out until you can see the entire topography within the view. 30 On the Edit menu. This ensures the import symbol is not accidently moved. and click OK. click Training Files. 25 On the File menu. 874 | Chapter 23 Site . Select the c_Import_Site file located in the Common folder. Under Layer/Level Colors. clear Current view only and choose Select for Layers. click Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. 31 On the Design Bar. You are immediately prompted to select the layers you want to import. 29 Select the imported topography. select Preserve colors. Until it is exploded. Under Import or Link. clear layer 0 and layer C_bench_mark. double-click Site. click Pin Position. under Floor Plans. it is considered an import symbol. 26 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane.

click Visibility/Graphics. clear C_INDX. 32 On the View menu. 37 Place the cursor over the imported symbol and. click Use Imported ➤ Import Instance. When you select the import symbol.Notice the elevation symbols are displayed. Creating a Toposurface | 875 . 36 On the Design Bar. click the Annotation Categories tab. click Toposurface. and then click OK. clear Elevations. you are prompted to select the layer that will generate the elevation points. when the edges highlight. 33 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 34 Under Visibility. 35 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. select it. and click OK. 38 In the Add Points from Selected Layers dialog.

Notice the change in this toposurface elevation is minor. you add property lines using two methods. this project file is required in its current state. 45 Proceed to the next exercise. you sketch the property lines and then convert the sketch into survey data. and click Save. you create property lines by entering survey data into a table of distances and bearings.rvt. 44 Navigate to your preferred folder. “Adding Property Lines” on page 876. 39 On the Design Bar. name the project Site-in progress. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Using the second method.The import symbol is converted to elevation points and contours. Adding Property Lines In this exercise. Using the first method. click Finish Surface. 40 On the View toolbar. click and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. click Save As. 43 On the File menu. 42 On the View toolbar. 41 Enter ZF to zoom to the extents of the image. click . 876 | Chapter 23 Site .

4 On the Design Bar. sketch the shape shown in the following illustration. select Create property lines by sketching. Click Modify. do so before continuing. and click OK. Sketch property lines 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. If you have not completed the previous exercise. Site-in progress. On the Design Bar. Using the 3-point Arc tool. you can quickly create the shape by doing the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Sketch the rectangle first. click Property Line. Adding Property Lines | 877 . Although you can use your preferred sketching method. double-click Site. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. NOTE The weight of the sketch lines has been increased in the illustration for training purposes.This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the project file in its current state. add an arc line on the right. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. click Lines. under Floor Plans. click Lines. Select and delete the right vertical line. 3 In the Property Line Creation dialog.

NOTE The values displayed in the Property Lines dialog depend on the exact dimensions and location of your sketch. when they highlight. Create property lines using a table of distances and bearings 11 Select the property lines and. click 12 On the Design Bar. 15 Starting in Row #1. click OK. on the Standard toolbar. 8 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. enter the following deed data for rows 1 through 4: ■ ■ ■ ■ to delete them. select the lines. select Edit Table. click Property Line. select Create property lines by table of distances and bearings. 7 Move the cursor over the property lines and. 100000 S 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" W 100000 N 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" E 878 | Chapter 23 Site . 9 In the warning dialog. 14 In the Property Lines dialog. click OK. The property lines are displayed with a dash-dot line type on the topography. 13 In the Property Line Creation dialog. A warning dialog is displayed. click Insert three times until there are four rows of deed data. and click OK. 10 In the Property Lines dialog.6 On the Design Bar. informing you that converting a property line sketch to a table cannot be undone.

click to place the property lines. 25 Under Visibility. If the gap is not closed. click the Imported Categories tab. 20 Click Load.dwg and click OK. the original DWG file remains visible in the view. click Training Files. the visibility of the imported symbol needs to be turned off. Adding Property Lines | 879 . 19 In the Tags dialog. The property lines are displayed at the tip of the cursor. Even though you converted the symbol to elevations points and contours. click Visibility/Graphics. Tag property lines 18 On the Settings menu. Before adding property line segment tags. 17 Move the cursor over the topographic surface and using the following illustration as a reference. 24 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 21 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 23 On the View menu. 22 In the Tags dialog. notice a tag is now loaded for property line segments.rfa. This means there is no gap in the property lines.Notice that after you complete the last line. scroll down the list of categories until you find Property Lines and notice there are no tags loaded for Property Line Segments. and click OK. review your data entry and make necessary corrections. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Civil\M_Property Line Tag. the distance that displayed under From last to first point now displays Closed. 16 Click OK. clear the checkbox for c_Import_Site.

28 Zoom in and place the cursor over the center of the north property line. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings In this exercise. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. you modify site settings and contour line visibility. NOTE If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not visible. click Tag ➤ By Category. 30 On the View Control Bar. right-click in the Design Bar. 29 Tag the three remaining property lines. The tags display more prominently in this view. 31 On the File menu. “Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings” on page 880. You created the second set of property lines directly from deed data and located it on the topography. this project file is required in its current state. click Model Graphics Style. In the next exercise. you create a new object style subcategory to mark a specific elevation. and click Shading with Edges. In this exercise. click to place it. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. In the final step. you loaded and tagged the property line segments. and click Drafting. When the tag displays at the tip of the cursor. The first set you sketched and then converted into deed data. you created two sets of property lines. clear Leader.26 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. You also modify the site settings so that the new subcategory is displayed at the specific elevation. 880 | Chapter 23 Site . 27 On the Options Bar. click Save.

10 Under Additional Contours. In the Object Styles dialog. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ Under Start. select Single Value. specify the following settings for the Working Contour subcategory: ■ ■ ■ Verify that the Line Weights are 1. select a shade of Brown. Under Line Pattern. and click OK. 4 Under Modify Subcategories. 3 On the Model Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click New. Modify site settings 8 On the Settings menu. Under Range Type. and click Wireframe. the new object style subcategory is displayed under Topography. enter the name Working Contour. 2 On the Settings menu. under Contour Line Display. select Working Contour. select Topography.0 mm. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings | 881 . click Object Styles. 9 In the Site Settings dialog. Create an object style subcategory for specific elevation 1 On the View Control Bar.rvt. enter 1000. Under Subcategory. Under Line Color. click Site Settings. scroll down the list of categories and expand Topography. 6 In the Object Styles dialog. select Dash dot. click Model Graphics Style. 5 In the New Subcategory dialog. for Subcategory. 7 Click OK. specify an interval of 1000 mm passing through elevation 0. Site-in progress.

click Close. In the next exercise. “Creating Topographic Subregions” on page 882. 12 On the File menu. Working Contour. 882 | Chapter 23 Site . such as material. In this exercise. displays on the topography only at the elevation you specified. it merely defines an area of the surface where you can apply a different set of properties. and islands. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. parking areas. you create subregions in order to define roads. and islands.11 Click OK. you create topographic subregions to define roads. you created a new object style subcategory for topography. Click Yes when prompted to save changes. The object style subcategory. The next exercise requires a new dataset. Creating a subregion does not result in separate surfaces. You then modified the site setting to distinguish a specific contour interval using this subcategory. Creating Topographic Subregions In this exercise. parking areas.

The horizontal rectangle is approximately 7500 mm wide. the vertical rectangle is approximately 19500 mm wide. sketch the shape highlighted in the illustration below.Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. click Subregion. and use the fillet arc sketching tool to add the curved corner. and open Metric\m_Site. TIP You can either sketch the shape freehand or draw two perpendicular rectangles. Sketch initial parking area 1 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Lines. Creating Topographic Subregions | 883 . try to replicate the location and proportion. 2 On the Design Bar.rvt. Although the exact dimensions are not important. use the trim tool to create just one closed loop. 3 Using the sketching tools on the Options Bar.

select Site . you may see fewer contour lines than in the images shown in this exercise. enter Parking for Name. Specify subregion properties for parking area 4 On the Design Bar. When you finish the sketch in a later step.Tarmacadam for Name. click Finish Sketch. click Properties. 6 In the Materials dialog. and then click the down arrow to open the Material dialog. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. Notice that the left edge of the subregion overhangs the site topography. under Materials and Finishes. the subregion will end at the edge of the defined topography.NOTE In the Metric dataset. and click OK. 8 On the Design Bar. under Identity Data. click Shading with Edges. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 884 | Chapter 23 Site . and click OK. click the Value for Material. 9 On the View menu.

This topography schedule uses a filter to omit unnamed topographic regions. 16 On the Design Bar. 15 Add new lines and modify the existing lines to create a boundary similar to the one shown in the following illustration. TIP Add the two upper parking areas as rectangles. Creating Topographic Subregions | 885 . Notice that the project area has increased. under Floor Plans. double-click Site. and double-click Topography Schedule. double-click Topography Schedule. 17 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style.Tarmacadam. they display within this schedule. click Model Graphics Style. Mirror the arc line to create an exact duplicate.Notice that the new subregion uses the material Site . 13 Select the subregion you created in the previous steps. and click Hidden Line. and click Shading with Edges. Modify the subregion 11 In the Project Browser. Although you can select each toposurface region separately and apply different properties to each. click Finish Sketch. 14 On the Options Bar. The two additional parking areas in the top portion of the sketch must be at least 5500 mm deep to accommodate parking spaces. expand Schedules/Quantities. NOTE Your values may differ depending on your sketch. the toposurface and its contour data remain one element. under Schedules/Quantities. and use the split and trim tools to clean up the sketch. Delete overlapping lines. Open the topography schedule 10 In the Project Browser. You can create a toposurface schedule to report information regarding each toposurface region. click Edit Boundary. 12 On the View Control Bar. As you create new subregions. 18 In the Project Browser.

Grass for Name. and then click the down arrow to open the Material dialog. click Model Graphics Style. double-click Topography Schedule. Notice that the schedule has been updated with the new information. 24 On the Design Bar. Precise dimensions are not important at this time. 26 In the Materials dialog.Grass for Name. under Schedules/Quantities. under Floor Plans. select Site . enter Island . click Finish Sketch. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Shading with Edges. click the Value for Material. 28 On the Design Bar. click Properties.Add additional subregions 19 In the Project Browser. In this training project. under Identity Data. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 886 | Chapter 23 Site . you apply different materials such as grass and concrete. 30 In the Project Browser. and click OK. click Model Graphics Style. 29 On the View Control Bar. under Materials and Finishes. 21 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. 23 In the upper-right parking area. Within each subregion. click Subregion. double-click Site. use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the parking island shown in the following illustration. 20 On the View Control Bar. 22 On the Design Bar. additional subregions are required to create a more attractive parking area. and click Hidden Line. click Lines.

Add the concrete walkway 33 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. Name each region Island . Creating Topographic Subregions | 887 .Cast-in-Situ Concrete . and apply the material Site . add the three additional subregions shown in the following illustration. Using the techniques learned in previous steps. click Lines. 34 On the Design Bar. Name the subregion Walkway. 32 In the Project Browser. 35 On the Design Bar. Notice that the schedule has been updated. double-click Site. under Floor Plans.31 In the Project Browser.walkway. double-click Topography Schedule. click Subregion. under Schedules/Quantities.Grass. 36 Use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the new concrete walkway shown in the following illustration. You must sketch each region separately.Grass. and apply the material Concrete . double-click Site.

you must either edit the entire toposurface or split the toposurface. there is still only one toposurface. 888 | Chapter 23 Site . 38 In the Project Browser. NOTE Although several toposurface subregions now exist within this project. click Finish Sketch. Notice that the schedule has been updated.WARNING Subregions cannot intersect. so you need to offset coincident lines between the subregions by 100 mm. If you want to modify the elevation points of a particular subregion. 39 On the File menu. under Schedules/Quantities. double-click Topography Schedule. click Save As. 37 On the Design Bar.

Notice that the toposurface displays differently. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Click OK to set the subregion phase to match the toposurface. Site tutorial-in progress.40 Navigate to your preferred folder. The display settings are controlled by the phase filter. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. this project file is required in its current state. under Floor Plans. and click Save. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Modify toposurface phase assignment 1 In the Project Browser. stating that subregions must have the same Phase Created parameter and the same Phase Demolished parameter as the host toposurface. Grading the Toposurface In this exercise. Grading the Toposurface | 889 . “Using Phasing” on page 992. “Grading the Toposurface” on page 889. double-click Site. 5 On the Design Bar.rvt. click Modify. you grade the toposurface to create a slightly elevated and flat parking area. A warning dialog is displayed. the existing topography is demolished and a new toposurface is created where you can edit the elevation points. 2 Select the toposurface. under Phasing.rvt. name the project Site tutorial-in progress. 3 On the Options Bar. see the tutorial. When you use the grading tool. and click OK. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. select Existing for Phase Created. click . RELATED For more information regarding phasing.

click Graded Region. Copying internal points lets you delete only the points in the parking area without altering the remaining elevation points. 7 In the Graded Region dialog.6 On the Design Bar. Delete elevation points 9 Draw a pick box outside the main parking area as in the following illustration. 890 | Chapter 23 Site . Make sure the pick box allows a significant buffer around the area. 8 Select the topographic surface. select Copy Internal Points. The intent is to select all the elevation points inside and around the parking area. and click Select and Edit.

demolished. and click Hidden Line. Grading the Toposurface | 891 . click Model Graphics Style.10 Press DELETE. Notice the toposurface displays with different colors representing the different phases: existing. 13 Press DELETE. 12 Draw another pick box around the driveway and remaining parking area as in the following illustration. 11 On the View Control Bar. and new.

19 On the View Control Bar. click . click Finish Surface. 20 On the View toolbar. Place the points until there are no contour lines crossing the parking area or walkway. click Model Graphics Style. click Point. 16 Add elevation points outside the perimeter of the entire parking area and walkway as in the following illustration. 18 On the View toolbar. and click Shading with Edges. The parking and walkway areas are now elevated and flat. 15 On the Options Bar.Add new elevation points 14 On the Design Bar. click . specify an Absolute Elevation of 5500 mm. 17 On the Design Bar. and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. 892 | Chapter 23 Site .

specify New Construction for Phase. “Adding a Building Pad” on page 893.The phase filter for this view allows both the new and demolished surfaces to display. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. nor can you add it without first adding a topographic surface. Site tutorial-in progress. 24 On the View menu. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. click Save. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. click View Properties. Only the graded topography displays.rvt. specify Existing for Phase. Therefore. Adding a Building Pad | 893 . because you assigned it to the Existing phase before grading. under Phasing. 23 Select the toposurface. 26 On the File menu. only the original toposurface displays. Adding a Building Pad In this exercise. A building pad is a toposurface hosted element and cannot be added to any other element. and click OK. When you add a building pad. Delete the demolished toposurface from the project 21 On the View menu. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. you create a building pad. you can delete it. it automatically cuts a hole in the toposurface and places it at the depth you specify. under Phasing. This accounts for the red surface that you see in this view. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Only the components created in or assigned to the Existing phase display in this view. this project file is required in its current state. click View Properties. and delete it. Because this toposurface is no longer required for this project. and click OK.

double-click Site. 894 | Chapter 23 Site . 2 On the View Control Bar. NOTE By default. click Pad. sketch an approximate replica of the outline shown in the following illustration. the Pick Walls command is active. The building pad should border the concrete walkway on the right and the upper parking area. and click Hidden Line. 3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. 4 On the Design Bar. you can pick the exterior walls to define the building pad. under Floor Plans. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. click Lines. If you have an existing building model.Add a building pad to the project 1 In the Project Browser. click Model Graphics Style.

and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. click Finish Sketch.6 On the Design Bar. click 9 On the View toolbar. click Save. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. this project file is required in its current state. Adding Site Components | 895 . . click Model Graphics Style. Notice the new 10 On the File menu. . “Adding Site Components” on page 895. Adding Site Components In this exercise. click building pad. 7 On the View Control Bar. and click Shading with Edges. 8 On the View toolbar. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. you add parking and planting components to the site surface.

Add parking components 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. under Floor Plans. 6 Use the flip arrows so it displays as shown below and move it toward the lower left corner of the parking area. NOTE Make sure you place the parking space a slight distance above the building pad. 5 On the Design Bar. double-click Site.90 deg.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. select M_Parking Space: 4800 x 2400mm . 4 Zoom in on the upper parking area that borders the building pad and add a parking component to the area. and select the parking space. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. Site tutorial-in progress. 3 In the Type Selector. 896 | Chapter 23 Site . click Modify. click Parking Component.

. click 9 On the View toolbar.7 Add 6 additional parking spaces to the right of the first space. Verify that the spaces are horizontally aligned and the left edge of each space is aligned with the right edge of the previous space. TIP You could also use the Array tool to accomplish this task. . Adding Site Components | 897 . click Site Component. and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. 8 On the View toolbar. double-click Site. click parking spaces. Notice the new Add planting components to the site 10 In the Project Browser. 11 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans.

14 On the View toolbar. click .12 In the Type Selector. choose any tree type. and add a tree to each of the two round parking islands as shown below. 898 | Chapter 23 Site . 13 Add some more trees outside the parking area as shown below.

click Save.15 On the View toolbar. and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. the landscape shown in the previous illustration has been rendered. you tag the planting and parking components that you added previously. 16 On the File menu. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. double-click Site. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. Site tutorial-in progress. Notice how the trees vertically attach to the toposurface. click Tag All Not Tagged. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Tagging Site and Parking Components | 899 . Tagging Site and Parking Components In this exercise. NOTE Plants are displayed as simple geometry unless rendered. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. Tag site components 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. “Tagging Site and Parking Components” on page 899. In the following illustration. this project file is required in its current state. click .

you create a parking schedule. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. and click OK. select the line for the category Parking Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Parking Tag: Boxed. and click Apply. select Mark. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. this project file is required in its current state. 7 On the File menu. click the Fields tab. select Parking for Category. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. you use a parking schedule to number the parking spaces. In the following exercise.rvt. click Hidden Line. Create a parking schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Schedule/Quantities. 900 | Chapter 23 Site . Notice each is tagged with no instance mark.3 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. and click OK. 5 On the View menu. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. and click Add. Site tutorial-in progress. You can use a parking schedule to report the quantity and area of each type of parking space. 6 Zoom in to the upper parking area and around the trees. click Apply. 4 Select the line for the category Planting Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Planting Tag: Boxed. “Creating Parking Space Schedules” on page 900. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 4 Under Available fields. click Save. NOTE Site components can also be numbered by clicking the tag number and changing the value. Creating Parking Space Schedules In the final exercise of this tutorial.

7 Under Fields. Also notice that when you place the cursor in the parking schedule. you can resize the column width by dragging the column edges. enter Size. 14 In the Parking Schedule. 12 In the Site plan. select Mark. 8 Under Fields. click Close Hidden Windows. 11 On the Window menu. 10 In the Project Browser. This allows you to know which space you are numbering. double-click Site. click Tile. under Space. select Type. Creating Parking Space Schedules | 901 . This closes all the views except the parking schedule. under Space. If necessary. 13 In the Parking Schedule. and click Add. 15 On the File menu. number the first three spaces consecutively. enter Space. 9 On the Window menu. This tiles the Site plan next to the parking schedule. zoom in around the upper parking lot where you previously added the parking spaces. select Type. the selected space highlights in the Site plan. 6 Click the Formatting tab. finish numbering the remaining spaces. under Floor Plans. and under Heading. and click OK. and under Heading. The parking schedule is displayed. Notice that the parking spaces in the Site plan update automatically. under Views (all).5 Under Available fields. click Save.

902 | Chapter 23 Site .

you use the structural tools in Revit Architecture 2008 to create a building model skeleton. you copy the entire structure and use the paste-align command to add the structure to the three levels above it.Structural 24 In this tutorial. you create framing elevations and add structural braces to the building model. and beams to Level 1. After completing level 1. You begin by adding the structural walls. In the final lesson. 903 . columns.

3 In the left pane of the Import/Link dialog. Import the DWG file 1 Before importing the DWG file. The DWG file contains walls that you trace in the next exercise to create the structural walls. under Views (all). click Training Files. go to the Project Browser. 904 | Chapter 24 Structural . under Floor Plans. You then sketch additional walls to which you add dimensions and constraints. and double-click Level 2. Importing a DWG for Use as an Underlay In this exercise. If necessary.dwg. specify the following: ■ Select Link (instead of import).Adding Structural Walls In this lesson. under Import or Link. 4 In the Import/Link dialog.rvt. verify that the Level 2 floor plan is open. and open Metric\m_Structural. 2 On the File menu. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you add structural walls to a project file where only the grid lines have been added. and select Metric\m_Wall_Import. You use an imported DWG file as an underlay to trace the initial outline of the structural walls. you import a DWG file into the Level 2 floor plan. click Training Files. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats.

click Save As. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. This file is used in the next exercise. After you trace the walls. 5 Under Layer/Level Colors. Sketching Structural Walls In this exercise. “Sketching Structural Walls” on page 905. Sketching Structural Walls | 905 .rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. right-click in the Design Bar and click Structural. and add the remaining structural walls to the building model. In this exercise.■ ■ Select Current view only. Display the Structural tab of the Design Bar 1 If the structural tab is not displayed. 9 Navigate to a folder of your choice and save the project as Structural_tutorial. Structural_tutorial. 8 On the File menu. This project file is required for all subsequent exercises in this tutorial. 6 Under Positioning. Select All for Layers. to trace the initial set of structural walls. select Invert colors. you use the linked DWG file to trace the initial set of structural walls. you imported a DWG file.rvt. and select Origin to origin. you turn off the visibility of the DWG file. 7 Click Open. select Automatically place. The DWG file is displayed on the Level 2 floor plan.

Select Finish Face: Exterior for Loc Line. you sketch a chain of walls over the path highlighted in the following illustration. ■ ■ ■ Select Chain. 5 In the Type Selector. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. specify the following: ■ Select Depth. 3 Draw a zoom region around the upper set of lines.200mm. In addition. 4 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 8 Move the cursor over the top right intersection of the line. 906 | Chapter 24 Structural . click Structural Wall. and click to specify the wall endpoint. rather than the height. Click . 6 On the Options Bar. 7 Begin the first wall by selecting the intersection of the upper left corner of the line chain.Sketch structural walls by tracing the DWG 2 On the View menu. This requires the bottom of the primary view range to be set to the level below in order to see the walls as you sketch them. their Structural Usage parameter is automatically set to Bearing. First. Structural walls differ from non-structural walls in several ways. select Basic Wall: Generic . you add a structural wall by specifying the depth of the wall. In the steps that follow.

10 Move the curser to the right. and click to complete the chain of walls. and click to specify the next wall endpoint. click Modify to finish the sketch. and click the next line intersection. 13 On the View toolbar. click . 12 On the Design Bar. 11 Move the cursor to the top of the line chain until a reference plane displays indicating the cursor is on a parallel plane with the slanted wall on the left.9 Move the cursor downward to the next line intersection. Sketching Structural Walls | 907 .

notice that the wall options you used previously are still selected. ■ ■ 908 | Chapter 24 Structural . expand Floor Plans. in the View toolbar. and double-click Level 2. 15 Zoom around the second chain of lines. On the Options Bar. click Structural Wall. 16 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. sketch a chain of walls over the path highlighted in the following illustration. zoom in to ensure you select the intersection of the imported lines and grid C. Use the Dynamic 14 In the Project Browser. When you reach the endpoint on the lower right corner of the chain.TIP If necessary. expand Views (all). you can spin the model in a 3D view by clicking View tools to modify the 3D view. ■ Begin the wall chain by clicking the lower left intersection where the end of the line chain adjoins grid C. 17 Using the bulleted steps below. Click each exterior line intersection in a clockwise direction.

under Floor Plans. click . click Structural Wall. Sketch additional structural walls 24 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. ■ Sketching Structural Walls | 909 . 22 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Click to create a three-point arc. Turn off the DWG visibility 20 In the Project Browser. click Modify to end the wall chain. Unselected categories are not visible in the referenced view. clear m_Wall_Import. 25 In the Type Selector. Select Wall Centerline for Loc Line. double-click Level 2. click Visibility/Graphics.200mm. specify the following: ■ ■ Clear Chain. 21 On the View menu. click the Imported Categories tab. 19 On the View toolbar. 23 Under Visibility.18 On the Design Bar.dwg and click OK. 26 On the Options Bar. select Basic Wall: Generic .

This is the right extent of the arc. This is the left extent of the arc. 30 Move the cursor to the right until it intersects with the slanted wall on the right.27 Follow the sequence of steps in the illustration below to add a 180 degree three point arc. click . Select the right endpoint of the horizontal wall. 910 | Chapter 24 Structural . Move the cursor upward and specify an arc radius of 180 degrees. ■ ■ ■ Select the endpoint of the left vertical wall. 28 On the Options Bar. 31 Add a vertical wall between the two horizontal walls as shown. 29 Add a horizontal wall beginning at the midpoint of the left vertical wall as shown.

and press ENTER.32 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 33 Select the vertical wall you added in the previous step and make sure the temporary dimension between the wall and the centerline of the left vertical wall is equal to 1500 mm. click the temporary dimension value between it and grid C. If it is not. Sketching Structural Walls | 911 . and press Enter. enter 1500. enter 1500. 34 Select the horizontal wall. click the value.

38 Draw the 1200 mm wall parallel to the adjoining wall as shown. click Structural Wall and on the Options Bar. 912 | Chapter 24 Structural . Both walls are 1200 mm long.35 Zoom around the upper set of walls as shown. clear Chain. you create the final structural walls for the project. Create the final structural walls 37 Begin the first wall on the endpoint and wall centerline shown in the illustration below. 36 On the Design Bar. In the steps that follow.

you used the DWG file to trace the initial set of structural walls. you dimension the structural walls and add an equality constraint to the dimension to keep the walls equidistant.39 Create an additional 1200 mm wall as shown. After turning off the visibility of the linked DWG. Begin the wall at the top of the right vertical wall and draw it inward so that it is parallel with the wall you sketched in the previous steps. This project file is required. You also reposition the walls to see how they adapt to changes in the design. click Modify. you added the remaining structural walls required for this building model. Floor Plans. You then make minor modifications to their position. “Dimensioning and Modifying Walls” on page 913. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. 2 Zoom around the lower set of walls. 42 On the File menu. 41 On the View toolbar. Add an aligned dimension 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. In this exercise. under Views (all). click . that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. click Save. Dimensioning and Modifying Walls | 913 . in its current state. you add dimensions and equality constraints to the walls. Structural_tutorial. 40 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 2. Dimensioning and Modifying Walls In this exercise. In the next exercise. Dataset This exercise requires the project file.

Select Entire Walls for Pick. click Modify.3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select it. and click OK. 6 Move the cursor to the left. and when it highlights. click Dimension. 5 Move the cursor over the left vertical wall. 914 | Chapter 24 Structural . ■ ■ On the Options Bar. the Options button becomes available. In the Auto Dimension Options dialog. Select Wall Centerlines for Prefer. and click to place the dimension as shown. After you select Entire Walls. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select . 4 On the Options Bar. select Intersecting Walls. Create an equality constraint 7 On the Design Bar. click Options to specify the wall pick options.

9 Click the EQ symbol to make each of the segments equal. Dimensioning and Modifying Walls | 915 .8 Select the dimension you added in the previous steps. Modify wall position 10 Select the upper horizontal wall as shown.

you add structural columns. you add structural columns and different beam types to the building model. and purlins to complete the Level 1 structure. several different beam types. In this exercise. you added a dimension to the structural walls and used an equality constraint to keep the walls equidistant. This project file is required. 13 On the File menu. Notice the horizontal walls remain equally spaced. “Adding Structural Columns and Beams” on page 916. and enter 4000 for the distance between the wall centerline and grid B.11 Click the temporary dimension value. Adding Structural Columns and Beams In this lesson. in its current state. click Save. joists. You also repositioned the walls and observed how they adapted to the change in the design. 916 | Chapter 24 Structural . In the next lesson. 12 On the Edit menu. to continue with the next lesson in this tutorial. click Undo Edit Dimension Length.

Structural_tutorial. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 6 Add a column to C1 as shown. In addition. double-click Level 1.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. TIP When adding the column. select Height and specify Level 2. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. Adding Structural Columns | 917 . you use several different methods to add structural columns: you manually select grid intersections. if the column orientation is not similar to the callout shown below. 5 On the Options Bar. click Structural Column. 4 In the Type Selector. select M_W-Wide Flange-Column: W250x80. If necessary. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. and you add a column outside the grids. you use the grid intersection tool. under Floor Plans. you rotate columns by pressing the SPACEBAR when necessary. 2 On the View menu.Adding Structural Columns In this exercise. press the SPACEBAR to rotate the column. Add columns to grid intersections manually 1 In the Project Browser. zoom in to place the column.

This option allows you to place columns at the intersections of selected column grids. C3. 9 Use a crossing selection. and C5. and select grids 1-5. 918 | Chapter 24 Structural . Add columns using selected grid intersections 8 On the Options Bar. click Grid Intersection.7 Add similar columns to C2. and A.

10 Notice columns are added to A1-5. specify a point under grid A and to the right of grid 5. Rotate the columns 11 Press the SPACEBAR. and drag your cursor up and to the left as shown below. 13 Press the SPACEBAR until the columns return to their original position. All of the columns on grid A rotate until they are parallel with the vertical grids. 12 Press the SPACEBAR again. Adding Structural Columns | 919 . Columns A3-5 are shown below.TIP To create the crossing selection. Notice the columns rotate until they are parallel with grid A.

17 Create a crossing selection that includes B1-5. Although you could have added columns B1-5 with the first set of columns.14 If necessary. 18 If the columns are not aligned as in the illustration below. 15 On the Options Bar. 920 | Chapter 24 Structural . click Modify. click Finish. and 6900 mm below the exterior face of the horizontal wall above it. click Finish. the columns on A1-5 do not rotate. Columns B3-5 are shown below. click Structural Column. The column should be 4200 mm to the left of grid 5. 20 On the Design Bar. 21 Select column A5 and delete it. 19 On the Options Bar. click Grid Intersection. 23 Add a M_W-Wide Flange-Column: W250x80 between B4 and C5. press the SPACEBAR to rotate them. TIP Notice that as you rotate these columns using the SPACEBAR. That is why you finished the first set and then reentered the grid intersection mode to add columns B1-5. Add a column outside of the grid 22 On the Design Bar. zoom out until you can see all the grids. you could not have rotated them independently of each other. Add columns B1-5 16 On the Options Bar. This completes this set of columns.

“Adding Structural Beams and Girders” on page 921. and you rotate the columns using the SPACEBAR. you learn how to work with these varied conditions. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial.24 On the Design Bar. you used various methods to add structural columns. As you use the beam tool. 25 On the View toolbar. Different structural conditions exist within the building model that require specific beam conditions. and use the grid tools to add beams automatically. 26 On the File menu. This project file is required. click Modify. In this exercise. you add structural beams to the building model. in its current state. In the next exercise. click . Adding Structural Beams and Girders | 921 . you add beams manually. click Save. Adding Structural Beams and Girders In this exercise.

Dataset This exercise requires the project file. 922 | Chapter 24 Structural . click Modify. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. Start the beam at the column midpoint and move your cursor up until it connects with the wall centerline. 7 On the Design Bar. 8 Zoom around the upper set of walls as shown. 2 On the View menu. 4 In the Type Selector. click Beam. Structural_tutorial.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. 6 Add a beam between the column shown below and the horizontal wall above it. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 5 Zoom around the right side of the building model. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 2. Add beams using point-to-point insertion 1 In the Project Browser. To add a beam using point-to-point insertion. you specify the start and endpoint of the beam.

the Structural Usage parameter is automatically set to Girder. For example. 14 On the Options Bar. 15 Create a crossing selection that includes grids 1 and 2. Use the grid tool to add beams between columns 13 In the Type Selector. and then move the cursor up to grid A. 11 On the Options Bar. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. if a beam is joined column-to-column. TIP Select the midpoint of the wall first. When you use the grid tool to place beams. click Beam. 12 Add a beam between the midpoint of the structural wall shown and grid A.7. the Structural Usage parameter of each beam is automatically specified depending on the join conditions. click Grid. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x32. Use the following table for other conditions. select Girder for Usage. Column Brace Horizontal Bracing Horizontal Bracing Other Horizontal Bracing Girder Joist Purlin Other Column* Girder Other Girder Joist Purlin Other Brace Horizontal Brace Girder Joist Purlin Other Other Other Horizontal Bracing Joist Other Horizontal Bracing Joist Purlin Other Horizontal Bracing Purlin Purlin Purlin Other Other Other Other Other Other *Structural walls produce the same result as columns. Adding Structural Beams and Girders | 923 .9 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 10 In the Type Selector.

22 In the Type Selector. Add beams to an intersecting structural wall 20 Select the structural wall that spans grids 3 and 4. and press ENTER. press and hold CTRL. 19 Zoom in the upper-right quadrant of the building model. 924 | Chapter 24 Structural . 24 Select grid 3. click the temporary dimension value. 18 On the Design Bar. click Beam. click Modify. 17 On the Options Bar. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. 21 On the Design Bar. and select grid C. click Grid.16 Notice that beams are added at the grids and connected to each column. click Finish. 23 On the Options Bar. enter 8200.

and for Usage. select Girder. Add a chain of beams 26 On the Options Bar. select Chain.Notice beams are added between columns. 25 On the Options Bar. In addition. refer to the following steps and illustration to add two beams to grid 5. Adding Structural Beams and Girders | 925 . 27 Using point-to-point insertion. ■ ■ ■ ■ Click column C5 to start the beam chain. Click the intersection of grid 5 and the structural wall as shown to add the final beam in the chain. notice that beams connect to the structural walls that intersect grids. Click column B5 to add the first beam. Press ESC to end the chain. click Finish.

926 | Chapter 24 Structural . select Girder for Usage. Press ESC to end the chain.28 On the Options Bar. SI. select Girder for Usage. Press ESC to end the chain. You may need to zoom in significantly to accomplish this. You can also use the shortcut key. 29 Add a beam between A4 and the structural wall that intersects grid 4 as shown. connecting the column at B4. to snap only to intersections. 31 Add a chain of beams beginning with the end of the structural wall at C4. NOTE When you begin the beam chain at C4. 30 On the Options Bar. and ending with the structural wall that intersects grid 4 as shown. make sure you select the intersection of the grid lines.

Adding Structural Beams and Girders | 927 . 35 Zoom around the beam between A3-4. it would have become the supporting beam because it was placed first. If the W310x32. click Grid. click Grid. and the W310x67 beam spanning A3-4 would have been two separate beams. The W310x67 beam spanning A3-4 supports the W310x32.7 beam had crossed grid A. 33 Select grid A.7 beam that intersects it perpendicularly.Add beams that intersect other beams 32 On the Options Bar. click Finish. 36 On the Options Bar. 34 On the Options Bar.

39 On the View toolbar. under Floor Plans. select Girder for Usage. select M_Concrete-Rectangular Beam: 200 x 500mm. 38 On the Options Bar. In the steps that follow. 42 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 44 On the Options Bar.37 Select grid B. 43 In the Type Selector. click . 41 Zoom around the upper structural walls between A4-5. click Beam. double-click Level 2. Add a concrete beam 40 In the Project Browser. 928 | Chapter 24 Structural . 45 Specify the beam start point at the endpoint of the short wall segment adjacent to grid 4 as shown below. click Finish. you use point-to-point insertion to add the beam between the two short wall segments that adjoin grid 4 and 5.

48 On the View toolbar. Adding Structural Beams and Girders | 929 . click . 47 On the Design Bar.46 Move the cursor to the right. Notice the concrete beam you added in the previous step. enter SE (shortcut key for endpoints). click Modify. and click the endpoint of the short wall segment adjacent to grid 5 as shown below.

you add two W310x67 beams parallel to the wall that intersects grid 3. 54 Begin the beam chain by selecting the intersection of the wall and grid 3. under Floor Plans. 55 Move the cursor to the left and parallel to the wall. click Beam. and click when it intersects grid 2. 51 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. and select Chain. 53 On the Options Bar. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. In the steps that follow. 930 | Chapter 24 Structural . 52 In the Type Selector.Add remaining girders 49 In the Project Browser. 50 Zoom around the A1-B3 region. select Girder. for Usage. double-click Level 2.

Press ESC twice to end the beam placement mode. click . 57 On the View toolbar. Adding Structural Beams and Girders | 931 .56 Move the cursor to the left and parallel to the wall. and click when it intersects grid 1.

2 Zoom around the A1 . For example. you add joists and purlins to the building model. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x32.58 On the File menu. and their display within the plan view adjusts accordingly. you add joists and purlins to the building model. In the next exercise. Add the beam a few feet to the right of grid one.7. 932 | Chapter 24 Structural .rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. you added beams and girders using the point-to-point insertion method. select Automatic. in its current state. 5 On the Options Bar. double-click Level 2. for Usage. Adding Joists and Purlins In this exercise. 4 In the Type Selector. “Adding Joists and Purlins ” on page 932.B3 quadrants. This project file is required. 6 Add one beam between the A1-2 girder and the parallel girder below it. You used the grid tool to add beams to selected grids and learned how varied structural conditions affect the outcome of the automatically placed beams. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. Add a W-Wide Flange joist 1 In the Project Browser. while allowing the automatic beam tool to assign the Structural Usage parameter value depending on the join conditions. click Save. You begin by adding W-Wide Flange joists. the structural usage of the beams is automatically set to purlin. Structural_tutorial. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. You then create a joist array. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. click Beam. Do not worry about the exact placement at this time. In this exercise. when you use the automatic beam tool to add beams between joists. under Floor Plans.

8 Select the beam you added in the previous steps. 11 Click OK. on the Edit menu. The beam needs to be 1250 mm right of grid 1.7 On the Design Bar. Adding Joists and Purlins | 933 . click Array. Create a joist array 12 With the joist selected. you selected the Automatic option. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 9 With the beam selected. click Modify. under Structural. Modify the temporary dimension value if necessary. notice that the Structural Usage value is Joist. click on the Options Bar. This value was set automatically because when you created the beam. any beam added between two girders becomes a joist when the Automatic option is selected. According to the table shown at the beginning of this lesson.

Once the direction is set. Make sure the cursor is over grid A. ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. This creates an array of 14 joists that are parallel to grid A. Enter 14 for Number. specify the following: Click . 15 Move the cursor to the right and parallel to grid A. enter 1250 and press ENTER. 934 | Chapter 24 Structural . Select 2nd for Move to.13 On the Options Bar. 14 Click the intersection of the upper extent of the joist and grid A as shown to specify the array start point.

Add purlins 16 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. Adding Joists and Purlins | 935 . 18 Zoom in around the area surrounding the purlin. 17 Add a beam from the midpoint of the first joist to the right of grid 2 that stretches perpendicularly to the next joist on the right as shown. click Beam.

22 Click the endpoint of the left joist as shown to specify the array start point. style. joists.Notice the difference between the line weights and patterns of the girders. 20 On the Edit menu. 21 On the Options Bar. and click. and purlins. 23 Move the cursor to the endpoint of the next joist on the right. click Array. Enter 7 for Number. specify the following: Click . Select 2nd for Move to. NOTE You can control the structural framing line weight. and color within the Object Styles dialog. 19 Select the purlin you created in the previous steps. 936 | Chapter 24 Structural . ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. Their display in plan view is dependent on their Structural Usage parameter value.

Adding Joists and Purlins | 937 . 28 In the Element Properties dialog. and create a crossing selection that includes all the structural framing members in this portion of the view. Turn on connection symbol visibility 24 Zoom in around the structural framing below A1-2. 27 On the Options Bar. 25 On the Options Bar. change the following instance parameters: ■ Select Moment Connection Last. 26 In the Filter dialog. clear all options except Structural Framing (Girder) and Structural Framing (Joist). click . under Other.The purlins array along the midpoints of the joists. click . and click OK.

click . 30 On the View toolbar. 938 | Chapter 24 Structural . Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels In this lesson. and notice the connection symbols display. In this exercise. This technique saves significant design time and ensures consistency on each level. you added different joist types and allowed the automatic beam tool to assign the Structural Usage parameter value depending on the join conditions. Click OK. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. you create new levels. you create new levels and copy the level one structure to the upper levels of the building model. In the next lesson. 31 On the File menu. 29 On the Design Bar. “Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels” on page 938. in its current state. click Save. and adjust the view until it resembles the image below. click Modify. You then copy the entire structure that you have designed up to this point and use the paste-align command to create the structure on the upper levels. This project file is required.■ ■ Select Moment Connection First.

under Elevations. 3 Drag the upper grid control up to move the grid heads out of the way of the new levels. 2 Select grid 1. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. You need at least 3 meters of space. you create several new levels.Defining New Levels In this exercise. Create three new levels 1 In the Project Browser.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Structural_tutorial. These levels are required in the next exercise where you copy the existing structural components to the new levels. double-click Building Elevation. 6 Sketch the new level line 3000 mm above Level 2 as shown below using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Click the level line starting point 3000 mm above the left extent of Level 2. Defining New Levels | 939 . 5 On the Options Bar. Move the cursor over the right extent of Level 2. click Level. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. select Make Plan View. Click to add Level 3.

notice that the Level 3 floor plan is displayed. click . 940 | Chapter 24 Structural . 8 On the File menu. Structural_tutorial. This project file is required. These levels that are required in the next exercise. Duplicating the Existing Design In this exercise. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. you created three new levels. Copy the structural elements 1 On the View toolbar.In the Project Browser. In this exercise. 7 Repeat the steps above to create Levels 4 and 5 as shown. “Duplicating the Existing Design” on page 940.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. you copy the structural elements and use the paste-align command to add them to the new levels. in its current state. click Save. where you copy the structural elements and paste align them to the new levels. This technique saves you significant time compared to manually recreating the design on each level. Each level is 3000 mm high. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial.

5 In the Select Levels dialog. Although you can select and copy the components from any view. Make sure the entire building model is included. click OK. select Level 3. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. Duplicating the Existing Design | 941 . it is often easier and more certain to copy from a 3D view if your intent is to select the entire building model.2 Draw a selection box around the entire design. “Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation” on page 942. 3 On the Edit menu. in its current state. press and hold CTRL. In this exercise. you copied the existing structural elements on Level 1 and used the paste-align command to create the structural framing on the upper levels. 6 In the Select Levels dialog. and select Levels 4 and 5. click Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 7 In the Project Browser. 8 On the File menu. Paste the structural components on the new levels 4 On the Edit menu. click Save. under Elevations. you create a framing elevation in order to add structural braces. In the next lesson. click Copy to Clipboard. double-click Building Elevation. This project file is required.

942 | Chapter 24 Structural . You then add C-channel bracing to one level and array it to the remaining levels. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. Create a framing elevation 1 In the Project Browser. and click. click Modify. Creating a Framing Elevation In this exercise. in the Project Browser. at the midpoint between grids 2 and 3. Structural_tutorial. you create a framing elevation. make sure Attach to Grid is selected.Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation In this lesson.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. you create a framing elevation in order to provide a view in which to place structural bracing members. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. 5 Place the cursor over grid C. double-click Level 2. 2 Zoom out so you can see the entire building model. You use this elevation view in the next exercise to place structural braces. under Floor Plans. 4 On the Options Bar. 6 On the Design Bar. click Framing Elevation. You can now view the new elevation. Elevation 1-a.

click Save. You begin by adding a set of braces to level 4. “Adding Structural Braces” on page 943. This project file is required. In the next exercise. you add structural braces to the building model. Structural_tutorial.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. you add c-channel bracing to the building model. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. This is because the Detail Level of this view is automatically set to coarse. You are ready to add the structural braces. Notice the stick framing representation. 8 On the File menu. Adding Structural Braces In the final exercise of this tutorial. in its current state. Also notice that grid 3 is identified within the view. you created an elevation view design specifically to add structural braces.7 Double-click the elevation head in order to open the view. Adding Structural Braces | 943 . You then array the braces to the remaining levels. In this exercise. Dataset This exercise requires the project file.

Also select grids 2 and 3 and drag them until they appear as shown. and using the shape grips. When adding the braces. you use point-to-point insertion.4. you should use the following snap shortcut keys when applicable. click Brace. 4 Enter SE and click the beam endpoint below the intersection of grid 2 and Level 4. select the view crop box. 944 | Chapter 24 Structural . 5 Enter SM and click the midpoint of the girder located on Level 5. ■ ■ SM: Snap only to midpoints of objects. selectM_ C-Channel: C75x7. Because it is often necessary to make sure you snap to the endpoints and midpoints. SE: Snap only to endpoints of objects.Expand the view extents 1 Before adding the braces. drag the left and right extents until you can see the grid heads for 2 and 3 as shown. 3 In the Type Selector. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar.

Adding Structural Braces | 945 . 7 Enter SE and click the endpoint below the intersection of grid 3 and Level 4. 6 Enter SM and click the midpoint of the girder located on Level 5. The second brace is displayed.The brace displays.

Array the braces 8 On the Design Bar. 12 Click the intersection of Level 5 and grid 2 to specify the array start point. click Tag All Not Tagged. 9 Select both braces on Level 4. 14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. specify the following: Click . Enter 4 for Number. Select Constrain. 946 | Chapter 24 Structural . 13 Click the intersection of Level 4 and grid 2 to specify the array endpoint. The braces are arrayed to Level 1. click Modify. 11 On the Options Bar. 10 On the Edit menu. click Array. Select 2nd for Move to.

In this exercise. 16 On the View toolbar. Adding Structural Braces | 947 . click . you added structural braces to the design and created a brace array. 17 On the File menu. and click OK.15 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. click Save. select Structural Framing Tags.

948 | Chapter 24 Structural .

team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the network or their own hard drive and publish work to a central file whenever they choose. doors. you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset. they cannot make changes to it. stairs. floors. and so on. called Worksharing. such as walls. 949 . In this tutorial.Sharing Projects 25 When working with large building projects. Only one user can edit each workset at a given time. They can update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published. Using Worksharing. This prevents possible conflicts within the project. All other team members can view this workset. A workset is a collection of building elements. you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project and have all their changes coordinated by Revit Architecture 2008. however. This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project at the same time. You can enable Worksharing for any project. architects commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional area. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on.

you can select which worksets are open or closed. This reduces the time it takes to open the file and the amount of memory it uses. When planning a Worksharing-enabled project The decisions you make when sharing a project and setting up its worksets can have long-lasting effects on the project team. You gain valuable practical experience setting up a project for worksets and working within that project. You can change the workset assignment of any modeling element within the property dialog for that element. Using Worksharing in a Project In this lesson. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals In this conceptual exercise. you can only make changes to the worksets that are editable by you. This includes how to plan and execute the use of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance. you learn some of the strategies that maximize your use of worksets. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing application. Elements in closed worksets are not read from disk until they are required. are automatically assigned to the view workset of the current view. Project size 950 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . You learn the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. each building element in the project is contained in exactly one workset. After the project is shared. If you only need to modify a single element within a workset that someone else has checked out. When you are working on a shared project. go to the Worksets dialog. and click Editable. After learning the fundamentals. you must first enable Worksharing. In the next exercise. In the lessons and exercises that follow. The first time you activate worksets within a project. When setting up Worksharing.Overview Sharing a project for the first time To share a project. a dialog displays allowing you to set up the initial sharing of the project. You then learn how to work within a Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and borrow particular elements from other users. Elements specific to a view. Increasing performance using selective open When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. you specify an active workset. you should take several considerations into account: General Considerations: ■ ■ ■ ■ Project size Team size Team member roles Default workset visibility You can maximize long-term project performance more easily if you plan Worksharing appropriately and use the feature correctly. select the desired workset. you learn how to work as an individual with the central and local project files. use Element Borrowing. Working in a shared project In a shared project. You learn what to consider before enabling and using Worksharing. Any new model elements are automatically assigned to the active workset. such as annotations and dimensions. Establishing practical policies on how all team members access and create new worksets in the project will maintain performance for existing users and ease the process of introducing new team members to the project. You can improve the display-related performance of Revit Architecture by opening only those worksets required for your work. To make a workset editable. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing. you enable Worksharing within a project and set up the initial workset environment. You can close or open worksets at any time using the Worksets dialog. Each workset can only be editable by one user at a time.

a Worksets tab displays on the Visibility/Graphics dialog. A typical scenario for a multi-story commercial building is shown in the following illustration. the worksets they add often do not need to be visible by default. If the project floor plan is so large that you need to split it with match lines to fit it on sheets. Team size You should take into consideration the size of the project team at the time you enable Worksharing. On this tab. Regardless of the default setting. greater subdivision improves workflow by reducing interference between team members. Instead. Step 3: Create additional worksets After enabling Worksharing. Team member roles Typically. Step 2:Activate Worksharing After the building model is ready for multiple user access. If you are sure that the elements of a particular workset should not appear in a view. such as a tenant interior. Experience has shown that. This allows Revit Architecture to display the view faster because computing time is not spent figuring out if the element belongs to a workset that should be displayed. As new members create worksets for their own use. the optimum number of worksets is approximately four for each team member. This project file should incorporate as many office/project standards as possible and it should include many of the families required by the project. remember to create worksets for functional roles and properly assign default visibility. you can change the visibility setting in the Visibility/Graphics dialog. each team member has control over a portion of the design. In most projects. Notice that the workset names refer to functional roles.The size of your building may affect the way you decide to segment the worksets for your team. In a multi-story structure. you can turn off the visibility of that workset within that view. for a typical project. When you create a new workset. The building model should also reach a reasonable point of development before you enable Worksharing. the project coordinator should create the additional worksets required by the team. you may want to create separate worksets for each portion. not including the Project Standards. with each assigned a specific functional task. and View worksets. Team size usually increases as the project progresses from the design stage to the documentation stage. you could create separate worksets for a set of building elements that will only appear on one floor. Shared Levels and Grids. Step 1: Start the project with one user One user starts to work on the project. You should have at least one workset for each person. you control workset visibility on a per view basis. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 951 . the project coordinator should enable Worksharing. you do not need to make separate worksets for each floor of the building. When creating the new worksets. you should separate the project into worksets that allow team members to work without interfering with each other. By subdividing the project based on these task roles. Conceptual stages of project sharing The following steps explain the basic stages of project sharing. TIP As new team members create new worksets for their own use. Default workset visibility After a project has been shared. designers work in teams. Unlike AutoCAD Xrefs. you decide whether or not the elements in that workset are visible by default in each view. make sure visibility defaults are set appropriately. Long-term performance is improved if new worksets are not visible by default unless they need to be.

Step 6: Create local files Each team member creates a local file that makes it possible to check out worksets and work on their respective portion of the building model. new building elements are assigned to the workset that is active at the moment. When you save to the central file. your changes propagate to the entire team. you have the option to choose which worksets to open. you can select which workset is active. you should relinquish any worksets that you no longer need. As you work. the central file is not a file that a team member would open and work in directly.Step 4: Subdivide the building model into worksets After you have created the initial worksets. The central file coordinates and propagates the changes of each user and keeps track of which worksets are available. you must assign building model elements to their respective workset. Generally. This gives you the right to make changes to the elements in the workset and to add to the workset. You create a local file by opening the central file and using “Save As” to create a local copy of the central file. There is no limit to the number of worksets you can have editable at one time. For example. Step 7: Open worksets Whenever you open a central or local file. Step 5: Create the central file The first time you save a project after Worksharing has been enabled. However. The tips discussed below provide useful information for working creatively with worksets. you should save the file locally and to the central file at regular intervals. the file is saved as the central file. This is called “Selective Open. On the Options Bar. however. Step 9:Work on the project Work on the project. you should then save to your local file. Therefore. Tips and common scenarios 1 When working on a Worksharing-enabled project. you should save to the central file and relinquish control of all worksets that you set as editable. When you save to the central file. Any changes that other users have made to the building model become visible to you after you save to the central file or when you select Reload Latest. you would want to assign the interior walls and other interior components to that workset. you can shorten the time required to open the file by selecting to open only the worksets required to complete your assigned tasks. 952 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . proceeds as usual. within the local file.” When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. Local files are user-specific and can only be accessed by the users that created them. After saving to the central file. When finished or at regular intervals. they are not propagated to the rest of the team. no other users can make modifications to any elements in those worksets until you check them back into the central file. each user saves their changes back to the central file where the changes can be propagated to all team members. This ensures that your local file is synchronized with the central file. it is essential that you save the central file to a location accessible to all team members. When you save locally (to your local file). Step 11: Closing a local file At the end of a work session. if a workset named Interior was created. you make that workset editable by you. This makes them available to other team members. Step 8: Check out worksets from the central file When you “check out” a workset. you can still work remotely as an individual and as a team. your changes are saved. You can make a workset active only if it is editable by you. Step 10: Saving your changes As you work on the project throughout the day.

you learned what to consider before enabling Worksharing. ■ If you realize that you need to modify elements in a workset that you did not make editable before going remote. You can also add new elements to any View or Project Standards workset even if they are not editable. you should check out the Materials workset. Since making a workset Editable at Risk carries a high risk that work will be lost. you can make the workset Editable at Risk. In this situation. you will probably be changing material definitions and other project settings. you may want to request that someone start a session of Revit Architecture. In this instance. You subdivide the project into worksets and save the project as the "Central File. If you choose Editable at Risk and the owner of the at-risk workset has already published their files to the central file. click Training Files. make any required worksets editable. and then save the local file. Alternatively. you will not be able to save your changes back to the central file if another user has changed the same workset and already published those changes back to the central file. WARNING You should avoid editing a workset “at risk” whenever possible." Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. This means that other team members will not be able to change any materials while you have the Materials workset checked out. You can work on the project from a remote location by doing the following: ■ Before leaving the office and disconnecting from the networked access to the central file. This will guarantee that no other user can make it editable during the remainder of your absence. you should use it only when: ■ ■ You do not intend to save your changes back to the central file.Taking your computer to a remote location with the project 2 You do not need to have access to the central file in order to work on the project. you will not only lose the changes to that workset. or You are very confident that no other user will make that workset editable in your absence.rvt. You learned the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. If you intend to render the building model while away from the office. you will lose the changes you made to all your worksets. Remote rendering 4 While rendering remotely using AccuRender® is supported. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets In this exercise. you can save your changes back to the central file but then the other owner loses all their work. you work no differently then you would in the office. In the next exercise. and make that workset editable. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Multiple users working remotely 3 Users can work remotely provided the remote users have high-speed network access to the central file. and transfer the updated local file back to the remote user. If you have a colleague who is in the office with access to the central file. To do this. for instance. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 953 . you enable Worksharing within an existing project. a user can transfer a local file to someone with network access who can then publish the changes back to the central file. you enable Worksharing in a project and set up some initial worksets. it is not recommended unless you understand the implications for the rest of the team. You can modify any elements in an editable workset and all new elements are added to the active workset. save to the central file. If the owner of the at-risk workset agrees to relinquish editability of the contested workset. and open Common\c_Worksets. reload the latest changes from the central file. you may want to phone them and make arrangements rather than waste valuable work time. if you know who checked out the required workset. In this conceptual exercise. change the username to your name under Settings ➤ Options. When working remotely. using VPN.

You cannot change your username with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open. Only User-Created worksets should display. one user is assigned to the development of the exterior. a third team member is assigned furniture placement. 4 In the Worksets dialog. In this simple training project. 954 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects .Enable Worksharing 1 On the File menu. another is assigned the interior layout. Your username displays as the present owner. Do not change your username during this exercise unless explicitly instructed to do so. you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently. Revit Architecture creates new worksets and moves project elements and settings into the new worksets: ■ ■ Families: Loaded families in the project move into separate worksets. imagine four users including yourself. a small number of team members are working on the building model. For example. and notice all are editable by you. click Worksets. The Worksets dialog is displayed. and the remainder of the team must work on wall section details. It also informs you that existing elements in your project move to a default workset. Therefore. In this case. ■ 6 Under Show. 3 Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you. When you enable worksharing. select: ■ ■ ■ Families Project Standards Views 5 Scroll down the list of workset names. Floor Plan Level 1 view moves into a workset called View: "Floor Plan Level 1". TIP You can change your username by selecting Options under the Settings menu. under Show. The project must be subdivided in such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user. and Views. Project Standards: All project-wide settings defined from the Settings menu move to Project Standards worksets. 2 Click OK to accept the default workset name. Project Standards. A confirmation dialog displays indicating that you are about to enable Worksharing. Views: Each view moves into a separate View workset. For training purposes. clear Families.

furniture components have not been added to the building model and therefore do not need to be moved to the respective workset. This improves performance since fewer components need to be generated in each view. click OK. 12 In the Worksets dialog. and click OK. currently named Workset1. In this training file. 20 Click OK. Notice that Visible by default in all views is checked. Subdividing the project into worksets 16 In the Project Browser. Because furniture should only be visible in specific views. and click OK You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project. select any of the exterior walls of the building model. and double-click Level 1. You do. Because the interior walls appear in many views. and walls. 10 Click New. expand Floor Plans. click . and click OK.Creating new worksets 7 In the Worksets dialog. need to reassign the interior elements to the Interior Layout workset. you can rename the default workset. however. stairs. 14 In the Rename dialog. 11 Enter Furniture Layout. 24 Select all of the interior elements. 22 On the Options Bar. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. select Workset1. Rather than create a new workset for these elements. type the name Exterior Shell. The next workset you create is for the furniture layout. The final new workset is for the exterior shell of the building model. under Identity Data. under Identity Data. all building model elements are assigned to that workset. 13 Click Rename. Because you renamed Workset1 to Exterior Shell. When you initially activate Worksharing. 21 Select one of the interior walls. 18 On the Options Bar. 9 Click OK. expand Views (all). all building model elements are placed into Workset1 by default. The next step is to assign elements within the building model to specific worksets. you should turn off Visible by default in all views. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. notice that the Workset parameter is set to Exterior Shell. clear Visible by default in all views. click . Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 955 . including the interior doors. click New. select Interior Layout for Workset. 15 In the Worksets dialog. 17 In the drawing area. This is why all worksets are editable immediately after you enable worksets. it is better to make them visible by default. 8 Enter the name Interior Layout.

click . TIP You can also hold CTRL down to select multiple elements. select them and change their workset assignment to Interior Layout. under Identity Data. 32 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 31 On the View menu. 28 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog.The easiest way to do this is to drag a pick box beginning inside the lower right corner and up to the upper left corner. 956 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . You can verify that all interior elements have been reassigned to the Interior Layout workset by turning off the visibility of that workset. 25 On the Options Bar. select Interior Layout for Workset. and click OK. This is because you turned off “Visible by default in all views” when you created the workset. 29 Clear Interior Layout to turn off the visibility of that workset in the view. Hold Shift down to deselect an element. Notice that the visibility of the Furniture Layout workset is turned off in this view. click the Worksets tab. 30 Click OK. click the Worksets tab. click Visibility/Graphics. 26 In the Element Properties dialog. click Visibility/Graphics. If any interior elements remain. 27 On the View menu. The Level 1 floor plan should display with only the exterior shell visible.

3 Click Open. Notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and all Editable values are set to No. If you intend on completing the remaining exercises in this tutorial. and click OK. you enabled Worksharing on a project. select Interior Layout for Workset. click Close. In addition. please do so before continuing. 36 On the Options Bar. This is imperative if you and another user intend to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial. and click OK. You must access it in each of the remaining exercises. under Floor Plans. select the central file and. Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to. click Worksets. make sure you remember the location of this central file. 44 Click OK. In this exercise. select all of the interior elements of the building model. Working Individually with Worksets In this exercise. click . any referenced workset is opened but hidden. under Open Worksets. click Save As. 2 In the Open dialog. If you do not have access to a network and still want to complete that exercise. Creating a local file 1 On the File menu. created new worksets to accommodate each team member. “Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets” on page 953. You then created the central file and checked in all worksets. under Views (all). Checking in the worksets 41 On the File menu. this can be accomplished by saving the central file to your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project. enter Worksets Project-Central as the file name. click Non Editable. under Identity Data. make modifications to the building model. 39 In the Save As dialog. you create your local file. 43 On the right side of the dialog. Now that you have created the central file. 42 In the Worksets dialog. select Specify. 40 Click Save. and publish your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. Working Individually with Worksets | 957 . check out worksets. 35 In the drawing area. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and access to the resulting central file. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file created in the previous exercise. double-click Level 2. 45 On the File menu. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. but be sure not to save the file in the training files location. click Open. select all the User-Created worksets by pressing CTRL + A. The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets. This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets. and then assigned building model elements to the worksets. Create the central file 38 On the File menu.33 Select Interior Layout. you must relinquish workset editability so that other users can have access to the worksets they need. If you have not yet completed the exercise. 34 In the Project Browser.

7 In the File Save Options dialog. select Interior Layout. you are assigned the task of designing the interior layout of the building model. 958 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . 17 On the Options Bar. 16 Select the upper exterior wall and notice a symbol displays indicating that the element belongs to a workset that is not currently editable. click . select all the User-Created worksets. The Worksets toolbar displays with a drop-down list that allows you to specify the active workset. 10 In the Worksets dialog. and select Yes for Editable. The project sharing environment allows you to choose which worksets are opened during a working session. You are now ready to modify the interior layout of the building model. 14 In the Project Browser. 5 On the File menu. 8 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. expand Floor Plans. Next. Verify that it is cleared. 13 On the Worksets toolbar. notice the Editable Only option. and double-click Level 1. and click Save. Any new elements that you add to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. expand Views (all). Before working on the model. 12 On the Window menu. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. click Worksets. you should activate the Worksets toolbar. In this case. Your name displays as the owner of the Interior Layout workset. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. If this is selected. and click OK. select Interior Layout for Name. click Options. click Save As. On the Options Bar. click Modify. click Toolbar ➤ Worksets. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. 6 In the Save As dialog.4 In the Opening Worksets dialog. you can only select editable elements within the drawing area. You have created a local file which is for your use only. Only the worksets that are opened are visible during that session. 11 Click OK. Checking out worksets 9 On the File menu.

The upper exterior wall should still be selected. 29 Using the following illustration as a guide. click . In the Worksets dialog. 22 On the File menu. you have borrowed the ownership of the upper exterior wall. notice that you do not own the Exterior Shell workset.126mm Partition (2-hr). notice that this element is assigned to the Exterior Shell workset and that the Edited by value is blank. 23 Click OK. In this case. The precise location is not important. click Worksets. the Edited by value is now assigned to you. under Identity Data. Because this element is not owned by another user. select Basic Wall: Interior . but you are listed as a borrower of that workset. you can still edit this wall. 19 Under Constraints. 28 In the Type Selector.18 In the Element Properties dialog. Even though you have not checked out the Exterior Shell workset. 26 Select the wall that hosted the deleted door. 25 Delete the door. Revit Architecture borrows it for you and applies your changes. select Finish Face: Exterior for Location Line. 20 On the Options Bar. click Wall. and modify the length so that the corridor is open. 27 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Notice that the wall still belongs to the Exterior Shell workset. a message would display and you would have the option to cancel the change or make the element editable. Modify the building model 24 Select the door on the right side of the corridor. however. If it was owned by another user. Working Individually with Worksets | 959 . add a horizontal wall in the lower right corner. 21 Click OK. and click OK.

Although this is not a necessary option if you are in the middle of a work session. click Modify. you should relinquish all worksets. and extend the lower end until it intersects the horizontal wall you added previously. All of the new elements that you added were automatically assigned to the Interior Layout workset. 36 In the Save to Central dialog. save to central. 34 Using the following illustration as a guide. click Save to Central. Saving your work 35 On the File menu. You should check this element back into central so that others can use it if necessary. select M_Sgl Flush: 864 x 2032mm. you should perform regular saves. select: ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets 960 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . click Door. Borrowed Elements is selected. 33 In the Type Selector. It is recommended that you locally save your work approximately every 30 minutes and save to central every 1-2 hours. a tooltip. When working in your local file. you can relinquish the user-created worksets as well as any borrowed elements. and save locally immediately afterward. 32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The Save to Central dialog is displayed with the path to the central file automatically filled in. it is recommended. In addition. In this particular case. Whenever you save. you borrowed the upper exterior wall in order to modify it. displays the workset as well as the element type.30 On the Design Bar. add two door openings into the rooms you created. At the end of a work session. notice that there is an option to save the local file immediately after the save to central. which matches the information in the Status Bar. By default. If you place the cursor over any of the new elements. 31 Select the vertical interior wall in the upper right corner.

2 Start a new Revit Architecture session by double-clicking the Revit Architecture icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. under Username. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 961 . select Specify. Throughout the process. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises and created central files on the network. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. leave this file open in its current state. and borrowed an element from a workset you did not own. For training purposes. and check out worksets 6 On the File menu. two users work on the building model residing in the central file you created and saved in a previous exercise. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. You modified the building model. The user who has not yet created a local file for the chosen central file is User 2. This exercise requires the completion of the previous workset exercises and access to the resulting local and central files. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file named Worksets Project-Central. you created your local file.rvt. and reload the latest changes. If you have not yet completed these exercises. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. 4 Click the General Tab and. Regardless of which central file you choose to use. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. return to the Settings dialog. 7 In the Open dialog. and published your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. click Options. and click OK. two users access the central file through a network connection. If you intend to complete the remainder of this tutorial by proceeding to the multi-user exercise. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. 3 On the Settings menu. checked out worksets. Using a second Revit Architecture session to mimic User 2 1 Minimize the current Revit Architecture window. select the central file and. instructions are staggered. User 2: Create a local file. under Open Worksets. Each modifies the building model within their local file and publishes it back to the central file where the other user can see the changes. and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2. and click OK. each user must check out worksets. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. For training purposes. click Open. and reset the Username to your computer login name. Creating a local copy 5 In this exercise.■ Save the local file after “Save to Central” 37 Click OK. 8 Click Open. Using Worksets with Multiple Users In this exercise. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. In this exercise. Throughout the remainder of this exercise. make elements editable. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2. This is a system setting. 9 In the Opening Worksets dialog. select all the User-Created worksets. skip the following section. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. select one of those central files to be used in this exercise. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). enter User 2. In the following section of this exercise. please do so before continuing. consider that person to be User 1. In addition. one user has already created a local file. specifically sequenced. and proceed to Creating a local copy.

10 On the File menu. 27 In the Save to Central dialog. 25 Click anywhere in the empty drawing area to ignore the warning. expand Views (all). and double-click Level 1. 18 On the File menu. 19 Try to change the Editable status for Exterior Shell to Yes. That is because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets are explicitly updated. User 2: Modify the building model and publish changes 29 In the Project Browser. 14 On the File menu. expand Views (all). 11 In the Save As dialog. 13 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive. 26 On the File menu. Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2. open it now. click Save to Central. If you only have one workset checked out. Notice that the Exterior Shell workset is checked out by User 2. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. User 1: Check out worksets. and move it to the left until it approaches the centerline of the exterior double door on the south wall. A warning is displayed informing you that a conflict exists.” 28 Click OK. and click OK. click Worksets. it becomes the active workset. If it is not open. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. click Save As. expand Floor Plans. click Worksets. expand Floor Plans. A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is already checked out by another user. 22 Click OK. 21 Select the Interior Layout workset. and double-click Level 1. 15 Select the Exterior Shell workset. 20 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog. modify the building model. 23 In the Project Browser. This file is for your use only. and select Yes for Editable. and publish changes 17 User 1 should still have the local file open. 962 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . and click Save. 12 In the File Save Options dialog. 16 Click OK. Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Interior Layout. You are now the owner of that workset. 24 Select the vertical interior wall shown in the following illustration. and select Yes for Editable. You now have a local copy of the project. click Options.

right-click Level 1. you publish your changes and load the changes other users have made to the building model. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. 36 On the File menu. 45 On the Project Browser.” 38 Click OK. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. 46 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 40 On the File menu. 41 Select Furniture Layout. and click OK. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. select Yes for Editable. right-click Copy of Level 1. 33 In the Save to Central dialog. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. and check out additional worksets 39 On the File menu. and click OK. you still have complete access to the elements belonging to the Interior Layout workset. under Floor Plans. and click Rename. you are asked if you want to make the Furniture Layout workset the active workset. When you save to central. 31 Click Delete Instances to delete the windows. However. The wall conflict with the door opening that User 1 introduced now displays. delete the left window on the lower exterior wall. under Views (all).” 34 Click OK. and move the door to the right in order to avoid the conflict. 42 On the Project Browser. Before adding any furniture. select the lower exterior wall. Because you now have more than one workset checked out. 35 Using the following illustration as a guide. and click Duplicate. you should create a furniture plan view. Click Yes. under Floor Plans. click Save to Central. 37 In the Save to Central dialog. any elements added to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. under Floor Plans. A message displays warning you that several windows are not cutting anything. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 963 . Even though the Furniture Layout workset is active. The changes User 2 made are apparent. 44 In the Rename View dialog. click Save to Central.30 Using the following illustration as a guide. click Worksets. 43 On the Project Browser. 32 On the File menu. and move it upward approximately 2 meters. click Reload Latest. User 1: Reload latest worksets. click Component. This is because windows are wall-hosted components and cannot float in the air without a wall to host them.

and click OK. If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise. This is because when the Furniture Layout workset was created. Therefore. 57 In the Element Properties dialog. Notice the new Level 1 Furniture Plan view in the Project Browser. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the local file after “Save to Central” 67 Click OK. 49 On the View menu. 58 In the Type Properties dialog. A message displays informing you that the component you are trying to place is not visible in that view. 52 On the File menu. click Reload Latest. the visibility of the workset is not turned on even though it is checked out and is the active workset.200mm.47 In the Type Selector. and click Properties. and click OK. 62 In the Worksets dialog. You should turn on the visibility before adding furniture. choose any desk. click Visibility/Graphics. select Furniture Layout to turn on its visibility. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. the Visible by default option was not selected. leave this file open in its current state. click Edit/New. click the Worksets tab.” 54 Click OK. rather than Families. 59 In the Rename dialog. NOTE System families. 61 On the File menu. Notice you have borrowed a portion of the workset. click Modify. 48 On the Design Bar. 60 Click OK 3 times. 53 In the Save to Central dialog. 66 In the Save to Central dialog. click Rename. 56 Right-click the upper exterior wall. 51 Notice that the desk you added previously now displays. select Project Standards. are placed under Project Standards. 64 Click OK. click Save to Central. 63 Scroll down to the bottom of the list until you see Wall Types. click Save to Central. and click inside any room. click Worksets. 964 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . 50 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under Show. 65 On the File menu. such as Wall Types. enter Exterior Wall . User 2: Make an element editable on the fly 55 On the File menu.

you may receive a message informing you that the central file has been relocated. Each user checked out worksets. and published their changes back to the central file. and these problems are rectified. 4 In the File Save Options dialog. you must borrow elements that belong to worksets that the other user has checked out. Each user must have network access to the central file. and click OK. If you have not completed the previous workset exercises. click Options. This exercise requires two users and. you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are actively working on. finished the previous workset exercises. select the following. proceed directly to the section Checking out worksets. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. select Reload Latest. leave this file open in its current state. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. two users are working on the same project with separate local files. throughout this training. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 965 . 70 In the Save to Central dialog. and click OK. click Save As. select Make this a Central File after save. and save 68 On the File menu. ■ ■ User-created Worksets Save the local file after “Save to Central” In this exercise. two users worked on the same building model using worksets. and still have your local files open. “Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users” on page 965. Only one user needs to open the dataset and save the central file to a network location. This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section. you save the dataset as a central file. These messages are a result of the central file being relocated (to your PC). Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Save training file as the central file on the network 1 On the File menu. 3 In the Save As dialog. modified the building model. There are specific instructions for each user. As each of you work.rvt. At the appropriate point in this exercise. If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). Click OK to this message and subsequent messages. you need to set up your central and local files. 69 On the File menu. click Training Files.User 1: Reload latest. In the final exercise of this tutorial. You learn how to make borrowing requests and how to grant them. 2 Navigate to a directory on the network that both users have access to. You have created a new central file for User 1 and User 2. select Save to Central. and open Common\c_Worksets Project-Central. Checking out worksets. In subsequent steps. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. NOTE When you open the training dataset for this tutorial. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users In this exercise. 5 Click Save.

click Save As. 17 On the File menu. 23 In the Worksets dialog. click Options. click Open. and navigate to the network location where User 1 saved the central file. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. and click OK.User 1: Create local file 6 For the sake of simplicity. 20 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. select them. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. Afterwards. and click OK. the steps for each user have to be followed in sequence. The central file should still be open. This is a system setting. if any User-Created worksets are not open. and click OK. User 2: Create local file 12 If you are a single user and want to replicate the multi-user experience. Checking out worksets 21 Both User 1 and User 2 can check out their worksets at the same time. 16 Select all the User-Created worksets. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. perform the following steps to create a session for User 2: ■ Start a second session of Revit Architecture by double-clicking the icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. Set the Username to User 2. 11 Name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. 8 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. ■ ■ ■ This Revit Architecture session is now set up for User 2. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. You have created a local file which is for your use only. and click OK. On the Settings menu. 13 On the File menu. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. and click Open. 966 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . Next. click Save As. click Worksets. Click the General tab of the Options dialog. and click Save. select Specify. This is the local file for User 1. In addition. return to the Settings dialog. 18 In the Save As dialog. click Options. click Options. 15 Click Open. 14 In the Open dialog. select the central file and under Open Worksets. and reset the Username to your computer login name. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. the user that saved the central file should be User 1. User 1: Check out worksets 22 On the File menu. 7 On the File menu. and click Save. 10 In the File Save Options dialog. 9 In the Save As dialog. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. 19 In the File Save Options dialog.

select Interior Layout. verify that Editable Only is cleared. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 967 . 33 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to edit the window. 32 Move the window 500 mm toward the upper exterior wall. User 2: Check out worksets 26 On the File menu. A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1. User 1: Grant User 2 permission to borrow element 34 When User 2 contacts you and informs you that a borrowing request is pending your authorization. You are now the owner of that workset. 31 On the left exterior wall. a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from User 1. select the Interior Layout workset. After you submit the request. select the second window from the top. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1. and click Editing Requests. and select Yes for Editable. 25 Under Active Workset. 30 On the Options Bar. At this point. and then click OK. and then click OK. Leave this dialog open until User 1 grants permission. click Worksets. You can do this by dragging the window or by modifying one of the temporary dimension values. User 2: Borrow an element from User 1 29 On the Project Browser. 28 Under Active Workset. 27 In the Worksets dialog. A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own. You are now the owner of that workset.24 Select the Exterior Shell workset. and select Yes for Editable. This allows you to select elements that belong to worksets that you do not own. you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed element. click the File me